Systems Manual Simatic ET200S PDF

Preface
______________
2
______________
3
Configuration options
______________
4
Installation
______________
5
Wiring and Assembling
______________
Commissioning and
6
Diagnostics
______________
General technical
7
specifications
______________
8
Interface modules
______________
9
Terminal modules
______________
10
Power modules
______________
11
Digital Electronic Modules
______________
12
Analog electronic modules
______________
13
4 IQ-SENSE
______________
14
RESERVE modules
______________
A
Order numbers
______________
B
Dimension drawings
______________
Address space of the inputs
C
and outputs
______________
D
Response Times
______________
Determining the Leakage
Resistance of an ET 200S
E
______________
Station
Product overview
SIMATIC ET 200S Distributed I/O System ET200S
Brief Instructions on
Commissioning ET 200S
SIMATIC
Distributed I/O System ET 200S
Operating Instructions
The following supplement is part of this documentation:

No.
Designation
Drawing number
Edition
1
2
Product information
Product information
A5E00352937-02
A5E00583609-01
01/2005
07/2005
Edition 07/2005
EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
Special Measures for

Interference-Free Operation
F
______________
Safety Guidelines
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.
Danger
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.
Warning
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.
Caution
with a safety alert symbol, indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.
Caution
without a safety alert symbol, indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
Notice
indicates that an unintended result or situation can occur if the corresponding information is not taken into
account.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The device/system may only be set up and used in conjunction with this documentation. Commissioning and
operation of a device/system may only be performed by qualified personnel. Within the context of the safety notes
in this documentation qualified persons are defined as persons who are authorized to commission, ground and
label devices, systems and circuits in accordance with established safety practices and standards.
Prescribed Usage
Note the following:
Warning
This device may only be used for the applications described in the catalog or the technical description and only in
connection with devices or components from other manufacturers which have been approved or recommended
by Siemens. Correct, reliable operation of the product requires proper transport, storage, positioning and
assembly as well as careful operation and maintenance.
Trademarks
All names identified by are registered trademarks of the Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this
publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the
owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.
Siemens AG
Automation and Drives
Postfach 48 48
90437 NRNBERG
GERMANY
Order No.: EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Edition 09/2005
Copyright Siemens AG 2005.

Technical data subject to change
Preface
Purpose of the manual
The information in this manual enables you to operate the distributed I/O system ET 200S on
the PROFIBUS DP as DP-Slave:
As a DP slave on PROFIBUS DP
As a PROFINET IO device on PROFINET
Required level of knowledge

Knowledge of the field of automation engineering is required to understand the manual.
Scope of the manual

This manual applies to the components of the ET 200S distributed I/O system specified in
the appendix.
The manual contains a description of the components that were valid at the time the manual
was published. We reserve the right to enclose a Product Information bulletin containing
up-to-date information regarding new components and new versions of components.
Changes since the previous version

The following changes/additions have been made since the previous version of the manual:
Function enhancement for interface module IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE
Function enhancement for interface module IM151-3 PN
Approvals
See "Standards, certifications, and approvals."
CE certification
Labeling for Australia (C-tick mark)

Distributed I/O System ET200S

Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14
iii
Preface
Standards
Position in the information landscape

The following table shows an overview of the contents of the handbooks for the ET 200S:
Manual
Contents
ET 200S Distributed I/O System
Installing and wiring of ET 200S

Commissioning and diagnostics of ET 200S
Technical specifications of IM151-1, digital, and analog
electronic modules
Order numbers for ET 200S
ET 200S Motor Starters
Installing and wiring of motor starters

Commissioning and diagnostics of motor starters
Technical specifications of motor starters
Fail-safe motor starters
Safety-integrated SIGUARD system
Order numbers for motor starters
PROFINET System Description
Basic principles of PROFINET

Network components and structures
Data exchange and communication
PROFINET engineering
From PROFIBUS DP to PROFINET IO
Differences
Blocks
System status lists
Diagnostics
Fail-Safe Motor Starters

Safety-Integrated SIGUARD System
ET 200S IM151-7 CPU Interface Module and Instruction List
Addressing of IM151-7 CPU

ET 200S with IM151-7 CPU in the PROFIBUS network
Commissioning and diagnostics of IM151-7 CPU
Technical specifications of the IM151-7 CPU
ET 200S FC Frequency Converter operating instructions
Installation
Commissioning
Open- and closed-loop control techniques
Protection and monitoring functions
Technical specifications
ET 200S FC Frequency Converter list manual
Parameter list
Function diagrams
Alarm and fault messages
Positioning ET 200S
1STEP 5V/204kHz
1POS INC/Digital
1POS SSI/Digital
1POS INC/Analog
1POS SSI/Analog
Technological functions ET 200S
1COUNT 24V/100kHz
1COUNT 5V/500kHz
1SSI
2PULSE
iv

Preface
Manual
Contents
Serial Interface Module ET 200S
1SI 3964/ASCII
1SI MODBUS/USS
Fail-safe modules
4/8 F-DI DC24V PROFIsafe

4 F-DO DC24/2A PROFIsafe
SIWAREX CS
Measurement of weight and power values
The manuals are available on the Internet in the languages German, English, French, Spanish and Italian
(see Service & Support on the Internet).
Guide
You can quickly access specific information in the manual by using the following aids:
At the start of the manual you will find a complete table of contents and a list of the
figures and tables that appear in the manual.
An overview of the contents of each section is indicated on the left of each page
throughout the manual.
Following the appendices, you will find a glossary in which important technical terms used
in the manual are defined.
At the end of the manual you will find a comprehensive index enabling rapid access to the
information you are looking for.
Special note
In addition to this manual, you will also need the manual for the DP master or PROFINET IO
controller you are using (see appendix).
Note
This manual contains a detailed listing of the contents of the ET 200S manuals (reference in
"See also"). We recommend that you begin by orienting yourself to the manuals (and
portions thereof) that are most relevant to solving your task.
Recycling and disposal

Due to the fact that it is low in contaminants, the ET 200S is recyclable. Contact a certified
electronic-waste disposal company to recycle and dispose of your old equipment in an
environment-friendly manner.
SIMATIC Technical Support, Contact Persons and Training

You will find information on this in the product information on the intranet at
http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/de/19293011

Preface
See also
Module order numbers (Page A-1)
Order numbers for connecting cables for 4 IQ-SENSE electronic module (Page A-9)
Order numbers for ET 200S spare parts (Page A-8)
Order numbers for ET 200S network components (Page A-7)
Order numbers for ET 200S accessories (Page A-6)
Standards, certifications, and approvals (Page 7-1)
Order numbers for manuals (Page A-9)
vi

Table of contents
Preface ...................................................................................................................................................... iii
1
Product overview .................................................................................................................................... 1-1

1.1
What are distributed I/O systems?............................................................................................. 1-1
1.2
What is PROFINET IO? ............................................................................................................. 1-3
1.3
What is the ET 200S distributed I/O system? ............................................................................ 1-4
1.4
Guide to the ET 200S manuals................................................................................................ 1-10
Brief Instructions on Commissioning ET 200S ........................................................................................ 2-1

2.1
2.1.1
2.1.2
2.1.3
2.1.4
2.1.5
2.1.6
2.1.7
Commissioning on PROFIBUS DP............................................................................................ 2-1

Introduction ................................................................................................................................ 2-1
Example: Installing ET 200S...................................................................................................... 2-3
Example: Wiring and assembling ET 200S ............................................................................... 2-4
Example: Configuring ET 200S in SIMATIC Manager............................................................... 2-5
Example: Creating a user program............................................................................................ 2-6
Example: Switching on ET 200S................................................................................................ 2-6
Example: Evaluating diagnostic messages ............................................................................... 2-7
2.2
2.2.1
2.2.2
2.2.3
2.2.4
2.2.5
2.2.6
2.2.7
Commissioning on PROFINET IO ........................................................................................... 2-10

Introduction .............................................................................................................................. 2-10
Example: Installing and wiring ET 200S .................................................................................. 2-12
Example: Configuring ET 200S in SIMATIC Manager............................................................. 2-13
Example: Assigning device names for the IO device............................................................... 2-14
Example: Creating a user program.......................................................................................... 2-14
Example: Switching on ET 200S.............................................................................................. 2-15
Example: Evaluating diagnostic messages ............................................................................. 2-16
Configuration options.............................................................................................................................. 3-1

3.1
Precisely Modular System ......................................................................................................... 3-1
3.2
ET 200S Power Supply.............................................................................................................. 3-3
3.3
Placing power modules and connecting them to common potential.......................................... 3-4
3.4
Configuration options for the interface modules ........................................................................ 3-6
3.5
3.5.1
3.5.2
3.5.3
3.5.4
3.5.5
Configuration options between the terminal modules and electronic modules ......................... 3-9
Electronic modules and applications ......................................................................................... 3-9
Identifying the proper terminal module for a power module .................................................... 3-14
Configuration example: Terminal modules for power modules ............................................... 3-16
Identifying the proper terminal module for an electronic module............................................. 3-19
Configuration example: Terminal modules for electronic modules.......................................... 3-20
3.6
Direct data exchange on PROFIBUS DP ................................................................................ 3-23
3.7
3.7.1
3.7.2
3.7.3
Isochronous operation on PROFIBUS DP............................................................................... 3-25

Cycle Synchronization on the PROFIBUS DP - Basics ........................................................... 3-25
Parameterizing Cycle Synchronization .................................................................................... 3-26
Fault correction during isochronous operation on PROFIBUS DP .......................................... 3-29

vii
Table of contents
viii
3.8
3.8.1
3.8.2
3.8.3
3.8.4
3.8.5
3.8.6
3.8.7
Option handling on PROFIBUS DP ......................................................................................... 3-30

Basic principles of option handling on PROFIBUS DP ............................................................ 3-30
Principle of operation of option handling.................................................................................. 3-30
Requirements for option handling ............................................................................................ 3-32
Example: Use of RESERVE modules...................................................................................... 3-33
Assigning parameters for option handling................................................................................ 3-34
Controlling and monitoring options .......................................................................................... 3-35
Fault correction during option handling.................................................................................... 3-37
3.9
Identification data ..................................................................................................................... 3-38
3.10
Use of the ET 200S in a redundant system ............................................................................. 3-41
3.11
Limitations on the number of modules that can be connected/maximum configuration.......... 3-43
Installation .............................................................................................................................................. 4-1

4.1
Basic principles of installation .................................................................................................... 4-1
4.2
Mounting the interface module................................................................................................... 4-4
4.3
Mounting the TM-P and TM-E terminal modules ....................................................................... 4-6
4.4
Replacing the terminal box on the terminal module................................................................... 4-9
4.5
Mounting the terminating module............................................................................................. 4-11
4.6
Mounting the shield connection ............................................................................................... 4-13
4.7
Applying slot number plates and color-coding plates .............................................................. 4-15
4.8
Setting the PROFIBUS address............................................................................................... 4-17
Wiring and Assembling ........................................................................................................................... 5-1

5.1
General rules and regulations for operating the ET 200S ......................................................... 5-1
5.2
Operating the ET 200S on a grounded incoming supply ........................................................... 5-3
5.3
Electrical configuration of the ET 200S...................................................................................... 5-6
5.4
5.4.1
5.4.2
5.4.3
5.4.4
5.4.5
5.4.6
5.4.7
5.4.8
5.4.9
5.4.10
Wiring the ET 200S .................................................................................................................... 5-7

Wiring rules for ET 200S ............................................................................................................ 5-7
Wiring a terminal module with screw terminals.......................................................................... 5-7
Wiring a terminal module with spring terminals ......................................................................... 5-8
Wiring terminal modules with Fast Connect............................................................................... 5-9
Wiring terminal modules........................................................................................................... 5-12
Terminal assignment of terminal module with inserted power module .................................... 5-15
Terminal assignment of terminal module with inserted electronic module .............................. 5-16
Wiring the IM151-1 BASIC, IM151-1 STANDARD, and IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE
interface modules..................................................................................................................... 5-17
Wiring IM151-3 PN interface module ....................................................................................... 5-19
Wiring the IM151-1 FO STANDARD interface module ............................................................ 5-20
5.5
5.5.1
5.5.2
Inserting and identifying electronic modules ............................................................................ 5-25

Inserting and identifying electronic modules ............................................................................ 5-25
Removing and inserting electronic modules ............................................................................ 5-28
5.6
Assigning a device name for the IO device.............................................................................. 5-30
Commissioning and Diagnostics ............................................................................................................. 6-1

6.1
Safety tests prior to commissioning ........................................................................................... 6-1
6.2
6.2.1
6.2.2
Commissioning and diagnostics on PROFIBUS DP.................................................................. 6-1

Basic principles of project design for the ET 200S on PROFIBUS DP...................................... 6-1
Configuring ET 200S on PROFIBUS DP ................................................................................... 6-3

Table of contents
6.2.2.1
6.2.2.2
6.2.2.3
6.2.2.4
6.2.2.5
6.2.2.6
6.2.3
6.2.3.1
6.2.3.2
6.2.4
6.2.4.1
6.2.4.2
6.2.4.3
6.2.4.4
6.2.4.5
6.2.4.6
6.2.4.7
6.2.4.8
6.2.4.9
6.2.4.10
Integrating the GSD file in your configuration software ............................................................. 6-3

Grouping modules for configuration........................................................................................... 6-4
Grouping of digital input modules .............................................................................................. 6-6
Grouping of digital output modules ............................................................................................ 6-7
Grouping of motor starters ......................................................................................................... 6-8
Example of a project design....................................................................................................... 6-8
Commissioning and startup of ET 200S on PROFIBUS DP.................................................... 6-10
Commissioning ET 200S on PROFIBUS DP........................................................................... 6-10
Startup of the ET 200S on PROFIBUS DP.............................................................................. 6-11
Diagnostics using LED display................................................................................................. 6-13
LED displays on the interface module ..................................................................................... 6-13
LED displays on the power module ......................................................................................... 6-15
LED displays on digital electronic modules ............................................................................. 6-16
LED displays on analog electronic modules ............................................................................ 6-17
LED displays on the 1COUNT 24V/100kHz electronic module ............................................... 6-18
LED displays on the 1COUNT 5V/500kHz electronic module ................................................. 6-19
LED displays on the 1SSI electronic module........................................................................... 6-20
LED displays on the STEP 5V/204kHz electronic module ...................................................... 6-21
LED displays on the 2PULSE electronic module..................................................................... 6-22
LED displays on the 1POS INC/Digital, 1POS SSI/Digital, 1POS INC/Analog, and
1POS SSI/Analog electronic modules ..................................................................................... 6-23
6.2.4.11 LED displays on the 1SI 3964/ASCII and 1SI Modbus/USS serial interface module.............. 6-25
6.2.4.12 LED displays on the 4 IQ-SENSE electronic module .............................................................. 6-26
6.2.5
Diagnostic messages of the electronic modules...................................................................... 6-27
6.2.6
Evaluating interrupts by ET 200S ............................................................................................ 6-27
6.2.7
Diagnostics with STEP 5 and STEP 7 ..................................................................................... 6-29
6.2.7.1 Reading out the diagnostics..................................................................................................... 6-29
6.2.7.2 Structure of the slave diagnostics ............................................................................................ 6-32
6.2.7.3 Station statuses 1 to 3 ............................................................................................................. 6-34
6.2.7.4 Master PROFIBUS address..................................................................................................... 6-35
6.2.7.5 Manufacturer ID ....................................................................................................................... 6-36
6.2.7.6 Identifier-related diagnostics .................................................................................................... 6-36
6.2.7.7 Module status........................................................................................................................... 6-37
6.2.7.8 Channel-specific diagnostics ................................................................................................... 6-40
6.2.7.9 Interrupts .................................................................................................................................. 6-49
6.2.7.10 Incorrect configuration states of ET 200S on PROFIBUS DP ................................................. 6-57
6.3
6.3.1
6.3.1.1
6.3.1.2
6.3.1.3
6.3.2
6.3.3
6.3.4
6.3.5
6.3.6
6.3.7
6.3.7.1
6.3.7.2
6.3.7.3
6.3.7.4
6.3.7.5
6.3.7.6
Commissioning and diagnostics on PROFINET IO ................................................................. 6-59

Configuring ET 200S on PROFIBUS IO .................................................................................. 6-59
Basic principles of configuration for the ET 200S on PROFINET IO....................................... 6-59
Integrating the GSD file in your configuration software ........................................................... 6-59
Combine modules for the configuration ................................................................................... 6-60
Commissioning and startup of ET 200S on PROFINET IO ..................................................... 6-61
Diagnostics using LED display................................................................................................. 6-63
Diagnostic messages of the electronic modules...................................................................... 6-65
Evaluating interrupts of ET 200S ............................................................................................. 6-66
Differences in the replacement value behavior........................................................................ 6-67
Diagnostics with STEP 7.......................................................................................................... 6-68
Reading out the diagnostics..................................................................................................... 6-68
Channel diagnostics................................................................................................................. 6-68
Incorrect configuration states of ET 200S on PROFINET IO .................................................. 6-72
Interruption of the ET 200S backplane bus ............................................................................. 6-72
Failure of the load voltage of the power module...................................................................... 6-75
STOP of IO controller and recovery of IO device .................................................................... 6-75

ix
Table of contents
7
General technical specifications ............................................................................................................. 7-1

7.1
Standards, certifications, and approvals .................................................................................... 7-1
7.2
Electromagnetic compatibility .................................................................................................... 7-6
7.3
Transport and storage conditions .............................................................................................. 7-8
7.4
Mechanical and climatic environmental conditions.................................................................... 7-8
7.5
Specifications for dielectric tests, protection class, degree of protection, and rated
voltage of the ET 200S............................................................................................................. 7-11
7.6
Variations in general technical specifications for the ET 200S FC frequency converter ......... 7-12
Interface modules ................................................................................................................................... 8-1

8.1
8.1.1
8.1.2
8.1.3
Parameters for interface modules.............................................................................................. 8-1

Parameters for the IM151-1 BASIC interface module ............................................................... 8-1
Parameters for interface module IM151-1 STANDARD, IM151-1 FO STANDARD and
IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE .......................................................................................................... 8-2
Parameters for the IM151-3 PN interface module ..................................................................... 8-3
8.2
8.2.1
8.2.2
8.2.3
8.2.4
8.2.5
8.2.6
8.2.7
8.2.8
8.2.9
8.2.10
8.2.11
8.2.12
8.2.13
8.2.14
8.2.15
Parameter description for the interface modules ....................................................................... 8-4

DP interrupt mode ...................................................................................................................... 8-4
Bus length .................................................................................................................................. 8-4
Operation at Preset <> Actual Configuration ............................................................................. 8-4
Option handling, general ............................................................................................................ 8-5
Option handling: slots 2 to 63..................................................................................................... 8-5
Diagnostic interrupt .................................................................................................................... 8-5
Hardware interrupt ..................................................................................................................... 8-6
Insert/remove-module interrupt.................................................................................................. 8-6
Analog-value format ................................................................................................................... 8-6
Interference frequency suppression........................................................................................... 8-6
Reference junction input ............................................................................................................ 8-7
Reference junction input ............................................................................................................ 8-7
Synchronize DP slave with DP cycle ......................................................................................... 8-7
Time Ti (read in process values)................................................................................................ 8-7
Time To (output process values) ............................................................................................... 8-8
8.3
IM151-1 BASIC interface module (6ES7151-1CA00-0AB0)...................................................... 8-9
8.4
IM151-1 STANDARD interface module (6ES7151-1AA04-0AB0) ........................................... 8-12
8.5
IM151-1 FO STANDARD interface module (6ES7151-1AB03-0AB0) ..................................... 8-16
8.6
Interface module IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE (6ES7151-1BA01-0AB0).................................... 8-20
8.7
8.7.1
8.7.2
8.7.3
8.7.4
Interface module IM151-3 PN (6ES7151-3AA10-0AB0).......................................................... 8-24

Features of the IM151-3 PN interface module ......................................................................... 8-24
SNMP ....................................................................................................................................... 8-28
SIMATIC Micro Memory Card for IM151-3 PN ........................................................................ 8-28
Updating the firmware of the IM151-3 PN................................................................................ 8-30
Terminal modules ................................................................................................................................... 9-1

9.1
Assignment of terminal modules to power modules and electronic modules ............................ 9-1
9.2
TM-P15S23-A1, TM-P15C23-A1, and TM-P15N23-A1 terminal modules

(6ES7193-4CCx0-0AA0)............................................................................................................ 9-4
9.3
TM-P15S23-A0, TM-P15C23-A0, and TM-P15N23-A0 terminal modules

(6ES7193-4CDx0-0AA0)............................................................................................................ 9-6
9.4
TM-P15S22-01, TM-P15C22-01, and TM-P15N22-01 terminal modules

(6ES7193-4CEx0-0AA0) ............................................................................................................ 9-8

Table of contents
10
11
9.5
TM-P30S44-A0 and TM-P30C44-A0 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CKx0-0AA0) .................. 9-10
9.6
TM-PF30S47-F1 terminal module (for PM-D F 24 VDC) (3RK1 903-3AA00) ......................... 9-13
9.7
TM-E15S26-A1, TM-E15C26-A1, and TM-E15N26-A1 universal terminal modules

(6ES7193-4CAx0-0AA0).......................................................................................................... 9-15
9.8
TM-E15S24-A1, TM-E15C24-A1, and TM-E15N24-A1 terminal modules

(6ES7193-4CAx0-0AA0).......................................................................................................... 9-18
9.9
TM-E15S24-01, TM-E15C24-01, and TM-E15N24-01 terminal modules

(6ES7193-4CBx0-0AA0).......................................................................................................... 9-20
9.10
TM-E15S23-01, TM-E15C23-01, and TM-E15N23-01 terminal modules

(6ES7193-4CBx0-0AA0).......................................................................................................... 9-22
9.11
TM-E15S24-AT and TM-E15C24-AT terminal modules (6ES7193-4CLx0-0AA0) .................. 9-24
9.12
TM-E30S44-01 and TM-E30C44-01 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CGx0-0AA0) .................. 9-27
9.13
TM-E30S46-A1 and TM-E30C46-A1 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CFx0-0AA0) .................. 9-29
Power modules..................................................................................................................................... 10-1

10.1
Parameters for power modules................................................................................................ 10-1
10.2
PM-E 24 VDC power module (6ES7138-4CA01-0AA0) .......................................................... 10-2
10.3
PM-E 24-48 VDC power module (6ES7138-4CA50-0AA0)..................................................... 10-5
10.4
PM-E 24-48 VDC, 24-230 VAC power module (6ES7138-4CB10-0AB0) ............................... 10-8
Digital Electronic Modules .................................................................................................................... 11-1

11.1
11.1.1
11.1.2
11.1.3
Parameters for digital electronic modules................................................................................ 11-1

Parameters for digital input modules ....................................................................................... 11-1
Parameters for 4DI NAMUR .................................................................................................... 11-3
Parameters for digital output modules ..................................................................................... 11-4
11.2
11.2.1
11.2.2
11.2.3
11.2.4
11.2.5
Parameter description for the digital electronic modules......................................................... 11-5

Hardware interrupt ................................................................................................................... 11-5
Input delay................................................................................................................................ 11-5
Trigger for hardware interrupt, rising edge .............................................................................. 11-5
Pulse stretching........................................................................................................................ 11-5
Chatter monitoring ................................................................................................................... 11-7
11.3
2DI 24 VDC ST digital electronic module (6ES7131-4BB01-0AA0). ....................................... 11-9
11.4
4DI 24 VDC ST digital electronic module (6ES7131-4BD01-0AA0)...................................... 11-13
11.5
4DI 24 VDC/SRC ST digital electronic module (6ES7131-4BD51-0AA0) ............................. 11-17
11.6
2DI 24 VDC High Feature digital electronic module (6ES7131-4BB01-0AB0)...................... 11-21
11.7
4DI 24 VDC High Feature digital electronic module (6ES7131-4BD01-0AB0) ..................... 11-25
11.8
4DI 24-48 VUC High Feature digital electronic module (6ES7131-4CD00-0AB0) ................ 11-29
11.9
4DI NAMUR digital electronic module (6ES7131-4RD00-0AB0)........................................... 11-33
11.10
2DI 120 VAC Standard digital electronic module (6ES7131-4EB00-0AB0) .......................... 11-41
11.11
2DI 230 VAC Standard digital electronic module (6ES7131-4FB00-0AB0) .......................... 11-45
11.12
2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A Standard digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BB01-0AA0)................. 11-49
11.13
4DO 24 VDC/0.5 A Standard digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BD01-0AA0) ................ 11-54
11.14
2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A High Feature digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BB01-0AB0) .......... 11-59
11.15
2DO 24 VDC/2 A Standard digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BB31-0AA0).................... 11-64

xi
Table of contents
12
11.16
4DO 24 VDC/2 A Standard digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BD31-0AA0).................... 11-69
11.17
2DO 24 VDC/2 A High Feature digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BB31-0AB0).............. 11-74
11.18
Digital electronic module 2DO 24 to 230 VAC (6ES7132-4FB00-0AB0)............................... 11-79
11.19
2RO NO 24-120 VDC/5 A, 24-230 VAC/5 A digital electronic module

(6ES7132-4HB01-0AB0)........................................................................................................ 11-84
11.20
2RO NO/NC 24-48 VDC/5 A 24-230 VAC/5 A digital electronic module

(6ES7132-4HB10-0AB0)........................................................................................................ 11-90
Analog electronic modules.................................................................................................................... 12-1

12.1
Introduction .............................................................................................................................. 12-1
12.2
12.2.1
12.2.2
12.2.3
Analog value representation .................................................................................................... 12-1

Overview .................................................................................................................................. 12-1
Analog value representation for measuring ranges with SIMATIC S7 .................................... 12-2
Measuring ranges of the analog input modules in SIMATIC S7 format for voltage,
current, and resistance-type sensors....................................................................................... 12-4
Measuring ranges of the analog input modules in SIMATIC S7 format for resistance
thermometer............................................................................................................................. 12-6
Measuring ranges of the analog input modules in SIMATIC S7 format for thermocouples..... 12-9
Output ranges of the analog output modules in SIMATIC S7 format for voltage
and current ............................................................................................................................. 12-12
12.2.4
12.2.5
12.2.6
12.3
12.3.1
12.3.2
12.3.3
Fundamentals of analog value processing ............................................................................ 12-13

Connecting measuring sensors ............................................................................................. 12-13
Connecting thermocouples .................................................................................................... 12-18
Connecting unused channels of analog input modules ......................................................... 12-23
12.4
12.4.1
12.4.2
12.4.3
12.4.4
Behavior of the analog modules during operation and in the event of problems................... 12-24
Influence of supply voltage and operating state on analog input and output values ............. 12-24
Effect of the value range for the analog input ........................................................................ 12-25
Effect of the value range for the analog output ...................................................................... 12-25
Use of the shield connection .................................................................................................. 12-26
12.5
12.5.1
12.5.7
Parameters for analog electronic modules ............................................................................ 12-26

Parameters for analog electronic modules 2AI U ST, 2AI I 2WIRE ST,
4AI I 2WIRE ST, and 2AI I 4WIRE ST ................................................................................... 12-26
Parameters for analog electronic modules 2AI U HF and 2AI I 2/4WIRE HF........................ 12-27
Parameters for analog electronic modules 2AI U High Speed, 2AI I 2WIRE High Speed,
and 2AI I 4WIRE High Speed................................................................................................. 12-28
Parameters for analog electronic modules 2AI RTD ST, 2AI TC ST,
and 2AI TC HF ....................................................................................................................... 12-29
Parameters for 2AI RTD High Feature analog electronic module ......................................... 12-31
Parameters for analog electronic modules 2AO U ST, 2AO U HF and 2AO I ST,
2AO I HF ................................................................................................................................ 12-34
Parameter description for the analog electronic modules...................................................... 12-35
12.6
2AI U Standard analog electronic module (6ES7134-4FB01-0AB0) ..................................... 12-37
12.7
2AI U High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7134-4LB00-0AB0) ............................... 12-41
12.8
2AI U High Speed analog electronic module (6ES7134-4FB51-0AB0)................................. 12-46
12.9
2AI I 2WIRE Standard analog electronic module (6ES7134-4GB01-0AB0).......................... 12-50
12.10
Analog electronic module 4AI I 2WIRE ST (6ES7134-4GD00-0AB0) ................................... 12-54
12.11
2AI I 2WIRE High Speed analog electronic module (6ES7134-4GB51-0AB0) ..................... 12-57
12.12
2AI I 4WIRE Standard analog electronic module (6ES7134-4GB11-0AB0).......................... 12-61
12.13
2AI I 2/4WIRE High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7134-4MB00-0AB0) ................ 12-65
12.5.2
12.5.3
12.5.4
12.5.5
12.5.6
xii

Table of contents
13
14
12.14
2AI I 4WIRE High Speed analog electronic module (6ES7134-4GB61-0AB0) ..................... 12-69
12.15
2AI RTD Standard analog electronic module (6ES7134-4JB50-0AB0)................................. 12-73
12.16
2AI RTD High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7134-4NB51-0AB0) ......................... 12-77
12.17
2AI TC Standard analog electronic module (6ES7134-4JB00-0AB0) ................................... 12-85
12.18
2AI TC High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7134-4NB01-0AB0) ............................ 12-91
12.19
2AO U Standard analog electronic module (6ES7135-4FB01-0AB0) ................................... 12-95
12.20
2AO U High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7135-4LB01-0AB0) ............................. 12-99
12.21
2AO I Standard analog electronic module (6ES7135-4GB01-0AB0) .................................. 12-102
12.22
2AO I High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7135-4MB01-0AB0)............................ 12-106
4 IQ-SENSE ......................................................................................................................................... 13-1

13.1
Features of 4 IQ-SENSE.......................................................................................................... 13-1
13.2
13.2.1
13.2.2
13.2.3
13.2.4
13.2.5
13.2.6
13.2.7
Parameters for the 4 IQ-SENSE .............................................................................................. 13-3

Overview .................................................................................................................................. 13-3
Group diagnostics parameter................................................................................................... 13-4
Synchronization group parameter............................................................................................ 13-4
Sensor type parameter ............................................................................................................ 13-6
Switching hysteresis parameter ............................................................................................... 13-7
Time functions and time value parameters.............................................................................. 13-8
Teach-in disable parameter ..................................................................................................... 13-8
13.3
13.3.1
13.3.2
13.3.3
Control and feedback interface (PIQ/PII)................................................................................. 13-9

Fundamentals of the control and feedback interface (PIQ/PII)................................................ 13-9
Standard................................................................................................................................. 13-10
Enhanced ............................................................................................................................... 13-11
13.4
Technical specifications ......................................................................................................... 13-15
RESERVE modules .............................................................................................................................. 14-1

14.1
RESERVE modules ................................................................................................................. 14-1
Order numbers .......................................................................................................................................A-1

A.1
Module order numbers............................................................................................................... A-1
A.2
Order numbers for ET 200S accessories .................................................................................. A-6
A.3
Order numbers for ET 200S network components .................................................................... A-7
A.4
Order numbers for ET 200S spare parts ................................................................................... A-8
A.5
Order numbers for connecting cables for 4 IQ-SENSE electronic module................................ A-9
A.6
Order numbers for manuals ....................................................................................................... A-9
Dimension drawings ...............................................................................................................................B-1

B.1
Minimum clearances for mounting, wiring, and heat dissipation ............................................... B-1
B.2
Interface modules ...................................................................................................................... B-2
B.3
Terminal modules (screw-type/spring terminals) with an electronic module inserted ............... B-3
B.4
Terminal modules (Fast Connect) with an electronic module inserted...................................... B-7
B.5
Terminating module ................................................................................................................. B-10
B.6
Shield connection..................................................................................................................... B-10

xiii
Table of contents
C
Address space of the inputs and outputs ................................................................................................C-1

C.1
Address space of the inputs and outputs...................................................................................C-1
Response Times.....................................................................................................................................D-1
D.1
Overview ....................................................................................................................................D-1
D.2
Response times at the DP master .............................................................................................D-1
D.3
Response times for the ET 200S ...............................................................................................D-2
D.4
Response times for the digital input modules ............................................................................D-6
D.5
Response times for the digital output modules ..........................................................................D-7
D.6
Response times for analog input modules.................................................................................D-7
D.7
Response times for analog output modules...............................................................................D-8
D.8
Response times for a 4 IQ-SENSE electronic module ............................................................D-10
D.9
Response times for technological modules .............................................................................D-10
D.10
Response times of PROFINET IO ...........................................................................................D-10
Determining the Leakage Resistance of an ET 200S Station .................................................................E-1
Special Measures for Interference-Free Operation ................................................................................. F-1

Glossary ..................................................................................................................................... Glossary-1
Index................................................................................................................................................ Index-1
Tables
Table 1-1
ET 200S components................................................................................................................. 1-6
Table 1-2
Features and benefits of ET 200S ............................................................................................. 1-9
Table 2-1
Configuration table in HW Config for PROFIBUS DP................................................................ 2-5
Table 2-2
Configuration table in HW config for PROFINET IO ................................................................ 2-13
Table 3-1
Configuration examples for ET 200S ......................................................................................... 3-1
Table 3-2
Power supply of the ET 200S..................................................................................................... 3-3
Table 3-3
Interface modules and the applications for which they are suited ............................................. 3-6
Table 3-4
Electronic modules and the applications for which they are suitable ........................................ 3-9
Table 3-5
TM-P terminal modules and the power modules for which they are suitable .......................... 3-11
Table 3-6
TM-E terminal modules and the electronic modules for which they are suitable..................... 3-12
Table 3-7
Terminal modules for power modules...................................................................................... 3-16
Table 3-8
Terminal modules for electronic modules ................................................................................ 3-20
Table 3-9
Control interface....................................................................................................................... 3-36
Table 3-10
Feedback interface................................................................................................................... 3-36
Table 3-11
Fault correction during option handling.................................................................................... 3-37
Table 3-12
Structure of DS 248 for ET 200S ............................................................................................. 3-38
Table 3-13
Basic structure of data records with identification data............................................................ 3-39
Table 3-14
Identification data ..................................................................................................................... 3-39
xiv

Table of contents
Table 3-15
Parameter length in bytes ........................................................................................................ 3-44
Table 3-16
Maximum configuration per voltage group............................................................................... 3-45
Table 4-1
Mounting dimensions ................................................................................................................. 4-2
Table 5-1
Removing and inserting electronic modules ............................................................................ 5-28
Table 6-1
Configuration table and address space ..................................................................................... 6-9
Table 6-2
Software requirements for commissioning on PROFIBUS DP ................................................ 6-10
Table 6-3
Status and error displays of the IM151-1 BASIC/ IM151-1 STANDARD/ IM151-1 FO
STANDARD/ IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE .................................................................................. 6-14
Table 6-4
Reading out the diagnostics with STEP 7 and STEP 5 on PROFIBUS DP ............................ 6-30
Table 6-5
Structure of station status 1 (Byte 0) ....................................................................................... 6-34
Table 6-6
Table 6-7
Table 6-8
Structure of the manufacturer ID (Bytes 4, 5) .......................................................................... 6-36
Table 6-9
Power module error types........................................................................................................ 6-42
Table 6-10
Digital electronic module error types ....................................................................................... 6-42
Table 6-11
Analog input module error types .............................................................................................. 6-44
Table 6-12
Analog output module error types............................................................................................ 6-45
Table 6-13
1SSI error types ....................................................................................................................... 6-45
Table 6-14
1COUNT 24V/100kHz error types ........................................................................................... 6-46
Table 6-15
1COUNT 5V/500kHz error types ............................................................................................. 6-46
Table 6-16
1STEP 5V/204kHz error types................................................................................................. 6-46
Table 6-17
2PULSE error types ................................................................................................................. 6-47
Table 6-18
1POS INC/Digital, 1POS SSI/Digital, 1POS INC/Analog, 1POS SSI/Analog error types ....... 6-47
Table 6-19
1SI 3964/ASCII, 1SI Modbus/USS error types ........................................................................ 6-48
Table 6-20
4 IQ-SENSE error types........................................................................................................... 6-48
Table 6-21
Software requirements for commissioning on PROFINET IO ................................................. 6-61
Table 6-22
Status and error displays of IM151-3 PN................................................................................. 6-64
Table 6-23
Reading out the diagnostics with STEP 7................................................................................ 6-68
Table 7-1
Use in industrial environment..................................................................................................... 7-5
Table 7-2
Variations in general technical specifications for the ET 200S FC frequency converter ......... 7-12
Table 8-1
Parameters for the IM151-1 BASIC interface module ............................................................... 8-1
Table 8-2

IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE .......................................................................................................... 8-2
Table 8-3
Parameters for the IM151-3 PN interface module ..................................................................... 8-3
Table 8-4
Terminal assignment of the IM151-1 BASIC interface module.................................................. 8-9
Table 8-5
Terminal assignment of the IM151-1 STANDARD interface module....................................... 8-13
Table 8-6
Terminal assignment of the interface module IM151-1 FO STANDARD................................. 8-17
Table 8-7
Terminal assignment of the IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE interface module................................ 8-21

xv
Table of contents
Table 8-8
Terminal assignment of the IM151-3 PN interface module...................................................... 8-26
Table 8-9
Available SIMATIC Micro Memory Cards ................................................................................ 8-29
Table 9-1
Assignment of TM-P terminal modules and power modules ..................................................... 9-1
Table 9-2
Assignment of TM-E terminal modules and electronic modules................................................ 9-2
Table 9-3
Terminal assignment of the TM-P15S23-A1, TM-P15C23-A1, and TM-P15N23-A1

terminal modules........................................................................................................................ 9-4
Table 9-4

Table 9-5
Terminal assignment of the TM-P15S22-01, TM-P15C22-01, and TM-P15N22-01

Table 9-6
Terminal assignment of the TM-P30S44-A0 and TM-P30C44-A0 terminal module................ 9-11
Table 9-7
Terminal assignment of the TM-PF30S47-F1 terminal module ............................................... 9-13
Table 9-8
Terminal assignment of the TM-E15S26-A1, TM-E15C26-A1, and TM-E15N26-A1

terminal modules with the 4-channel digital electronic modules.............................................. 9-16
Table 9-9

terminal modules...................................................................................................................... 9-18
Table 9-10
Terminal assignment of the TM-E15S24-01, TM-E15C24-01, and TM-E15N24-01

Table 9-11

Table 9-12
Terminal assignment of the TM-E15S24-AT and TM-E15C24-AT terminal module ............... 9-25
Table 9-13
Terminal assignment of the TM-E30S44-01 and TM-E30C44-01 terminal module................. 9-27
Table 9-14
Terminal assignment of the terminal module ........................................................................... 9-30
Table 10-1
Parameters for power modules................................................................................................ 10-1
Table 10-2
Terminal assignment of the PM-E 24 VDC power module ...................................................... 10-2
Table 10-3
Terminal assignment of the PM-E 24-48 VDC power module ................................................. 10-6
Table 10-4
Terminal assignment of the PM-E 24-48 VDC, 24-230 VAC power module ........................... 10-9
Table 11-1
Parameters for digital input modules ....................................................................................... 11-2
Table 11-2
Parameters for 4DI NAMUR..................................................................................................... 11-3
Table 11-3
Parameters for digital output modules ..................................................................................... 11-4
Table 11-4
Terminal assignment of the 2DI 24 VDC Standard.................................................................. 11-9
Table 11-5
Terminal assignment of the 4DI 24 VDC Standard................................................................ 11-13
Table 11-6
Terminal assignment of the 4DI 24 VDC/SRC Standard ....................................................... 11-17
Table 11-7
Terminal assignment of the 2DI 24 VDC High Feature ......................................................... 11-21
Table 11-8
Terminal assignment of the 4DI 24 VDC High Feature ......................................................... 11-25
Table 11-9
Terminal assignment of the 4DI 24-48 VUC High Feature .................................................... 11-29
Table 11-10
Terminal assignment of NAMUR sensors and sensors to IEC 60947-5-6 ............................ 11-33
Table 11-11
Terminal assignment of NAMUR changeover contact or sensor to IEC 60947-5-6 .............. 11-34
Table 11-12
Terminal assignment of a single, closed contact with 10 k

(mechanical normally open contact) ...................................................................................... 11-34
xvi

Table of contents
Table 11-13
Terminal assignment of a closed changeover contact with 10 k

(mechanical changeover contact).......................................................................................... 11-35
Table 11-14
Terminal assignment of an open single contact (mechanical normally open

contact with single contact).................................................................................................... 11-35
Table 11-15
Terminal assignment of an open changeover contact (mechanical changeover

contact) .................................................................................................................................. 11-36
Table 11-16
Diagnosis for changeover contacts........................................................................................ 11-40
Table 11-17
Terminal assignment of the 2DI 120 VAC Standard.............................................................. 11-41
Table 11-18
Terminal assignment of the 2DI 230 VAC Standard.............................................................. 11-45
Table 11-19
Terminal assignment of the 2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A Standard .................................................... 11-49
Table 11-20
Terminal assignment of the 4DO 24 VDC/0.5 A Standard .................................................... 11-54
Table 11-21
Terminal assignment of the 2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A High Feature .............................................. 11-59
Table 11-22
Terminal assignment of the 2DO 24 VDC/2 A Standard ....................................................... 11-64
Table 11-23
Terminal assignment of the 4DO 24 VDC/2 A Standard ....................................................... 11-69
Table 11-24
Terminal assignment of the 2DO 24 VDC/2 A High Feature ................................................. 11-74
Table 11-25
Terminal assignment of the 2DO 24-230 VAC ...................................................................... 11-79
Table 11-26
Terminal assignment of the 2RO NO 24-120 VDC/5 A, 24-230 VAC/5 A (as of

Version 2)............................................................................................................................... 11-85
Table 11-27
Switching capacity and lifetime of the relay contacts ............................................................ 11-89
Table 11-28
Terminal assignment of the 2RO NO/NC 24-48 VDC/5 A, 24-230 VAC/5 A......................... 11-90
Table 11-29
Switching capacity and lifetime of the contacts ..................................................................... 11-94
Table 12-1
Measured values in the case of a wire break depending on diagnostic being enabled .......... 12-2
Table 12-2
Analog value representation (SIMATIC S7 format) ................................................................. 12-2
Table 12-3
Measured-value resolution of the analog values (SIMATIC S7 format) .................................. 12-3
Table 12-4
SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring ranges 80 mV, 2.5 V, 5 V, and 10 V ............................ 12-4
Table 12-5
SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring ranges 1 to 5 V, 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA .............................. 12-4
Table 12-6
SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring range 20 mA ...................................................................... 12-5
Table 12-7
SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring ranges 150 , 300 , 600 , 3000 .................................. 12-5
Table 12-8
SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring ranges Pt 100, 200, 500, 1000 Standard in C and F......... 12-6
Table 12-9
SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring ranges Pt 100, 200, 500, 1000 Climatic in C and F........... 12-6
Table 12-10
SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring ranges Ni 100, 200, 500, 1000 Standard in C and F......... 12-7
Table 12-11
SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring ranges Ni 100, 200, 500, 1000 Climatic in C and F........... 12-7
Table 12-12
SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring ranges Cu 10 Standard in C und F.................................... 12-8
Table 12-13
SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring ranges Cu 10 Climatic in C und F...................................... 12-8
Table 12-14
SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring range Type B in C and F.................................................... 12-9
Table 12-15
SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring range Type C in C and F ................................................... 12-9
Table 12-16
SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring range Type E in C and F.................................................. 12-10
Table 12-17
SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring range Type J in C and F .................................................. 12-10
Table 12-18
SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring range Type K in C and F.................................................. 12-10

xvii
Table of contents
Table 12-19
SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring range Type L in C and F .................................................. 12-11
Table 12-20
SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring range Type N in C and F.................................................. 12-11
Table 12-21
SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring range Type R, S in C and F ............................................. 12-11
Table 12-22
SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring range Type T in C and F .................................................. 12-12
Table 12-23
SIMATIC S7 format: Output ranges 5 V; 10 V; 20 mA ................................................. 12-12
Table 12-24
SIMATIC S7 format: Output ranges 1 to 5V; 4 to 20mA ........................................................ 12-13
Table 12-25
Compensation of the reference junction temperature............................................................ 12-18
Table 12-26
Reference junction parameters.............................................................................................. 12-21
Table 12-27
How the analog input/output values depend on the operating mode of the PLC
(CPU of the DP master) and the supply voltage L +.............................................................. 12-24
Table 12-28
Behavior of the analog modules depending on the position of the analog input value
in the value range................................................................................................................... 12-25
Table 12-29
Behavior of the analog modules depending on the position of the analog output
value in the value range ......................................................................................................... 12-25
Table 12-30
Parameters for analog input modules U, I Standard.............................................................. 12-26
Table 12-31
Parameters for analog electronic modules U, I High Feature................................................ 12-27
Table 12-32
Parameters for analog input modules U, I High Speed ......................................................... 12-28
Table 12-33
Parameters for analog input modules RTD, TC..................................................................... 12-29
Table 12-34
Parameters for 2AI RTD High Feature analog electronic module ......................................... 12-31
Table 12-35
Parameters for analog output modules U, I ........................................................................... 12-34
Table 12-36
Terminal assignment of the 2AI U Standard .......................................................................... 12-38
Table 12-37
Terminal assignment of the 2AI U High Feature.................................................................... 12-42
Table 12-38
Terminal assignment of the 2AI U High Speed...................................................................... 12-46
Table 12-39
Terminal assignment of the 2AI I 2WIRE Standard ............................................................... 12-50
Table 12-40
Terminal assignment of the 4AI I 2WIRE ST ......................................................................... 12-54
Table 12-41
Terminal assignment of the 2AI I 2WIRE High Speed........................................................... 12-57
Table 12-42
Terminal assignment of the 2AI I 4WIRE Standard ............................................................... 12-62
Table 12-43
Terminal assignment of the 2AI I 2/4WIRE High Feature...................................................... 12-65
Table 12-44
Terminal assignment of the 2AI I 4WIRE High Speed........................................................... 12-70
Table 12-45
Terminal assignment of the 2AI RTD Standard ..................................................................... 12-74
Table 12-46
Terminal assignment of the 2AI RTD High Feature............................................................... 12-78
Table 12-47
Terminal assignment of the 2AI TC Standard........................................................................ 12-86
Table 12-48
Terminal assignment of the 2AI TC High Feature.................................................................. 12-91
Table 12-49
Terminal assignment of the 2AO U Standard ........................................................................ 12-96
Table 12-50
Terminal assignment of the 2AO U High Feature .................................................................. 12-99
Table 12-51
Terminal assignment of the 2AO I Standard........................................................................ 12-103
Table 12-52
Terminal assignment of the 2AO I High Feature ................................................................. 12-107
Table 13-1
Parameters for the 4 IQ-SENSE .............................................................................................. 13-3
Table 13-2
Diffuse sensor .......................................................................................................................... 13-6
xviii

Table of contents
Table 13-3
Reflex sensor ........................................................................................................................... 13-6
Table 13-4
Standard feedback interface .................................................................................................. 13-10
Table 13-5
Enhanced feedback interface ................................................................................................ 13-11
Table 13-6
Enhanced control interface .................................................................................................... 13-12
Table 13-7
Terminal assignment of the 4 IQ-SENSE .............................................................................. 13-15
Table A-1
Interface module order numbers................................................................................................ A-1
Table A-2
Terminal module order numbers................................................................................................ A-2
Table A-3
Power module order numbers.................................................................................................... A-3
Table A-4
Digital electronic module order numbers ................................................................................... A-3
Table A-5
Analog electronic module order numbers .................................................................................. A-4
Table A-6
Process-related module order numbers .................................................................................... A-5
Table A-7
Reserve module order numbers ................................................................................................ A-5
Table A-8
ET 200S accessories order numbers ........................................................................................ A-6
Table A-9
Network components (PROFIBUS DP) for ET 200S order numbers ........................................ A-7
Table A-10
Network components (PROFINET IO) for ET 200S order numbers.......................................... A-8
Table A-11
Fuse for digital input module and power module ....................................................................... A-8
Table A-12
Connecting cable for 4 IQ-SENSE electronic module ............................................................... A-9
Table A-13
ET 200S documentation packages or manuals ......................................................................... A-9
Table A-14
STEP 7 and SIMATIC S7 manuals .......................................................................................... A-10
Table A-15
STEP 7 and SIMATIC S7 manuals .......................................................................................... A-11
Table A-16
Technical Guide to PROFIBUS DP and SIMATIC S7 ............................................................. A-11
Table C-1
Address spaces of the inputs and outputs of the ET 200S........................................................ C-1
Table C-2
PII feedback interface and PIQ control interface .......................................................................C-2

xix
Table of contents
xx

Product overview
1.1
1.1
What are distributed I/O systems?
Distributed I/O System Range of Application

When a system is set up, it is common for the inputs to and outputs from the process to be
incorporated centrally in the automation system.
If the inputs/outputs are located at greater distances from the automation system, the wiring
can become very extensive and complex, and electromagnetic interferences can impair
reliability.
Distributed I/O systems are suited for these types of installations:
The controller CPU is located centrally.
The I/O systems (inputs and outputs) operate decentrally on-site.
The powerful PROFIBUS DP with its high data transmission rates ensures smooth
communication between the controller CPU and the I/O systems.
What is PROFIBUS DP?

PROFIBUS DP is an open bus system based on IEC 61784-1:2002 Ed1 CP 3/1 with the
"DP" transmission protocol (DP stands for distributed peripherals).
Physically, PROFIBUS DP is either an electrical network based on a shielded two-wire line
or an optical network based on a fiber-optic cable.
The "DP" transmission protocol enables a rapid, cyclic exchange of data between the
controller CPU and the distributed I/O systems.
What is a DP master and what are DP slaves?

The DP master links the controller CPU with the distributed I/O systems. The DP master
exchanges data with the distributed I/O systems via PROFIBUS DP and monitors the
PROFIBUS DP.
The distributed I/O systems (= DP slaves) prepare the sensor and actuator data on-site so
that they can be transmitted to the controller CPU via PROFIBUS DP.

1-1
Product overview
1.1 What are distributed I/O systems?
Which devices can be connected to PROFIBUS DP?

An extremely wide range of devices can be connected on the PROFIBUS DP as a DP
master or as DP slaves, provided their behavior complies with IEC 61784-1:2002 Ed1
CP 3/1. The devices that can be used include the following:
SIMATIC S5
SIMATIC S7/M7/C7
SIMATIC programming device or PC
SIMATIC HMI (operator panel (OP), operator station (OS), and text display (TD) operator
control and monitoring devices)
Devices from other manufacturers
Structure of a PROFIBUS DP network

The figure below illustrates a typical PROFIBUS DP network structure. The DP masters are
integrated in the relevant device. For example, the S7-400 has a PROFIBUS DP interface
and the IM 308-C master interface module is inserted in an S5-115U. The DP slaves are the
distributed I/O systems, which are connected to the DP masters by means of
PROFIBUS DP.
6
68
ZLWK,0&
3URJUDPPLQJGHYLFH3&
'3PDVWHU
352),%86'3
'3VODYHV
(7;
(76
Figure 1-1
1-2
(7/
'ULYH
(70
6
(7%
'3$6,/,1.
68'3
2326
2WKHUILHOGGHYLFHV
Typical PROFIBUS DP network structure

Product overview
1.2 What is PROFINET IO?
1.2
1.2
What is PROFINET IO?
Definition
PROFINET IO is the open transmission system with realtime functionality defined in
accordance with the PROFINET standard. The standard defines a vendor-neutral
communication, automation, and engineering model.
An industrial-grade connection system is available for cabling of PROFINET components.
PROFINET departs from the hierarchical master-slave principle of PROFIBUS. A
provider-consumer principle is used instead. During configuration, the user specifies
which modules of an IO device are subscribed to by an IO controller.
The quantity frameworks are extended in accordance with the options available on
PROFINET IO. Parameter limits are not exceeded during configuration.
The transmission rate is 100 Mbits/s.
The user view during configuration is largely the same as that on the PROFIBUS DP
(STEP 7 HW Config is used for configuration).
Structure of a PROFINET IO network

The figure below illustrates a typical PROFINET IO network structure. PROFIBUS slaves, if
present, can be integrated by means of an IE/PB link.
,2FRQWUROOHU
6
6ZLWFK
,2GHYLFH
(76
6ZLWFK
,2GHYLFH
(76
6ZLWFK
23
6ZLWFK
3URJUDPPLQJ
GHYLFH
6ZLWFK
,(3%
OLQN
352),%86'3
Figure 1-2
PD[P
352),1(7,2
,QGXVWULDO(WKHUQHW
Typical structure of a PROFINET IO network

1-3
Product overview
1.3 What is the ET 200S distributed I/O system?
1.3
1.3
What is the ET 200S distributed I/O system?
Definition
The ET 200S distributed I/O system is a discretely modular, highly flexible DP slave with
IP 20 degree of protection.
Area of application
You can insert practically any number of I/O modules in practically any combination directly
next to the interface module that transfers the data to the DP master. This means you can
adjust the configuration to suit your on-site requirements.
Independent from the interface module, an ET 200S can consist of up to 63 modules such as
power modules, peripheral modules and motor starters.
The ability to integrate motor starters (switching and protecting of any three-phase load up to
7.5 kW) ensures that the ET 200S can be adapted quickly to suit almost any process-related
use of your machine.
The fail-safe modules of the ET 200S enable you to read in and output data in a fail-safe
manner up to Safety Category 4 (EN 954-1).
Terminal modules and electronic modules

The ET 200S distributed I/O system is connected as follows:
To PROFIBUS DP by means of a cable connector for PROFIBUS DP at the IM151-1
interface module
To PROFINET IO by means of a cable connector for PROFINET IO at the IM151-3 PN
interface module
Every ET 200S peripheral system is a
A DP slave on the PROFIBUS DP
An IO device on the PROFINET IO
1-4

Product overview
View
The figure below shows an example configuration of an ET 200S.
1
10
ET 200S IM151-1 interface module
PM-E power module for electronic modules
Electronic modules
Power module for PM-D motor starters
Direct starter
Reversing starter
Terminating module
Power bus
TM-E terminal modules for electronic modules
TM-P terminal modules for power modules

1-5
Product overview
ET 200S components
The following table provides an overview of the most important components of the ET 200S:
Table 1-1
ET 200S components
Component
...is the mounting rail for the ET

200S. You install the ET 200S on the
mounting rail.
Interface module
IM151-1 BASIC
IM151-1 STANDARD
IM151-1 HIGH
FEATURE
...connects the ET 200S to the DP

master and prepares the data for the
assembled electronic modules and
motor starters.
IM151-1 FO
STANDARD
Interface module
IM151-3 PN
1-6
Function
Mounting rail
Image
With RS 485 interface:
With fiber-optic cable interface:
... ...connects the ET 200S to the

PROFINET IO controllers and
prepares the data for the assembled
electronic modules and motor
starters.
with PROFINET interface:

Product overview
Component
Terminal module
Function
Image
...carries the wiring and

accommodates the power and
electronic modules. Terminal
modules are available in the following
variants:
For power modules
For electronic modules
With screw terminal
With spring terminal
With Fast Connect (quick
connection method, no stripping
required)
Power module
...monitors the voltage for all

electronic modules in the voltage
group. The following power modules
are available:
For a 24 VDC infeed with
diagnostics
For a 24 VDC to 48 VDC infeed
with diagnostics
For a 24 VDC to 48 VDC, 24 VAC
to 230 VAC infeed with
diagnostics and fuse
Electronic module
...is inserted onto the terminal module

and determines the function:
Digital input modules with 24
VDC, 120/230 VAC, and NAMUR
Digital output modules with 24
VDC and 120/230 VAC
Relay modules
Analog input modules with
voltage, current, and resistance
measurement; thermoresistor;
and thermocouples
Analog output modules for voltage
and current
Technology modules
Fail-safe modules
RESERVE
Terminating module
...terminates the ET 200S and can be

used as a mount for 6 reserve fuses
(5 mm x 20 mm).

1-7
Product overview
Function
Image
Slot number labels
...are used for identifying the slots on

the terminal module.
Color coding labels
...enable customer- and

country-specific coding of the
terminals on the terminal module
PROFIBUS cable with

bus connector
... connects nodes of a

PROFIBUS DP configuration to each
other.
63
...for machine labeling or printing

80 strips per labeling sheet
62
Labeling sheet (DIN A4,

perforated, film)
...is used for connecting cable

shields.
Component
Shield connection
Fiber optic duplex cable

... connects nodes of a
with simplex plug (in the
PROFIBUS DP configuration to each
plug adaptor for
other.
IM151-1 FO STANDARD)
PROFINET connector
according to the
specifications in the
... connects nodes of a PROFINET IO

configuration to each other.
PROFINET Installation
Guide and the Industrial
Ethernet FC installation
instructions
1-8

Product overview
Features and benefits of ET 200S

The table below presents the features and benefits of ET 200S.
Table 1-2
Features and benefits of ET 200S

Features
Benefits
Structure
Function-oriented, cost-optimized station
design
Significant reduction in effort for configuration
and documentation
Space savings due to the ability to string
modules together in any order
Discretely modular design

1/2/4-channel electronic modules
Power modules
Integrated motor starters
Extensive range of electronic modules
Broad area of application
Communication capable, system-integrated

motor starter: Direct and oscillating starter up to
7.5 kW
PLC inputs and outputs, terminal blocks, circuit

breakers, and contactors in a plug-in module
save space and the effort involved in wiring
Permanent wiring due to the separation of

mechanical and electronic components
Prewiring possible
Module replacement during operation of the
ET 200S ("hot swapping")
Individual connection of power modules to

common potential
Individual formation of voltage groups

(identifiable by color coding of the TM-P
terminal modules for power modules)
Simple load interruption
Robust design for harsh industrial conditions (5 g

vibration resistance)
High operational reliability when mounted directly

on the machine, high availability
Connection system
Integrated voltage buses
Reduced effort required for wiring
Power bus up to 50 A for motor starters
Minimization of wiring in 400 V range
Screw terminals, spring terminals, and Fast

Connect
A change in terminal connection method is not

necessary
2- and 3-conductor connection or

2-, 3- and 4-conductor connection
Optimal selection on grounds of space and cost

Connection method with no stripping required
Time savings during wiring
Fast Connect
Replaceable terminal box in the terminal module
No need to remove the terminal module in the

event of terminal damage
Automatic coding of the I/O modules
Quick and reliable module replacement
Large label
Adequate space for clear identification
High data transfer rate of up to 12 Mbits/s on the

PROFIBUS DP and 100 Mbit/s on the
PROFINET IO
Short reaction times
Integrated safety functions
Savings on time-consuming safety engineering
For motor starters up to safety category

4 according to EN 954-1
Fail-safe modules

For detecting and outputting fail-safe signals via

PROFIBUS (PROFIsafe) up to Safety Category 4
(EN 954-1)
1-9
Product overview
1.4 Guide to the ET 200S manuals
1.4
1.4
Guide to the ET 200S manuals
Required manuals for various configurations

The components of ET 200S are described in various manuals. These manuals are part of
various documentation packages. The table below shows possible configuration variants of
the ET 200S and the manuals in the documentation packages that are required for each
variant.
You will need the information contained in the
following manuals:
$2
$,
'2
Distributed I/O System ET 200S

30(
,0
ET 200S consists of the following components:
38/6(
3RV,QF$QDORJ
66,
'2
30(
,0
Technological Functions ET 200S
3RV,QF'LJLWDO
'2
30(
,0

Positioning ET 200S
0RGEXV866
$,
'2
30(
ET 200S Serial Interface Module
$2
$,
'2

30(
,0
&38
,0
IM151-7 CPU Interface Module
1-10
$2
$,
'2
30(
,0
31

+
PROFINET System documentation

Product overview
1.4 Guide to the ET 200S manuals
PM-D
2AO
2DO
PM-E
IM151-1
ET 200S consists of the following components:
DS
DS
You will need the information contained in the

following manuals:

+

)'2
)',
30(
'2
'2
30(
,0
ET 200S Distributed I/O System Fail-Safe

Modules
30')352),VDIH
)'2
)',
30(
,0

)'6H[
)'6H[
ET 200S Distributed I/O System Fail-Safe

Modules
+

ET 200S FC Frequency Converter

operating instructions
+

list manual
+

operating instructions
+

list manual
1
ICU24F for fail-safe frequency converter

1-11
Brief Instructions on Commissioning ET 200S

2.1
2.1.1
2.1
Commissioning on PROFIBUS DP
Introduction
Introduction
Using the following simple examples, you will learn how to place the ET 200S into operation
on the PROFIBUS DP step by step:
ET 200S assembling and wiring up
Configuring ET 200S in the SIMATIC manager
Creating a user program
Switching on ET 200S
Evaluating diagnostic messages:
Removing and inserting of modules
Switching off the load voltage on the power module
Wire break in the actuator wiring on the digital output module
Requirements
You have assembled an S7 station consisting of a power supply component and a DP
master (e. g. CPU 315-2 DP). A CPU 315-2 DP was used as a DP master for this
example. Every other DP master (Norm IEC 61784-1:2002 Ed1 CP 3/1) is naturally also
usable.
STEP 7 (starting V5.0 with ServicePack 3) is completely installed on you PG. You have
STEP 7 knowledge.
The programming device must be connected at the DP master.

2-1

2.1 Commissioning on PROFIBUS DP
Required components
The following graphic shows you which ET 200S components you require for the example on
the PROFIBUS DP:

30
',
',
',
',

6ORW
30 '2 '2 '2 '2
,0
5DLO
7HUPLQDWLQJPRGXOH
[70(1$WHUPLQDOPRGXOHDQG
'29'&$+LJK)HDWXUH
HOHFWURQLFPRGXOH
7031$WHUPLQDOPRGXOHDQG
30(9'&SRZHUPRGXOH
[70(1$WHUPLQDOPRGXOHDQG',9'&
+LJK)HDWXUHHOHFWURQLFPRGXOH
7031$WHUPLQDOPRGXOHDQG30(9'&SRZHUPRGXOH
,067$1'$5'LQWHUIDFHPRGXOH
352),%86EXVFRQQHFWRU
Figure 2-1
Components for the example on PROFIBUS DP
Order numbers for example configuration on the PROFIBUS DP

Quantity
2-2
Ordering data
Order number
Standard profile rails 35 mm (e. g. length 483 mm)
6ES5 710-8MA11
IM151-1 STANDARD interface module and terminating module, 1 unit
6ES7151-1AA04-0AB0
Fast Connect Terminal Module TM-P15N23-A1, 1 piece
6ES7193-4CC70-0AA0
Fast Connect Terminal Module TM-E15N24-A1, 5 pieces
6ES7193-4CA70-0AA0
PM-E 24 VDC, 1 unit
6ES7138-4CA01-0AB0
2DI DC24V HF, 5 pieces
6ES7131-4BB01-0AB0
2DO DC24V/0,5A HF, 5 pieces
6ES7132-4BB01-0AB0
Bus connector
6ES7972-0BA12-0XA0


2.1.2
Example: Installing ET 200S
Procedure
1. Mount the rail (35 mm x 7.5 mm or 15 mm) with a length of at least 210 mm on a
stationary base.
2. Install the various modules on the rail beginning on the left (hook on, swing in, move to
the left). Adhere to the following sequence:
IM151-1 STANDARD interface module
TM-P15S23-A1 terminal module
4 x TM-E15S24-A1 terminal module
TM-P15S23-A1 terminal module
4 x TM-E15S24-A1 terminal module
Terminating module
3. Set PROFIBUS address 3 on the IM 151-1 STANDARD interface module.
Set PROFIBUS Address 3:
2)) 21

*)
Intended for future enhancements. Switch must be in OFF position.

2-3

2.1.3
Example: Wiring and assembling ET 200S
Procedure
1. Wire the ET 200S as shown below:
$8;

$

$

$8;

/ 0

24 VDC electronic power supply
24 VDC sensor supply voltage group 1
24 VDC load supply voltage group 2
1. Use the PROFIBUS bus connector to connect the DP master with the ET 200S. The
PROFIBUS DP interface is located on the IM 151-1 STANDARD interface module.
2. Insert the power and electronic modules into the terminal modules.
3. Switch on the power supply for the DP master.
4. Observe the status LEDs on the DP master.
CPU 315-2 DP:
DC 5 V lights up
SF DP off
BUSF flashes
2-4


2.1.4
Example: Configuring ET 200S in SIMATIC Manager
Procedure
1. Start SIMATIC Manager, and create a new project with a DP master
(e.g., CPU315-2 DP). Create OB1 and OB82 for the project.
2. Create the PROFIBUS subnet.
3. Connect the PROFIBUS subnet with the DP master in HW Config.
4. Take the ET 200S from the hardware catalog and put it on the PROFIBUS.
5. Set PROFIBUS address 3 for ET 200S.
6. Drag the individual ET 200S modules from the hardware catalog to the configuration
table.
7. Select the electronic modules in the configuration table, and click the "Pack addresses"
button.
Table 2-1
Configuration table in HW Config for PROFIBUS DP
Module/
DP identifier
Order number
I address
Q address
Comment
6ES7138-4CA01-0AA0 PM-E DC24V
Power module
6ES7131-4BB01-0AB0 2DI DC24V
6ES7131-4BB01-0AB0 2DI DC24V
Byte 0.2 and 0.3
6ES7131-4BB01-0AB0 2DI DC24V
Byte 0.4 and 0.5
6ES7131-4BB01-0AB0 2DI DC24V
Bits 0.6 and 0.7
Power module
6ES7132-4BB01-0AB0 2DO DC24V
6ES7132-4BB01-0AB0 2DO DC24V
Byte 0.2 and 0.3
6ES7132-4BB01-0AB0 2DO DC24V
Byte 0.4 and 0.5
10
6ES7132-4BB01-0AB0 2DO DC24V
Bits 0.6 and 0.7
Byte 0.0 and 0.1
Byte 0.0 and 0.1
1. Set the following parameters:

In the DP slave properties dialog box for ET 200S:
Enable startup for set- <> actual configuration: enable
In the DP slave properties dialog box for the PM-E 24 VDC, Module/DP ID 1
(in the configuration table)
Diagnostics: Missing load induced stress
In the DP slave properties dialog box for 2 DO 24 VDC, Module/DP ID 7
(in the configuration table)
Diagnostics: Wire failure A0
2. Save the configuration.

2-5

2.1.5
Example: Creating a user program
Procedure
1. Create the user program in the LAD/STL/FBD editor in OB1.
Example 1: Reading in an input and controlling an output:
STL
A I 0.0
If input byte 0.0 and
A M 2.0
memory bit 2.0 are set, then
S Q 0.0
set output byte 0.0
Example 2: Transferring an input byte to an output byte:

STL
L PIB 0
Load I/O input byte 0 in the accumulator

(bytes 0.0 to 0.7)
T PQB 0
Transfer the accumulator content to

I/O output byte 0 (byte 0.0 to 0.7)
1. Save the project in SIMATIC Manager.

2. Download the configuration to the DP master.
2.1.6
Example: Switching on ET 200S
Procedure
1. Switch on all of the power supplies on the ET 200S.
2. Observe the status LEDs on the DP master and ET 200S.
CPU 315-2 DP:
DC 5 V: lights up
SF DP: off
BUSF: off
ET 200S:
SF: off
BF: off
ON: lights up
2-6


2.1.7
Example: Evaluating diagnostic messages
Introduction
In this example, you generate diagnostic messages by provoking errors in the ET 200S. In
the event of an error, OB82 is started. You evaluate the start information in OB82.
Tip: Call SFC13 in OB82, and evaluate the diagnostic frame.
Removing and inserting the 2 DI 24 VDC High Feature digital electronic module
1. Remove the 2 DI 24 VDC High Feature electronic module from the terminal module
during operation.
2. Observe the status LEDs on the IM 151-1 STANDARD interface module:
SF: lights up a diagnostic message is pending.
BF: off
ON: lights up
Result: The ET 200S continues to run error-free.
3. Evaluate the diagnostic message:
Result:
Station status 1 (Byte 0): Bit 3 is set external diagnostic
Identifier-related diagnostic data: Byte 7.1 is set Slot 2
Module status: Byte 19.2/19.3: 11B no module
4. Reinsert the removed electronic module into the terminal module.
Result:
Status LED on the IM 151-1 STANDARD interface module:
SF: off
BF: off
ON: lights up
The diagnostic message is deleted.

2-7

Switching off load voltage on the power module

1. Switch off the load voltage on the PM-E 24 VDC (slot 1).
2. Observe the status LEDs.
IM 151 STANDARD interface module:
SF: lights up
Power module:
PWR: off No load voltage available on the power module
SF: lights up a diagnostic message is pending.
I/O modules in the voltage group:
LEDs: light up
3. Evaluate the diagnostics.
Result:
Station status 1 (Byte 0): Bit 3 is set external diagnostics
Channel-specific diagnostics:
Byte 35.0 to 35.5: 000000B Slot 1
Byte 37.0 to 37.4: 10001B sensor or load voltage missing
4. Switch on the load voltage on the power module again, and reevaluate the diagnostics.
Result:
SF: off
Status LEDs on the power module:
PWR: on
SF: off
Status LEDs on the I/O modules:
LEDs: off
2-8


Simulating a wire break in the actuator wiring

1. Remove the cable from terminal 1 on the 2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A; High Feature electronic
module (slot 7)
2. Observe the status LEDs:
IM151-1 STANDARD interface module:
SF: lights up
2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A High Feature electronic module:
SF: lights up a diagnostic message is pending
1: off output is not activated
3. Evaluate the diagnostic message:
Result:
Station status 1 (Byte 0): Bit 3 is set external diagnostics
Channel-specific diagnostics:
Byte 35.0 to 35.5: 000110B Slot 7
Byte 36.0 to 35.5: 000000B Channel 0
Byte 37.0 to 37.4: 00110B Wire break
4. Reattach the cable to the actuator to terminal 1, and reevaluate the diagnostics:
SF: off
Status LEDs on the 2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A High Feature electronic module:
SF: off
1: off/on
See also
Reading out the diagnostics (Page 6-29)

2-9

2.2 Commissioning on PROFINET IO
2.2
2.2.1
2.2
Commissioning on PROFINET IO
Introduction
Introduction
The following simple example teaches you step-by-step how to commission the ET 200S on
PROFINET IO:
Installing and wiring of ET 200S
Configuring with STEP 7 using the GSD file
Transferring device names to the IO device
Integrating into the user program
Switching on the ET 200S
Evaluating the interrupts and diagnostics:
Removing and inserting of modules
Switching off the load voltage on the power module
Wire break in the actuator wiring on the digital output module
Requirements
You have set up an S7 station consisting of a power supply module and an IO controller
(e.g., CPU 317-2 PN/DP). A CPU 317-2 PN/DP was used as the IO controller in this
example.
STEP 7 (V5.3 Service Pack 1 or higher) is fully installed on your programming device
(PG). You are familiar with STEP 7.
The PG is connected to the PROFINET IO.
2-10


Required components
The figure below illustrates the ET 200S components needed for the example on
PROFINET IO:
,0
31

30
',
',
',
', 30 '2 '2 '2 '2
6ORW
5DLO
7HUPLQDWLQJPRGXOH
[70(1$WHUPLQDOPRGXOHDQG
'29'&$+LJK)HDWXUH
HOHFWURQLFPRGXOH
7031$WHUPLQDOPRGXOHDQG
30(9'&SRZHUPRGXOH
[70(1$WHUPLQDOPRGXOHDQG',9'&
+LJK)HDWXUHHOHFWURQLFPRGXOH
7031$WHUPLQDOPRGXOHDQG30(9'&SRZHUPRGXOH
,031LQWHUIDFHPRGXOH
,QGXVWULDO(WKHUQHW)&LQVWDOODWLRQFDEOHZLWK352),1(7FRQQHFWRU
Figure 2-2
Components for the example on PROFINET IO
Order numbers for the example configuration on PROFINET IO

Quantity
Ordering data
Order number
Standard mounting rail, 35 mm (e.g., length of 483 mm)
6ES5 710-8MA11
IM151-3 PN interface module and terminating module, 1 unit
6ES7151-3AA10-0AB0
SIMATIC Micro Memory Card (e. g. 64k)
6ES7953-8LF11-0AA0
TM-P15N23-A1 Fast Connect terminal module, 1 unit
6ES7193-4CC70-0AA0
TM-E15N24-A1 Fast Connect terminal module, 5 units
6ES7193-4CA70-0AA0
PM-E 24 VDC, 1 unit
6ES7138-4CA01-0AA0
2DI DC24V HF, 5 pieces
6ES7131-4BB01-0AB0
2DO DC24V/0.5A HF, 5 pieces
6ES7132-4BB01-0AB0
PROFINET connector (according to the specifications in the PROFINET

Installation Guide)
Appropriate installation cables:
FC Standard Cable
FC Trailing Cable
FC Marine Cable

6XV1 840-2AH10
6XV1 840-3AH10
6XV1 840-4AH10
2-11

2.2.2
Example: Installing and wiring ET 200S
Installing the mounting rail

1. Mount the rail (35 mm x 7.5 mm or 15 mm) with a length of at least 210 mm on a
stationary base.
2. Start from the left with the installation of the individual modules on the profile rail (hook in
- swivel in - slide to left). Adhere to the following sequence:
IM151-3 PN interface module
TM-P15N23-A1 terminal module
4 x TM-E15N24-A1 terminal module
TM-P15N23-A1 terminal module
4 x TM-E15N24-A1 terminal module
Terminating module
Wiring and assembling ET 200S

1. Wire the ET 200S as shown below:
$8;
2-12
$8;

$

$

/ 0
24 VDC electronic power supply
24 VDC sensor supply voltage group 1
24 VDC voltage group 2


1. Use the PROFINET connector to connect the ET 200S (IO device) to the IO controller via
a switch. The PROFINET interface is located on the IM 151-3 PN interface module.
2. Insert the power and electronic modules into the terminal modules.
3. Switch on the power supply for the IO controller.
4. Observe the status LEDs on the IO controller.
CPU 317-2 PN/DP:
DC 5 V lights up
SF off
BF2 flashes
2.2.3
Example: Configuring ET 200S in SIMATIC Manager
Procedure
1. Start SIMATIC Manager, and create a new project with an IO controller
(e.g., CPU 317-2 PN/DP). Create OB1, OB82, and OB83 for the project.
2. Open the "Properties - Ethernet Interfaces" window in the HW config and apply a subnet
e. g. Ethernet(1).
3. Take the IM151-3 PN from the ET 200S catalog of the hardware catalog and insert it on
Ethernet(1):PROFINET IO System (100).
4. Drag the individual ET 200S modules from the hardware catalog to the configuration
table.
Table 2-2
Module
Configuration table in HW config for PROFINET IO

Order number
I address
Q address
Comment
6ES7151-3AA10-0AB0 IM151-3 PN
6ES7131-4BB01-0AB0 2DI DC24V
Byte 0.0 and 0.1
6ES7131-4BB01-0AB0 2DI DC24V
Byte 1.0 and 1.1
6ES7131-4BB01-0AB0 2DI DC24V
Byte 2.0 and 2.1
6ES7131-4BB01-0AB0 2DI DC24V
6ES7132-4BB01-0AB0 2DO DC24V
Byte 0.0 and 0.1
6ES7132-4BB01-0AB0 2DO DC24V
Byte 1.0 and 1.1
6ES7132-4BB01-0AB0 2DO DC24V
Byte 2.0 and 2.1
10
6ES7132-4BB01-0AB0 2DO DC24V
Byte 3.0 and 3.1

Power module
Byte 3.0 and 3.1

Power module
2-13

1. Set the following parameters:
In the IO device properties dialog for the PM-E 24 VDC,
Module 1 (in the configuration table)
Diagnostics: Missing load induced stress
In the IO device properties dialog for the 2 DO 24 VDC,
Module 7 (in the configuration table)
Diagnostics: Wire failure A0
2. Compile and save the configuration.
2.2.4
Example: Assigning device names for the IO device
Procedure
1. Insert the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card in the IM151-3 PN.
2. Switch on the power supply for the IM151-3 PN interface module.
3. Open the "Properties - IM151-3 PN" window in the HW config and enter the device name
for the IO device there.
4. An online PROFINET connection from the PG to the IO device via a switch is required for
transferring the name to the IM151-3 PN interface module.
The device name is transferred to the IM151-3 PN using "PLC > Ethernet > Assign
Device Name." To do so, activate the "Assign name" button in the "Assign device name"
window. The device name is stored on the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card in the interface
module IM151-3 PN.
Once the name is assigned, it appears in the window.
2.2.5
Example: Creating a user program
Procedure
1. Create the user program in the LAD/STL/FBD editor in OB1.
Example 1: Reading in an input and controlling an output:
STL
2-14
A I 0.0
If input byte 0.0 and
A M 2.0
memory bit 2.0 are set, then
S Q 0.0
set output byte 0.0


Example 2: Transferring an input byte to an output byte:
STL
L PIB 0
Load I/O input byte 0 in the accumulator

(bytes 0.0 to 0.7)
T PQB 0
Transfer the accumulator content to

I/O output byte 0 (byte 0.0 to 0.7)
1. Save the project in SIMATIC Manager.

2. Download the configuration to the IO controller.
2.2.6
Example: Switching on ET 200S
Procedure
1. Switch on all of the power supplies on the ET 200S.
2. Observe the status LEDs on the IO controller, ET 200S, and switch.
CPU 317-2 PN/DP:
DC 5 V: lights up
SF: off
BF2: off
LINK: lights up
ET 200S:
SF: off
BF: off
ON: lights up
LINK: lights up
Switch:
LINK: lights up
100MB: lights up

2-15

2.2.7
Example: Evaluating diagnostic messages
Introduction
In this example, you generate diagnostic messages by provoking errors in the ET 200S.
In the event of an error, OB83 is started. You evaluate the start information in OB83.
Hint: Call up the SFB 52 within the OB 83 and evaluate the diagnostic telegram.
Procedure
1. Remove the 2 DI 24 VDC High Feature electronic module from the terminal module
(e.g., from slot 2) during operation.
2. Observe the status LEDs on the IM 151-3 PN interface module:
SF: lights up diagnostic message present.
BF: off
ON: lights up
Result: The ET 200S continues to run without fault.
3. In the event of a remove interrupt, OB83 is started. Start SFB 52 in OB83. Evaluate the
E002H diagnostic data record.
Byte
Contents
Meaning
Header information
0 and 1
8104H
Data record with discrepancies between the preset and actual

configurations
2 and 3
0014H
20 bytes follow
4 and 5
0100H
Version 1.0
6 and 7
0001H
0001H if the preset configuration deviates from the actual

configuration
IO device header information

8 and 9
0000H
steady
10 and 11
0000H
steady
12 and 13
0001H
Number of slots in which there is a discrepancy between the preset

configuration and the actual configuration
Configuration data of slots
2-16
14 and 15
0002H
Slot number of the slot with a discrepancy between the preset and
actual configurations
16 to 19
XXXXXXXXH
20 and 21
0000H
Identification of the inserted module

No module inserted
22 and 23
0000H
Number of submodule slots with a discrepancy between the preset

and actual configurations. Because the content is 0000H, no
additional submodule data follow.


1. Reinsert the removed electronic module into the terminal module.
Result:
Status LEDs on the IM151-3 PN interface module:
SF: off
BF: off
ON: lights up
Once the module is inserted, diagnostic data record E002H no longer indicates a
discrepancy between the preset and actual configurations for any slot.
Switching off load voltage on the power module

1. Switch off the load voltage on the PM-E 24 VDC (slot 1).
2. Observe the status LEDs.
IM 151-3 PN interface module:
SF: lights up
Power module:
PWR: off Load voltage on power module not present
I/O modules in the voltage group:
LEDs: light up
3. Evaluate diagnostic data record C00AH.
Hint: Call up the SFB 52 within the OB 81 or OB82 and evaluate the diagnostic telegram.
Byte
Contents
Meaning
Header information
0 and 1
0010H
Data record with channel diagnostics
2 and 3
0012H
18 bytes follow
4 and 5
0100H
Version 1.0
Channel diagnostic data

6 and 7
0001H
Slot 1
8 and 9
0001H
Submodule slot 1
10 and 11
8000H
12
08H
Incoming fault
13
00H
Reserved
14 and 15
8000H
Error on submodule
Submodule diagnostic is pending
Channel diagnostic data record 0 with detailed information on the fault

16 and 17
0000H
18
08H
Arriving fault
Channel 0
19
01H
Data type: 1 Bit
20 and 21
0011H
Sensor or load voltage missing

2-17

1. Switch on the load voltage on the power module again, and reevaluate the diagnostics.
Result:
SF: off
Status LEDs on the power module:
PWR: on
SF: off
Status LEDs on the I/O modules:
LEDs: off
The diagnostic is deleted.
Simulating a wire break in the actuator wiring

1. Remove the cable from terminal 1 on the 2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A; High Feature electronic
module (slot 7)
2. Observe the status LEDs:
IM151-3 PN interface module:
SF: lights up
2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A High Feature electronic module:
1: 1: off output is not activated
3. Evaluate diagnostic data record C00AH:
Byte
Contents
Meaning
Header information
0 and 1
0010H
Data record with channel diagnostics
2 and 3
0012H
18 bytes follow
4 and 5
0100H
Version 1.0
Channel diagnostic data

6 and 7
0007H
Slot 7
8 and 9
0001H
Submodule slot 1
10 and 11
8000H
12
08H
Incoming fault
13
00H
Reserved
14 and 15
8000H
Error on submodule
Submodule diagnostic is pending
Channel diagnostic data record 0 with detailed information on the fault
2-18
16 and 17
0000H
18
48H
Incoming fault at an output
Channel 0
19
01H
Data type: 1 Bit
20 and 21
0006H
Wire break


1. Reattach the cable to the actuator to terminal 1, and reevaluate the diagnostics:
SF: off
Status LEDs on the 2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A High Feature electronic module:
SF: off
1: off/on
The diagnostic is deleted.

2-19

2-20

3.1
3.1
Precisely Modular System
Principle
In describing the ET 200S as a discretely modular system, we mean you can adapt the
ET 200S configuration to meet the exact requirements of your application.
The table below shows you a number of examples of ET 200S distributed I/O system
configurations:
Configuration examples for ET 200S
','&967
','&967
$2867
$,57'67
&28179N+]
6ORW
&RPSOHWLRQ
30(SRZHUPRGXOH
Structure
,QWHUIDFHPRGXOH
Example
ET 200S with
Digital electronic modules
Technology modules
66,
Table 3-1
66,

3-1
3.1 Precisely Modular System
'6
'6
0
a
0
a
6ORW
&RPSOHWLRQ

30'SRZHUPRGXOH
Structure
,QWHUIDFH
PRGXOH
Example
ET 200S with motor starters

'6
6ORW
&RPSOHWLRQ

'6
','&967
','&967
30(SRZHUPRGXOH
30'SRZHUPRGXOH
30(SRZHUPRGXOH
,QWHUIDFHPRGXOH
','&967
ET 200S with
Electronic modules
Motor starters
','&967
a
a
0
a
3-2
0
a

0DQGDWRU\

3.2 ET 200S Power Supply
3.2
3.2
ET 200S Power Supply
Overview
Power is supplied to the ET 200S:
With 24 VDC at the interface module (see table below).
Power supply of the ET 200S
6ORW
&RPSOHWLRQ
66,
&RXQW9N+]
$,57'
$28
,QWHUIDFHPRGXOH
24 VDC
at the interface module
','&9
Configuration (example)
30(SRZHUPRGXOH
Power supply
','&9
Table 3-2
66,
'&9

3-3
3.3 Placing power modules and connecting them to common potential
3.3
3.3
Placing power modules and connecting them to common potential
Placing and Connecting to Common Potential

With ET 200S, you can choose where to position the power modules. Each TM-P terminal
module (for a power module) that you install in the ET 200S opens a new voltage group. All
sensor and load supplies of the downstream electronic modules/motor starters are fed from
this TM-P terminal module (for a power module). If you place an additional TM-P terminal
module after an electronic module/motor starter, you interrupt the voltage buses (P1/P2) and
simultaneously open a new voltage group. This enables sensor and load supplies to be
individually connected to common potential.
AUX(iliary) Rail (AUX 1)

A TM-P terminal module (for a power module) enables you to connect an additional potential
(up to the maximum rated load voltage of the module), which you can apply by means of the
AUX(iliary) bus. You can set the AUX(iliary) bus individually:
As a protective conductor bar
For additionally required voltage
Placing power modules and connecting them to common potential
(0
(0
(0
(0
(0
(0
(0
(0
(0

3-4

Voltage group 1
Supply voltage 2
Voltage group 2
Supply voltage 1
Voltage group 3
Additionally required voltage
Termination
Protective conductor
Power module
P1/P2 power buses
Interface module
AUX bus
Supply voltage 3

3.3 Placing power modules and connecting them to common potential
Warning
If you connect the AUX1 bus to common potential independently of the P1/P2 buses
(different voltages), there is no safe electrical separation between the AUX1 bus and the
P1/P2 buses.
Connecting different potentials to the AUX1 bus

Note
If you apply different potentials to the AUX1 bus within an ET 200S station, you must
separate the voltage groups by means of a power module with the TM-P15S23-A0 terminal
module.

3-5
3.4 Configuration options for the interface modules
3.4
3.4
Configuration options for the interface modules
Which Interface Module Matches Your Application:

Table 3-3
Interface modules and the applications for which they are suited
Applications
Interface module
Connecting the PROFIBUS DP via an RS 485

Transfer rates:
IM151-1 BASIC
interface
9.6; 19.2; 45.45; 93.75; 187.5; 500
kBaud, 1.5 ; 3; 6; 12 Mbit/s
Operation as a DPV0 slave
Direct data exchange
ET 200S Power Supply Bus Length: not relevant
Number of modules: max. 12
interface
ET 200S bus length: max. 2 m (can be
parameterized)
Option handling and status byte for power
modules
Transfer rates:
9.6; 19.2; 45.45; 93.,75; 187.5;
500 kBaud, 1.5 ; 3; 6; 12 Mbit/s
IM151-1 STANDARD
In addition, for 6ES7151-1AA04-0AB0 or higher:

Acyclic data traffic (read/write data record)
Diagnostic interrupts
Hardware interrupts
Insert/remove module interrupts
Firmware update via PROFIBUS DP
Identification data
Connecting the PROFIBUS DP via fiber-optic

cable
parameterized)
modules
Transfer rates:
IM 151-1 FO STANDARD
9.6; 19.2; 45.45; 93.75; 187.5; 500
kBaud, 1.5 ; 12 Mbit/s
In addition, for 6ES7151-1AB03-0AB0 or higher:

Hardware interrupts
Identification data
3-6

Applications
interface
Security-oriented I-slave-slave-communication
via PROFIBUS DP
Use of fail-safe modules
Clocking as of 1.5 Mbps
Firmware update via PROFIBUS DP using HW
Config
Noncyclical data traffic (dataset read/write):
Class 2 services (e.g. firmware update)
Hardware interrupts
Interface module
Transfer rates:
IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE
9.6; 19.2; 45.45; 93.75; 187.5; 500
kBaud, 1.5 ; 3; 6; 12 Mbit/s
after 6ES7151-1BA01-0AB0 additional:

parameterized)
Identification Data
module
Security-oriented I-slave-slave-communication
for fault-secure modules
Operation as DPV1-slave on the Y-switching
Connection of the PROFINET IO via RJ45

connector
Operation as an IO device
Hardware interrupts
ET 200S bus length: max. 2 m
Status byte for power modules
Transfer rate:
100 Mbit/s
Autosensing
IM151-3 PN
after 6ES7151-3AA10-0AB0 additional:

Summary of modules within a byte (packing)
Slot granular replacement value behavior
Data sets for I/O devices

3-7
Rules for setting up a fiber-optic cable network with IM151-1 FO STANDARD

For fiber-optic cable networks containing nodes with integrated fiber-optic cable interfaces,
note the following:
The fiber-optic cable network can only be set up as a line segment.
If you remove the fiber-optic cable from an integrated fiber-optic cable interface, or the
supply voltage to the IM151-1 FO STANDARD interface module fails, all the downstream
nodes are no longer accessible.
Example configuration of a fiber-optic cable network with IM151-1 FO STANDARD

The figure below presents an example of how to set up a fiber-optic cable network with the
ET 200S and the IM151-1 FO STANDARD interface module.
1
S7-400H automation system with IM 467 FO as the DP master
ET 200S Distributed I/O with IM151-1 FO STANDARD
Fiber-optic duplex cable
Rules for setup of a PROFINET network

You can find information about setting up and starting up PROFINET in the PROFINET
system documentation.
3-8

3.5 Configuration options between the terminal modules and electronic modules
3.5
3.5.1
3.5
Configuration options between the terminal modules and electronic

modules
Electronic modules and applications
Use of electronic modules

Table 3-4
Electronic modules and the applications for which they are suitable
Applications
Evaluating switches, proximity

switches (BEROs), sensors, and
encoders
24 VDC
Electronic module
2DI 24 VDC Standard
2DI 24 VDC High Feature
4DI 24 VDC Standard
4DI 24 VDC/SRC Standard
UC 24 to 48V
4DI 24 to 48 VUC High Feature
Evaluating NAMUR sensors

Evaluating wired, unwired
mechanical sensors
4 input channels
4DI NAMUR
Evaluating switches, proximity

switches (BEROs), sensors, and
encoders
120 VAC
2DI 120 VAC Standard
230 VAC
Switching solenoid valves, DC and

AC contactors, indicator lights,
actuators
24 VDC up to 0.5 A
2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A Standard
2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A High Feature

24 VDC up to 2 A
2DO 24 VDC/2 A Standard

2DO 24 VDC/2 A High Feature
120/230 VAC up to 1 A
2DO 24 to 230 VAC/1 A
Up to 120 VDC/230 VAC up to 5 A
2RO NO 24 to 120 VDC/5 A 24 to 230

VAC/5 A
Up to 48 VDC/230 VAC up to 5 A
2RO NO/NC 24 to 48 VDC/5 A 24 to 230

VAC/5 A
Measuring voltages
10 V/ 5 V/ 1 to 5 V
2AI U Standard
Measuring voltages with high

resolution
10 V/ 5 V/ 1 to 5 V
2AI U High Feature
Time-critical measuring of voltages
10V/ 5V/ 2.5V/ 1 to 5V
2AI U High Speed
Measuring currents with two-wire

measuring transducers
4 to 20 mA
2AI I 2WIRE Standard
Time-critical measuring of currents

with two-wire measuring
transducers
4 to 20 mA
Measuring currents with four-wire

measuring transducers
20 mA/ 4 to 20 mA

2AI I 2WIRE High Speed
0 to 20 mA

3-9
Applications
Electronic module
Measuring currents with two-wire,

four-wire measuring transducers
and high resolution
20 mA/ 4 to 20 mA
2AI I 2/4WIRE High Feature
Time-critical measuring of currents

with four-wire measuring
transducers
4 to 20 mA
0 to 20 mA
20 mA
Measuring temperatures with

thermoresistors and resistors
Measuring reference junction
temperatures in thermocouple
applications
Pt100/ Ni100 150 /300 /600
2AI RTD Standard

thermoresistors and resistors
Measuring reference junction
temperatures in thermocouple
applications
High degree of accuracy
Temperature coefficient can be
assigned
Pt100/ Ni100/ Pt 200/ Ni 120/ Pt

500/ Ni 500/ Pt 1000/ Ni 1000 150
/ 300 / 600 / PTC
2AI RTD High Feature

thermocouples and voltages
Type E/N/J/K/L/S/R/B/T
80 mV
2AI TC Standard

thermocouples and voltages
Internal reference junction in
connection with TM-E15S24-AT
Type E/N/J/K/L/S/R/B/T/C
80 mV
2AI TC High Feature
Outputting of voltages
10 V/ 1 to 5 V
2AO U Standard
Outputting of voltages with high

resolution
10 V/ 1 to 5 V
2AO U High Feature
Outputting of currents
20 mA/ 4 to 20 V
2AO I Standard
Outputting of currents with high

resolution
20 mA/ 4 to 20 V
2AO I High Feature
Photoelectric proximity switch
Reflex sensor and diffuse sensor

with IQ-SENSE
4 IQ-SENSE
Counting of pulses, measurement

of frequency, rotational speed, or
period duration by means of
incremental encoders
24 V signals up to 100 kHz
1COUNT 24V/100kHz
5 V signals up to 500 kHz
1COUNT 5V/500kHz
Detecting and evaluating of paths

with absolute encoders (SSI)
Simple positioning tasks
Absolute encoder: 13 Bit/ 21 Bit/ 25 1SSI

Bit
Control of stepper motor power

sections
Positioning of stepper motors
5 V pulses up to 204 kHz
1STEP 5V/204kHz
Outputting of pulses in 4 different

operating modes
Minimum pulse duration of 200 s
2PULSE
Controlled positioning, incremental

encoder 5 V differential signals
Drive controlled by means of digital 1POS INC/Digital

outputs: backwards, forwards, rapid
traverse/creep speed
Drive triggered via analog output

10V
3-10
1POS INC/Analog

Applications
Controlled positioning, SSI encoder
Electronic module
Drive controlled by means of digital 1POS SSI/Digital

outputs: backwards, forwards, rapid
traverse/creep speed
Drive triggered via analog output
10V
1POS SSI/Analog
RS-232C/RS-422/RS-485 serial
data transmission
ASCII and 3964(R) protocol
1SI 3964/ASCII
Protocol mode and USS
1SI Modbus/USS
Reservation of a slot for any

electronic module
Width 15 mm
RESERVE
Width 30 mm
Use of electronic modules on terminal modules

You can combine the terminal modules in the ET 200S configuration.
Table 3-5
TM-P terminal modules and the power modules for which they are suitable
Power modules
Screw terminal
15S23-A1
15S23-A0
15S22-01
30S44-A0
F30S47-F0
Order number
6ES7-193
...4CC20-0AA0
...4CD20-0AA0
...4CE00-0AA0
...4CK20-0AA0
3RK1
903-3AA00
Spring terminal
15C23-A1
15C23-A0
15C22-01
30C44-A0
Order number
6ES7-193
...4CC30-0AA0
...4CD30-0AA0
...4CE10-0AA0
...4CK30-0AA0
---
---
---
Fast Connect
15N23-A1
15N23-A0
15N22-01
Order number
6ES7-193
...4CC70-0AA0
...4CD70-0AA0
...4CE60-0AA0
PM-E 24 VDC
PM E 24-48 VDC
PM-E 24 to 48 VDC/
24 to 230 VAC
PM-E F pm 24 VDC
PROFIsafe*
PM-E F pp 24 VDC
PROFIsafe*
PM-D F 24 VDC
PROFISafe
* see manual ET 200S Fault-Secure Modules

3-11
Table 3-6
TM-E terminal modules and the electronic modules for which they are suitable
Electronic modules
Screw terminal
15S26-A1
15S24-A1
15S24-01
15S23-01
15S24-AT
30S44-01
30S46-A1
Order number
6ES7193
...4CA400AA0
...4CA200AA0
...4CB200AA0
...4CB000AA0
...4CL200AA0
...4CG200AA0
...4CF400AA0
Spring terminal
15C26-A1
15C24-A1
15C24-01
15C23-01
15C24-AT
30C44-01
30C46-A1
Order number
6ES7193
...4CA500AA0
...4CA300AA0
...4CB300AA0
...4CB100AA0
...4CL300AA0
...4CG300AA0
...4CF500AA0
Fast Connect
15N26-A1
15N24-A1
15N24-01
15N23-01
---
---
---
Order number
6ES7193
...4CA800AA0
...4CA700AA0
...4CB700AA0
...4CB600AA0
4DI UC24..48V HF
4DI NAMUR
2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A
Standard
2DO 24-230 VAC/2 A
2RO NO 24 to 120 VDC/5

A 24 to 230 VAC/5 A
2DI 24 VDC Standard

4DI 24 VDC Standard
2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A High

Feature
4DO 24 VDC/0.5 A
Standard
2DO 24 VDC/2 A High
Feature
2RO NO/NC 24 to 48
VDC/5 A 24 to 230 VAC/5
A
2AI U Standard
2AI U High Feature
2AI U High Speed
2AI I 2/4WIRE High

Feature

2AI RTD Standard
3-12

Electronic modules
Screw terminal
15S26-A1
15S24-A1
15S24-01
15S23-01
15S24-AT
30S44-01
30S46-A1
Order number
6ES7193
...4CA400AA0
...4CA200AA0
...4CB200AA0
...4CB000AA0
...4CL200AA0
...4CG200AA0
...4CF400AA0
Spring terminal
15C26-A1
15C24-A1
15C24-01
15C23-01
15C24-AT
30C44-01
30C46-A1
Order number
6ES7193
...4CA500AA0
...4CA300AA0
...4CB300AA0
...4CB100AA0
...4CL300AA0
...4CG300AA0
...4CF500AA0
Fast Connect
15N26-A1
15N24-A1
15N24-01
15N23-01
---
---
---
Order number
6ES7193
...4CA800AA0
...4CA700AA0
...4CB700AA0
...4CB600AA0
2AI TC Standard
2AI TC High Feature

2AO U Standard
2AO U High Feature

2AO I Standard
2AO I High Feature

4 IQ-SENSE
1COUNT 24V/100kHz
1COUNT 5V/500kHz
1SSI
1STEP 5V/204kHz
2PULSE
1POS INC/Digital
1POS SSI/Digital
1POS INC/Analog
1POS SSI/Analog
1SI 3964/ASCII
1SI Modbus/USS
4/8 F-DI 24 VDC

PROFIsafe*
4 F-DO 24 VDC/2 A
PROFIsafe*
RESERVE
(width 15 mm)
RESERVE
(width 30 mm)
* see ET 200S Fail-Safe Modules manual

3-13
3.5.2
Identifying the proper terminal module for a power module
Applicability of power modules

The table below indicates which power modules you can use with the various electronic
modules:
Power modules
Electronic modules
PM-E 24 VDC
Can be used with all electronic modules except the 2DI 120 VAC Standard, 2DI 230 VAC
Standard, and 2DO 120/230 VAC.
PM-E 24 to 48 VDC
Can be used with all electronic modules except the 2DI 120 VAC Standard, 2DI 230 VAC
Standard, and 2DO 120/230 VAC.
PM-E 24 to 48 VDC/ 24 to
230 VAC
Can be used with all electronic modules.
PM-E F pm 24 VDC
PROFIsafe
For the fail-safe modules.
PM-E F pp 24 VDC
PROFIsafe
See ET 200S Distributed I/O System Fail-Safe Modules manual
PM-E F 24 VDC PROFIsafe
3-14

Procedure
Identifying the proper terminal module for a power module for your application:
'R\RX
QHHGDFFHVVDWWKLV
WHUPLQDOPRGXOHWRWKH$8;
EXVE\PHDQVRIWHUPLQDOVIRU
H[DPSOHIRUSURWHFWLYHFRQGXFWRUVRU
DGGLWLRQDOVXSSO\RISRWHQWLDOXSWR
WKHPD[LPXPORDGYROWDJHRIWKH
PRGXOH"
6FUHZW\SHWHUPLQDO
7036
[WHUPLQDOV
1R
6SULQJWHUPLQDO
703&
[WHUPLQDOV
)DVW&RQQHFW
7031
[WHUPLQDOV
<HV
'R\RX
ZDQWWRLQWHUUXSWWKH
$8;EXVZLWKWKLVWHUPLQDO
PRGXOHDQGWKXVRSHQDQHZSRWHQWLDO
JURXS"
6FUHZW\SHWHUPLQDO
7036$
[WHUPLQDOV
1R
6SULQJWHUPLQDO
703&$
[WHUPLQDOV
)DVW&RQQHFW
7031$
[WHUPLQDOV
<HV
6FUHZW\SHWHUPLQDO
7036$
[WHUPLQDOV
'R\RX
ZDQWWRXVHIDLOVDIH
PRGXOHVLQWKLVQHZSRWHQWLDO
JURXS"
1R
6SULQJWHUPLQDO
703&$
[WHUPLQDOV
6SULQJWHUPLQDO
7031$
[WHUPLQDOV
<HV
6FUHZW\SHWHUPLQDO
7036$
[DQG[WHUPLQDOV
<HV
6SULQJWHUPLQDO
703&$
[DQG[WHUPLQDOV
6FUHZW\SHWHUPLQDO
703)6)
[WHUPLQDOV
Figure 3-1
Selecting terminal modules for power modules

3-15
3.5.3
Configuration example: Terminal modules for power modules
Introduction
The table below indicates options for using terminal modules for power modules:
Table 3-7
Terminal modules for power modules
Terminal module
Configuration
TM-P15S22-01
3RWHQWLDOJURXS
TM-P15C22-01
3RWHQWLDOJURXS
%DFNSODQHEXV
3
3
TM-P15N22-01
30 (0 (0 (0 30 (0 (0 (0 (0 (0
$8;
TM-P15S23-A1
TM-P15C23-A1
3RWHQWLDOJURXS
3RWHQWLDOJURXS
%DFNSODQHEXV
3
3
TM-P15N23-A1
30 (0 (0 (0 30 (0 (0 (0 (0 (0
$

$

$

$

$FFHVVE\
PHDQVRI
WHUPLQDOVWR$8;
3-16
$8;
3(

Terminal module
TM-P15S23-A0
Configuration
TM-P15C23-A0
3RWHQWLDOJURXS
3RWHQWLDOJURXS
%DFNSODQHEXV
3
3
TM-P15N23-A0
30 (0 (0 (0 30 (0 (0 (0 (0 (0
$

$

$

$

$8;
$FFHVVE\
PHDQVRIWHUPLQDOV
WR$8;
2SHQQHZSRWHQWLDOJURXSE\PHDQVRI$8;
TM-P30S44-A0
3RWHQWLDOJURXS
TM-P30C44-A0
3RWHQWLDOJURXS
%DFNSODQHEXV
3
3
30
(0

$

$

30
(0

$

$

$8;
$FFHVVE\PHDQV
RIWHUPLQDOVWR
$8;
2SHQQHZSRWHQWLDOJURXSE\PHDQVRI$8;

3-17
Terminal module
TM-PF30S47-F1
Configuration
3RWHQWLDOJURXS
30
(0
3RWHQWLDOJURXS
30
%DFNSODQHEXV
3
3
(0

$8;
3-18

3.5.4
Identifying the proper terminal module for an electronic module
Procedure
'R\RXQHHG
DWHUPLQDOPRGXOHWKDWLV
VXLWDEOHIRUDOOHOHFWURQLFPRGXOHV
ZLGWKPPDQGWKDWSURYLGHVDFFHVVWR
WKH$8;EXVYLDWHUPLQDOV"
6FUHZW\SHWHUPLQDO
70(6$[WHUPLQDOV
<HV
6SULQJWHUPLQDO
70(&$[WHUPLQDOV
)DVW&RQQHFW
70(1$[WHUPLQDOV
1R
'R\RXQHHG
DWHUPLQDOPRGXOHZLWKDFFHVVYLDWHUPLQDOV
WRWKH$8;EXVIRUH[DPSOHIRUSURWHFWLYHFRQGXFWRUVRU
WKHXVHRIDGGLWLRQDOSRWHQWLDOXSWR
WKHPD[LPXPUDWHGORDGYROWDJH
RIWKHPRGXOH"
6FUHZW\SHWHUPLQDO
70(6$[WHUPLQDOV
<HV
)DVW&RQQHFW
70(1$[WHUPLQDOV
1R
'R\RXQHHG
WHUPLQDOVDQG
IXQFWLRQDOLW\RIDPRGXOHHJFRXQWHUPRGXOH
FRQQHFWLRQRIQRQUHTXLUHGVLJQDOOLQHVZLWKWKH
VDPHSRWHQWLDODV33HJFRQQHFWLRQRI
QRQHTXLYDOHQWVHQVRUV"
6SULQJWHUPLQDO
70(&$[WHUPLQDOV
6FUHZW\SHWHUPLQDO
70(6[WHUPLQDOV
70(6[WHUPLQDOV
<HV
6SULQJWHUPLQDO
70(&[WHUPLQDOV
70(&[WHUPLQDOV
)DVW&RQQHFW
70(1[WHUPLQDOV
1R
'R\RX
QHHGDWHUPLQDOPRGXOH
ZLWKDQLQWHUQDOUHIHUHQFHMXQFWLRQ
IRUWHPSHUDWXUHFRPSHQVDWLRQ"
<HV
6FUHZW\SHWHUPLQDO
70(6$7[WHUPLQDOV
6SULQJWHUPLQDO
70(&$7[WHUPLQDOV
1R
'R\RX
QHHGDWHUPLQDOPRGXOH
IRUWKHIDLOVDIHPRGXOHV"
<HV
6SULQJWHUPLQDO
70(6$[WHUPLQDOV
1R
6FUHZW\SHWHUPLQDO
70(6[WHUPLQDOV
1R
1RWIRUHOHFWURQLFPRGXOHVZLWKWHFKQRORJLFDOIXQFWLRQV
Figure 3-2
6FUHZW\SHWHUPLQDO
70(6$[WHUPLQDOV
6SULQJWHUPLQDO
70(&[WHUPLQDOV
)DVW&RQQHFW
70(1[WHUPLQDOV
Selecting terminal modules for electronic modules

3-19
3.5.5
Configuration example: Terminal modules for electronic modules
Introduction
The table below indicates options for using terminal modules for electronic modules:
Table 3-8
Terminal modules for electronic modules
Terminal modules
Configuration
TM-E15S26-A1
TM-E15C26-A1
3RWHQWLDOJURXS
3RWHQWLDOJURXS
TM-E15N26-A1
%DFNSODQHEXV
3
3
30 (0 (0 (0 30 (0 (0 (0 (0 (0

$

$

$

$

$

$

$

$

$8;
$FFHVVYLDWHUPLQDOVWR$8;
TM-E15S24-A1
TM-E15C24-A1
3RWHQWLDOJURXS
3RWHQWLDOJURXS
%DFNSODQHEXV
3
3
TM-E15N24-A1
30
(0 (0 (0 30
(0 (0 (0 (0 (0

$

$ $

$ $

$

$

$ $

$ $

$ $

$ $

$

$8;
$FFHVVE\PHDQVRIWHUPLQDOVWR$8;
3-20

Terminal modules
Configuration
TM-E15S24-01
TM-E15C24-01
3RWHQWLDOJURXS
3RWHQWLDOJURXS
%DFNSODQHEXV
3
3
TM-E15N24-01
30 (0 (0 (0 30 (0 (0 (0 (0 (0

$8;
TM-E15S23-01
TM-E15C23-01
3RWHQWLDOJURXS
3RWHQWLDOJURXS
%DFNSODQHEXV
3
3
TM-E15N23-01
30
(0 (0 (0 30
(0 (0 (0 (0 (0

$8;
TM-E15S24-AT
TM-E15C24-AT
3RWHQWLDOJURXS
3RWHQWLDOJURXS
%DFNSODQHEXV
3
3
30 (0 (0 (0 30 (0 (0 (0 (0 (0

$8;

3-21
Terminal modules
Configuration
TM-E30S44-01
TM-E30C44-01
3RWHQWLDOJURXS
3RWHQWLDOJURXS
%DFNSODQHEXV
3
3
30
(0
(0 30
(0
(0

$8;
TM-E30S46-A1
TM-E30C46-A1
3RWHQWLDOJURXS
%DFNSODQHEXV
3
3
30
(0

$

$

(0

$ $ $

$$ $

3-22
3RWHQWLDOJURXS
30
(0

$

$

(0

$ $ $

$ $ $

$8;

3.6 Direct data exchange on PROFIBUS DP
3.6
3.6
Direct data exchange on PROFIBUS DP
Introduction
The ET 200S can be used as the sender (publisher) for direct data exchange
(data exchange broadcast). The DP master you are using must, of course, also support
direct data exchange. You will find information on this in the description of the DP master.
Principle
Direct data exchange (data exchange broadcast) is characterized by the fact that
PROFIBUS DP nodes "listen in" on which data a DP slave is returning to its DP master. This
mechanism enables the node that is "listening in" (receiver / subscriber) to directly access
changes to the input data of remote DP slaves.
During configuration in STEP 7, you use the respective I/O input addresses to specify the
address area of the receiver where the sender's data are to be placed.
Example: Direct data exchange with IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE

The figure below gives an example of the direct data exchange relationships you can
configure with an ET 200S as the sender and the nodes that can "listen in" as possible
receivers.
2
1
3
9
6
8
8
8
7
CPU 31x-2
DP slave
DP master system 1
CPU 31x-2 as DP slave
CPU 31x-2 as DP master 1
ET 200S
DP master system 2
PROFIBUS
CPU 31x-2 as DP master 2

3-23
3.6 Direct data exchange on PROFIBUS DP
Note
The IM 151-1 High Feature differentiates the Security-oriented I-slave-slave-communication
via PROFIBUS DP for the fault-secure modules after 6ES7151-1BA01-0AB0. You can find
the description of this function in the manual S7 Distributed Safety Configuration and
Programming.
3-24

3.7 Isochronous operation on PROFIBUS DP
3.7
3.7.1
3.7
Isochronous operation on PROFIBUS DP
Cycle Synchronization on the PROFIBUS DP - Basics
Features
Reproducible response times (i.e., of equal length) are achieved in SIMATIC with an
equidistant DP bus cycle, synchronization of the user program on the DP bus cycle, and the
isochronous transfer of I/O data to the I/O modules. The isochronous portions of the user
program are processed synchronously with the DP bus cycle by means of synchronous cycle
interrupts (OB61 to OB64). The I/O data are transferred at defined and constant
(isochronous) intervals via the backplane bus of the DP slave to the I/O modules and
switched through isochronously up to the "terminal."
In other words, isochronous operation results in the synchronization of all of the hitherto
free-running single cycles. These include the user program in the CPU, the DP cycle on the
PROFIBUS subnet, the cycle in the DP slave, and, finally, the cycle in the I/O modules of the
DP slaves.
The maximum jitter for the IM151-1 amounts to 10 s. The jitter of the periphery devices of
the ET 200S cannot be accounted for due to the existing diversity.
Requirements
The cycle synchronization is possible with the IM 151-1 HIGH FEATURE with modules,
that support cycle synchronization. You can see whether a module supports cycle
synchronization in the device description or HW config. Other modules in the ET 200S
setup are possible. However, these do not support cycle synchronization.
The transmission rate of the PROFIBUS DP is at least 1.5 Mbps (shorter equidistance
times can be achieved with higher transmission rates).
The maximum equidistance cycle is 32 ms.
The equidistance master (Class 1) must be a class 1 DP master. In other words, a
programming device or PC cannot be an equidistance master.
In equidistant operation, only one DP master (Class 1) can be active on the
PROFIBUS DP. Programming devices or PCs (Class 2) can also be connected.
The cycle synchronization can only then be activated on the ET 200S if the equidistant
bus cycle on the DP master system was activated.
Isochronous operation (equidistance) of the ET 200S is not guaranteed during removal or
insertion of electronic modules.
If asynchronous results like "Switch on power module" or "Read/Write data set" are to
cause no cycle injury, a sufficiently large gap between To and Ti must be ensured, i.e.
Tdp is to be increased.
In equidistant operation, the ET 200S requires a startup time of approximately 150 DP
cycles to ensure isochronous operation right through to the terminals.
The bus length must amount to less than 1 m.

3-25
Optimizing the equidistant time

The longest delays for the digital input/output modules (assignable in the case of inputs)
are the critical factor in determining the length of the equidistant DP cycle. Hint: Pay
attention to equal input delay of all digital modules in the ET 200S-Station for cycle
synchronization.
The shorter the input delays you set for the HIGH FEATURE digital input modules, the
shorter the equidistance times that can be achieved. Hint: For the digital input modules
HIGH FEATURE, set at least one input delay of 0.1 ms.
The processing time of the modules should be taken into account in the case of modules
that support isochronous operation.
The minimum equidistance time is dependent on the number of modules in the ET 200S.
Hint: Use at least 4-channel digital input modules HIGH FEATURE to reduce the number
of modules.
Lower equidistance times can be achieved if you distribute the modules of an ET 200S
(with a high module count) between two ET 200S stations.
The equidistance time is reduced if you increase the transmission rate.
Hint: Set the highest possible baud rate.
3.7.2
Parameterizing Cycle Synchronization
Procedure
1. CPU settings:
"Object properties" of the CPU > Register "Cycle synchronization alarms"
CPU - Set cycle synchronization alarm
Select the DP master system used
Select the desired subprocess image
Recommended delay time:
accept the standard settings of the default value.
Memory
Interrupts
General
Startup
Priority
OB 61:
25
Time Interrupts
Cyclic Interrupts
Clock-Synchr. Interrupts
Diagnostics / Clock Protection
Cycle / Clock Flag
DP MasterSystem No.
Subprocess Image(s)
(e.g.: 1.4)
Remanence
Time Delay
3.000
ms
Default
Figure 3-3
3-26
Dialog box cycle synchronization alarms

2. DP master system settings:
DP master "Object properties" > "General" tab > "Properties" button > "Parameter" tab >
"Properties" button > "Network settings" tab > "Options" button
Activate equidistance on the DP master system
Set the length of the equidistance DP cycle (max. 32 ms)
Set "Times Ti and To for all DP slaves equal" (causes a synchronization of the I/O
data of the various DP slaves)
Times Ti and To can be set separately.
Recommendation: accept the standard settings Ti and To.
Equidistance
Network Station
Cables
Activate equidistant bus cycle

Recalculate
Optimize DP cycle (and poss. Ti, To):

Number of PGs/OPs/TDs etc. on PROFIBUS
Configured:
Total:
Graduation:
Equidistant DP cycle:
8.000
ms
0.125
ms
Details ...
(min = 6.000 ms; max. = 32.000 ms)

Synchronization of Slaves
Times Ti an To identical for all slaves (if not: setting in Properties - Slaves)
Graduation:
Time Ti (read in process values):
(min = 3.4375 ms; max = 3.5625 ms)
3.5000
ms
0.0625
ms
Graduation:
Time To (output process values):
(min = 0.8125 ms; max = 3.5625 ms)
Figure 3-4
3.5000
ms
0.0625
ms
Dialog box options
Note
The "recalculate" button enables you to recalculate a value for the equidistant DP cycle
from STEP 7 that takes the current PROFIBUS DP configuration into account. This value
is then automatically entered in the fields "Equidistant DP cycle", Time Ti (...)" and "Time
To (...)".

3-27
3. DP slave settings:
DP slave "Object properties" > "Cycle synchronization" tab
Activate "Synchronize DP slave to equidistant DP cycle".
Enter times Ti and To (if "Times Ti and To for all DP slave equal" was not set on the
DP master). Recommendation: Accept the standard settings for Ti and To.
Select the devices to be configured and assign in the "Addresses" tab the subprocess
image defined in the CPU.
3URSHUWLHV'3VODYH
*HQHUDO
LQIRUPDWLRQ
6ODYHSDUDPHWHUV
&ORFNLQJ
6\QFKURQL]H'3VODYHWRHTXLGLVWDQW'3F\FOHWKHVDPH7L7RIRUDOOVODYHV
7LPH7LUHDGSURFHVVYDOXHV
PLQ PVPD[ PV

PV 7LPHEDVH
PV
7LPH7LUHDGSURFHVVYDOXHV
PLQ PVPD[ PV

PV 7LPHEDVH
PV
(TXLGLVWDQW'3F\FOH
PLQ PVPD[ PV

PV
Figure 3-5
DP slave properties dialog box
Note
If you click on "Cycle synchronization" in the "Edit" menu, a configuration overview of the
cycle synchronized devices is displayed.
4. Create user program:

Creation of the OB 61.
At the start of the OB 61, the SFC 126 has to call up the inputs to update the
subprocess image.
At the end of the OB 61, the SFC 127 has to call up the outputs to update the
subprocess image.
The subprocess image to be used is the one in the CPU parameterized subprocess
image ("Cycle synchronization alarms" tab).
3-28

3.7.3
Fault correction during isochronous operation on PROFIBUS DP
Diagnostics
Event
Cause
Action
Station failure of the ET 200S
Faulty isochronous operation

(10 or more clock failures or
clock violations).
Check the parameter

assignment.
The obtainable equidistance

times are too long.
The input delays of the HIGH

FEATURE digital input modules
are not optimally set.
Decrease the input delay of the

HIGH FEATURE digital input
modules.
No isochronous signal
detection/output
Wrong process image partition

used.
Check whether the same

process image partition was
used in the user program of
OB61 (or up to OB64) when
SFCs 126/127 are called and in
the configuration of the DP
master/DP slave.
Neg. RET_VAL in the case of

SFCs 126/127
Further information
You can find further information to the cycle synchronization in the STEP 7 Online Help and
in the manual Cycle synchronicity.

3-29
3.8 Option handling on PROFIBUS DP
3.8
3.8.1
3.8
Option handling on PROFIBUS DP
Basic principles of option handling on PROFIBUS DP
Principle
Option handling enables you to set up the ET 200S for future expansions (options). Option
handling means that you install, wire, configure, and program the planned maximum
configuration of the ET 200S. The electronic modules required for this are merely replaced
with inexpensive RESERVE modules, which you can easily replace later with the planned
electronic modules.
This means that the ET 200S can be completely prewired ("master cabling") because the
RESERVE module is not connected to the terminals of the terminal module and therefore is
not connected to the process.
The RESERVE modules for future expansion at the right-hand end of the station are
optional. In this case, preparatory installation and wiring are possible but not required.
See also
Removing and inserting electronic modules (Page 5-28)
3.8.2
Principle of operation of option handling
Principle
With option handling, the configuration of slots 2 to 63 of the ET 200S is checked. If the
check is enabled for a slot, the RESERVE module (option) or a configured electronic module
can occupy this slot without a diagnostic being signaled. If the check is disabled, only the
configured electronic module can be located in this slot. Any other module will trigger a
diagnostic. You can also control the configuration of slots 2 to 63 and monitor the
configuration of slots 1 to 63 using the control and feedback interface in the process input
image (PII) and process output image (PIQ).
3-30

7KHVHWWLQJRIWKHSDUDPHWHU2SHUDWLRQDW3UHVHW!$FWXDO
FRQILJXUDWLRQLVQRWUHOHYDQWIRUWKHSURFHVVLOOXVWUDWHG
,VWKHFRQILJXUHG
HOHFWURQLFPRGXOHLQVHUWHG"
<HV
1RHUURU
%LWLQ3,,
1R
%LWLQ3,,
6ORW
HQDEOHGFRQILJXUDWLRQLQ
+:&21),*"
1R
3UHVHW!DFWXDOFRQILJXUDWLRQ
'LDJQRVLVLVUHSRUWHG
<HV
6ORW
HQDEOHGLQ3,4
ELWLQ3,4 "
1R
<HV
,VWKH
5(6(59(PRGXOHLQVHUWHG
RULVWKHUHDQHPSW\VORWDWWKHULJKW
KDQGHQGRIWKH
(76VWDWLRQ"
1R
,QFRUUHFWPRGXOH
5HPRYHGPRGXOH
<HV
1RHUURU
1RGLDJQRVLV
Figure 3-6
3,, SURFHVVLQSXWLPDJH
3,4 SURFHVVRXWSXWLPDJH
Principle of operation of option handling

3-31
3.8.3
Requirements for option handling
Requirements
The following is required for option handling:
Interface module IM 151-1 STANDARD (after 6ES7151-1AA03-0AB0), IM 151-1 FO
STANDARD (after 6ES7151-1AB02-0AB0) or IM 151-1 HIGH FEATURE
(6ES7151-1BA01-0AB0).
For configuration, the GSD file (see table below)
DPV0 operation
SI02806A.GSx
DPV0/DPV1 operation
SI02806B.GSx
SI03806A.GSx
SI03806B.GSx
As of 07/2003 (V1.0 or higher)

6ES7151-1AA03-0AB0
DPV0/DPV1
operation
SI0280E0.GSx
after date 08/2005
(after V2.0)
6ES7151-1AB02-0AB0
6ES7151-1AA04-0AB0
6ES7151-1AB03-0AB0
6ES7151-1BA01-0AB0
Note
You do not require a GSD file for option handling in STEP 7 if you are using both of the
following:
IM 151-1 STANDARD / FO
after STEP 7 V5.3 Service Pack 3 and
The current HW update for the interface and power modules. Link the HW Update in
the HW Config via the "Tools > install HW updates" menu command. You can
download the HW updates on the Internet at Customer Support.
IM 151-1 HIGH FEATURE
after STEP 7 V5.3 Service Pack 3
You can find the options handling description in the STEP 7 Online Help.
PM-E 24 to 48 VDC or PM-E 24 to 48 VDC/24 to 230 VAC power module

One of these power modules must be included in the configuration at least once.
RESERVE modules as a substitute for the future electronic modules
Note
If the actual configuration of an ET 200S station does not match the preset configuration,
a diagnostic is signaled if the check for the relevant slots is not enabled for option
handling.
3-32

3.8.4
Example: Use of RESERVE modules
30('&9
','&9
','&9
$,8
30('&9
'2
'2
'2
'2
30('&9
',
',
',
'2
'2
'2
'2
%XVWHUPLQDWLRQ
)XWXUHSODQQHG
PD[LPXP
FRQILJXUDWLRQ
RIWKH(7
6
,067$1'$5'
Configuration variants
VWYHUVLRQ
3UHSDUDWLRQ
XVLQJ
5(6(59(
PRGXOHVDQG
SUHZLULQJ
25
2SWLRQ
%DVLF
FRQILJ
2SWLRQ
30('&9
','&9
','&9
$,8
30('&9
5(6(59(
5(6(59(
5(6(59(
5(6(59(
30('&9
',
',
',
5(6(59(
5(6(59(
5(6(59(
5(6(59(
%XVWHUPLQDWLRQ
,067$1'$5'
%DVLFFRQILJ
7KLVVHWXS
PXVWEH
FRQILJXUHG
+:&21),*
&20
352),%86
6HQVRUVDFWXDWRUV
<RXPXVWLQVWDOO
DQGZLUHWKLV
FRQILJXUDWLRQ
25
30('&9
','&9
','&9
$,8
30('&9
5(6(59(
5(6(59(
5(6(59(
5(6(59(
30('&9
',
',
',
%XVWHUPLQDWLRQ
3UHSDUDWLRQ
XVLQJ
5(6(59(
PRGXOHVDQG
SUHZLULQJ7KH
5(6(59(
PRGXOHVDWWKH
ULJKWKDQGHQG
RIWKHVWDWLRQ
DUHQRWSUHVHQW
,067$1'$5'
QGYHUVLRQ
<RXPXVWLQVWDOO
DQGZLUHWKLV
FRQILJXUDWLRQ
6HQVRUVDFWXDWRUV
Figure 3-7
Example of the use of the RESERVE modules

3-33
3.8.5
Assigning parameters for option handling
Introduction
In STEP 7 or COM PROFIBUS, you parameterize the desired electronic module that you
would like to use for future applications e.g. 4DI HF on the RESERVE module slots
(or the expansions on the right end of the station):
Drag the electronic module to the configuration table
Assign the parameters
Procedure
1. Drag a PM-E 24 to 48 VDC or PM-E 24 to 48 VDC/24 to 230 VAC power module with one
of the following entries to the configuration table:
...O (option handling) or
...SO (status byte + option handling)
Note
Entry of the power module with the ending ...O or ...SO can only be made once in the
ET 200S configuration!
2. Assign parameters to the interface module as follows:

Interface module
Parameters
Setting
Description
IM 151-1
STANDARD
Option handling,
general
Enable
Option handling is enabled for the

entire ET 200S.
or
Option handling: Slot

2 to 63
Enable (all slots on

which RESERVE
modules can be
located)
There are RESERVE modules or

a configured electronic module on
the slot. A diagnostic is not
signaled.
IM 151-1 FO
STANDARD
or
IM 151-1 HIGH
FEATURE
Note
For the parameterization "Operation for set < > actual installation" blocked,
The ET 200S does not start up if a module is missing or if an incorrect module is inserted.
The diagnostic "No module" or "Incorrect module" is signaled.
The ET 200S starts up if you enable option handling for the slot of an inserted RESERVE
module. A diagnostic is not signaled.
3-34

Substitute values
If you have assigned an electronic module for the RESERVE module, the following substitute
values are signaled:
Digital input modules: 0
Analog input modules: 7FFFH
Function module: 0
3.8.6
Controlling and monitoring options
Introduction
You can use the control interface (PIQ) and feedback interface (PII) to control and monitor
options by means of the user program.
Recommendation: Before you work with the optional enhancements of the ET 200S, check
via the feedback interface (see table further below) whether all configured electronic
modules are plugged in.
Note
The use of SFCs 14/15 enables consistent accesses to the control and feedback interface.
Principle
The control and feedback interface is in the process output and input image of the PM-E 24
to 48 VDC or PM-E 24 to 48 VDC/24 to 230 VAC power modules. It is only available if you
have selected the entries ending in ...O or ...SO for the relevant power module in the
configuration software.
There is one bit for each slot of the electronic or RESERVE modules of the ET 200S.
Control interface: Slot 2 to 63
Feedback interface: Slot 1 to 63

,%4%[
,%4%[
,%4%[

,%4%[
,%4%[
,%4%[
,%4%[
,%4%[

%LWQR

1RWDSSOLFDEOH
Figure 3-8
Control interface (PIQ) and feedback interface (PII)

3-35
Control interface PIQ (AB x to AB x+7):

You can use these bytes (8 bytes) to control the diagnostic behavior of the slots that you
enabled for option handling in HW Config.
Only the bits of the slots you enabled for option handling during parameter assignment are
evaluated (they are marked with "0").
Table 3-9
Slot
2 to 63
Control interface
Value of the bit
Response
Parameter assignment for option handling applies. RESERVE

modules are permitted:
The station is engaged in data exchange.
A diagnostic is not signaled.
The SF LED on the interface module is off.
Parameter assignment for option handling is cancelled.

RESERVE modules are not accepted on this slot:
The diagnostic "Incorrect module" is signaled.
The SF LED on the interface module lights up.
Feedback interface PII (EB x to EB x+7):

The feedback interface (8 bytes) tells you which module is actually on each slot.
All slots are reported. This includes slots that you have not enabled for option handling.
Table 3-10
Slot
1 to 63
3-36
Feedback interface
Value of the bit
Response
The RESERVE module, an incorrect module, or a removed

module is on the slot.
The configured module is on the slot.

3.8.7
Fault correction during option handling

Table 3-11

Event
ET 200S does not start up;

configuration error
Cause
Action
There are multiple entries of

power modules ending in ...O or
...SO in the ET 200S
configuration.
Check and correct the

configuration in HW Config.
There is no power module entry

ending in ...O or ...SO in the
ET 200S configuration.
Use a power module entry

ending in ...O or ...SO in HW
Config.

3-37
3.9 Identification data
3.9
3.9
Identification data
Definition
Identification data are data that are stored in a module for assisting the user in:
Checking the system configuration
Locating hardware changes in a system
Correcting errors in a system
Identification data enable modules to be uniquely identified online. For IM151-STANDARD
(after 6ES7151-AA04-AB0), IM151- FO STANDARD (after 6ES7151-AB03-AB0) and
IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE (after 6ES7151-1BA01-0AB0), this data is available on the
ET 200S.
In STEP 7, the identification data are displayed in the "Module Information - IM 151" and
"Properties - DP Slave" tabs (see STEP 7 online help).
Reading of identification data

The user can access particular identification data with Read data record. This requires a
two-stage access:
1. A data record containing the associated data record numbers for the various indices is
stored in data record 248 (see table below).
Table 3-12
Structure of DS 248 for ET 200S

Content
Length (bytes)
Coding (hex)
Header information
ID of content directory
00 01
Index of content directory
00 00
Length of subsequent blocks in bytes
00 08
Number of blocks
00 05
SSL
Associated data record number
Length of data record
Index
2
2
2
2
F1 11
00 E7
00 40
00 01
SSL
Index
2
2
2
2
F1 11
00 E8
00 40
00 02
SSL
Index
2
2
2
2
F1 11
00 E9
00 40
00 03
SSL
Index
2
2
2
2
F1 11
00 EA
00 40
00 04
Block information for identification data
8-bytes of block information for additional data record objects

: 48
3-38

1. The portion of the identification data assigned to the respective index is located under the
associated data record number (see table on identification data below).
All data records with identification data have a length of 64 bytes.
The data records are structured according to the principle shown in the table below.
Table 3-13
Basic structure of data records with identification data

Content
Length (bytes)
Coding (hex)
Header information
SSL
F1 11
Index
00 0x
Length of identification data
00 38
Number of blocks with identification data
00 01
Index
00 0x
Identification data for the respective index (see table

below)
54
Identification data
The identification data are assigned to the indices corresponding to the table below.
The data structures in data records 231 to 234 correspond to the specifications of
PROFIBUS Guideline - Order No. 3.502, Version 1.1, May 2003.
Table 3-14
Identification data
Identification data
Access
Default setting
Explanation
Identification data 0: Index 1 (data record 231)

MANUFACTUREROR_ID
Read (2 bytes)
2A hex (=42 dec)
The name of the manufacturer is stored

here. (42 dec = SIEMENS AG)
ORDER_ID
Read (20 bytes)
Dependent on the
module
Order number of the module
SERIAL_NUMBER
Read (16 bytes)
Not relevant
HARDWARE_REVISION
Read (2 bytes)
Not relevant
SWSOFTWARE_REVISION
Read (4 bytes)
Firmware version
Provides information on the firmware

version of the module.
REVISIONS_COUNTER
Read (2 bytes)
Provides information on the assigned

changes on the module.
PROFILE_ID
Read (2 bytes)
F600 hex
Generic device
PROFILE_SPECIFIC_
TYPE
Read (2 bytes)
0005 hex
On interface modules
IM_VERSION
Read (2 bytes)
0101 hex
Provides information on the version of the

identification data (0101 hex = Version 1.1)
IM_SUPPORTED
Read (2 bytes)
000E hex
Provides information on the available

identification data (Index 2 to 4)
Maintenance Data 1: Index 2 (data record 232)

TAG_FUNCTION
Read/write (32
bytes)
Enter a system-wide unique identifier for

the module here.
TAG_LOCATION
Read/write (22
bytes)
Enter the installation location of the module

here.

3-39
Identification data
Access
Default setting
Explanation
Maintenance Data 2: Index 3 (Data set 233)

INSTALLATION_DATE
Read/write (16
bytes)
Enter the installation date of the module

here.
RESERVED
Read/write (38
bytes)
Reserved
Enter a comment on the module here.
Maintenance Data 3: Index 4 (Data set 234)

DESCRIPTOR
3-40
Read/write (54
bytes)

3.10 Use of the ET 200S in a redundant system
3.10
3.10
Use of the ET 200S in a redundant system
Properties
The ET 200S is integrated in a redundant DP system as DPV0 or DPV1 slave via the Y
switching.
Requirements
DPV0
DPV1
Possible with all interface modules

after STEP 7 V5.3 SP3
GSD file
IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE after

(6ES7151-1BA01-0AB0)
STEP 7 V5.3 SP3
5HGXQGDQW'3V\VWHP
5HGXQGDQW352),%86'3
</,1.
,0
<VZLWFKLQJ
(70
(70
<OLQH
(76
Figure 3-9
ET 200S and the Y switching

3-41
3.10 Use of the ET 200S in a redundant system
Procedure
1. Configuration of the redundant DP system (redundant DP master, PROFIBUS DP,
slaves)
2. Configure the ET 200S with STEP 7
Reference
You can find further information in the documentation for Y switching (manual or product
information).
3-42

3.11 Limitations on the number of modules that can be connected/maximum configuration
3.11
3.11
Limitations on the number of modules that can be

connected/maximum configuration
Principle
Number of modules:
ET 200S with IM151-1 BASIC: max. 12 modules.
ET 200S with IM151-1 STANDARD; IM151-1 FO STANDARD; IM151-1 HIGH
FEATURE: max. 63 modules.
Note
Reduction of the maximum number of connectable peripheral modules
For every utilized 2D0 AC24 230V module in an ET 200S, the number of connectable
peripheral modules in this station is reduced by one module.
This applies to IM151-1 STANDARD, IM151-1 FO STANDARD and IM151-1 HIGH
FEATURE.
This includes power modules, electronic modules, RESERVE modules, and motor
starters.
Bus length of the ET 200S:
max. 2 m: for IM151-1 BASIC.
max. 2 m (can be parameterized): for IM151-1 STANDARD; IM151-1 FO STANDARD;
IM 151-1 HIGH FEATURE
Parameter length:
for PROFIBUS DP: Independent from the DP master used (max. 244 byte)
For IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE after 6ES7151-1BA01-0AB0 the possibility exists for
operation on a S7-CPU in configuration after STEP 7 V5.3 SP3 , IM151-1 HIGH
FEATURE after 6ES7151-1BA01-0AB0 to operate with more that 244 byte parameter
data. A configuration per GSD file does not offer this possibility. Also see the note
below.
for PROFINET IO: not relevant for maximum upgrade.

3-43
Table 3-15
Parameter length in bytes

Module
Parameter length
Module
Parameter length
IM151-1 BASIC
19 bytes
4 bytes
IM151-1 STANDARD
27 bytes
7 bytes
27 bytes
12 byte
(4 byte 3)
4 bytes
IM151-1 FO STANDARD
IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE 6
56 byte 1
PM-E 24 VDC
3 bytes
PM-E 24 to 48 VDC
PM-E 24 to 48 VDC/24 to
230 VAC
12 byte
(4 byte 4)
3 bytes
2AI RTD Standard
4 bytes
3 bytes
7 byte
(4 byte 2)
2DI 24 VDC Standard
1 byte
2AI TC Standard
4 bytes
2AI TC High Feature
4DI 24 VDC Standard

4DI NAMUR
12 bytes
2AO U Standard
3 bytes
2AO U High Feature
3 bytes
2AO I Standard
2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A High

Feature
3 bytes
2AO I High Feature
1 byte
1COUNT 24V/100kHz
1COUNT 5V/500kHz
16 bytes
2DO 24 VDC/2 A High

Feature
3 bytes
1SSI
8 bytes
1 byte
1STEP 5V/204kHz
7 bytes
2PULSE
16 bytes
16 bytes

2DO 24 to 230 VAC/1 A
3 bytes
1POS INC/Digital
2RO NO 24 to 120 VDC/5 A

24 to 230 VAC/5 A
3 bytes
1POS SSI/Digital
7 bytes
7 bytes
16 bytes
1POS INC/Analog
1POS SSI/Analog
2AI U Standard
4 bytes
1SI 3964/ASCII
2AI U High Feature
4/8 bytes
1SI Modbus/USS
2AI U High Speed
12 byte
(4 byte 5)
4 IQ-SENSE
16 bytes
RESERVE
---
Motor starter STANDARD
3 bytes
Motor starter HIGH

FEATURE
12 bytes
1) Cycle synchronization is activated

2) for application as 2AI RTD ST
3) for application as 6ES7134-4GB50-0AB0
4) for application as 6ES7134-4FB50-0AB0
5) for application as 6ES7134-4GB60-0AB0
6) is not relevant after 6ES7151-1BA01-0AB0
3-44

Note
With the IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE (6ES7151-1BA01-0AB0) you have the possibility to
configure more than 244 byte parameter data in STEP 7 in DPV1 mode. Due to the higher
parameter length, an increase in the startup time is to be expected.
Address space:
On PROFIBUS DP (depends on the DP master)
The IM151-1 BASIC interface module supports a maximum of 88 input bytes or 88
output bytes.
Interface module IM151-1 STANDARD and IM151-1 FO STANDARD supported
A maximum of 128 input bytes or 128 output bytes (6ES7151-1AA03-0AB0 or higher
and 6ES7151-1AB02-0AB0 or higher)
A maximum of 244 input bytes or 244 output bytes (6ES7151-1AA04-0AB0 or higher
and 6ES7151-1AB03-0AB0 or higher)
The IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE interface module supports a maximum of 244 input
bytes or 244 output bytes.
On PROFINET IO
The IM151-3 PN interface module supports a maximum of 256 input bytes and 256
output bytes.
Power module: Maximum expansion per potential group
Table 3-16
Maximum configuration per voltage group
Power modules
PM-E 24 VDC power
module
Maximum
current-carrying capacity
10 A
PM-E 24 to 48 VDC power 10 A

module
PM-E 24 to 48 VDC/24 to
230 VAC power module
10A (DC 24V)

8A (AC 120/230V)

Connectable modules
The number of modules that can be
connected depends on the total current of all
the modules in this voltage group. This must
not exceed 10 A in total. The total current is
governed in large part by the digital output
modules:
2DO 24-230 VAC/2 A
3-45
Number of identifiers: per module one identifier (max. 63 identifiers)
You can use the ET 200S with DP masters with diagnostic frame lengths of 32 bytes
because the length of the diagnostic frame can be assigned for all of the interface
modules.
See also
Structure of the slave diagnostics (Page 6-32)
Parameters for the IM151-1 BASIC interface module (Page 8-1)
IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE (Page 8-2)
Parameters for the IM151-3 PN interface module (Page 8-3)
3-46

Installation
4.1
4.1
Basic principles of installation

Warning
Open components
Modules of an ET 200S are open components. That is, you must set up the ET 200S in
housings, cabinets, or electrical rooms that are accessible only by means of a key or tool.
Only trained and authorized personnel should be allowed access to the housings, cabinets,
or electrical rooms.
Simple installation
The ET 200S distributed I/O system is designed for simple installation.
Installation rules
The ET 200S distributed I/O system starts with an interface module.
A power module comes after the interface module or at the beginning of each voltage
group.
After a power module come digital, analog, technology, or RESERVE modules.
The ET 200S distributed I/O system ends with the terminating module.
The maximum configuration of the distributed I/O system is as follows:
IM151-1 BASIC: max. 13 modules (including interface module). The bus length is not
relevant.
IM151-1 STANDARD / IM151-1 FO STANDARD / IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE: max. 64
modules (including interface module) or max 2 m bus length.
Mounting position
Preferably, the ET 200S is mounted horizontally on a vertical wall. Any other installation
position is also possible; however, there are limitations with regard to ambient temperature.

4-1
Installation
4.1 Basic principles of installation
Mounting rail
The distributed I/O system ET 200S is installed on a galvanized profile rail according to
EN 50022 (35 x 7.5 mm or 35 x 15 mm).
Note
If the ET 200S distributed I/O system is exposed to elevated vibratory and shock loads, we
recommend that you screw the rail to the mounting surface at intervals of approximately 200
mm.
To prevent the ET 200S distributed I/O system from slipping sideways, we recommend that
you apply a mechanical hold-down (for example, with grounding terminal, 8WA2 011-1PH20)
at both ends of the device.
If you install the rail on grounded, zinc-plated mounting plates, there is no need to ground
the rail separately.
Mounting dimensions
Table 4-1
Mounting dimensions
Dimensions
4-2
Mounting
width
Interface module: 45 mm
Terminal module with electronics modules: 15 mm or 30 mm
Terminator module: 7.5 mm
Mounting
height
Interface module: 119.5 mm

Electronic module with terminal module:
3-stepped with screw or spring clamp: 119.5 mm
3-stepped with Fast Connect: 143 mm
3-stepped with screw or spring clamp: 151.5 mm
3-stepped with Fast Connect and shielding plate: 175 mm
4-stepped with screw or spring clamp: 132 mm
4-stepped with screw or spring clamp and shielding plate: 164 mm
6-stepped with screw or spring clamp: 157 mm
6-stepped with screw or spring clamp and shielding plate: 189 mm
7-stepped with screw clamp: 196.5 mm
Mounting
depth
ET 200S on profile rail with 7.5 mm depth: 75 mm

ET 200S on profile rail with 15 mm depth: 82.5 mm

Installation
4.1 Basic principles of installation
Minimum clearances for mounting, wiring, and heat dissipation

When the ET 200S is installed in an enclosure, the distance to the enclosure cover or front
door should be at least 2 mm.
PP
30 (0 (0 (0 30
(0 (0 (0
PP
PP
PP
PP
Figure 4-1
PP
PP
Minimum clearances
Note
Compatibility to the successor device of a IM151-3 PN (6ES7151-3AA10-0AB0)
Allow for an additional 15 mm space on the left side for the installation in the IM151-3 PN
(6ES7151-3AA10-0AB0). You device is thus compatible to the 15 mm wide successor
device.

4-3
Installation
4.2 Mounting the interface module
4.2
4.2
Mounting the interface module
Introduction
The interface module connects the ET 200S with the PROFIBUS DP.
The interface module exchanges data between the higher-level controller and the I/O
modules.
Requirements
The mounting rail is installed.
All terminal modules are installed to the right of the interface module. The maximum
configuration of the ET 200S distributed I/O system is 12/63 modules (including power
modules, I/O modules, reserve modules, and motor starters).
Required tool
3-mm screwdriver

1. Hook the interface module onto the rail.
2. Pivot the interface module backwards until you hear the locking mechanism engage.
Figure 4-2
4-4

Installation
4.2 Mounting the interface module
Removing the interface module

The interface module is wired, and the terminal modules are on the right:
1. Switch off the supply voltage on the interface module.
2. Disconnect the wiring and the bus connector on the interface module.
3. Use a screwdriver to push the locking mechanism on the interface module downward
until it stops, and move the interface module to the left.
Note: The locking mechanism is beneath the interface module.
4. With the locking mechanism depressed, pivot the interface module so that it comes off
the mounting rail.

4-5
Installation
4.3 Mounting the TM-P and TM-E terminal modules
4.3
4.3
Mounting the TM-P and TM-E terminal modules
Introduction
The terminal modules accommodate the I/O modules and power modules.
The terminal modules can be prewired (without I/O modules).
All terminal modules are mounted on the right of the interface module.
Requirements
The mounting rail is installed.
Required tool
3-mm screwdriver
Mounting the terminal module

1. Hook the terminal module onto the mounting rail.
2. Pivot the terminal module backwards until you hear the locking mechanism engage.
3. Move the terminal module to the left until you hear it latch onto the previous interface
module (if already mounted) or the terminal module.
Figure 4-3
4-6
Mounting the terminal module

Installation
Removing the terminal module

The terminal module is wired, and there are other terminal modules on the right and left.
A particular terminal module within the ET 200S distributed I/O system can only be removed
when there is a distance of approximately 8 mm to the adjacent terminal modules
(you achieve this distance by moving the adjacent modules).
1. Switch off the supply voltage on the terminal module and, if applicable, the power
module.
2. Disconnect the wiring on the terminal module.
3. Removal from the right:
Use a screwdriver to push the locking mechanism on the previous terminal
module/interface module (on the left) downward until it stops, and move the terminal
module to the right.
Removal from the left:
Use a screwdriver to push the locking mechanism on the terminal module downward until
it stops, and move the terminal module to the left.
Note: The locking mechanism is beneath the terminal module.
4. With the locking mechanism depressed, pivot the terminal module so that it comes off the
mounting rail.
Removing the terminal module (from the right)
3
4
Locking mechanism

4-7
Installation
Note
It is not necessary to remove the terminal module in order to replace the terminal box.
See also
Replacing the terminal box on the terminal module (Page 4-9)
4-8

Installation
4.4 Replacing the terminal box on the terminal module
4.4
4.4
Replacing the terminal box on the terminal module
Introduction
The terminal box is part of the terminal module. If necessary, you can replace the terminal
box. It is not necessary to remove the terminal module.
Requirements
The terminal module is installed, wired, and assembled with an electronic module.
Required tool
3-mm screwdriver
Procedure
1. Switch off the supply voltage on the terminal module and, if applicable, the power
module.
2. Disconnect the wiring on the terminal module.
3. Simultaneously press the upper and lower release buttons of the electronic module, and
remove it from the terminal module.
4. Insert the screwdriver from below at an angle into the small opening underneath the slot
number plate, and at the same time pull the terminal box downward until it stops. Then
pull the terminal box upward and out of the terminal module.
5. Replace the terminal box, and insert the new one into the terminal module from above
(see figure). Then push the terminal box upward until it snaps into place.
6. Insert the electronic module in the terminal module.
7. Wire the terminal module.
8. Switch on the supply voltage on the terminal module and, if applicable, the power
module.

4-9
Installation
4.4 Replacing the terminal box on the terminal module
Replacing the terminal box on the terminal module:
4-10
Slot number plate

Installation
4.5 Mounting the terminating module
4.5
4.5
Mounting the terminating module
Introduction
The terminating module on the right end of the ET 200S terminates the ET 200S distributed
I/O system. If you have not inserted a terminating module, the ET 200S is not ready for
operation.
Requirements
The last terminal module must be installed.

1. Hook the terminating module onto the mounting rail to the right of the last terminal
module.
2. Pivot the terminating module backwards onto the mounting rail.
3. Move the terminating module to the left until you hear it latch onto the last terminal
module.
1
3
Figure 4-4

4-11
Installation
4.5 Mounting the terminating module
Removing the terminating module

1. Use a screwdriver to push the locking mechanism on the last terminal module downward
until it stops, and move the terminating module to the right.
2. Pivot the terminating module so that it comes off the mounting rail.
Note
If
the terminating module of the ET 200S is removed and remounted under voltage, or
the ET 200S backplane bus is interrupted during operation, e.g., at a terminal module,
and then restored to function,
the complete power supply of the ET 200S must be switched off and on again in order to
achieve a defined station status.
4-12

Installation
4.6 Mounting the shield connection
4.6
4.6
Mounting the shield connection
Introduction
The shield connection is needed for applying cable shields (e.g., analog electronic
modules, 1COUNT 24V/100kHz electronic module, and 1SSI electronic module).
You mount the shield connection on the terminal module.
The shield connection consists of a shield connection element, a power bus (3 x 10 mm),
a shield clamp, and a grounding terminal.
Requirements
The terminal modules are installed.
Required tool
3-mm screwdriver
Metal-cutting saw
Procedure
1. Push the shield connection element onto the first terminal module from below.
2. Push the shield contact element onto the last terminal module from below.
In order to maintain the stability of the power bus between two shield connection
elements during installation, you must insert an additional shield connection element after
every sixth terminal module (given a width of 15 mm).
3. Saw off a piece of power bus of the appropriate size. The length of the power bus should
be equal to the distance between the shield connection elements + 45 mm.
4. Press the power bus onto the shield connection element. The power bus must be sized in
such a way that it projects from the shield contact element by 15 mm on the left or right,
depending on the mounting direction.
5. Attach the shield terminals to the power bus (between the shield connection elements).
6. Attach the grounding terminal to the projecting power bus.
Mounting the shield connection:

4-13
Installation
4.6 Mounting the shield connection
4
2
3
4-14
Shield terminals
Shield connection elements
Grounding terminal
Power bus

Installation
4.7 Applying slot number plates and color-coding plates
4.7
4.7
Applying slot number plates and color-coding plates
Introduction
The slot number plates identify the individual I/O modules with a slot (1 to 63).
The color-coding plates enable an individual color coding of the terminals in accordance
with company or national conventions. The color-coding plates are available in white, red,
blue, brown, yellow, yellow-green, and turquoise. Each terminal on the terminal module
can be provided with a color-coding plate.
The slot number plates and color-coding plates are applied to the terminal modules.
Position of the slot number plate: below the coding element on the terminal module.
Position of the color-coding plates: directly next to each terminal on the terminal box.
Requirements
The terminal modules are installed.
There must not be any electronic modules inserted when you apply the slot number
plates.
The terminal modules should not be wired when you apply the color-coding plates.
Required tool
3-mm screwdriver (for removal only)
Applying slot number plates and color-coding plates

Applying slot number plates:
1. Break off the slot number plate (1 to 63) from the strip.
2. Use your finger to press the slot number plate onto the terminal module.
Applying color-coding plates:
1. You can twist off the color-coding plates directly from the strip onto the opening provided
for them next to the terminal
2. Use your finger to press the color-coding plates onto the terminal module.

4-15
Installation
4.7 Applying slot number plates and color-coding plates
Applying slot number plates and color-coding plates:
2
2
Slot number plate
Color-coding plates
Removing slot number plates and color-coding plates

Removing slot number plate:
1. Detach the electronic module from the terminal module.
2. Lift the slot number plate from its holder.
Removing color-coding plates:
Use a screwdriver to lift the color-coding plates from their holders.
4-16

Installation
4.8 Setting the PROFIBUS address
4.8
4.8
Setting the PROFIBUS address
Introduction
The PROFIBUS address is used to specify the address of the ET 200S distributed I/O
system on the PROFIBUS DP.
The PROFIBUS DP address for the ET 200S is set on the interface module by means of
DIP switches. The DIP switches are on the front of the interface module, protected by a
sliding window.
The permitted PROFIBUS DP addresses are 1 to 125.
Each address can be assigned only once on the PROFIBUS DP.
Requirements
Address setting is not yet assigned on PROFIBUS DP.
Required tool
3-mm screwdriver
Setting the PROFIBUS DP address

1. Slide the window on the interface module upward.
2. Use a screwdriver to set the desired PROFIBUS DP address via the DIP switch.
3. Close the window.
,QWHUIDFHPRGXOH
2))
21
([DPSOH
'3DGGUHVV
(76

2QO\ZLWK,067$1'$5',0)267$1'$5'
5HVHUYHGIRUIXWXUHXSJUDGHV7KLVVZLWFKPXVWEHLQWKH2))SRVLWLRQ
Figure 4-5
Setting the PROFIBUS address

4-17
Installation
4.8 Setting the PROFIBUS address
Changing the PROFIBUS DP address

You change the PROFIBUS DP address in exactly the same way as you set it. A change in
the PROFIBUS DP address is applicable to the ET 200S after a power on at the interface
module.
4-18


5.1
5.1
General rules and regulations for operating the ET 200S
Introduction
When operating the ET 200S distributed I/O system as part of a plant or system, special
rules and regulations have to be followed depending on the field of application.
This chapter provides an overview of the most important rules you have to observe when
integrating the ET 200S distributed I/O system in a plant or system.
Specific application
Note the safety and accident prevention regulations that apply to specific applications
(for example, machine protection guidelines).
Emergency stop devices

Emergency stop devices as defined in IEC 204 (corresponds to DIN VDE 113) must remain
effective in all operating modes of the plant or system.
Startup of the system after certain events

The following table identifies situations you must pay attention to when the system starts up
after the occurrence of certain events.
If ...
Startup follows a power dip or a power
failure
Then ...
Dangerous operating states must not occur. If
necessary, force an emergency stop!
Startup of the ET 200S follows an

interruption of the bus communication
Startup follows unlocking of the emergency
stop device

There must not be an uncontrolled or undefined

startup.
5-1

5.1 General rules and regulations for operating the ET 200S
Line voltage
The following table identifies requirements to be observed for the line voltage.
With ...
Requirements
Stationary plants or systems without all-pole line

voltage disconnect switch
There must be a line voltage disconnect switch or

a fuse in the building installation.
Load power supplies, power supply modules
The set rated voltage range must correspond to

the local line voltage.
All circuits of the ET 200S distributed I/O system
Any fluctuation/deviation of the line voltage from

the rated value must be within the permitted
tolerances
24 VDC supply
The following table identifies requirements you must observe for the 24 VDC supply.
With ...
Requirements ...
Buildings
Outdoor lightning
protection
Take lightning protection

precautions
24 VDC supply lines, signal lines
Indoor lightning
protection
(for example, lightning protection

elements)
24 VDC supply
Safe (electrical) isolation of extra-low voltage
Protection against outside electrical influences

The following table identifies requirements you must observe to provide protection against
electrical influences or faults.
With ...
Requirements ...
All plants or systems in which the ET 200S

is integrated
The plant or system must be connected to a protective

conductor for dissipation of electromagnetic
interferences.
Supply, signal, and bus lines
The wiring arrangement and installation must be

correct.
Signal and bus lines
Any wire or conductor break must not result in

undefined states of the plant or system.
See also
Mechanical and climatic environmental conditions (Page 7-8)
5-2


5.2 Operating the ET 200S on a grounded incoming supply
5.2
5.2
Operating the ET 200S on a grounded incoming supply
Introduction
In this section, you will find information on the overall configuration of an ET 200S distributed
I/O system on a grounded incoming supply (TN-S system). The specific subjects discussed
are:
Disconnecting devices, short-circuit protection, and overload protection in accordance
with DIN VDE 0100 and DIN VDE 0113
Load voltage supplies and load circuits.
Grounded incoming supply

In grounded incoming supplies, the neutral conductor of the supply line is grounded. A mere
ground fault between a live conductor and ground or a grounded section of the plant causes
the protective devices to trip.
Safety isolation
Safety isolation is required for:
Modules that must be supplied with 60 VDC or 25 VAC
24 VDC load circuits
Configuring the ET 200S with ungrounded reference potential

After M151-1 BASIC (6ES7151-1CA00-0AB0), IM151-1 STANDARD
(6ES7151-1AA02-0AB0), IM151-1 FO STANDARD (6ES7151-1AB01-0AB0), IM151-1 HIGH
FEATURE (6ES7151-1BA00-0AB0) and IM151-3 PN (6ES7151-3AA10-0AB0) the ground M
of the power supply rated voltage of the IM151-x to the profile rail (ground wire) via an RC
combination and thus a ground-free installation is possible.
For dissipation of interference currents, the ground of the IM151-x is internally linked via an
RC combination (R = 10 M / C = 22 nF) with the profile rail (ground wire). High-frequency
interference currents are thus dissipated, and static charge is prevented.

5-3

Components and protective measures

Various components and protective measures are required for the installation of an overall
plant. The types of components and the degree to which the protective measures are
mandatory depend on the DIN VDE regulation that applies to your plant setup. The following
table refers to the figure below.
Compare ...
Refer to figure
Disconnecting device for controller,

sensors, and actuators
Short-circuit and overload protection:
Group-wise for sensors and actuators
DIN VDE 0100

... Part 460:
... Part 1:
Main switch
Disconnector
... Part 725:

Single-pole protection of
circuits
... Part 1:
Fuse for grounded
secondary electric circuit:
unipolar
otherwise: fuse all poles
Isolation by transformer
recommended
Isolation by transformer
recommended
Load power supply for AC load

circuits with more than five
electromagnetic devices
5-4
DIN VDE 0113


ET 200S in the overall configuration

The figure below shows the ET 200S distributed I/O system in the overall configuration
(load voltage supply and grounding concept) with incoming supply from a TN-S system.
L1
L2
L3
N
PE
Low-voltage distribution e.g.

TN-S system (3 x 400 V)
FG: Functional ground to divert noise
directly to the DIN rail by means of a
spring contact
ET 200S
FG
FG FG
FG FG FG FG FG
Mounting rail
PE (AUX1)
AC
DC
1L+
1M
Shield contact for fastening cable
shields
Ground bus
Load circuit
400 VAC for motor starters
2
3
AC
DC
VDC load circuit for electronic modules and
motor starters
2
3
AC
AC
120 VAC/230 VAC load circuit for AC modules
Figure 5-1
Operate ET 200S with grounded ground

5-5

5.3 Electrical configuration of the ET 200S
5.3
5.3
Electrical configuration of the ET 200S
Isolation
In the ET 200S, isolation exists between:
The load circuits/process and all other circuit components of the ET 200S
The PROFIBUS DP interface in the interface module and all other circuit components
The PROFINET interface in the IM151-3 PN interface module and all other circuit
components
The figure below shows the voltage ratios for ET 200S with IM151-1. Only the primary
components are shown in the figure.
'3
LQWHUIDFH
(OHFWURQLFV
EDFNSODQHEXV
(76EDFNSODQHEXV
%XVLQWHUIDFH %XVLQWHUIDFH %XVLQWHUIDFH %XVLQWHUIDFH %XVLQWHUIDFH
,VRODWLRQ
,VRODWLRQ
,VRODWLRQ
3URFHVV
HOHFWURQLF
FRPSRQHQW
3URFHVV
HOHFWURQLF
FRPSRQHQW
,VRODWLRQ
,VRODWLRQ
,VRODWLRQ
,0
/ 0
'&90 3(
3RZHU
PRGXOH
3RWHQWLDO,2
Figure 5-2
5-6
3URFHVV
HOHFWURQLF
FRPSRQHQW
7HUPLQDWLQJPRGXOH
5DLO
'&9 0 3(
(OHFWURQLF
PRGXOH
(OHFWURQLF
PRGXOH
3RWHQWLDO'3LQWHUIDFH
3RZHU
PRGXOH
(OHFWURQLF
PRGXOH
3RWHQWLDOORJLFFLUFXLWU\
Voltage ratios for ET 200S with IM151-1


5.4 Wiring the ET 200S
5.4
5.4.1
5.4
Wiring the ET 200S
Wiring rules for ET 200S
Wiring rules
Wiring rules for ...
Interface module (supply

voltage)
Terminal modules (spring

and screw terminals)
Terminal modules
(Fast Connect)
Connectable wire cross-sections for

solid wires
No
0.14 to 2.5 mm2
0.5 to 1.5 mm2
Connectable
wire
cross-sections
for flexible wires
Without end sleeve
0.25 to 2.5 mm2
0.14 to 2.5 mm2
0.5 to 1.5 mm2
With end sleeve
0.25 to 1.5 mm2
0.14 to 1.5 mm2
---
Number of wires per connection
1 or a combination of 2 conductors up to 1.5 mm2

(total) in a common end sleeve
Maximum external diameter of the wire

insulation
3.8 mm
3.2 mm at 1.5 mm2
Stripped wire length
11 mm
End sleeves in
accordance with
DIN 46228
Without insulating
collar
Form A, 8 to 12 mm long
With insulating collar

0.25 to 1.5 mm2
Form E, up to 12 mm long
5.4.2
3.1 mm at 1.5 mm2

3.8 mm at 2.5 mm2
--Form A, up to 12 mm long
-----
Wiring a terminal module with screw terminals
Introduction
In terminal modules with screw terminals, the individual wires are screwed into the terminal.
Requirements
Follow the wiring rules.
No end sleeves are required.
Required tool
3-mm screwdriver

5-7

Procedure
1. Strip 11 mm of insulation from the wires.
2. Insert the individual wires into the terminal.
3. Screw the ends of the individual wires onto the terminal module (torque of 0.4 to 0.7 Nm).
5.4.3
Wiring a terminal module with spring terminals
Introduction
In terminal modules with spring terminals, the individual wires are affixed by inserting them
into the terminal.
Requirements
Required tool
3-mm screwdriver
Procedure
1. Strip 11 mm of insulation from the wires.
2. Insert the screwdriver in the upper (round) opening of the terminal.
3. Insert the wire into the lower (square) opening of the terminal to the end stop.
4. Release the terminal by pressing with the screwdriver into the opening.
5. Push the wire into the released spring terminal, and pull the screwdriver out.
5-8


Figure 5-3
5.4.4
Wiring the spring terminal
Wiring terminal modules with Fast Connect
Introduction
In the case of terminal modules with Fast Connect, the individual wires are attached
using a quick connection method that requires no stripping.
Fast Connect is a connection method that requires no wire preparation
(i.e., the wire insulation does not have to be stripped).
Each terminal of the terminal module with Fast Connect has a test opening
(for measuring the voltage, for example). The test opening is suitable for probes with a
maximum diameter of 1.5 mm.
End sleeves are not permitted.
Diagram of the Fast Connect terminal module

5-9

1
2
3
Opening for measuring, checking: max. 1.5 mm
Opening for 1 wire: 0.5 ... 1.5 mm2
Locking mechanism open (the wire can be inserted)
Locking mechanism closed (the cable is connected)
Requirements
Required tool
3-mm screwdriver
Connectable wires
You can connect solid and flexible wires with PVC insulation with a wire cross-section of
0.5 mm2 to 1.5 mm2 (max. external diameter of 3.2 mm). If the conductor cross-section is the
same, they can be connected fifty times. You can find a list of the tested wires at:
http://www.idc2.de
UL-compliant cables and connections
Wiring range for insulating piercing connection 22 -16 AWG solid/stranded PVC insulated
conductors, UL style no. 1015 only.

1. Insert the unstripped wire into the round opening to the end stop (the insulation and
conductor must form a flat surface).
2. Insert the screwdriver into the opening above the locking mechanism to the end stop.
3. Press the screw driver downward until the locking mechanism reaches its end position.
5-10


PP

Figure 5-4
Result: The wire is connected.
Note
If you want to reconnect a wire that was connected previously, you must first cut it off.
Releasing the wiring from the terminal module with Fast Connect
1. Insert the screw driver into the opening below the locking mechanism to the end stop.
2. Using the screwdriver, lift and press the locking mechanism upward.
3. The wiring is released: Remove the wire.

Figure 5-5
Releasing the wiring from the terminal module with Fast Connect

5-11

Removing any conductor remnants (if necessary)

To remove any conductor remnants (insulation), you can remove disassemble the locking
mechanism from the terminal module (see Step 3). To do this, the locking mechanism must
be open (upper position). You can only insert the locking mechanism in the upper position
(see Step 4).
1. Insert the screwdriver in the opening below the locking mechanism (the tip of the
screwdriver is on the lip of the locking mechanism).
2. Press the screwdriver downward until you lift the locking mechanism from the terminal
module.
3. Remove the locking mechanism from the terminal module. Remove any remnants of the
conductor from the locking mechanism.
4. Use your fingers to press the locking mechanism back into the opening. Attention: Put the
locking mechanism into the correct position or you could damage the terminal point.

Figure 5-6
5.4.5
Disassembling the locking mechanism from the terminal module
Wiring terminal modules
Introduction
The ET 200S distributed I/O system incorporates terminal modules both for power modules
and for electronic modules:
In the case of the terminal modules for power modules, you connect the supply/load
voltage for the respective voltage group.
Terminal modules for electronic modules connect the ET 200S with the process.
In the case of the terminal modules for electronic modules, you can connect cable shields
by means of a shield connection.
Requirements
You must wire the terminal modules with the supply/load voltage switched off at the
power module and the load voltage switched off at the electronic module.
5-12


Required tool
3-mm screwdriver
Wiring terminal modules for power modules

Wire the terminal module in accordance with the terminal assignment.
Wiring terminal modules for digital, analog, and technology modules

Wire the terminal module in accordance with the terminal assignment.
Connecting cable shields

We recommend that you use the shield connection to connect cable shields (in the case of
analog electronic modules, the 1COUNT 24V/100kHz electronic module and the 1SSI
electronic module, for example).
1. Remove the insulation material from the area around the shield clamp, and clamp the
cable shield into the shield clamp (above the power bus). The shield clamp is suitable for
one cable with a maximum diameter of 8 mm or two cables with a maximum diameter
of 4 mm each.
2. Tighten the shield clamp (approximately 0.5 Nm)
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 if you want to connect additional cable shields.
4. Strip the insulation from the ground wire (from 6 to 25 mm2), and insert it into the
grounding terminal (below the power bus). Tighten the grounding terminal
(2 Nm to 2.5 Nm).
5. Attach the other end to the ground bus.

5-13

Connecting cable shields:
1
5
2
4
Shield clamp
Insulation material removed
Cable to the sensor
Cable to the ground bus
Grounding terminal
Note
To stabilize the shield connection, you must mount and screw in at least one shield clamp
over the shield connection element.
5-14


5.4.6
Terminal assignment of terminal module with inserted power module
Terminal assignment
The terminal assignment of the terminal module depends on which power module is
inserted.
TM-P15S23-A1 and power
module
$8;
$8;
$ $

$ $

3
3

$

$

3
$8;3(
TM-P15S23-A0 and power

module
3
3
$8;3(
AUX1 bus (PE)

implemented. Connection to
terminals A4 and A8.
$8;
3
3

$

$

3
$8;3(
AUX1 bus (PE) interrupted.

Connection to terminals A4
and A8.
TM-P30S44-A0 and power module
3

3
3
3
$8;3(
TM-P15S22-01 and power

module
AUX1 bus implemented. No

connection to the terminals
of the terminal module.
TM-PF30S47-F0 and PM-D F

24 VDC*
&KDQQHO
&+
&KDQQHO
&+
$

3
3
$8;3(
$

$

AUX1 bus (PE) interrupted.

Connection to terminals A4 and A8.
'&9
0
AUX1 bus implemented. No

connection to the terminals of
the terminal module.
*: for terminal assignment, see ET 200S Fail-Safe Modules manual

5-15

5.4.7
Terminal assignment of terminal module with inserted electronic module
Terminal assignment
The terminal assignment of the terminal module depends on which electronic module is
inserted. For information on technology modules, refer to the Technological Functions
manual.
TM-E15S26-A1 and electronic
module/technology module
TM-E15S24-A1 and
electronic module
&KDQQHO
&+
&KDQQHO
&+
&KDQQHO
&+
&KDQQHO
&+
&KDQQHO
&+
&KDQQHO
&+
&KDQQHO
&KDQQHO
&KDQQHO
&KDQQHO
&KDQQHO
&KDQQHO
&+
&+
&+
&+
&+
&+
AUX1 bus (PE) implemented.

Connection to terminals A4, A8
and A3, A7.
&KDQQHO
&+
&KDQQHO
&+
&KDQQHO
&+
&KDQQHO
&+
AUX1 bus (PE)

implemented. Connection
to terminals A4 and A8.
TM-E15S24-01 and electronic

module/technology module
AUX1 bus implemented.

No connection to the
terminals.
TM-E15S24-AT and 2AI TC

High Feature
&KDQQHO
&KDQQHO
&+
&+
AUX1 bus (PE) implemented. No

connection to terminals 4 and 8.
5-16
TM-E15S23-01 and
electronic module

No connection to the terminals
of the terminal module.


TM-E30S44-01 and technology
module
&KDQQHO
&KDQQHO
&+
&+
TM-E30S46-A1 and fail-safe

module*
)'2
)'2
)',
)',

$
$

$$

$

$

$

$

AUX1 bus (PE) implemented. No

connection to terminals 4 and 8 or
12 and 16.

and A3, A7 or A12, A16 and A11
and A15.
*: for terminal assignment, see ET 200S Fail-Safe Modules manual
5.4.8
Wiring the IM151-1 BASIC, IM151-1 STANDARD, and IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE
interface modules
Introduction
The supply voltage and the bus connector (RS 485) are connected at the IM151-1 BASIC,
IM151-1 STANDARD, and IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE interface modules.
Requirements
Wire the interface module with the supply voltage switched off.
Required tool
3-mm screwdriver

5-17

Procedure
1. Connecting the supply voltage:
Strip the insulation from the wires for the supply voltage of the interface module.
Secure the individual wires in the screw terminal.
2. Connecting PROFIBUS DP:
Insert the bus connector onto the PROFIBUS DP connection.
Tighten the screws of the bus connector.
Wiring IM151-1 BASIC, IM151-1 STANDARD, and IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE:
1
(76
Labeling strip
Supply voltage (1L+, 2L+, 1M, 2M)
PROFIBUS DP
See also
Wiring rules for ET 200S (Page 5-7)
5-18


5.4.9
Wiring IM151-3 PN interface module
Introduction
The supply voltage and the bus connector are connected at the IM151-3 PN interface
module.
Requirements
Required tool
3-mm screwdriver
Industrial Ethernet Fast Connect stripping tool (6GK1 901-1GA00) (stripping tool for
Industrial Ethernet Fast Connect installation cables)
Required accessories
PROFINET connector (according to the specifications in the PROFINET Installation
Guide)
Industrial Ethernet Fast Connect installation cables
The following are suitable:
Fast Connect standard cable
6XV1 840-2AH10
Fast Connect trailing cable
6XV1 840-3AH10
Fast Connect marine cable
6XV1 840-4AH10
Installing bus connector

Install the PROFINET connector according to the specifications in the PROFINET Installation
Guide.
Procedure
2. Connecting PROFINET:
Insert the bus connector onto the PROFINET connection.

5-19

Wiring IM151-3 PN:
2
ET 200S
PROFINET
Labeling strip
See also
5.4.10
Wiring the IM151-1 FO STANDARD interface module
Introduction
The supply voltage and the fiber-optic cable are connected at the IM151-1 FO STANDARD
interface module via a simplex connector.
Requirements
Required tool
3-mm screwdriver
5-20


Required accessories
Package with simplex connectors and polishing sets (6GK1901-0FB00-0AA0)
Package with plug adapters (6ES7195-1BE00-0XA0)
Fiber optic duplex cable see catalog IK PI
Installing simplex connectors

Note
The fiber optic cable may have the following maximum length:
PROFIBUS plastic fiber optic standard cable
50 m
PROFIBUS PCF fiber optic standard cable
300 m
1. Remove approximately 30 cm of the jacket of the fiber-optic duplex cable.

2. Attach the fiber optic duplex cable with the associated simplex plugs. You can find
detailed installation instructions in theSIMATIC NET- PROFIBUS Networks manual.
Hint: Do not click the 2 simplex plugs closed individually, click them closed together so
that they a complete a "duplex plug". In this manner you will achieve a better hold in the
plug adapter.
IMPORTANT: The smoothed and polished surface of the plastic fibers must be absolutely
flat and even. Likewise, the plastic jacket must not protrude or be cut unevenly. Every
irregularity causes strong attenuation of the light signal over the fiber-optic cable!
3. Place the simplex connectors into the plug adapter for the IM151-1 FO STANDARD
interface module and the fiber-optic cable into the designated cable ducts. Snap the plug
adapter closed until you can hear clearly that the side panels have engaged.
When inserting the plug in the plug adaptor, pay attention to the correct position:
Transmitter always up and receiver always down!

5-21

Plug adapter for IM151-1 FO STANDARD
Snap the two simplex connectors closed together such that you get a "duplex connector."
Hint: Cut the lower wire approx. 10 mm shorter than the upper wire to achieve a better
arrangement of the wiring.
Maximum 30-mm bending radius
Fiber-optic duplex cable
Bending radius for the fiber-optic cable

When placing the fiber-optic duplex core into the plug adapter and routing the cable, be sure
not to exceed the permissible bending radius of 30 mm. Refer also to the installation
guidelines for fiber-optic cable in the ET 200 Distributed I/O System or SIMATIC NET PROFIBUS Networks manual.
Reusing fiber-optic cable

Note
If you insert previously used fiber-optic cable into the plug adapter, you must shorten both
fiber-optic cores by the amount of the curved lengths and reinstall the simplex connectors.
This will prevent any attenuation losses caused by rebent, heavily stressed portions of the
fiber-optic duplex core.
5-22


Wiring the IM151-1 FO STANDARD interface module

2. Connecting PROFIBUS DP:
Insert the fiber-optic cable with the mounted plug adapters into the
IM151-1 FO STANDARD interface module.
Fold the protruding plug grip upward.
Pay attention to the correct position: The transmitter fiber optic cable is inserted into the
receiver female connector and the receiver fiber optic cable in the transmitter female
connector of the fiber optic cable interface of the IM151-1 FO STANDARD.
If the IM151-1 FO STANDARD interface module is the last node of the fiber-optic cable
network, the unoccupied fiber-optic cable interface must be blanked off (blanking plug
inserted in IM151-1 FO STANDARD, as supplied).
Caution
Do not look directly into the opening of the optical transmit diodes. The emitted light beam
could damage your eyes.

5-23

Wiring up IM151-1 FO STANDARD:
2
1
7
6
4
3
ET 200S
Transmitter
Grip
Labeling strip
Simplex connector
PROFIBUS DP (fiber-optic cable)
Receiver
See also
5-24


5.5 Inserting and identifying electronic modules
5.5
5.5.1
5.5
Inserting and identifying electronic modules
Introduction
The electronic modules are inserted in the terminal modules.
A labeling strip allows you to identify the electronic modules.
Electronic modules are:
Self-coding
Type-coded
The first time you insert an electronic module, a coding key engages on the terminal
module. This mechanically prevents the wrong electronic module from being inserted.
Requirements
Follow the rules below for inserting electronic modules.
Procedure
1. Insert the electronic module into the terminal module until you hear it snap into place.
2. For identification purposes, pull the labeling strip upward out of the electronic module.
3. Then reinsert the labeling strip back into the electronic module.
3
2
Figure 5-7

5-25

Removing electronic modules

1. Simultaneously press the two release buttons on the top and bottom of the electronic
module.
2. Pull the electronic module forward out of the terminal module.
Figure 5-8
Removing electronic modules
Implementing an electronic module type change

You have already removed the electronic module:
1. Use a screwdriver to remove the coding key from the terminal module.
2. Reinsert the coding key onto the used electronic module.
3. Insert the new electronic module (type change) into the terminal module until you hear it
snap into place.
4. Label the new electronic module.
Removing the coding key
5-26


Coding key
Warning
Changes to the code element can result in dangerous plant conditions.
Replacing a defective electronic module

You have already removed the electronic module:
1. Remove the coding key from the underside of the new electronic module.
2. Insert the new electronic module (same type) into the terminal module until you hear it
snap into place.
3. Label the new electronic module.
See also
Incorrect configuration states of ET 200S on PROFIBUS DP (Page 6-57)
Electronic modules and applications (Page 3-9)

5-27

5.5.2
Removing and inserting electronic modules
Introduction
ET 200S supports the removal and insertion of modules during operation (RUN mode). The
ET 200S remains in RUN mode when an electronic module is removed. The protective
conductor connections of the ET 200S are not interrupted.
Rules
You cannot remove and insert modules during operation unless the corresponding
parameters have been assigned.
You can remove and insert modules during operation with IM151-1 BASIC,
IM151-1 STANDARD (6ES7151-1AA01-0AB0 or higher), IM151-1 FO STANDARD,
IM151-1 FO STANDARD, IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE, and IM151-3 PN interface modules.
If one module is missing (gap) and the ET 200S is powered up, the station will not start
up.
The removal and insertion of modules affects the isochronous operation (equidistance).
When replacing more than one module, make sure that only one gap occurs.
Principle
The following table indicates which modules you can remove and insert under which
conditions:
Table 5-1
Removing and inserting electronic modules

Modules
5-28
Removing and
inserting
Conditions
Interface module
No
---
Power modules
Yes
The load voltage must be switched off!
Digital electronic modules (input)
Yes
---
Digital electronic modules (output)
Yes
The load voltage must be switched off by

means of an external switch/fuse!
Yes
---
4 IQ-SENSE
Yes
The sensors can also be replaced during

operation. The electronic module then
assigns parameters automatically to
these sensors.


Modules
1COUNT 24V/100kHz
Removing and
inserting
Conditions
Yes
The load voltage must be switched off by

means of an external switch/fuse!
Yes
---
1COUNT 5V/500kHz
1SSI
1STEP 5V/204kHz
2PULSE
1POS INC/Digital
1POS SSI/Digital
1POS INC/Analog
1POS SSI/Analog
1SI 3964/ASCII
1SI Modbus/USS
Yes
---
RESERVE
Yes
---
See also
Incorrect configuration states of ET 200S on PROFIBUS DP (Page 6-57)
Incorrect configuration states of ET 200S on PROFINET IO (Page 6-72)

5-29

5.6 Assigning a device name for the IO device
5.6
5.6
Assigning a device name for the IO device
Introduction
Each PROFINET device has a factory-assigned unique device identification (MAC address).
For the configuration and in the startup, every ET 200S IO device is addressed with its
device name.
For detailed information on addressing in PROFINET IO, refer to the PROFINET System
Description.
Assigning a device name

1. Insert an empty SIMATIC Micro Memory Card in the IM151-3 PN.
2. Switch on the power supply for the IM151-3 PN interface module.
3. Open the "Properties - IM151-3 PN" window in the HW config and enter the device name
for the IO device there. You can choose any arbitrary device name except for "NONAME"
(independent of upper/lower case)
Figure 5-9
5-30
Assigning a device name in HW Config


An online PROFINET connection from the PG to the IO device via a switch is required
for assigning the name to the IM151-3 PN interface module.
4. Transfer the device name to the IM151-3 PN using "PLC > Ethernet > Assign Device
Name."
Figure 5-10
Transferring a device name online to the IM151-3 PN

5-31

Click the "Assign name" button in the "Assign device name" window. The device name
is stored on the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card in the interface module IM151-3 PN.
Figure 5-11
"Assign device name" window before name assignment
Once the name is assigned, it appears in the window.
5-32


Figure 5-12
"Assign device name" window after name assignment
Forwarding the device name when the interface module is replaced

The IO device device name is stored on the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card.
For the transfer of the device name when exchanging the interface module IM151-3 PN, pull
the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card out of the "old" IM151-3 PN and insert it in the "new one".
The IO device adopts the device name from the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card after
switching the power supply off/on. Then, the station is addressable again and functions the
same as before the exchange.
Station flash test

If you are using multiple IO devices, multiple IO devices are also indicated in the "Assign
device name" dialog. In this case, you should compare the MAC address of the device with
the indicated MAC address and select the proper IO device.
The identification of IO devices in a system is facilitated by a station flash test. The flash test
is activated as follows:
1. In the "Assign device name" dialog, select one of the indicated IO devices.
2. Select a flash duration.
3. Click the "Flash on" button.
The LINK LED on the selected IO device flashes (open the flaps on the front cover of the
IM151-3 PN!)

5-33

5-34

Commissioning and Diagnostics

6.1
6.1
Safety tests prior to commissioning
Running tests
Note
You must ensure the safety of your system. Before undertaking the final commissioning of
your system, you should perform a complete function test and the necessary safety tests.
Provision should be made in the tests for all possible foreseeable errors. In this way, you can
avoid exposing your personnel or property to danger during operation.
6.2
6.2.1
6.2
Commissioning and diagnostics on PROFIBUS DP
Basic principles of project design for the ET 200S on PROFIBUS DP
Introduction
Project design involves configuring and assigning parameters to the ET 200S.
Configuring: Systematic ordering of the individual ET 200S modules (setup).
Parameterizing: Determining the ET 200S parameters with the configuration software.

6-1

6.2 Commissioning and diagnostics on PROFIBUS DP
Note
The ET 200S is included in the hardware catalog of HW Config:
IM151-1 BASIC: after STEP 7 V5.2
IM151-1 STANDARD: after STEP 7 V5.0 with Service Pack 3
IM151-1 FO STANDARD: after STEP 7 V5.1 with Service Pack 1
IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE: after STEP 7 V5.1 with Service Pack 3
You will not need a GSD file. Advantages:
Simplified summary of the devices (via the "Pack addresses" button in HW config)
Validity checking of parameters
You can find further information about the procedure in the STEP 7 Online Help.
DPV1 operation
If you are using IM151-1 STANDARD (6ES7151-1AA04-0AB0 or higher) or IM151-1 FO
STANDARD (6ES7151-1AB03-0AB0 or higher) in DPV1 mode on an S7 CPU that does not
support an insert/remove module interrupt, you must not enable the "Operation at preset <>
actual configuration" parameter in STEP 7. Otherwise, the removal of a module (module
failure) always results in a station failure (OB86).
If it is imperative that you enable "Operation at preset <> actual configuration", you must
either select DPV0 mode or configure IM151-1/FO STANDARD using the GSD file (under
"Additional field devices - I/O" in the STEP 7 hardware catalog). "Operation at preset <>
actual configuration" is then possible even when the insert/remove module interrupt is
disabled.
However, the S7-CPU does not register an insertion or removal (module failure). You can
detect such events only by cyclically reading the diagnostic frame and evaluating the module
status.
Configuring by means of the GSD file
You configure the ET 200S distributed I/O system using the GSD file. The ET 200S is linked
as norm slave in your system via the GSD file. You can download the GSD file on the
Internet at the following address:
http://www.ad.siemens.de/csi_e/gsd
The following GSD files are available:
IM151-1 BASIC: "SIEM80F3.GSx"
IM151-1 STANDARD:
up to 6ES7151-1AA02-0AB0: "SIEM806A.GSx"
after 6ES7151-1AA03-0AB0: "SI03806A.GSx"
IM151-1 FO STANDARD: "SI03806B.GSx"
IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE:
up to 6ES7151-1BA00-0AB0: "SI0180E0.GSx"
after 6ES7151-1BA01-0AB0: "SI0280E0.GSx"
6-2


6.2.2
Configuring ET 200S on PROFIBUS DP
6.2.2.1
Integrating the GSD file in your configuration software
Introduction
The following instructions describe how you link the GSD file in SIMATIC S7 or SIMATIC S5
(COM PROFIBUS).
Integrating the GSD file in SIMATIC S7

In SIMATIC S7 proceed as follows after STEP 7, V5.0, Service Pack 3 for linking of the GSD
file:
1. Start STEP 7, and select the "Options > Install New GSD Files" menu command in HW
Config.
2. In the next dialog, select the GSD file to be installed and confirm with OK.
Result: The field device is displayed in the hardware catalog in the directory
"PROFIBUS DP > Other field devices > I/O".
3. Configure the ET 200S using STEP 7 (refer to the STEP 7 help).
Integrating the GSD file in SIMATIC S5

In SIMATIC S5 (COM PROFIBUS V5.1 Service Pack 2 Hotfix 1 or higher), the procedure for
integrating the GSD file is as follows:
1. Copy the GSD file from ET 200S in the COM PROFIBUS directory: "...CPBV51\GSD"
(default)
2. Copy the Bitmap file to the directory: "...CPBV51\BITMAPS".
3. Start COM PROFIBUS, and call the "File > Read in GSD File" file menu command.
Result: ET 200S is displayed in the hardware catalog for the slave configuration.
4. Configure the ET 200S using COM PROFIBUS (refer to the COM PROFIBUS help).
Note
If you are using different configuration software, refer to the relevant documentation.

6-3

6.2.2.2
Grouping modules for configuration
Introduction
The ET 200S has a maximum address area of:
IM151-1 BASIC: up to 88 byte for inputs and 88 byte for outputs.
IM151-1 STANDARD (up to 6ES7151-1AA03-0AB0), IM151-1 FO STANDARD (up to
6ES7151-1AB02-0AB0): up to 128 byte for inputs and 128 byte for outputs.
IM151-1 STANDARD (after 6ES7151-1AA04-0AB0), IM151-1 FO STANDARD (after
6ES7151-1AB03-0AB0), IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE: up to 244 byte for inputs and 244
byte for outputs.
To better utilize the available address space of the DP master and reduce data exchange
between the ET 200S and the DP master, you can group several electronic modules/load
feeders within one byte in the input or output area of the process image. This is achieved by
the systematic arrangement and designation of the ET 200S electronic modules/motor
starters.
A listing of the address space requirements for the individual modules is located in the
appendix.
You can group the following module types within a byte:
Digital input modules
Digital output modules
Motor starters (direct starters and reversing starters)
Procedure
1. Integrate the GSD file in your configuration software.
Result: You can identify combinable devices in the hardware catalog of your configuration
software by double availability. The devices differ only by a "*" in the name.
2. Configure the ET 200S setup, adhering to the following rules:
The modules that you can group within a byte must be of the same module type (see
above).
Interface module IM151-1 STANDARD, 6ES7151-1AA00-0AB0 with creation state 1
to 4: The devices that are combinable within a byte must be connected directly next to
one another. Only power modules are permitted between the electronic modules.
Power modules do not open a new byte.
After Interface module IM151-1 BASIC; IM151-1 STANDARD, 6ES7151-1AA00-0AB0
with creation state 5, 6ES7151-1AA01-0AB0; IM151-1 FO STANDARD and
IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE: Optional other devices may be connected between
combinable devices.
There can be a total of no more than 8 channels (1 byte).
6-4


Note
In STEP 7 applications, if you combine the modules for IM151-1 STANDARD,
IM 151-1 FO STANDARD or IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE in the DPV1 mode:
No insert/remove module interrupts (OB83) are triggered for these modules. In this
case, you can recognize that a module has been removed by evaluating the module
status in the diagnostic frame in the cyclic user program.
Each grouped module then receives its own diagnostic address.
3. Select the module designation without "*" from the hardware catalog of your configuration
software.
Result: You open a byte and store the first device there.
4. Select the module designation with "*" from the hardware catalog of your configuration
software.
Result: You store other devices in the opened byte until all bits are occupied.
5. If a byte is filled, you must configure a module again (that is, open a new byte without "*").
Note
Configuration via the GSD file: The configuration software does not check the correct
combination of the devices. If you configure more than 8 channels in a byte, the modules
that exceed the byte limit are reported as improperly configured in the diagnostics.
Module status 10B: incorrect module; invalid reference data
These modules are not addressed.
See also
Address space of the inputs and outputs (Page C-1)

6-5

6.2.2.3
Grouping of digital input modules
Principle
The figure below illustrates schematically the grouping of digital input modules.
,067$1'$5'(6$$$%ZLWKSURGXFWOHYHOWR
',
6WUXFWXUH
,QSXW
E\WH
', ',
:LWKRXW
'HVLJQDWLRQ
6WHS
6WHS
6WHS
', ', ',
:LWKRXW
:LWK

',
:LWKRXW
:LWK

',
',
$VRI,0%$6,&,067$1'$5'(6$$$%ZLWKSURGXFWOHYHO
(6$$$%,0)267$1'$5'DQG,0+,*+)($785(
',
6WUXFWXUH
'HVLJQDWLRQ
6WHS
6WHS
6WHS
', $, ',
:LWKRXW
', $, ', $2 ',
:LWKRXW
:LWKRXW
:LWK
,QSXW
E\WH

',
:LWK

:LWK
',
',
$,
$,
2XWSXW
E\WHV

$2
Figure 6-1
6-6
Grouping of digital input modules within a byte


6.2.2.4
Grouping of digital output modules
Principle
The figure below illustrates schematically the grouping of digital output modules.
,067$1'$5'(6$$$%ZLWKSURGXFWOHYHOWR
6WHS
6WHS
6WHS
6WUXFWXUH
'2
'2 '2
'2 '2 '2
'HVLJQDWLRQ
:LWKRXW
,QSXW
E\WH
:LWKRXW
:LWK

:LWKRXW
',
:LWK

',
',
(6$$$%,0)267$1'$5'DQG,0+,*+)($785(
6WHS
6WHS
6WHS
6WUXFWXUH
'2
'2 $, '2
'HVLJQDWLRQ
:LWKRXW
:LWKRXW

,QSXW
E\WH
:LWK

'2 $, '2 $2 '2
:LWKRXW
:LWK

$,
2XWSXW
E\WHV

'2
:LWK
$,
'2
'2

$2
Figure 6-2
Grouping of digital output modules within a byte

6-7

6.2.2.5
Grouping of motor starters
Principle
The figure below illustrates schematically the grouping of motor starters.
6WHS
6WUXFWXUH
06
06 06
:LWKRXW
'HVLJQDWLRQ

,QSXWE\WH
:LWKRXW
:LWK
',
2XWSXWE\WH
Figure 6-3
6.2.2.6
6WHS
',

'2

'2
Grouping of motor starters within a byte
Example of a project design
Introduction
The following example describes how to design an ET 200S configuration:
Configuration of ET 200S
An example design of an ET 200S configuration is shown in the following figure:
'6
%XVWHUPLQDWRU
'6
'6
30'
'29
'29
30($&9
'2'&9
'2'&9
$2,
30('&9
52
','&9

$,8

'2'&9
'2'&9
$,8

$2,
','&9
30('&9
,QWHUIDFHPRGXOH
','&9
6ORW

*URXSLQJLQDVLQJOHE\WH
(6$$$%,0)267$1'$5'DQG,0+,*+)($785(
Figure 6-4
6-8
Configuration of ET 200S


Configuration table and address space

The user is free to select the byte addresses of the inputs and outputs (if the configuration
software supports this). The bit addresses result automatically from the sequence of the
grouped modules.
The table below shows which modules have been grouped and the corresponding address
space.
Table 6-1
Configuration table and address space
Slot
Module
1
Grouping
I/O address
---
Yes
6ES7131-4BB01-0AB0 2DI DC24V
6ES7131-4BB01-0AB0* 2DI DC24V
6ES7134-4FB01-0AB0 2AI U
No
6ES7135-4GB01-0AB0 2AO I
No
6ES7131-4BD01-0AA0* 4DI DC24V
Yes
6ES7132-4BD01-0AA0 4DO DC24V
Yes
6ES7132-4BB01-0AB0* 2DO DC24V
Inputs
Outputs
---
---
0.0 to 0.1
0.2 to 0.3
1 to 4
0 to 3
0.4 to 0.7
4.0 to 4.3
4.4 to 4.5
6ES7132-4HB01-0AB0* 2DO Rel.
10
6ES7134-4FB01-0AB0 2AI U
No
4.6 to 4.7
11
6ES7135-4GB01-0AB0 2AO I
No
5 to 8
5 to 8
12
---
13
6ES7132-4BB30-0AB0 2DO 24 VDC
Yes
9.0 to 9.1
14
6ES7132-4BB30-0AB0* 2DO 24 VDC
Yes
9.2 to 9.3
15
6ES7138-4CA00-0AA0 PM-E AC230
16
6ES7132-4FB00-0AB0* 2DO 230 V
Yes
---
17
6ES7132-4FB00-0AB0* 2DO 230 V
Yes
18
3RK1903-0BA00 PM-D
19
3RK1301-xxB00-0AA0 DS
20
3RK1301-xxB00-0AA0 *DS
21
3RK1301-xxB00-0AA0 DS
---
---
---
---
--9.4 to 9.5
9.6 to 9.7
---
---
Yes
9.0 to 9.3
10.0 to 10.3
9.4 to 9.7
10.4 to 10.7
Yes
10.0 to 10.3
11.0 to 11.3
No grouping
If you do not want to group digital input modules, digital output modules, or motor starters
within a byte when configuring the ET 200S distributed I/O system, use only those module
designations without "*" from the hardware catalog of your configuration software.
Each individual electronic module/motor starter will then occupy one byte in the input or
output area of the process image.

6-9

6.2.3
Commissioning and startup of ET 200S on PROFIBUS DP
6.2.3.1
Commissioning ET 200S on PROFIBUS DP
Software requirements
The table below contains the software requirements for commissioning on PROFIBUS DP.
Table 6-2
Software requirements for commissioning on PROFIBUS DP
Configuration software
used
Version
Notes
STEP 7
Version 5.0 Service

Pack 3 or higher
You are using HW Config. With Service Pack 3 or higher, the

ET 200S is included in the hardware catalog.
COM PROFIBUS
Version 5.1, Service

Pack 2, Hotfix 1 or
higher
You have integrated the GSD file of ET 200S in COM PROFIBUS.
Configuration software for

a different DP master
You need the GSD file of ET 200S.
Requirements for commissioning

The following additional requirements must be satisfied for commissioning the ET 200S on
PROFIBUS DP:
DP slave is installed
PROFIBUS address is set on the DP slave
DP slave is wired
DP slave is configured (configured and parameters assigned)
Supply voltage for the DP master is switched on (see manual for the DP master)
DP master is switched to RUN mode (see manual for the DP master)
Procedure
To commission the DP slave, proceed as follows:
1. Switch on the supply voltage for the DP slave.
2. If necessary, switch on the supply voltage for the load.
See also
Basic principles of project design for the ET 200S on PROFIBUS DP (Page 6-1)
Basic principles of installation (Page 4-1)
Setting the PROFIBUS address (Page 4-17)
6-10


6.2.3.2
Startup of the ET 200S on PROFIBUS DP
Flow diagram for startup of the ET 200S
6WDUWXSZKHQH[SHFWHG!DFWXDOFRQILJXUDWLRQ
SDUDPHWHUGLVDEOHGRQO\LQWKHFDVHRI'39
6ZLWFKRQWKHVXSSO\YROWDJHIRU
WKH'3VODYH
'3VODYHVHWVRXWSXWVWRDQG
DFFHSWVWKHVHW352),%86
DGGUHVV
/('V21'&9
DQG%)OLJKWXS
'3VODYHUHFHLYHVFRQILJXUDWLRQ
GDWDIURPWKH'3PDVWHU
&RQILJXUDWLRQGDWD
FRUUHVSRQGWRWKHDFWXDO
VHWXS"
1R
6)OLJKWVXSUHG
%)EOLQNVUHG
<HV
%)/('RIILQSXWVDQGRXWSXWV
HQDEOHGGDWDWUDQVIHUEHWZHHQ
(76DQG'30DVWHUSRVVLEOH
Figure 6-5
5HPHG\0DWFKFRQILJXUDWLRQGDWD
WRVHWXSRUYLFHYHUVD
Startup of the ET 200S on PROFIBUS DP

6-11

Note
All interface modules support the default startup. In other words, configuration using the
GSD file or HW Config is not necessary.
The following conditions apply:
Preset parameters are used.
AKF (general identifier format in compliance with the PROFIBUS standard) in the
configuration frame
Grouping (packing) of the electronic modules is not possible without parameter
assignment.
All supply voltages must be switched on at the power modules.
It is not possible to remove or insert modules during operation.
See also
Parameters for digital output modules (Page 11-4)
Parameters for digital input modules (Page 11-1)
Parameters for 4DI NAMUR (Page 11-3)
Parameters for analog electronic modules 2AI U ST, 2AI I 2WIRE ST, 4AI I 2WIRE ST, and
2AI I 4WIRE ST (Page 12-26)
Parameters for analog electronic modules 2AO U ST, 2AO U HF and 2AO I ST, 2AO I HF
(Page 12-27)
Parameters for 2AI RTD High Feature analog electronic module (Page 12-31)
Parameters for analog electronic modules 2AI RTD ST, 2AI TC ST, and 2AI TC HF
(Page 12-34)
Parameters for analog electronic modules 2AI U High Speed, 2AI I 2WIRE High Speed, and
2AI I 4WIRE High Speed (Page 12-28)
Parameters for analog electronic modules 2AI U HF and 2AI I 2/4WIRE HF (Page 12-27)
Channel-specific diagnostics (Page 6-40)
6-12


6.2.4
Diagnostics using LED display
6.2.4.1
LED displays on the interface module
Interface module
LED display on the interface module:
(76
6)
%)
21
Group error (red)
Bus fault (red)
Supply voltage (green)

6-13

Status and error displays using LEDs on IM151-1 BASIC/IM151-1 STANDARD/

IM151-1 FO STANDARD/IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE
The table below shows the status and error displays of the IM151-1 BASIC,
IM151-1 STANDARD, IM151-1 FO STANDARD, and IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE interface
modules.
Table 6-3
Status and error displays of the IM151-1 BASIC/ IM151-1 STANDARD/ IM151-1 FO STANDARD/
Event (LEDs)
Cause
SF
BF
ON
Off
Off
Off
Action
There is no voltage at the interface module, or

the interface module has a hardware defect.
Switch on the power supply voltage DC 24 V

on the interface module.
On
There is voltage at the interface module.
Flashing
On
The interface module is not configured or is

configured incorrectly. No data exchange is
taking place between the DP master and the
interface module.
Causes:
The PROFIBUS address is incorrect.
Configuration error
Parameter assignment error
*
On
On
Transmission rate detection, illegal

PROFIBUS address, or lowermost DIP switch
(PROFIBUS address) not in the OFF position.
Causes:
The response monitoring time has
elapsed.
Bus communication with the interface
module via PROFIBUS DP has been
interrupted.
On
On
The designed configuration of the ET 200S

does not match the actual configuration.
Check the interface module.

Check the configuration and parameter
assignment.
Check the PROFIBUS address.
Set a valid PROFIBUS address (1 to 125) at

the interface module, or check the bus
configuration.
Check that the bus connector is correctly
inserted.
Check whether the bus cable to the DP
master has been disconnected.
Switch the 24 VDC supply voltage off and
on again at the interface module.
Check the configuration of the ET 200S to
determine whether a module is missing or
defective or whether an unconfigured module
is inserted.
Check the configuration (e.g., using COM
PROFIBUS or STEP 7), and correct the
parameter assignment error.
There is an error in an I/O module, or the

interface module is defective.
Off
Off
On
Replace the interface module, or contact your

Siemens representative.
Data exchange is taking place between the DP master and the ET 200S.
The preset configuration and actual
configuration of the ET 200S match.
* Not applicable
6-14


6.2.4.2
LED displays on the power module
Power module
LED display on the power module:
6)
2 )6*
3:5
Group error (red)
Fuse (green) only in the case of PM-E 24 to 48 VDC/120 to 230 VAC)
Load voltage (green)
Status and error displays by means of LEDs on the power module

The table below shows the status and error displays on the power module.
Event (LEDs)
SF
FSG
Cause
Action
PWR
On
Off
Off
No parameter assignment, or incorrect

module inserted. There is a diagnostic
message.
Check the parameter assignment.

Evaluate the diagnostics.
The fuse in the power module has tripped.
Replace the fuse.
There is no load voltage at the power

module.
Check the load voltage.

6-15

6.2.4.3
LED displays on digital electronic modules

LED displays on digital electronics modules:
6)
Group error (red) only for 2DI DC24V HF, 4DI DC24V HF, 2DO DC24V/0.5A HF, 2DO DC24V/2A HF and
4DI NAMUR
Status display for input/output status (green)
Status display for status of the inputs/outputs (green) only for 4DI DC24V ST, 4DI DC24V HF, 4DO DC24V/0.5A ST, 4DO DC24V/2A ST,
4DI UC24..48V HF and 4DI NAMUR
Status and error displays by means of LEDs on the digital electronic module
The table below shows the status and error displays on the digital electronic module.
Event (LEDs)
SF
Cause
On
No configuration or incorrect
module plugged in. Diagnostic
message present.
On
Check the parameterization.

Evaluate the diagnostic
message.
Input/output on channel 0
activated.
On
Input/output on channel 1
activated.
On
Input/output on channel 2 (only for

4DI/DO) activated.
On
6-16
Action
Input/output on channel 3 (only for

4DI/DO) activated.


6.2.4.4
LED displays on analog electronic modules

LED displays on analog electronics modules:
6)
Group error (red)
Status and error displays by means of LEDs on analog electronic modules

The table below shows the status and error displays on digital electronic modules.
Event (LED)
Cause
Action
SF
On
No parameter assignment, or
incorrect module inserted. No load
voltage. There is a diagnostic
message.

Check the parameter

assignment. Check the load
voltage. Evaluate the
diagnostics.
6-17

6.2.4.5
LED displays on the 1COUNT 24V/100kHz electronic module
1COUNT 24V/100kHz
LED displays on the 1COUNT 24V/100kHz:
6)
83
'1
Group error (red)
Status display of counting direction (green)
Status display for digital input/digital output (green)
Status and error displays by means of LEDs on the 1COUNT 24V/100kHz

The table below shows the status and error displays on the 1COUNT 24V/100kHz electronic
module.
Event (LEDs)
SF
UP
DN
Action
message present.

Evaluate the diagnostic message.
On
On
Status of the low-order bits of

the counter, if the counter
counts forward.
On
Status of the inverse low-order

bits of the counter, if the
counter counts backward.
On
DO (direct control, comparator

output) activated.
On
6-18
Cause
DI (HW gate, synchronization,

latch) activated.


6.2.4.6
LED displays on the 1COUNT 5V/500kHz electronic module
1COUNT 5V/500kHz
LED displays on the 1COUNT 5V/500kHz:
6)
83
6<1
'1
Group error (red)
Status display for the digital output (green)
Status display for digital input (green)
Status display for synchronization (green)
Status display for counting direction (green)

Status and error displays by means of LEDs on the 1COUNT 5V/500kHz electronic module
The table below shows the status and error displays on the 1COUNT 5V/500kHz electronic
module.
Event (LEDs)
SF
UP
DN
SYN
Cause
13
Action
16
On
No parameterization. Diagnostic message Check the parameterization.

present.
Evaluate the diagnostic
message.
On
Status of the low-order bits of the counter,

if the counter counts forward.
On
Status of the inverse low-order bits of the

counter, if the counter counts backward.
On
Synchronization is performed (only in

counting modes; image of STS_SYN
acknowledgement bit).
On
DO 1 is activated.
On
DO 2 is activated.
On
DI is activated.

6-19

6.2.4.7
LED displays on the 1SSI electronic module
1SSI
LED display on the EM 1SSI:
6)
83
3
'1
&03
Group error (red)
Status display for change in sensor value (green)
Status display for result of comparison
Status and error displays by means of LEDs on the EM 1SSI electronic module
The table below shows the status and error displays on the EM 1SSI.
Event (LEDs)
SF
UP
DN
Cause
CMP
On
No parameterization.
Diagnostic message present. Evaluate the diagnostic
message.
On
for transmitter value change

from small to larger
transmitter values (including
zero-crossing)
On
for transmitter value change

from larger to smaller
transmitter values (including
zero-crossing)
On
DI (latch) activated.
On
6-20
Action
Set for comparison result

CMP 1


6.2.4.8
LED displays on the STEP 5V/204kHz electronic module
1STEP 5V/204kHz
LED displays on the EM 1STEP 5V/204kHz:
6)
5()
5'<
326
Group error (red)
Status display for digital input REF (green)
Ready for positioning job (green)
Positioning underway (green)
Status and error displays by means of LEDs on the EM 1STEP 5V/204kHz electronic module
The table below shows the status and error displays on the EM 1STEP 5V/204kHz electronic
module.
Event (LEDs)
SF
REF
RDY
Cause
Action
POS
On
message present.
On
Check the
parameterization. Evaluate
the diagnostic message.
REF activated.
On
If parameters were assigned to the

module correctly and pulse enable
has been activated
On
DI activated.
On
If a positioning operation is running

6-21

6.2.4.9
LED displays on the 2PULSE electronic module
2PULSE
LED displays on the 2PULSE:
6)
Group error (red)
Status display for the digital output (green)
Status and error displays by means of LEDs on the 2PULSE electronic module
The table below shows the status and error displays on the 2PULSE electronic module.
Event (LEDs)
SF
On
Cause
8
No parameterization. Diagnostic
message present.
On
Action
Check the parameterization. Evaluate
the diagnostic message.
Input on the channel 0 activated.

On

On
Output on channel 0 is activated.

On Output on channel 1 is activated.
6-22


6.2.4.10
LED displays on the 1POS INC/Digital, 1POS SSI/Digital, 1POS INC/Analog, and
1POS SSI/Analog electronic modules
1POS INC/Digital, 1POS SSI/Digital, 1POS INC/Analog, 1POS SSI/Analog

LED displays on the 1POS INC/Digital, 1POS SSI/Digital, 1POS INC/Analog,
1POS SSI/Analog:
6)
83
'1

2
3 326

Group error (red)
Status displays for digital inputs (green)
Positioning underway (green)
Status display for a change in an actual value (green)

6-23

Status and error displays by means of LEDs on the 1POS INC/Digital, 1POS SSI/Digital,
1POS INC/Analog, and 1POS SSI/Analog electronic modules
The table below shows the status and error displays on the 1POS INC/Digital,
1POS SSI/Digital, 1POS INC/Analog, and 1POS SSI/Analog electronic modules.
Event (LEDs)
SF
UP
DN
POS
Cause
13
Action
14
On
No parameterization.
Diagnostic message
present.
On
Check the
parameterization.
Evaluate the
diagnostic message.
In the case of actual value

change from lower to
higher values
On
In the case of actual value

change from higher to
lower values
On
Digital: the positioning runs

and one of the 3 digital
outputs is set.
Analog: the positioning
runs and on the analog
output a voltage not equal
to 0 V is output.
On
DI 0 is activated.
On
DI 1 is activated.
On
6-24
DI 2 is activated.


6.2.4.11
LED displays on the 1SI 3964/ASCII and 1SI Modbus/USS serial interface module
1SI 3964/ASCII and 1SI Modbus/USS serial interface modules

LED displays on the 1SI 3964/ASCII, 1SI Modbus/USS:
6)
7;
5;
Group error (red)
Status displays for digital inputs (green)
Status and error displays by means of LEDs on the 1SI 3964/ASCII and 1SI Modbus/USS serial
interface modules
The table below shows the status and error displays on the 1SI 3964/ASCII and
1SI Modbus/USS serial interface modules.
Event (LEDs)
SF
TX
Cause
Action
RX
On
Hardware fault
Check the module.
Firmware error

Wire break or loose cable between Check the wiring.

the module and the communication
peer1
Communication error
On
Check the communication settings.
The module is sending data via the

interface.
On
The module is receiving data via

the interface.
Only detected in the case of RS-422 interface connections when the default for the receive line is
set to R(A) 5V/R(B) 0V.
1

6-25

6.2.4.12
LED displays on the 4 IQ-SENSE electronic module
4 IQ-SENSE
LED on the electronics module 4 IQ-SENSE:
6)
2

Group error (red)
Status display for the input status (green)
Status and error displays by means of LEDs on the 4 IQ-SENSE electronic module
The table below shows the status and error displays on the 4 IQ-SENSE electronic module.
Event (LEDs)
SF
On
On
Cause
Action
6
No parameter assignment.
There is a diagnostic message.
Underrange of function reserve.
Adjust the reflection light barrier. Clean

the optical system. Replace the
sensor.
Teach-in operation is underway.
Terminate the teach-in operation.

On

On
Input on channel 2 is activated

On Input on channel 3 is activated
6-26


6.2.5
Diagnostic messages of the electronic modules
Actions after a diagnostic message in DPV0 mode

The error is entered in the channel-specific diagnostics in the diagnostic frame:
Several simultaneous diagnostic messages are possible.
Actions after a diagnostic message in DPV1 mode

Each diagnostic message leads to the following actions:
Diagnostics can be reported as diagnostic interrupts in DPV1 mode.
After a diagnostic message is signaled, the message is:
Entered in the diagnostic frame as a diagnostic interrupt block (always limited to one
interrupt)
Stored in the diagnostic buffer of the CPU
OB82 is called. If OB82 is not available, the CPU goes to STOP mode.
Acknowledgement of the diagnostic interrupt (after which a new interrupt is possible).
See also
6.2.6
Evaluating interrupts by ET 200S
Introduction
In the case of certain process states/errors, the DP slave saves one interrupt block for each
process state or error containing relevant information in the diagnostic frame (DPV1 interrupt
mechanism). Independent of this, the diagnostic status of the DP slave is maintained in the
identifier-related diagnostics, the module status, and the channel-related diagnostics.
Interrupts in DPV0 mode

For DPV0 mode, no interrupts are defined based on the PROFIBUS standard. Thus,
interface modules do not trigger an interrupt in DPV0 mode.

6-27

Interrupts in DPV1 mode

The ET 200S supports the following interrupts:
Hardware interrupts
Requirement: Alarms are only supported if you operate the interface modules IM151-1
STANDARD (after 6ES7151-1AA04-0AB0) (in the DPV1 mode), IM151-1 FO STANDARD
(after 6ES7151-1AB03-0AB0) (in the DPV1 mode) and IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE
(in the DPV1 mode).
In case of an interrupt, interrupt OBs are automatically executed in the CPU of the DP
master (see information on program design in the System Software for S7-300/ S7-400
programming manual).
Triggering of a diagnostic interrupt

For an arriving or outgoing event (e.g. wire failure) the module triggers for "enable:
diagnostic alarm" a diagnostic alarm.
The CPU interrupts processing of the user program and processes the OB82 diagnostic
block instead. The result that caused the interrupt to be triggered is entered in the start
information of OB82.
Evaluating hardware interrupts with STEP 7

When a hardware interrupt occurs, the CPU interrupts the processing of the user program
and processes the OB40 hardware interrupt block instead.
The module channel that triggered the hardware interrupt is entered in the start information
of OB40 in the OB40_POINT_ADDR variable. The figures below present the assignment to
the bits of the local data double word 8.
Hardware interrupts for 2DI 24 VDC High Feature and 4DI 24 VDC High Feature electronic
modules:
/%
/%
/%

/%

%LWQR
/'
5LVLQJHGJH&KDQQHO
5LVLQJHGJH&KDQQHO
5LVLQJHGJH&KDQQHO
',
',
5LVLQJHGJH&KDQQHO
Figure 6-6
6-28
Start information of the OB 40: which event has triggered process alarm for digital input
modules


Hardware interrupts for 2AI U High Speed, 2AI I 2WIRE High Speed, and 2AI I 4WIRE High
Speed electronic modules:
/%
/%
/%
/%

%LWQR
/'
/RZHUOLPLWYDOXHQRWPHW&KDQQHO
8SSHUOLPLWYDOXHH[FHHGHG&KDQQHO
/RZHUOLPLWYDOXHH[FHHGHG&KDQQHO
Figure 6-7
Start information of the OB 40: which event has triggered process alarm for analog input
modules
You will find a description of OB40 in the System and Standard Functions reference manual.
Triggering of an insert/remove-module interrupt

Insert/remove-module interrupts are supported in DPV1 mode. The CPU interrupts
processing of the user program and processes the OB83 diagnostic block instead. The result
that caused the interrupt to be triggered is entered in the start information of OB83.
6.2.7
Diagnostics with STEP 5 and STEP 7
6.2.7.1
Reading out the diagnostics
Introduction
The slave diagnostics comply with IEC 61784-1:2002 Ed1 CP 3/1. Depending on the DP
master, slave diagnostics can be read out with STEP 5 or STEP 7 for all DP slaves that
comply with the standard.
Length of the diagnostics frame

The maximum frame length for the ET 200S is as follows:
IM151-1 BASIC: 43 byte
IM151-1 STANDARD, IM151-1 FO STANDARD, IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE
(DPV0 mode): 64 byte
IM151-1 STANDARD, IM151-1 FO STANDARD (DPV1 mode): 110 byte
IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE (DPV1 mode): 128 byte
The minimum frame length is
6 bytes (identifier-related diagnostics, module status, and channel-specific diagnostics
disabled via parameter assignment).

6-29

Options for reading out the diagnostics

The table below shows the options for reading out the diagnostics with STEP 7 and STEP 5
on PROFIBUS DP.
Table 6-4
Reading out the diagnostics with STEP 7 and STEP 5 on PROFIBUS DP

Block or tab in STEP 7
Application
"DP Slave Diagnostics"

tab
Slave diagnostics in plain text on

the STEP 7 user interface
"Diagnosing hardware" in
SFC 13 "DP NRM_DG"
Reading out slave diagnostics

(store in data area of the user
program)
For SFCs, refer to STEP 7
SFC 59 "RD_REC"
Reading out data records of the

S7 diagnostics (store in the data
area of the user program)
See the system and standard

functions reference manual
SFB 52
Read data records from the DP

slave
For SFBs, refer to STEP 7

online help (system
functions/system function
blocks)
SFB 54 "RALRM"1
Receiving interrupts from the

interrupt OBs

online help (system
blocks)
SIMATIC S5 with IM308-C

as DP master
FB 192 "IM308C"
For FBs, refer to the ET 200

Distributed I/O System
SIMATIC S5 with the

S5-95U PLC as DP master
FB 230 "S_DIAG"
Reading out slave diagnostics

(store in data area of the user
program)
Automation system with DP

master
SIMATIC S7/M7
"RDREC"
Reference
STEP 7 online help
online help
manual
Only with S7-400 V3.0 or higher and with CPU 318 V3.0 or higher
Example of reading out slave diagnostics using FB 192 "IM308C"

Here, you will find an example of how to use FB 192 to read out the slave diagnostics for a
DP slave in the STEP 5 user program.
The following assumptions apply to this STEP 5 user program:
The IM308-C occupies as DP master the tiles 0 ... 15 (number 0 of the IM308-C).
The DP slave has PROFIBUS address 3.
The slave diagnostics are intended to be stored in DB 20. However, you can also use any
other data block for this.
The slave diagnostics consist of a maximum 64 bytes (IM151-1 STANDARD).
6-30


STEP 5 user program
STL
Explanation
: A
DB 30
: SPA
FB 192
Name
: IM308C
DPAD
KH F800
Default address area of the IM 308-C
IMST
KY 0, 3
IM No. = 0, PROFIBUS address of DP slave = 3
FCT
KC SD
Function: read slave diagnostics
GCGR
KM 0
Not evaluated
TYP
KY 0, 20
S5 data area: DB 20
STAD
KF +1
Diagnostic data from data word 1
LENG
KF -1
Diagnostic length = joker length (all permitted bytes)
ERR
DW 0
Error code stored in DW 0 of DB 30
Example of reading out S7 diagnostics with SFC 13 "DP NRM_DG"

Here, you will find an example of how to use SFC 13 to read out the slave diagnostics for a
DP slave in the STEP 7 user program.
The following assumptions apply to this STEP 7 user program:
The diagnostic address of the ET 200S is 1022 (3FEH).
The slave diagnostics should be stored in the DB82: starting at address 0.0, length 64
bytes.
The slave diagnostics consist of a maximum of 64 bytes
(IM151-1 STANDARD in DPV0 mode).
STEP 7 user program
STL
Explanation
CALL SFC 13
REQ
:=TRUE
Read request
LADDR
:=W#16#3FE
Diagnostic address of the ET 200S
RET_VAL
:=MW0
RET_VAL of SFC 13
RECORD
:=P#DB82.DBX 0.0 BYTE 64
Data mailbox for the diagnostic in DB 82
BUSY
:=M2.0
Read operation runs over several OB1 cycles

6-31

6.2.7.2
Structure of the slave diagnostics

The figure below shows the structure of the slave diagnostics.
IM151-1 BASIC
IM151-1 STANDARD
IM151-1 FO STANDARD
Byte 0
Byte 1
Byte 2
Byte 0
Byte 1
Byte 2
Station statuses 1 to 3
Byte 3
Byte 3
Master PROFIBUS address
Byte 4
Byte 5
Byte 4
Byte 5
High byte
Low byte
Byte 6
:
Byte 14
Byte 9
Byte 15
:
Byte 15
Byte 16
Module status
:
Byte 34
Byte 35
Byte 17
Byte 36
Byte 18
Byte 37
Byte 42
Byte 61
:
to max.
Byte 109/127
Identifier-related
Diagnostics
* **
max.
48 bytes
More information
Byte 6
:
Byte 8
Manufacturer ID
9 channel-specific diagnostics
(15 for IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE
in the DPV1 mode)
The channel-specific
diagnostics is variable from
0 to 27 byte. This depends on the
number of channel-specific
diagnoses.
Interrupts
(only 1 interrupt possible for each slave
diagnostic frame possible)
* These diagnoses can be disabled or enabled by parameter. If you

disable the diagnoses, they are removed from the diagnostic frame.
** Only in the case of IM151-1 STANDARD (6ES7 151-1AA04-0AB0 or higher), IM151-1 FO
STANDARD (6ES7 151-1AB03-0AB0 or higher) and IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE in the
DPV1 mode.
Figure 6-8
6-32


Note
If you utilize the ET 200S in a redundant system, the slave diagnostics receive an additional
H status block.
Note
The length of the diagnostic frame varies:
For IM151-1 BASIC, between 6 and 43 bytes
For the IM151-1 STANDARD, IM151-1 FO STANDARD and IM 151-1 HIGH FEATURE
(depending on the parameterization)
Between 6 and 62 bytes in DPV0 mode
Between 6 and 110 bytes in DPV1 mode (STANDARD)
Between 6 and 128 bytes in DPV1 mode (HIGH FEATURE)
For IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE, between 6 and 62 bytes in DPV0 mode and between 6
and 128 bytes in DPV1 mode (depending on the parameter assignment).
You can see the length of the last received diagnostic frame in:
STEP 7 from the parameter RET_VAL des SFC 13.
STEP 5 from the parameter ERR of the FB 192.

6-33

6.2.7.3
Station statuses 1 to 3
Definition
Station statuses 1 to 3 provide an overview of the status of a DP slave.
Structure of station status 1(Byte 0)

Table 6-5
Bit
Structure of station status 1 (Byte 0)

Meaning
Cause/remedy
1: The DP slave cannot be addressed by the DP

master.
Correct PROFIBUS address set on the DP slave?

Bus connector connected?
Voltage at DP slave?
RS 485 repeater set correctly?
Reset carried out on DP slave?
1: The DP slave is not yet ready to exchange data.
Wait while the DP slave starts up.
1: The configuration data sent by the DP master to

the DP slave does not match the configuration of
the DP slave.
Correct station type or correct configuration of the DP

slave entered in the configuration software?
1: External diagnostics are available. (Group

diagnostic display)
Evaluate the identifier-related diagnostics, the module

status, and/or the channel-specific diagnostics. Bit 3 is
reset as soon as all the faults have been rectified. The bit
is reset when there is a new diagnostic message in the
bytes of the diagnostics indicated above.
1: The required function is not supported by the DP

slave (for example, changing the PROFIBUS
address by means of software).
Check the configuration.
1: The DP master cannot interpret the response of

the DP slave.
Check the bus configuration.
1: The DP slave type does not match the software

configuration.
Correct station type entered in the configuration software?
1: Parameters have been assigned to the DP slave

by a different DP master (not the one that currently
has access to the DP slave).
The bit is always 1, for example, if you access the DP

slave with the programming device or another DP master.
The PROFIBUS address of the DP master that assigned
parameters to the DP slave is located in the "master
PROFIBUS address" diagnostic byte.
6-34



Table 6-6
Bit
Meaning
1: Parameters have to be reassigned to the DP slave.
1: A diagnostic message is pending. The DP slave will not work until the fault has been
corrected (static diagnostic message).
1: The bit is always set to "1" in the DP slave.
1: Response monitoring has been enabled for this DP slave.
1: The DP slave has received the "FREEZE" control command 1.
1: The DP slave has received the "SYNC" control command 1.
0: The bit is always at 0.
1: The DP slave is disabled, that is, it has been removed from the processing in progress.
The bit is updated only if another diagnostic message changes, too.

Table 6-7
Bit
0 to 6
7
6.2.7.4
Meaning
0: The bits are always at "0".
1:
There are more diagnostic messages than the DP slave can store.
The DP master cannot enter all the diagnostic messages sent by the DP slave in its
diagnostic buffer (channel-specific diagnostics).
Master PROFIBUS address
Definition
The master PROFIBUS address diagnostic byte contains the PROFIBUS address of the
DP master that:
Assigned parameters to the DP slave and
Has read and write access to the DP slave
The master PROFIBUS address is in byte 3 of the slave diagnostics.

6-35

6.2.7.5
Manufacturer ID
Structure
The manufacturer ID contains a code that describes the type of the DP slave.
The table below shows the structure of the manufacturer ID (Bytes 4, 5).
Table 6-8
Structure of the manufacturer ID (Bytes 4, 5)
Byte 4
6.2.7.6
Byte 5
Manufacturer ID for
80H
F3H
ET 200S with IM151-1 BASIC
80H
6AH
ET 200S with IM151-1 STANDARD
80H
6BH
ET 200S with IM151-1 FO STANDARD
80H
E0H
ET 200S with IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE
Identifier-related diagnostics
Definition
The identifier-related diagnostics indicate whether or not modules of the ET 200S have
errors/faults. The identifier-related diagnostics start at byte 6 and comprise:
3 bytes in the case of IM151-1 BASIC
9 bytes in the case of IM151-1 STANDARD, IM151-1 FO STANDARD, and
Structure of the identifier-related diagnostics

The identifier-related diagnostics for ET 200S is structured as follows with the
IM151-1 BASIC interface module:

%\WH

%LWQR

/HQJWKRIWKHPRGXOHGLDJQRVLV
LQFOXGLQJE\WH E\WHV
&RGHIRU,'UHODWHGGLDJQRVWLFV
%\WH
%\WH

%LWQR

0RGXOHWR
0RGXOHWR
(YHQWVRQWKH
FRUUHVSRQGLQJPRGXOH
DUHLQGLFDWHGE\VHWELWV
$OZD\V
Figure 6-9
6-36
Structure of the identifier-related diagnostics for ET 200S with IM151-1 BASIC


The identifier-related diagnostics for ET 200S is structured as follows with the
modules:
%\WH

%LWQR

/HQJWKRIWKHPRGXOHGLDJQRVLVLQFOXGLQJE\WH
E\WHV
&RGHIRU,'UHODWHGGLDJQRVWLFV
%\WH
%\WH
%\WH
%\WH
%\WH
%\WH
%\WH
%\WH

%LWQR
0RGXOHWR
0RGXOHWR
0RGXOHWR
0RGXOHWR
0RGXOHWR
0RGXOHWR
0RGXOHWR
0RGXOHWR

(YHQWVRQWKH
FRUUHVSRQGLQJPRGXOH
DUHLQGLFDWHGE\VHWELWV
$OZD\V
Figure 6-10
6.2.7.7
Structure of the identifier-related diagnostics for ET 200S with IM151-1 STANDARD,

IM151-1 FO STANDARD, and IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE
Module status
Definition
The module status indicates the status of the configured modules and expands on the
identifier-related diagnostics with regard to the configuration. The module status begins after
the identifier-related diagnostics and comprises:
7 bytes in the case of IM151-1 BASIC
20 bytes in the case of IM151-1 STANDARD, IM151-1 FO STANDARD, and

6-37

Structure of the module status

The module status for ET 200S is structured as follows with the IM151-1 BASIC interface
module:
%\WH

%LWQR
/HQJWKRIWKHPRGXOHVWDWXV
LQFOXGLQJE\WH E\WHV
&RGHIRUPRGXOHVWDWXV
%\WH
+
6WDWXVW\SH0RGXOH6WDWXV
%\WH
+
LUUHOHYDQW
%\WH
+
LUUHOHYDQW

%\WH
%\WH
%\WH

%LWQR
0RGXOHVWR
0RGXOHVWR
0RGXOHVWR
%PRGXOH2.YDOLGXVHUGDWD
%PRGXOHHUURULQYDOLGXVHUGDWD
%LQFRUUHFWPRGXOHLQYDOLGXVHUGDWD
%QRPRGXOHRUPRGXOHIDLOXUH
LQYDOLGXVHUGDWD
Figure 6-11
Structure of the module status for ET 200S with IM151-1 BASIC
The module status for ET 200S is structured as follows with the IM151-1 STANDARD,
IM151-1 FO STANDARD, and IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE interface modules:
6-38



%\WH

%LWQR
/HQJWKRIWKHPRGXOHVWDWXV
LQFOXGLQJE\WH E\WHV
&RGHIRUPRGXOHVWDWXV

+
%\WH
6WDWXVW\SH0RGXOH6WDWXV
%\WH
+
LUUHOHYDQW
%\WH
+
LUUHOHYDQW

%\WH
%\WH
%\WH
%\WH
%\WH
%\WH
%\WH
%\WH
%\WH
%\WH
%\WH
%\WH
%\WH
%\WH
%\WH
%\WH
DOZD\V
Figure 6-12
%LWQR
0RGXOHVWR
0RGXOHVWR
0RGXOHVWR
0RGXOHVWR
0RGXOHVWR
0RGXOHVWR
0RGXOHVWR
0RGXOHVWR
0RGXOHVWR
0RGXOHVWR
0RGXOHVWR
0RGXOHVWR
0RGXOHVWR
0RGXOHVWR
0RGXOHVWR
0RGXOHVWR
%PRGXOH2.YDOLGXVHUGDWD
%PRGXOHHUURULQYDOLGXVHUGDWD
%LQFRUUHFWPRGXOHLQYDOLGXVHUGDWD
%QRPRGXOHRUPRGXOHIDLOXUH
LQYDOLGXVHUGDWD
Structure of the module status for ET 200S with IM151-1 STANDARD,

IM151 FO STANDARD, and IM151 HIGH FEATURE

6-39

6.2.7.8
Channel-specific diagnostics
Definition
The channel-specific diagnostics give information on channel faults of modules and expand
on the identifier-related diagnostics. The channel-specific diagnostics start after the module
status (if parameters are preset accordingly). The maximum length is limited by the
maximum total length of the slave diagnostics of 43/62 bytes in DPV0 mode or 110/128
bytes in DPV1 mode. The channel-specific diagnostics do not affect the module status.
A maximum of 9 (in DPV0/DPV1 mode) or 15 (in DPV1 mode with
IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE) channel-specific diagnostic messages are possible.
Setup of the channel-specific diagnostics

The channel-specific diagnostics for ET 200S are structured as follows with the
IM151-1 BASIC interface module:

%\WH

%LWQR

%XSWR %0RGXOHVORWWKDWVHQGVWKH
FKDQQHOVSHFLILFGLDJQRVLV
&RGHIRUFKDQQHOVSHFLILFGLDJQRVLV

%LWQR
%\WH
%XSWR%1XPEHURIWKHFKDQQHOWKDWVHQGVWKHGLDJQRVLV
%,QSXWFKDQQHO
%2XWSXWFKDQQHO
%,QSXWRXWSXWFKDQQHO

%LWQR
%\WH
(UURUW\SH
&KDQQHO
W\SH
%\WHV
WR
Figure 6-13
6-40
%%LW
%ELWV
%ELWV
%%\WH
%:RUG
%ZRUGV
1H[WFKDQQHOVSHFLILFGLDJQRVWLFPHVVDJH
DVVLJQPHQWDVIRUE\WHVWR
Structure of the channel-specific diagnostics for ET 200S with IM151-1 BASIC


The channel-specific diagnostics for ET 200S is structured as follows with the
modules:
%\WH

%LWQR
%WR%6ORWRIWKHPRGXOH
WKDWVXSSOLHVWKHFKDQQHOVSHFLILFGLDJQRVLV
&RGHIRUFKDQQHOVSHFLILFGLDJQRVLV

%LWQR
%\WH
%WR%1XPEHURIWKHFKDQQHOWKDWVXSSOLHVWKHGLDJQRVLV
%,QSXWFKDQQHO
%2XWSXWFKDQQHO
%,QSXWRXWSXWFKDQQHO

%LWQR
%\WH
(UURUW\SHVHHIROORZLQJWDEOHV
&KDQQHOW\SH %%LW
%ELWV
%ELWV
%%\WH
%:RUG
%:RUGV
%\WH
WR
1H[WFKDQQHOVSHFLILFGLDJQRVWLFPHVVDJH
DVVLJQPHQWDVIRUE\WHVWR
0D[E\WH
0D[E\WH
0D[E\WH
LQ'39PRGH,0,0)267$1'$5',0+,*+)($785(
LQ'39PRGH,0,0)267$1'$5'
LQ'39PRGH,0+,*+)($785(
Structure of the channel-specific diagnostics for ET 200S with IM151-1 STANDARD,

IM151-1 FO STANDARD, and IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE
Note
The slot of the module is encoded in bits 0 to 5 of byte 16/35. Necessary: displayed number
+1 slot of the module (0 slot 1; 1 slot 2; 3 slot 4 etc.)
In bits 6/7 of byte 17/36, 00B is output if a power module reports a channel-specific
diagnostic.

6-41

Power module error types

The diagnostic message is reported on channel 0 and applies to the whole module.
The table below shows the error types on power modules
Table 6-9
Power module error types
Power module electronic

modules
PM-E 24 to 48
VDC/
120 to 230 VAC
PM-E 24 VDC
Error type
Remedy
17D
10001: Sensor or load

voltage missing
No supply voltage, or
inadequate supply
voltage.
Correct the process

wiring. Check the supply
voltage.
18D
10010: Fuse error
The fuse in the power

module has tripped.
Replace the fuse.
PM-E 24 to 48
VDC
---
Meaning
Digital electronic module error types

The table below shows the error types on digital electronic modules
Table 6-10
Digital electronic module error types
Error type
Meaning
Remedy
1D
00001: Short-circuit
Short circuit of the

sensor supply. The
diagnostic message is
issued on channel 0
and applies to the
whole module.
Correct the process

wiring (sensor wiring).
1D
00001: Short circuit

sensor supply. The
diagnostic message is
issued on channel 0
and applies to the
whole module.
Correct the process

wiring (sensor wiring).
Line to the actuator

interrupted.
Correct the process

wiring.
No supply voltage, or
inadequate supply
voltage.
Correct the process

wiring. Check the supply
voltage.
Fuse triggered.
Replace the fuse.
(In conjunction with

IM151-1 BASIC / IM151-1
STANDARD,
6ES7151-1AA02-0AB0 or
higher,
IM151-1 FO
STANDARD,
6ES7151-1AB01-0AB0 or
higher) or IM151-1 HIGH
FEATURE
26D
11010: External error

(In conjunction with
IM151-1 STANDARD, up
to 6ES7151-1AA01-0AB0
or IM151-1 FO
STANDARD, up to
6ES7151-1AB00-0AB0)
4DI 24 to 48 VUC High Feature
6-42
26D


Error type
Remedy
Correct the process
wiring.
1D

actuator supply to
ground.
6D
00110: Wire break

interrupted.
1D
Short circuit on the

signal line to the
sensor.
Correct the process

wiring.
Sensor is defective.
Replace the sensor.
Wrong sensor type

assigned.
Parameterization
correction
Load impedance too

low.
Use a sensor with higher

impedance.
Signal line to a sensor

interrupted.
Correct the process

wiring.
Sensor is defective.
Replace the sensor.
Wrong sensor type

assigned.
Parameterization
correction
Load impedance too

low.
Use a sensor with higher

impedance.
Internal module error

occurred.
Replace the module.
4DI NAMUR
Meaning
6D
00110: Wire break
9D
01001: Error
Sensor signal flutters.
Eliminate cause of error.
16D
10000: Parameterization
error
Parameter assignment
is faulty.
Correct the parameter

assignment.
26D
11010: External fault
Sensor error.
Replace the sensor.
Changeover contact
fault.
Correct the process

wiring.

6-43

Analog input module error types

The table below shows the error types on analog input modules
Table 6-11
Analog input module error types

Analog input modules
2AI U
High
Speed
2AI U Standard
2AI U High
Feature
2AI I 2WIRE
Standard
2AI TC
Standard
Error type
16
D
2AI TC
High
Feature
Meaning
10000:
Parameterization
error
not match with the

configuration.
4AI I 2WIRE
Standard
Parameterization
faulty.
2AI I 2WIRE High

Speed
2AI I 4WIRE
Standard
2AI RTD
Standard
-----
2AI RTD High

Feature
---
Correction of the
parameterization
(diagnostics wire failure
only for the allowed
measuring range
parameterized).
9D
01001: Error

has occurred
(diagnostic message
on channel 0 applies
to the whole module).
Replace the module.
7D
00111: Upper value

limit exceeded
Value is above the

overcontrol range.
Correct the
module/actuator tuning.
8D
01000: Lower value

limit fallen below
Value is below the

undercontrol range.
Correct the
module/actuator tuning.
6D
00110:
Wire break1
Line to the sensor

interrupted.
Correct the process

wiring.
21
10101:
Reference channel
error2
Error on the reference

channel
Check the reference

module
(2AI RTD Standard).
2AI I 2/4WIRE
High Feature
2AI I 4WIRE High
Speed
Remedy
Module cannot
Correction of the
evaluate parameter for configuration (adjust
the channel:
configured and actual
Inserted module does upgrade)
1 In the case of the 2AI RTD High Feature reference module, a wire break is reported for the measured-current and
constant-current lines of the sensor.
2 The
following applies for the modules 2AI TC ST and 2AI TC HF:

Reference channel error is not reported if the RTD module is not parameterized in the GSD file with the PT100 climate.
This applies to IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE (6ES7151-1BA00-0AB0 or higher), IM151-7 CPU and IM151-3 PROFINET IO
(6ES7151-3AA00-0AB0 or higher).)
Analog output module error types

The table below shows the error types on analog output modules.
6-44


Table 6-12
Analog output module error types
Analog output modules

2AO U
Standard
2AO U
High
Feature
2AO I Standard
Error type
16D
2AO I High
Feature
Meaning
10000: Parameterization
error
Correction of the
Module cannot
evaluate parameter for configuration (adjust
configured and actual
the channel:
Inserted module does upgrade)
not match with the
configuration.
Parameterization
faulty.
---
Remedy
Correction of the
parameterization
(diagnostics wire break
only for the allowed
measuring range
parameterized).
9D
01001: Error

has occurred
(diagnostic message
on channel 0 applies
to the whole module).
Replace the module.
---
1D

actuator supply.
Correct the process

wiring.
2AO I Standard
6D
00110: Wire break

interrupted.
Correct the process

wiring.
2AO I High
Feature
1SSI error types

The table below shows the error types on 1SSI.
Table 6-13
1SSI error types

Error type
Meaning
Remedy
1D
Short circuit of the supply to the

absolute encoder.
Correct the process wiring.
9D
01001: 01001: Error
Internal module error occurred.
Replace the module.
Load voltage from the power module is

too low.
Correct the process wiring. Check the

load voltage.
16D
10000: 10000: Parameter

assignment error
Parameters have not been assigned to

the module.
Correct the parameter assignment.
26D
11010: 11010: External error
Start/Stop bit error (error absolute

encoder): Wire failure of the sensor
cable or sensor cable is not connected.
Sensor type, transmission rate, and
monoflop time do not correspond to the
sensor connected; programmable
sensors do not correspond to the
settings on the EM 1SSI electronic
module. Sensor is defective or there
are faults.
Replace the sensor; correct the

process wiring.

6-45

1COUNT 24V/100kHz error types

The table below shows the error types on the 1COUNT 24V/100kHz electronic module.
Table 6-14

Meaning
Remedy
1D
Error type
Short circuit of the sensor supply or the

actuator.
Check the wiring to the sensor. Correct

the process wiring.
5D
00101: Excess temperature
Digital output is overloaded.
6D
00110: Wire break
Line to the actuator interrupted.
9D
01001: Error
Replace the module.
Load voltage from the power module is

too low.

load voltage.

the module.
16D
10000: Parameter assignment

error

The table below shows the error types on the 1COUNT 5V/500kHz electronic module.
Table 6-15

Error type
Meaning
Remedy
1D

actuator.

the process wiring.
5D
00101: Excess temperature
Digital output is overloaded.
6D
00110: Wire break
Line to the actuator interrupted.
9D
01001: Error
Replace the module.
16D

error

the module.
26D
Wire break/short circuit of the 5 V

sensor signals:
A, /A, B, /B, N, /N,
1STEP 5V/204kHz error types

The table below shows the error types on the 1STEP 5V/204kHz electronic module.
Table 6-16
1STEP 5V/204kHz error types

Error type
1D
Meaning
Remedy
Short circuit of the sensor supply.
Check the wiring to the switches.

9D
01001: Error
Replace the module.
16D

error

the module.
6-46


2Pulse error types

The table below shows the error types on the 2PULSE electronic module.
Table 6-17
2PULSE error types

Error type
1D
Meaning
Remedy

actuator.
Check the wiring to the switches and

actuators. Correct the process wiring.
9D
01001: Error
Replace the module.
16D

error

the module.
1POS INC/Digital, 1POS SSI/Digital, 1POS INC/Analog, 1POS SSI/Analog error types
The table below shows the error types on the 1POS INC/Digital, 1POS SSI/Digital, 1POS
INC/Analog, and 1POS SSI/Analog electronic modules.
Table 6-18
1POS INC/Digital, 1POS SSI/Digital, 1POS INC/Analog, 1POS SSI/Analog error types
Error type
Meaning
Remedy
1D

the process wiring.
16D
10000: Parameterization error

the module.
17D
10001: Load voltage 2L+

missing
applies only to 1POS INC/Digital and

1POS SSI/Digital: Power supply
voltage not present or too low.

supply voltage.
26D
11010: external error
Wire break/short circuit of the sensor

signals.
Wire break in the sensor cable, or

sensor cable is not connected.
Replace the sensor.
Sensor is defective or there are faults.

Sensor type, transmission rate, and
monoflop time do not correspond to the
sensor connected; programmable
sensors do not correspond to the
settings on the module.

6-47

1SI 3964/ASCII and 1SI Modbus/USS serial interface modules

The table below shows the error types on the 1SI 3964/ASCII and 1SI Modbus/USS serial
interface modules.
Table 6-19
1SI 3964/ASCII, 1SI Modbus/USS error types

Error type
Meaning
Remedy
6D
00110: Wire break
Wire broken or disconnected.
Check the wiring to the terminals.

Check the cable to the peer.
7D
00111: Upper value limit

exceeded
Buffer overflow; message length

overflow
The P_RCV FB must be called more

frequently.
8D
01000: Lower value limit fallen

below
Message with a length of 0 sent1
Check why the communication peer is

sending frames without user data.
9D
01001: Error
Replace the module.
16D

the module.
22D
10110: Message error
Framing error, parity error
Check the communication settings.
EM 1SI: only for 3964(R)
4 IQ-SENSE error types

The table below shows the error types on the 4 IQ-SENSE electronic module.
Table 6-20
4 IQ-SENSE error types

Error type
1D
6D
00110: Wire break
Meaning
Remedy
Short circuit of the lines between the

electronic module and sensor

the process wiring.
Line to the sensor interrupted.
No sensor connected.
Connect the sensor.
Sensor does not respond.
Replace the sensor.
01000: Lower value limit fallen

below
Maintenance requirement (signal

quality <130%, function reserve),
sensor-dependent
Adjust the reflection light barrier.
9D
01001: Error
Communication error between the

electronic module and sensor
Replace the electronic module or the

sensor.
16D
Parameter assignment is faulty.
Inserted module does not agree with

the configuration.
Correct the configuration (align actual

and preset configuration).
Teach-in error (a new value could not

be determined/obtained)
Repeat teach-in.
8D
Clean the optical system.
Check the wiring.
Inserted sensor does not match

configured sensor.
26D
6-48
11010: external error
Function reserve lower limit violated

(signal quality <110%) or sensor error,
sensor-dependent
Correct the configuration, or insert a

different sensor type.
Adjust the reflection light barrier.
Clean the optical system.
Replace the sensor.


Error type
27D
11011: Unclear error
6.2.7.9
Meaning
Remedy
Teach-in operation is underway.
Terminate the teach-in operation.
Alignment tool is active.
Close the alignment tool.
Interrupts
Introduction
The information in this section is applicable to the IM151-1 STANDARD
(6ES7151-1AA04-0AB0 or higher), IM151-1 FO STANDARD
(6ES7151-1AB03-0AB0 or higher), and IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE interface modules.
Definition
The interrupt section of the slave diagnosis provides information on the interrupt type and the
cause that led to the triggering of the interrupt. The interrupt section consists of a maximum
of 48 bytes.
Position in the diagnostic frame

The interrupt section comes after the channel-specific diagnostics (only in DPV1 mode).
Example: If 3 channel-specific diagnostics are pending, then the interrupt section starting at
byte 44
Data records
The diagnostic data of a module can be up to 44 bytes in length and is located in data
records 0 and 1:
Data record 0 (DS 0) contains 4 bytes of diagnostic data describing the current status of
an automation system. DS0 is part of the header information of OB82
(local data bytes 8 to 11).
Data record 1 (DS 1) contains the 4 bytes of diagnostic data that are also contained in
data record 0 and, in addition, up to 40 bytes of module-specific diagnostic data.
You can read out DS0 and DS1 by means of SFC59 "RD_REC".

6-49

Contents
The contents of the interrupt function depend on the interrupt type:
In the case of diagnostic interrupts, diagnostic data record 1 (up to 44 bytes) is sent as
the interrupt status information (starting at byte x+4).
In the case of process interrupts, the interrupt status information is 4 bytes in length.
For insert/remove interrupt, the length of the interrupt information is
5 byte for IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE (6ES7151-1BA00-0AB0)
0 Byte for IM151-1 STANDARD (6ES7151-1AA04-0AB0 or higher),
IM151-1 FO STANDARD (6ES7151-1AB03-0AB0 or higher) and
IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE (6ES7151-1BA01-0AB0 or higher)
Structure of interrupts
If the configuration was performed with STEP 7, the interrupt data are evaluated and
transferred to the appropriate organization blocks (OBs).
6-50


The interrupt section for the ET 200S is structured as follows:

%\WH[

/HQJWKRIWKHLQWHUUXSWVHFWLRQLQFOE\WH[ PD[E\WHV
&RGHIRUGHYLFHVSHFLILFGLDJQRVLV

%\WH[
%'LDJQRVWLFLQWHUUXSW
%3URFHVVLQWHUUXSW
%5HPRYHLQWHUUXSW
%,QVHUWLRQLQWHUUXSW
,QWHUUXSW
W\SH

6ORWQXPEHUV
%\WH[
,067$1'$5'+,*+)($785(VHQGVLQWHUUXSW

WR6ORWRIWKHPRGXOHUHWXUQLQJWKHLQWHUUXSW

%\WH[
,QWHUUXSWVHTXHQFH
QXPEHUWR
'LDJQRVWLFLQWHUUXSW %DWOHDVWRQHHUURULVSHQGLQJ
%JRLQJHUURU
%5HVHUYHG
3URFHVVLQWHUUXSW
%
5HPRYHLQWHUUXSW
%IRU,0+,*+)($785(
(6%$$%
%IRU,067$1'$5',0)267$1'$5'
DQG,0+,*+)($785(
(6%$$%
%FRUUHFWPRGXOHLQVHUWHG
%ZURQJPRGXOHLQVHUWHG
,QVHUWLRQLQWHUUXSW
%\WH[WR
%\WH[
%\WH[
'LDJQRVWLFGDWD
FRQWHQWVRIGDWD
UHFRUG
3URFHVV
LQWHUUXSWGDWD
Figure 6-14
%\WH[
5HPRYHLQVHUWLRQLQWHUUXSWGDWDIRU
,0+,*+)($785(
(6%$$%
QRWZLWK
,067$1'$5'
,0)267$1'$5'DQG
,0+,*+)($785(
(6%$$%
Structure of the interrupt status of the interrupt section

6-51

Diagnostic interrupt, byte x+4 to x+7

%\WH[

,QFRPLQJGLDJQRVLV%
*RLQJGLDJQRVLV %
0RGXOHSUREOHPLHHUURUGHWHFWHG
,QWHUQDOHUURULQPRGXOH
([WHUQDOHUURU0RGXOHQRWUHVSRQGLQJ
&KDQQHOHUURULQPRGXOH

%\WH[

0RGXOHFODVV
%IRU,067$1'$5'+,*+)($785(
%IRUGLJLWDOHOHFWURQLFPRGXOHDVRIE\WH[
%IRUDQDORJHOHFWURQLFPRGXOHDVRIE\WH[
%IRUSURFHVVUHODWHGPRGXOHDVRIE\WH[
%IRUSRZHUPRGXOHDVRIE\WH[
&KDQQHOLQIRUPDWLRQDYDLODEOHDOZD\V
8VHULQIRUPDWLRQDYDLODEOHDOZD\V

$OZD\V
%\WH[

%\WH[
Figure 6-15
6-52

$OZD\V
Structure of bytes x+4 to x+7 for diagnostic interrupt


Diagnostic interrupt of the modules

%\WH[

&KDQQHOW\SH
%+,QSXWFKDQQHO
&+2XWSXWFKDQQHO
'+3URFHVVUHODWHGPRGXOHPRWRUVWDUWHUSRZHUPRGXOHIDLOVDIHPRGXOH
%\WH[
/HQJWKRIWKHFKDQQHOVSHFLILFGLDJQRVLV
%\WH[
1XPEHURIFKDQQHOVSHUPRGXOH
%\WH[
'LDJQRVWLFHYHQWRQFKDQQHORIWKHPRGXOH
%\WH[

6KRUWFLUFXLW
2YHUORDG
2YHUWHPSHUDWXUH
:LUHEUHDN
9LRODWLRQRIKLOLPLW
%\WH[

9LRODWLRQRIOROLPLW
(UURU
%\WH[

3DUDPHWHUDVVLJQPHQWHUURU
6HQVRURUORDGYROWDJHPLVVLQJ
)XVHGHIHFW
&RPPXQLFDWLRQSUREOHP
5HIHUHQFHFKDQQHOHUURU
0HVVDJHHUURU
%\WH[

$FWXDWRUVKXWGRZQ
6DIHW\UHODWHGVKXWGRZQ
([WHUQDOIDXOW
8QFOHDUHUURU
%\WH[WR[HUURUW\SHRQFKDQQHOVHHE\WHV[WR[
Figure 6-16
Structure starting at byte x+8 for diagnostics frame

6-53

Example of a diagnostic interrupt

([DPSOH
7KH',HOHFWURQLFPRGXOHUHSRUWVWKHVKRUWFLUFXLWGLDJQRVWLFLQWHUUXSWRQFKDQQHO
%\WH[

/HQJWKRIWKHLQWHUUXSWVHFWLRQ E\WHV

%\WH[

'LDJQRVWLFLQWHUUXSW

%\WH[

6ORWQXPEHU
%\WH[

7KHUHLVDWOHDVWHUURU
,QWHUUXSWVHTXHQFHQXPEHU
%\WH[

&KDQQHOHUURU
%\WH[

'LJLWDOHOHFWURQLFPRGXOH
&KDQQHOLQIRUPDWLRQDYDLODEOH
%\WH[DQG[DOZD\V
Figure 6-17
6-54
Example of a diagnostic interrupt



%\WH[

,QSXWFKDQQHO % +
%\WH[

/HQJWKRIWKHFKDQQHOVSHFLILFGLDJQRVLV ELWV
%\WH[

1XPEHURIFKDQQHOVSHUPRGXOH

%\WH[

'LDJQRVWLFHYHQWRQFKDQQHO
%\WH[WR[FKDQQHO
%\WH[WR[FKDQQHO
%\WH[

%LW[ HUURUW\SHRQFKDQQHO VKRUWFLUFXLW
%\WH[WR[FKDQQHO
%\WH[WR[FKDQQHO
Figure 6-18
Example of a diagnostic interrupt (continued)

6-55

Process interrupt of digital input modules

%\WH[
5LVLQJHGJHRQFKDQQHO
5LVLQJHGJHRQFKDQQHO
5LVLQJHGJHRQFKDQQHO
5LVLQJHGJHRQFKDQQHO
%\WH[[DQG[DOZD\V +
Figure 6-19
Structure starting at byte x+4 for process interrupt (digital input)
Process interrupt of analog input modules

%\WH[
/RZHUOLPLWYDOXHH[FHHGHG&KDQQHO

%\WH[
/RZHUOLPLWYDOXHQRWPHW&KDQQHO
%\WH[DQG[DOZD\V +
Figure 6-20
6-56
Structure starting at byte x+4 and byte x+5 for process interrupt (analog input)


Insert/remove interrupt from IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE (only 6ES7151-1BA00-0AB0)

%\WH[
LUUHOHYDQW
%\WH[
%\WH[

6.),'67(3
%\WH[
7\SH,'RIWKHPRGXOHKLJKE\WH
%\WH[
7\SH,'RIWKHPRGXOHORZE\WH
/HJHQG7\SH,'RIDUHPRYHGPRGXOH)&+HPSW\VORW
Figure 6-21
Structure starting at byte x+4 for remove/insert interrupt
Byte x+4 to x+8 contains the identifier of the module that has been removed or inserted.
The interrupt type in byte x+1 indicates whether the modules have been removed or
inserted.
6.2.7.10
Incorrect configuration states of ET 200S on PROFIBUS DP
Invalid configuration states

The following invalid configuration states of the ET 200S lead to station failure of the
ET 200S or prevent data exchange from occurring. These responses occur irrespective of
whether the IM parameters "Operation at preset <> actual configuration", "Replace modules
during operation", and "Startup when expected <> actual configuration" have been enabled.
Two missing modules
Terminating module missing
Number of modules exceeds the maximum configuration
Module missing in slot 1 (in the case of IM151-1 STANDARD, 6ES7151-1AA00-0AB0)
Faulty backplane bus (for example, terminal module is defective)
Note
Starting at IM151-1 BASIC / IM151-1 STANDARD (6ES7151-1AA01-0AB0),
IM151-1 FO STANDARD and IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE: If one module is missing (gap)
and the ET 200S POWER ON is switched, then the station does not start up.

6-57

Diagnostics
The following diagnostics can be used to identify all invalid configuration states:
Interface module
IM151-1 BASIC
All 12 bits set
IM151-1 STANDARD
IM151-1 FO STANDARD
All 63 bits set
6-58
Module status
01B: "Module error, invalid reference data" for all

modules (slots) up to cause of the malfunction
11B: "no module, invalid reference data" after
the cause of the malfunction


6.3 Commissioning and diagnostics on PROFINET IO
6.3
6.3
Commissioning and diagnostics on PROFINET IO
6.3.1
Configuring ET 200S on PROFIBUS IO
6.3.1.1
Basic principles of configuration for the ET 200S on PROFINET IO
Introduction
The IM151-3 PN interface module must be provided with a device name (see chapter on
installation).
Configuration involves configuring and assigning parameters to the ET 200S.
Configuring: Systematic ordering of the individual ET 200S modules (setup).
Parameterizing: Determining the parameters from ET 200S with the configuration
software.
Note
The ET 200S is included in the hardware catalog of HW Config:
IM151-3 PN: STEP 7 V5.3 and Service Pack 1 or higher
The STEP 7 online help provides additional information on the procedure.
GSD file
You configure the ET 200S using the GSD file. This file enables you to integrate the
ET 200S in your system as an IO device. You can download the GSD file as follows:
On the Internet at http://www.ad.siemens.de/csi_e/gsd
The following GSD file is available for the IM151-3 PN interface module:
GSDML-V1.0-Siemens-ET200S-"Date in yyyymmdd".xml
6.3.1.2
Introduction
The instructions below describe how to integrate the GSD file in SIMATIC S7 V5.3 Service
Pack 1 or higher.

6-59


To integrate the GSD file in SIMATIC S7 into the configuration software, proceed as follows:
1. Start STEP 7, and select "Options > Install New GSD File" in HW Config.
2. In the next dialog, select the GSD file to be installed and confirm with "OK."
Result: The IO device is displayed in the PROFINET IO directory in the hardware catalog.
3. Configure the ET 200S using STEP 7 (refer to STEP 7 integrated help).
6.3.1.3
Combine modules for the configuration
Introduction
The IM151-3 PN has a maximum address scope of 256 byte for inputs and 256 bytes for
outputs.
For a better utilization of the available address space of the IO controller, you can combine
multiple electronic modules/ load branches within a byte in the input or output area of the
system image. This occurs though a systematic arrangement and identification of the
ET 200S electronic modules/ motor starters.
Note
The combination is only possible with the IM151-3 PN after 6ES7151-3AA10-0AB0 and
STEP 7 V5.3 SP 2.
You can find a specification of the required address space for individual modules in the
appendix.
You can combine the following device types within a byte:
Motor starters (direct starters and oscillating starters)
Optional other devices may be connected between combinable devices.
The combination procedure is identical to PROFIBUS DP.
6-60


Asymmetry for insert/remove interrupts

The combination of devices takes place during the configuration. By selecting a device label
without "*", you open a byte. By selecting a device with "*", you fill the byte until all bits are
occupied.
For the generation of insert/remove interrupts results in the following asymmetrical behavior:
%\WH[
0RGXOH 0RGXOH 0RGXOH
ZLWKRXW ZLWK
ZLWK

,IUHPRYHGWKHQRQO\WKHUHPRYHGPRGXOHZLOOIDLO
DUHPRYHPRGXOHLQWHUUXSWLVJHQHUDWHG
,IUHPRYHGWKHQDOOPRGXOHVWKDWDUHFRPELQHGLQWKLVE\WH
FDQQRORQJHUEHVXSSOLHGZLWKWKHUHIHUHQFHGDWD
Figure 6-22
Asymmetry for insert/remove interrupts
Further information
You can find further information on combining modules for the configuration in chapter
ET200S configuration on the PROFIBUS DP.
See also
Grouping modules for configuration (Page 6-4)
6.3.2
Commissioning and startup of ET 200S on PROFINET IO
Table 6-21
Software requirements for commissioning on PROFINET IO
Configuration software
used
STEP 7
Configuration software for
a different IO controller
Version
Version 5.3 Service
Pack 1 or higher
Notes
You use HW Config and the supplied GSD file.
You need the GSD file of ET 200S.

6-61

Requirements for commissioning

The following additional requirements must be satisfied for commissioning the ET 200S on
PROFINET IO:
IO device installed
IO device wired
SIMATIC Micro Memory Card inserted, IO device configured with device names
(configured and parameterized)
Supply voltage for the IO controller is switched on (see manual for the IO controller)
IO controller is switched to RUN mode (see manual for the IO controller)
Commissioning the ET 200S

To commission the IO device, proceed as follows:
1. Switch on the voltage supply for the IO device (see relevant section in this manual).
2. If necessary, switch on the supply voltage for the load.
Startup of the ET 200S
Switch on the supply voltage for

the IO device
IO device sets outputs to

"0" and accepts the
configured device name from the
SIMATIC Micro Memory Card
The "ON" LED comes on
"BF" LED flashes.
(with connection to the switch)
BF LED lights up
(without connection to the switch)
IO device receives
connect telegram and
parameter data
from IO controller
"BF" LED off;

inputs and outputs
enabled;
data transfer possible.
Figure 6-23
6-62
Startup of the ET 200S on the PROFINET IO


Note
The IM151-3 PN interface modules support the default startup.
The following conditions then apply:
The preset parameters are used (refer to parameters for the electronic modules).
All supply voltages at the power modules must be switched on.
6.3.3
Diagnostics using LED display
Interface module
LED display on the interface module IM151-3 PN (front door opened):
6)
%)
21
/,1.
5;7;
(76
Group error (red)
Bus fault (red)
Supply voltage (green)

under the front door:
IO controller not available (green)
Data exchange (yellow)

6-63

Status and error displays by means of LEDs on IM151-3 PN interface module

Table 6-22
Status and error displays of IM151-3 PN

LEDs
SF
BF
Meaning
Remedy
ON
Off
Off
Off
There is no voltage at the interface module, or

the interface module has a hardware defect.
Switch on the power supply voltage DC 24 V

on the interface module.
On
There is voltage at the interface module.
Flashing On
Incorrect or no connect telegram - no data

exchange between the IO controller and the
interface module (IO device) takes place, but
the device is physically linked with a switch.
Causes:
Device name is incorrect
Configuration error
*
On
On
The IO device is not linked with a switch
On
On
The designed configuration of the ET 200S

does not match the actual configuration.

assignment.
Check the device name.
Assign a valid device name to the interface
module.
Establish a connection to the IO controller

(via a switch).
module.
Check the bus configuration.
Check that the bus connector is correctly
inserted.
Check whether the bus cable to the IO
controller has been disconnected.
Check the configuration of the ET 200S to

determine whether a module is missing or
defective or whether an unconfigured module
is inserted.
Check the configuration (e.g., with STEP 7),
and correct the parameter assignment error.
There is an error in an I/O module, or the

interface module is defective.
Replace the interface module, or contact your

Siemens representative.
Incoming diagnostic
On
Off
On
Off
Off
On
No SIMATIC Micro Memory Card is

inserted.
The inserted SIMATIC Micro Memory Card
is full or does not have enough storage
space for the device name.
No suitable SIMATIC Micro Memory Card
is inserted (i.e. no SIMATIC Micro Memory
Card from Siemens).
Data exchange is taking place between the IO

controller and the ET 200S.
Before switching on the power supply voltage,

insert an empty SIMATIC Micro Memory Card
in the IM151-3 PN.
The preset configuration and actual

configuration of the ET 200S match.
On
On
Off
Flashing Off
0.5 Hz
6-64
Off
FW update is running
FW update successfully completed


LEDs
SF
BF
Meaning
Remedy
ON
On
Flashing Off
0.5 Hz
External error during FW update

(e.g., incorrect FW)
Use the proper FW for the update
On
Flashing Off
2 Hz
Internal error during FW update

(e.g., read/write error)
Repeat FW update
LINK
RX/TX
Off
Off
There is no connection to the switch/IO

controller
(no IO controller is available on the network)
On
Autonegotiation is complete and PROFINET

transmission rate is accepted
On
On
Transmission/reception is in progress
No uniform transmission rate

Autonegotiation not successful
* Not applicable
Power modules, electronic modules, technology modules

The use of LED displays for diagnostics for power modules, electronic modules, and
technology modules is the same as for ET 200S with PROFIBUS DP.
6.3.4
Diagnostic messages of the electronic modules
Actions after a diagnostic message

Each diagnostic message leads to the following actions:
Several simultaneous diagnostic messages are possible.
Diagnostics are reported as diagnostic interrupts and can be read using data records.
After a diagnostic message is signaled, the message is stored in the diagnostic buffer of
the IO controller.
OB82 is called. If OB82 is not available, the IO controller goes to STOP mode.
Acknowledgement of the diagnostic interrupt (after which a new interrupt is possible).
Causes of errors and corrective actions

The causes of the errors and the correction actions to be taken when specific diagnostic
messages appear are described later on in this manual.

6-65

6.3.5
Evaluating interrupts of ET 200S
Introduction
Interrupts are triggered by the IO device when certain errors occur. Interrupt evaluation
differs according to the IO controller used.
Evaluating interrupts with IO controller

The ET 200S supports the following interrupts:
Process interrupts
In case of an interrupt, interrupt OBs are automatically executed in the CPU of the IO
controller (see information on program design in the System Software for S7-300/ S7-400
programming manual).
You can obtain information on the cause of the error and the error type using the OB number
and the start information.
You can obtain detailed information on the error event in the error OB with SFB 54 RALRM
(read supplementary interrupt information)
Triggering of a diagnostic interrupt

When an incoming or outgoing event (e.g. wire break) is registered , the module triggers a
diagnostic interrupt if "Enable: Diagnostic interrupt" is set.
The CPU interrupts the processing of the user program and processes the OB82 diagnostic
block. The event that caused the interrupt to be triggered is entered in the start information of
OB82.
Triggering of a process interrupt

When a process interrupt occurs, the CPU interrupts the processing of the user program and
processes the OB40 process interrupt block. The event that caused the interrupt to be
triggered is entered in the start information of OB40.
Triggering of an insert/remove-module interrupt

The CPU interrupts the processing of the user program and processes the OB83 diagnostic
block. The event that caused the interrupt to be triggered is entered in the start information of
OB83.
6-66


Diagnostic "Process interrupt lost"

For the modules
2DI DC24V HF (6ES7131-4BB01-0AB0),
4DI DC24V HF (6ES7131-4BD01-0AB0 and
4DI UC24..48V HF (6ES7131-4CD00-0AB0)
the diagnostic "Process interrupt lost" is not available at present.
Note
If more than 90 process interrupts are generated per second, process interrupts can be lost.
6.3.6
Differences in the replacement value behavior
Replacement value behavior station granular with 6ES7151-3AA00-0AB0

If you use an interface module 6ES7151-3AA00-0AB0 in the IO device, the following
replacement value behavior is displayed:
All output modules output their parameterized replacement values or 0 on their outputs.
Replacement value behavior slot granular starting with 6ES7151-3AA00-0AB0

If you use an interface module 6ES7151-3AA10-0AB0 in the IO device, the following
replacement value behavior is displayed:
All outputs whose reference data companion are "Bad", output their parameterized
replacement values or 0 on their outputs.

6-67

6.3.7
Diagnostics with STEP 7
6.3.7.1
Reading out the diagnostics
Options for reading out the diagnostics

Table 6-23
Reading out the diagnostics with STEP 7
Automation system
with
IO controller
SIMATIC S7
6.3.7.2
Block or
tab in STEP 7
Application
Reference
In HW Config via
"Station > Open
ONLINE"
Device diagnostics in
form of plain text on
STEP 7 interface (in the
Quick View, Diagnostics
View, or Module
Information windows)
"Diagnosing hardware" in
SFB 52
"RDREC"
Reading data records

from the IO device

online help (system
SFB 54
"RALRM"
Receiving interrupts from

the IO device

online help (system
STEP 7 online help
blocks)
blocks)
Channel diagnostics
Definition
The channel diagnostics provide information on channel faults of modules.
Channel faults are mapped as channel diagnostics in IO diagnostic data records. Each data
record contains 10 bytes.
Diagnostics can be read for all of the following: a submodule slot, a slot, the slots in a device
that are assigned to an IO controller, and a device. The determination is reached via the data
record number:
6-68
800AH
Channel diagnostics for a submodule slot
800BH
Manufacturer-specific channel diagnostics for a submodule slot (coming)
800CH
Manufacturer-specific diagnostics for a submodule slot (coming and going)
C00AH
Channel diagnostics for a slot
C00BH
Manufacturer-specific channel diagnostics for a slot (coming)
C00CH
Manufacturer-specific channel diagnostics for a slot (coming and going)
E002H
Deviation of the set configuration by the actual configuration of an IO

controller assigned IO device


E00AH
Channel diagnostics for the slots in a device that are assigned to an IO

controller
E00BH
Manufacturer-specific channel diagnostics for an IO controller assigned

channel in an IO device (coming)
E00CH
Manufacturer-specific channel diagnostics for the IO controller assigned

channels in an IO device (coming and going)
F00AH
Channel diagnostics for a device
F00BH
Manufacturer-specific channel diagnostics for an IO device (coming)
F00CH
Manufacturer-specific channel diagnostics for an IO device (coming and

going)
AFF0H to
AFFFH
Manufacturer, order number, creation state, version, etc.
The data record is read with the SFB 52 RDREC (read data record).
Structure of diagnostic data records

You can find the diagnostic data records structure and examples for programming in the
programming manual From PROFIBUS DP to PROFINET IO.
The data records that the ET 200S supports are based on the PROFINET IO - Application
Layer Service Definition V2.0 standard.
You can download the standard at http://www.profibus.com at no cost.

6-69

Channel diagnostics
The channel diagnostics for ET 200S is structured as follows with the IM151-3 PN interface
module:
%\WHDQG
%LWQR

%LWQR
%LWQR
%LWQR
%LWQR
'DWDUHFRUGFRQWHQWV+

%\WHDQG
'DWDUHFRUGOHQJWK

%\WHDQG
9HUVLRQ

%\WHDQG
6ORWQXPEHURIWKHFRPSRQHQWWULJJHULQJWKHLQWHUUXSW

%\WHDQG
6XEPRGXOHVORWQXPEHURIWKHFRPSRQHQWWULJJHULQJWKHLQWHUUXSW
%\WHDQG

%LWQR
,GHQWLILFDWLRQRIWKHLQWHUUXSWVRXUFH+6XEPRGXOH
%\WH
%LWQR
5HVHUYHG
(UURUW\SH
%,QFRPLQJIDXOW
%\WH

%LWQR
%LWQR
%\WHDQG
(UURUW\SH
+ELV)))+5HVHUYHG
+'LDJQRVWLFPHVVDJHIRUVXEPRGXOHLVSHQGLQJ
+0DQXIDFWXUHUVSHFLILFGLDJQRVWLFV
+WR))))+5HVHUYHG
Figure 6-24
6-70
Structure of the channel diagnostics for ET 200S with IM151-3 PN



%LWQR
%LWQR
%\WHDQG
&KDQQHOQXPEHURIWKHFRPSRQHQWWULJJHULQJWKHLQWHUUXSW

%\WH
%LWQR
5HVHUYHG
(UURUW\SH
%,QFRPLQJIDXOW
&KDQQHOW\SH
5HVHUYHG
,QSXWFKDQQHO
2XWSXWFKDQQHO
,QSXWRXWSXWFKDQQHO

%LWQR
%\WH
&KDQQHOW\SH
+IUHHGDWDW\SH +:RUG
+%LW
+'RXEOHZRUG
+ELWV
+GRXEOHZRUGV
+ELWV
+WR))+5HVHUYHG
+%\WH

%\WHDQG
(UURUW\SH
+5HVHUYHG

+)XVHEXUQWWKURXJKWULJJHUHG
+6KRUWFLUFXLW

+0DQXIDFWXUHUVSHFLILF
+8QGHUYROWDJH

+*URXQGIDXOW
+2YHUYROWDJH
+5HIHUHQFHSRLQWQRORQJHUDYDLODEOH
+2YHUORDG

+6DPSOLQJIDXOW
+7HPSHUDWXUHULVH

+7KUHVKROGYDOXHH[FHHGHGIDOOHQEHORZ
+:LUHEUHDN

+2XWSXWVZLWFKHGRII
+8SSHUOLPLWYLRODWLRQ +6HFXULW\UHOHYDQWHUURU
+/RZHUOLPLWYLRODWLRQ $+H[WHUQDOHUURU
+(UURU

%+WR)+0DQXIDFWXUHUVSHFLILF
$+WR)+5HVHUYHG
+WR))+5HVHUYHG
+,QFRUUHFWSDUDPHWHUDVVLJQPHQW+WR)))+0DQXIDFWXUHUVSHFLILF
+3RZHUVXSSO\HUURU +WR))))+5HVHUYHG
Figure 6-25
Structure of the channel diagnostic record for ET 200S with IM151-3 PN
The bytes 16 to 21 repeat themselves for every further error that is reported in this diagnostic
message.
Error types of the other modules

The error types of the power modules, digital electronic modules, analog electronic modules,
and the technology modules are the same as for ET 200S with PROFIBUS DP.

6-71

6.3.7.3
Incorrect configuration states of ET 200S on PROFINET IO
Incorrect configuration states

The following incorrect structure states of the ET 200S lead to a malfunction of the IO device
ET 200S or prevent the entry in the data exchange:
starting with 2 missing modules
Note
If one module is missing (gap) and the ET 200S is powered up, the IO device will not
start up.
6.3.7.4
Interruption of the ET 200S backplane bus
Special diagnostics for bus interruption

If the ET 200S does not start up or data exchange is terminated, the cause can be a
defective terminal module. The defective terminal module causes the ET 200S backplane
bus to be physically interrupted.
The IM151-3 PN (slot 0) has a manufacturer-specific diagnostic consisting of 35 bytes for
locating a bus interruption. The module status and the identifier-related diagnostics are
mapped within this diagnostic, as is the familiar case with PROFIBUS DP.
An interrupt is not generated in the event of an interruption of the ET 200S backplane bus.
The information must be read out explicitly by the user. The data record with index F00BH is
available for this purpose.
6-72


Composition of manufacturer-specific diagnostics

Content of manufacturer-specific diagnostics:
%\WHDQG
%LWQR

%LWQR
%LWQR
%LWQR
%LWQR
'DWDUHFRUGFRQWHQWV+

%\WHDQG
'DWDUHFRUGOHQJWK

%\WHDQG
9HUVLRQ

%\WHDQG

%\WHDQG
%\WHDQG

%LWQR
%\WH
%LWQR
5HVHUYHG
(UURUW\SH
%,QFRPLQJIDXOW
%\WH
%\WHDQG
%LWQR

%LWQR
(UURUW\SH
+0DQXIDFWXUHUVSHFLILFGLDJQRVWLFV
Figure 6-26
Structure of the identifier-related diagnostics for ET 200S with IM151-3 PN on

PROFINET IO

6-73


%LWQR
%LWQR
%\WHDQG

%\WH
%LWQR
5HVHUYHG
(UURUW\SH
%,QFRPLQJIDXOW
&KDQQHOW\SH
5HVHUYHG
,QSXWFKDQQHO
2XWSXWFKDQQHO
,QSXWRXWSXWFKDQQHO

%LWQR
%\WH
&KDQQHOW\SH
+IUHHGDWDW\SH +:RUG
+%LW
+'RXEOHZRUG
+ELWV
+GRXEOHZRUGV
+ELWV
+WR))+5HVHUYHG
+%\WH

%\WHDQG
(UURUW\SH
+5HVHUYHG

+6KRUWFLUFXLW

+8QGHUYROWDJH

+*URXQGIDXOW
+2YHUYROWDJH
+2YHUORDG

+6DPSOLQJIDXOW
+7HPSHUDWXUHULVH

+7KUHVKROGYDOXHH[FHHGHGIDOOHQEHORZ
+:LUHEUHDN

+2XWSXWVZLWFKHGRII
+8SSHUOLPLWYLRODWLRQ +6HFXULW\UHOHYDQWHUURU
+(UURU

$+WR)+5HVHUYHG
+WR))+5HVHUYHG
Figure 6-27
Structure of the channel diagnostic record for ET 200S with IM151-3 PN on the
PROFINET IO
message.
6-74


6.3.7.5
Failure of the load voltage of the power module
Failure of the load voltage

If there is a failure of the load voltage of the power module, electronic modules with their own
controller (including analog and technology modules) exhibit the following behavior:
If such a module is removed during the load voltage failure, a remove-module interrupt is
generated.
If such a module is inserted during the load voltage failure, the associated insert module
interrupt is generated once the load voltage is restored and the module has powered up.
Restoration of the load voltage

After the load voltage is restored and the electronic modules with their own controller are
powered up, the IM151-3 PN interface module reassigns parameters for these modules with
the saved startup parameters.
Note
If parameters have been reassigned for an electronic module with its own controller by
means of the user program, the reassigned data are no longer available after the load
voltage is restored.
6.3.7.6
STOP of IO controller and recovery of IO device
Diagnostics after IO controller STOP

If diagnostics are reported by the IO device while the IO controller is in STOP mode, the
corresponding organization blocks are not started after startup of the IO controller. You must
create an image of the device state in OB100.
Diagnostics after restoration of the IO device

When an IO device is restored, you must use SFB 52 to read the E00CH data record. There,
you will find complete diagnostics for the slots in a device that are assigned to an IO
controller.

6-75

6-76

General technical specifications

7.1
7.1
Standards, certifications, and approvals
Introduction
The general technical specifications comprise the standards and test values met by the
ET 200S distributed I/O system, as well as the criteria used to test the
ET 200S distributed I/O system.
CE certification
The distributed I/O system ET 200S fulfills the requirements and protection target/goals of
the following EC guidelines and matches the harmonized European standards (EN) that
were published for the memory-programmable controllers in the official journals of the
European communities.
73/23/EEC "Electrical Equipment for Use within Fixed Voltage Ranges" (Low-Voltage
Directive)
89/336/EEC "Electromagnetic Compatibility" (EMC Directive)
94/9/EC "Equipment and protective systems intended for use in potentially explosive
atmospheres" (Explosion Protection Directive)
The EC declarations of conformity are kept available for the responsible authorities at the
following address:
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft
A&D AS RD ST Type Test
P.O. Box 1963
D-92209 Amberg
Federal Republic of Germany

7-1

7.1 Standards, certifications, and approvals
UL approval
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. in accordance with

UL 508 (Industrial Control Equipment)
CSA approval
Canadian Standards Association in accordance with

C22.2 No. 142 (Process Control Equipment)
or
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. according to

CSA C22.2 No. 142 (Industrial Control Equipment)
or
HAZ. LOC.
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. according to

CSA C22.2 No. 142 (Process Control Equipment)
UL 1604 (Hazardous Location)
CSA-213 (Hazardous Location)
7-2


APPROVED for use in
Class I, Division 2, Group A, B, C, D Tx;
Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC Tx
The motor starters ET 200S have no cUlus for HAZ. LOC.
Note
You can find the currently valid certificates and approvals on the type plate of each module.
FM approval
Factory Mutual Research (FM) in accordance with

Approval Standard Class Number 3611, 3600, 3810
APPROVED for use in Class I, Division 2, Group A, B, C, D Tx;
Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC Tx
The ET 200S motor starters are not FM-approved. All other modules of the ET 200S are
FM-approved.
In accordance with EN 50021 (Electrical apparatus for potentially explosive atmospheres;

type of protection "n")
II 3 G EEx nA II T4 to T5
Warning
Personal injury and property damage can occur.
Personal injury and property damage can occur can occur in hazardous areas if you
disconnect plug-in connections while an ET 200S is in operation.
In hazardous areas, always deenergize the ET 200S before disconnecting plug-in
connections.

7-3

Warning
Warning Explosion Hazard
Substitution of components may impair the suitability for Class I, Div. 2.
Warning
This equipment is suitable for use in Class I, Div. 2, Group A, B, C, D or in non-hazardous
locations only.
Mark for Australia
The ET 200S distributed I/O system fulfills the requirements of AS/NZS 2064 (Class A).
IEC 61131
The distributed I/O system ET 200S fulfills the requirements and criteria of the standard
IEC 61131-2 (memory programmable controllers, part 2: equipment requirements and
verifications).
PROFIBUS standard
The ET 200S distributed I/O system is based on IEC 61784-1:2002 Ed1 CP 3/1.
Marine type approval

Classification organizations:
ABS (American Bureau of Shipping)
BV (Bureau Veritas)
DNV (Det Norske Veritas)
GL (Germanischer Lloyd)
LRS (Lloyds Register of Shipping)
Class NK (Nippon Kaiji Kyokai)
Use in industrial environment

SIMATIC products are designed for use in industrial environment.
7-4


Table 7-1
Use in industrial environment
Area of application
Requirement for
Emitted interference
Industry
EN 61000-6-4: 2001 2001
Interference immunity
EN 61000-6-2 : 2001 2001
Use in residential areas

If you use the ET 200S in residential areas, you must ensure limit class B in accordance with
EN 55011 with respect to emission of radio interference.
Suitable measures for achieving a limit class B radio interference level are:
Installation of the ET 200S in grounded control cabinets/control boxes
Use of filters in supply lines

7-5

7.2 Electromagnetic compatibility
7.2
7.2
Electromagnetic compatibility
Definition
Electromagnetic compatibility is the capability of an electrical device to function satisfactorily
in its electromagnetic environment without interfering with this environment.
The ET 200S distributed I/O system meets the requirements of the European Union's EMC
law, for example. This requires that the ET 200S distributed I/O system meets the
specifications and directives concerning electrical installation.
Pulse-shaped interferences
The following table shows the electromagnetic compatibility of the ET 200S distributed I/O
system relative to pulse-shaped interferences.
Pulse-shaped interference
Tested with
Corresponds to severity
Electrostatic discharge
8 kV
3 (air discharge)
in accordance with
IEC 61000-4-2
4 kV
2 (contact discharge)
Burst pulses (rapid, transient

interferences) in accordance with
IEC 61000-4-4.
2 kV (supply line)
2 kV (signal line)
3
3
Surge in accordance with IEC 61000-4-5

Only with lightning protection elements (see the DP master manual and
the SIMATIC NET PROFIBUS Networks description)
Asymmetrical interconnection
2 kV (supply line)
2 kV (signal line/data line)
Symmetrical interconnection
1 kV (supply line)
1 kV (signal line/data line)
7-6


7.2 Electromagnetic compatibility
Sinusoidal interferences
The following table shows the electromagnetic compatibility of the ET 200S distributed I/O
system relative to sinusoidal interferences.
RF radiation in accordance with IEC 61000-4-3
Electromagnetic RF field
Amplitude-modulated
80 MHz to 1000 MHz
Pulse-modulated
900 MHz 5 MHz
0.15 MHz to 80 MHz
50% ED
80% AM (1 kHz)
200 Hz repetition rate
150 source impedance
10 V/m
80% AM (1 kHz)
RF coupling in accordance with

IEC 61000-4-6
10 Veff unmodulated
Emission of radio interferences

Emitted interference of electromagnetic fields in accordance with EN 55011: Limit class A,
Group 1 (measured at a distance of 10 m).
Frequency
Emitted interference
From 30 MHz to 230 MHz
< 40 dB (V/m)Q
From 230 MHz to 1000 MHz
< 47 dB (V/m)Q

7-7

7.3 Transport and storage conditions
7.3
7.3
Transport and storage conditions

The ET 200S distributed I/O system surpasses the transport and storage requirements of
IEC 61131-2. The following specifications apply to modules that are transported and stored
in their original packaging.
7.4
7.4
Type of condition
Permitted range
Free fall
1 m
Temperature
From -40C to +70 C
Temperature change
20 K/h
Air pressure
From 1080 to 660 hPa (corresponds to a height of -1000 to 3500 m)
Relative humidity
From 5% to 95%, without condensation
Mechanical and climatic environmental conditions
Climatic environmental conditions

The following climatic environmental conditions apply:
Environmental conditions
Areas of application
Remarks
Temperature
From 0C to 60C
For horizontal installation
From 0C to 40C
For all other mounting positions
From 0C to 55C (see restrictions below)*
For vertical installation
Temperature change
10 K/h
Relative humidity
From 15% to a maximum of 95%
Without condensation
Air pressure
From 1,080 hPa to 795 hPa
Corresponds to an altitude of
-1,000 m to 2,000 m
Contaminant concentration
SO2: < 0.5 ppm;

rel. humidity < 60 %, no condensation
H2S: < 0.1 ppm;
rel. humidity < 60 %, no condensation
Test:
10 ppm; 4 days
1 ppm; 4 days
* Restrictions for area of application: 0 to 55C, vertically mounted

This area of application (0C to 55C, vertically-mounted) is permitted for the following
modules only:
IM151-1 STANDARD: 6ES7151-1AA02-0AB0
PM-E DC24V: 6ES7138-4CA01-0AA0
2DI DC24V ST: 6ES7131-4BB01-0AA0
7-8


7.4 Mechanical and climatic environmental conditions
2DI DC24V HF: 6ES7131-4BB01-0AB0
4DI DC24V ST: 6ES7131-4BD01-0AA0
4DI DC24V HF: 6ES7131-4BD01-0AB0
2DO DC24V/0,5A ST: 6ES7132-4BB01-0AA0
2DO DC24V/0,5A HF: 6ES7132-4BB01-0AB0
4DO DC24V/0,5A: 6ES7132-4BD01-0AA0
2DO DC24V/2A ST: 6ES7132-4BB31-0AA0
2DO DC24V/2A HF: 6ES7132-4BB31-0AB0
4DO DC24V/2A ST: 6ES7132-4BD31-0AA0
2RO NO DC24..120V/5A AC24..230V/5A: 6ES7132-4HB01-0AB0
Note
None of the supply and load voltages of the ET 200S are permitted to exceed 24 VDC.
This voltage limit must be ensured.
Mechanical environmental conditions

The mechanical environmental conditions are shown in the following table in the form of
sinusoidal vibrations.
ET 200S modules
Frequency range
All modules except motor starters 10 f 58 Hz

58 f 150 Hz

Constant
Intermittent
0.15 mm amplitude
0.35 mm amplitude
2 g constant acceleration
5 g constant acceleration
7-9

7.4 Mechanical and climatic environmental conditions
Testing mechanical environmental conditions

The following table provides information on the type and extent of tests for mechanical
environmental conditions.
Test for ...
Test standard
Terminal modules and electronic modules
Vibrations
Vibration test in
accordance with
IEC 60068-2-6
Vibration type: Frequency sweep with a rate of change of 1

octave/minute.
10 Hz f 58 Hz, constant amplitude of 0.35 mm
58 Hz f 150 Hz, constant acceleration of 5 g
Vibration duration: 20 frequency sweeps per axis in each of the 3
mutually vertical axes
Shock
Repetitive shock
7-10
Shock, tested in
accordance with
IEC 60068-2-27
Shock, tested in
accordance with
IEC 60068-29
Type of shock: Half-sine

Strength of shock: 15 g peak value, 11 ms duration
Direction of shock: 3 shocks each in +/- direction in each of the 3
Type of shock: Half-sine
Strength of shock: 25g peak value, 6 ms duration
Direction of shock: 1000 shocks each in +/- direction in each of the 3


7.5 Specifications for dielectric tests, protection class, degree of protection, and rated voltage of the ET 200S
7.5
7.5
Specifications for dielectric tests, protection class, degree of

protection, and rated voltage of the ET 200S
Test voltage
Insulation resistance is demonstrated during the type test with the following test voltage in
accordance with IEC 61131-2:
Circuits with a rated voltage of Ue relative to
other circuits or ground
Test voltage
<50 V
500 VDC
<150 V
2,500 VDC
<250 V
4000 VDC
Pollution degree/overvoltage category in accordance with IEC 61131

Pollution degree 2
Overvoltage category
When UN = 120/230 VAC: III
When UN = 24 VDC: II
Protection class
Protection class I in accordance with IEC 60536
Degree of protection IP 20
Degree of protection IP 20 in accordance with IEC 60529 for all ET 200S modules, that is:
Protection against contact with standard test probes
Protection against foreign bodies with a diameter greater than 12.5 mm
No special protection against water
Rated voltage for operation

The ET 200S distributed I/O system works with the rated voltage and corresponding
tolerances shown in the following table.
ET 200S modules
Rated voltage
Tolerance range
All modules except motor starters
24 VDC
20.4 VDC to 28.8 VDC 1

18.5 VDC to 30.2 VDC 2
120 VAC
93 VAC to 132 VAC (47 Hz to 63 Hz)
230 VAC
187 VAC to 264 VAC (47 Hz to 63 Hz)
Static value: Generation as functional extra-low voltage with safety isolation in accordance with IEC 60364-4-41
Dynamic value: Including ripple, e.g., at three-phase bridge rectifier

7-11

7.6 Variations in general technical specifications for the ET 200S FC frequency converter
7.6
7.6
Variations in general technical specifications for the ET 200S FC

frequency converter
Variations in general technical specifications

The table below presents the variations in the general technical specifications for the
ET 200S FC frequency converter compared to the ET 200S.
Table 7-2
Variations in general technical specifications for the ET 200S FC frequency converter

Section
Variations
Standards, certifications, and approvals
The frequency converter is not

cULus-approved for hazardous locations
FM-approved (Factory Mutual Research)
Marine type-approved
Free fall: 0.35 m
Climatic environmental conditions
Temperature for horizontal installation:

From 0 C to 60 C
Temperature for vertical installation:
From 0 C to 40 C
Mechanical environmental conditions

Rated voltage for operation
Use in Zone 2
7-12
See operating instructions for ET 200S FC

Frequency Converter (6SL3 298-0CA12-0xP0)
The ET 200S FC frequency converter is not
approved for use in hazardous area Zone 2.

Interface modules
8.1
8.1.1
8.1
Parameters for interface modules
Parameters for the IM151-1 BASIC interface module
Overview
Table 8-1
Parameters for the IM151-1 BASIC interface module
IM151-1 BASIC
Value range
Default setting
Applicability
Operation at Preset <> Actual

configuration
Disable/enable
Disable
ET 200S
Disable/enable
Enable
ET 200S
Module status
Disable/enable
Enable
ET 200S
Disable/enable
Enable
ET 200S
Format of analog values
SIMATIC S7/
SIMATIC S5
S7
ET 200S
Interference frequency
suppression
50 Hz / 60 Hz
50 Hz
ET 200S
Reference junction slot
None / 2 to 12
None
ET 200S
Reference junction input
RTD on channel 0/
RTD on channel 1
ET 200S

8-1
Interface modules
8.1 Parameters for interface modules
8.1.2
Parameters for interface module IM151-1 STANDARD, IM151-1 FO STANDARD

and IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE
Overview
Table 8-2

IM151-1 STANDARD/ HIGH

FEATURE
Value range
Default4
Applicability
DP interrupt mode
DPV0/DPV1
DPV0
ET 200S
Bus length
1m/>1m
1m
ET 200S
Operation at preset <> actual

configuration1
Disable/enable
Disable
ET 200S
Diagnostic interrupt3
Disable/enable
Disable
ET 200S
Hardware interrupt3
Disable/enable
Disable
ET 200S
Insert/remove-module interrupt2
Disable/enable
Disable
ET 200S
ID-related
diagnostics
Disable/enable
Enable
ET 200S
Module status
Disable/enable
Enable
ET 200S
Disable/enable
Enable
ET 200S
Option handling, general
Disable/enable
Disable
ET 200S
Option handling: Slot 2 to 63
Disable/enable
Disable
Module
Analog-value format
SIMATIC S7/
SIMATIC S5
S7
ET 200S
suppression
50 Hz/60 Hz
50 Hz
ET 200S
None/2 to 63
None
ET 200S
Reference junction slot input
RTD on channel 0/
RTD on channel 1
ET 200S
Synchronize slave on DP cycle5 enable/disable
disable
ET 200S
Time Ti (read process values)5
Minimum/Maximum
Standard value
ET 200S
Time To (output process

values)5
Minimum/Maximum
Standard value
ET 200S
Note also the Option Handling parameter
In the GSD file, the default setting of the parameter is "Disable".
Parameter can only be assigned in DPV1 mode.
The default settings are applicable for the default startup (if no other parameters are specified by
the DP master).
5 Only
See also
Assigning parameters for option handling (Page 3-34)
8-2

Interface modules
8.1 Parameters for interface modules
8.1.3
Parameters for the IM151-3 PN interface module
Overview
Table 8-3
Parameters for the IM151-3 PN interface module

IM151-3 PN
Value range
Default setting
Applicability
Bus length
1m/>1m
1m
ET 200S
suppression
50 Hz / 60 Hz
50Hz
ET 200S
None / 2 to 63
None
ET 200S
RTD on channel 0/
RTD on channel 1
ET 200S

8-3
Interface modules
8.2 Parameter description for the interface modules
8.2
8.2
8.2.1
Parameter description for the interface modules
DP interrupt mode
Note
This parameter only used for IM151-1 STANDARD (6ES7151-1AA04-0AB0 or higher),
IM151-1 FO STANDARD (6ES7151-1AB03-0AB0 or higher) and IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE.
Description
This parameter allows you to enable or disable DPV1 operation of the ET 200S. If DPV1
operation is enabled, data records and interrupts are supported (can be assigned
parameters) by means of Class 1 and Class 2 services.
Requirement:
The DP master also support DPV1.
8.2.2
Bus length
Description
1 m: Default setting - the maximum bus length is 1 m.
> 1 m: The bus length of the ET 200S is > 1 m up to a maximum of 2 m. This setting will,
however, increase the response time of the ET 200S.
8.2.3
Operation at Preset <> Actual Configuration
Description
If the parameter is enabled and:
Modules are removed and inserted during operation, this does not lead to a station failure
of the ET 200S.
The actual configuration differs from the expected configuration, the ET 200S remains
engaged in data transfer with the DP master.
8-4

Interface modules
If the parameter is disabled and:
Modules are removed and inserted during operation, this leads to a station failure of the
ET 200S.
The actual configuration differs from the expected configuration, there is no data transfer
between the DP master and the ET 200S. Exception: Option handling with RESERVE
modules.
8.2.4
Option handling, general
Description
Using this parameter you can enable or disable the option handling for the entire ET 200S.
8.2.5
Option handling: slots 2 to 63
Description
Using this parameter you can enable or disable the checking of the configuration.
Slots 2 to 63 are enabled: Instead of the configured electronic module you can also insert
a RESERVE module in the relevant slot without diagnostics being reported.
Slots 2 to 63 are disabled: Only the configured module can be located on the relevant
slot. RESERVE modules are treated as incorrect modules. Depending on the setting of
the "Operation at Preset <> Actual Configuration" parameter, the ET 200S will either fail
or remain in data transfer.
8.2.6
Diagnostic interrupt
Description
This parameter allows you to enable or disable diagnostic interrupts. Diagnostic interrupts
are supported
On PROFIBUS DP, when the ET 200S is in DPV1 mode.
On PROFINET IO.

8-5
Interface modules
8.2.7
Hardware interrupt
Description
This parameter allows you to enable or disable hardware interrupts. Hardware interrupts are
supported
On PROFINET IO.
8.2.8
Insert/remove-module interrupt
Description
This parameter allows you to enable or disable insert/remove-module interrupts.
Insert/remove-module interrupts are supported
On PROFINET IO.
8.2.9
Analog-value format
Description
Here you set the number format for all analog electronic modules.
8.2.10
Interference frequency suppression
Description
The frequency of your alternating voltage system can affect measured values negatively,
particularly in the case of both measurements in small voltage ranges and thermocouples.
Specify here the dominant line frequency in your system (50 Hz or 60 Hz).
The interference frequency suppression parameter is valid for all analog electronic modules.
The integration time and conversion time of the individual modules are also set by means of
this parameter. See the technical specifications of the analog electronic modules.
8-6

Interface modules
8.2.11
Description
This parameter allows you to assign a slot (none, 2 to 12 or 2 to 63) where the channel for
measuring the reference temperature is located (calculation of the compensation value).
See also
Connecting thermocouples (Page 12-8)
8.2.12
Description
This parameter allows you to set the channel (0/1) for measuring the reference temperature
(calculation of the compensation value) for the assigned slot.
See also
8.2.13
Synchronize DP slave with DP cycle
Description
You can use this parameter to enable or disable isochronous operation.
If you enable isochronous operation, the I/O of the ET 200S are synchronized with the global
control frame of the master (as an equidistance cycle).
8.2.14
Time Ti (read in process values)
Description
This value can only be set provided you have enabled the "Synchronize DP slave with DP
cycle" parameter.
Ti is the time reserved for reading in the input data at the ET 200S. At the beginning of Ti,
the input data is converted at the terminals and stored in a buffer via the backplane bus of
the ET 200S. Ti ends at the beginning of the next, equidistant DP cycle (i.e. with the global
control frame).

8-7
Interface modules
At this point, the most recent, most up-to-date input data must be available to be read in on
the PROFIBUS subnet. The time Ti must take into account the processing and delay times in
the modules and in the backplane bus of the ET 200S and, in the case of modular slaves, is
therefore dependent on the configuration.
The time Ti can only be set in the specified increments between the minimum and maximum
values. Normally, the default values should be accepted.
8.2.15
Time To (output process values)
Description
This value can only be set provided you have enabled the "Synchronize DP slave with DP
cycle" parameter.
The end of the To time is the point at which the output data is switched to the module
terminals in its converted form. The time To includes the following:
Distribution of the output data via the PROFIBUS DP bus system to the slaves
(= cyclic master- slave data exchange)
Distribution of the output data to the modules via the backplane bus of the slave
Conversion and transfer of the output data to the output terminals of the module
To starts with the arrival of the global control frame. Like Ti, the time can be set only in the
specified increments between the minimum and maximum values displayed. Normally, you
should accept the default values.
8-8

Interface modules
8.3 IM151-1 BASIC interface module (6ES7151-1CA00-0AB0)
8.3
8.3
IM151-1 BASIC interface module (6ES7151-1CA00-0AB0)
Order number
6ES7151-1CA00-0AB0
Features
The IM151-1 BASIC interface module has the following features:
It connects the ET 200S with PROFIBUS DP via the RS485 interface.
It prepares the data for the electronic modules and motor starters that are fitted.
It supplies the backplane bus.
The PROFIBUS DP address of the ET 200S can be set by means of switches.
If the 24 VDC power supply is disconnected, the IM151-1 BASIC interface module is also
disconnected.
The maximum address space is 88 bytes for inputs and 88 bytes for outputs.
The reference potential M of the rated supply voltage of the IM151-1 BASIC to the rail
(protective conductor) is connected by means of an RC combination, thus permitting an
ungrounded configuration.
A maximum of 12 modules can be operated with the IM151-1 BASIC.
The maximum bus length is not relevant.
Terminal assignment
The following table shows the terminal assignment of the IM151-1 BASIC interface module
for the 24 VDC voltage supply and PROFIBUS DP:
Table 8-4
Terminal assignment of the IM151-1 BASIC interface module

View

Signal name

Designation
RxD/TxD-P
Data line B
RTS
Request To Send
M5V2
Data reference potential (station)
P5V2
Supply plus (station)
RxD/TxD-N
Data line A

8-9
Interface modules
View
/ / 0 0
Signal name
Designation
1L+
24 VDC
2L+
24 VDC (for loop through)
1M
Chassis ground
2M
Ground (for loop through)
Block diagram
6)
%)
21
(OHFWULFDO
LVRODWLRQ
352),%86'3
FRQQHFWLRQ
$
$
%
%
%DFNSODQHEXV
(OHFWURQLF
FRPSRQHQWV
(76
EDFNSODQH
EXV
LQWHUIDFH
FRQQHFWLRQ
352),%86
DGGUHVV
,QWHUQDOSRZHU
VXSSO\
Figure 8-1
8-10
3
3
3
3
Block diagram for the IM151-1 BASIC interface module

Interface modules
Dimensions and weight
Dimension W x H x D (mm)
45 x 119.5 x 75
Weight
Approx. 150 g
Data for specific modules
Transmission rate
9.6, 19.2, 45.45, 93.75, 187.5, 500 kbps, 1.5, 3; 6;

12 Mbps
Bus protocol
PROFIBUS DP
Interface
RS 485
SYNC capability
Yes
FREEZE capability
Yes
Manufacturer ID
80F3H
Yes
Isochronous operation
No
Max. output current of the PROFIBUS DP

interface (5, 6)
80 mA
Voltages, currents, potentials

Rated supply voltage of the electronic
components (1L+)
24 VDC
P1
Yes
Power failure bypass
No
Isolation
Between the backplane bus and electronic

components
No
Between the PROFIBUS DP and electronic

components
Yes
Between the supply voltage and electronic

components
No
Permitted potential difference (to the rail)
75 VDC, 60 VAC
Insulation tested with
500 VDC
Current consumption from rated supply voltage

(1L+)
Approx. 70 mA
Power dissipation of the module
Typ. 1.5 W
Status, interrupts, diagnostics
Interrupts
None
Diagnostic function
Yes
Group error
PROFIBUS DP bus monitoring
Red "SF" LED

red "BF" LED
Monitoring of the power supply voltage of the

electronics
Green "ON" LED

8-11
Interface modules
8.4 IM151-1 STANDARD interface module (6ES7151-1AA04-0AB0)
8.4
8.4
IM151-1 STANDARD interface module (6ES7151-1AA04-0AB0)
Order number
6ES7151-1AA04-0AB0
Features
The IM151-1 STANDARD interface module has the following features:
It connects the ET 200S with PROFIBUS DP via the RS485 interface.
Switching off the DC 24 V power supply voltage also switches off the interface module
IM151-1 STANDARD.
The reference potential M of the rated supply voltage of the IM151-1 STANDARD to the
rail (protective conductor) is connected by means of an RC combination, thus permitting
an ungrounded configuration.
A maximum of 63 modules can be operated with the IM151-1 STANDARD.
The maximum bus length is 2 m (can be set).
Supports option handling and status byte for power modules.
Additional features as compared to the IM151-1 STANDARD interface module (up to
6ES7151-1AA03-0AB0):
Noncyclical data traffic (data record read/write):
Class 2 services and class 1 services
Hardware interrupts
Identification data
8-12

Interface modules
Terminal assignment
The following table shows the terminal assignment of the IM151-1 STANDARD interface
module for the 24 VDC voltage supply and PROFIBUS DP:
Table 8-5
Terminal assignment of the IM151-1 STANDARD interface module

View
Signal name

Designation
RxD/TxD-P
Data line B
RTS
Request To Send
M5V2
P5V2
RxD/TxD-N
Data line A
9
/ / 0 0
1L+
24 VDC
2L+
1M
Chassis ground
2M
Block diagram
6)
%)
21
(OHFWULFDO
LVRODWLRQ
352),%86'3
FRQQHFWLRQ
$
$
%
%
%DFNSODQHEXV
(OHFWURQLF
FRPSRQHQWV
(76
EDFNSODQH
EXV
LQWHUIDFH
FRQQHFWLRQ
352),%86
DGGUHVV
,QWHUQDOSRZHU
VXSSO\
Figure 8-2
3
3
3
3
Block diagram for the IM151-1 STANDARD interface module

8-13
Interface modules
45 x 119.5 x 75
Weight
Approx. 150 g
Transmission rate
9.6, 19.2, 45.45, 93.75, 187.5, 500 kbps, 1.5, 3; 6;

12 Mbps
Bus protocol
PROFIBUS DP
Interface
RS 485
SYNC capability
Yes
FREEZE capability
Yes
Manufacturer ID
806AH
Yes
No

interface (5, 6)
80 mA

components (1L+)
24 VDC
P1
Yes
Min. 20 ms
Isolation
Between the backplane bus and

electronic components
No
Between the PROFIBUS DP and

Yes
Between the supply voltage and

No
75 VDC, 60 VAC
500 VDC
Current consumption from rated supply

voltage (1L+)
Approx. 200 mA
Typ. 3.3 W
8-14
Interrupts
yes
Diagnostic function
yes
Group error
Red "SF" LED
Monitoring of the power supply voltage of

the electronics
Green "ON" LED
Red "BF" LED

Interface modules
Updating the firmware of the IM151-1 STANDARD

With STEP 7 V5.1, Service Pack 3 and higher, you can update the firmware of the
IM151-1 STANDARD (via accessible nodes).
To update the firmware you receive files (*.UPD) with the current firmware.
The following prerequisites must be fulfilled:
The IM151-1 STANDARD in the station whose firmware is to be updated must be
accessible online.
The files with the current firmware version must be available in the file system of your
programming device (PG)/PC.
You can find information about the procedure in the STEP 7 Online Help.
Note
We recommend that you perform the firmware update via PROFIBUS DP.

8-15
Interface modules
8.5 IM151-1 FO STANDARD interface module (6ES7151-1AB03-0AB0)
8.5
8.5
IM151-1 FO STANDARD interface module (6ES7151-1AB03-0AB0)
Order number
6ES7151-1AB03-0AB0
Features
The IM151-1 FO STANDARD interface module has the following features:
It connects the ET 200S with PROFIBUS DP via the fiber-optic cable interface
If the 24 VDC power supply is disconnected, the IM151-1 FO STANDARD interface
module is also disconnected.
The reference potential M of the supply voltage of the IM151-1 FO STANDARD to the rail
(protective conductor) is connected by means of an RC combination, thus permitting an
ungrounded configuration.
A maximum of 63 modules can be operated with the IM151-1 FO STANDARD.
The maximum bus length is 2 m (can be set).
Supports option handling and status byte for power modules.
Additional characteristics compared to the interface module IM151-1 FO STANDARD
(up to 6ES7151-1AB02-0AB0):
Operation as a DPV1
Hardware interrupts
insert/remove interrupts
Identification data
8-16

Interface modules
Terminal assignment
In the following table you will find the terminal assignment of the interface module
IM151-1 FO STANDARD for the DC 24V power supply and PROFIBUS DP with fiber optic
interface:
Table 8-6
Terminal assignment of the interface module IM151-1 FO STANDARD

View
5HFHLYLQJVWDWLRQV
Signal name
Designation
5HFHLYLQJVWDWLRQV
)LEHURSWLFLQWHUIDFH
7UDQVPLWWHU
7UDQVPLWWHU
/ / 0 0
1L+
24 VDC
2L+
1M
Chassis ground
2M
Block diagram
352),%86'3
FRQQHFWLRQILEHURSWLFV
6)
%)
21
%DFNSODQHEXV
(OHFWURQLF
FRPSRQHQWV
(76
EDFNSODQH
EXV
LQWHUIDFH
FRQQHFWLRQ
352),%86
DGGUHVV
,QWHUQDOSRZHU
VXSSO\
Figure 8-3
$
%
$
%
)LEHU
RSWLF
LQWHUIDFH
3
3
3
3
Block diagram for the IM151-1 FO STANDARD interface module

8-17
Interface modules
Dimensions W H D (mm)
45 119.5 75
Weight
Approx. 150 g
Transmission rate
9.6; 19.2; 45.45; 93.75; 187.5; 500 kbps,

1.5; 12 mbps
Bus protocol
PROFIBUS DP
Interface
Fiber-optic cable
SYNC capability
Yes
FREEZE capability
Yes
Manufacturer ID
806BH
Yes
No

components (1L+)1
24 VDC
P1
Yes
Min. 20 ms
Isolation

components
No

components
No

(1L+)
Power supply for the ET 200S backplane bus
Approx. 200 mA
Max. 700 mA
Typ. 3.3 W
8-18
Interrupts
yes
Diagnostic function
yes
Group error
Red "SF" LED

red "BF" LED

electronics
Green "ON" LED

Interface modules
Updating the firmware of the IM151-1 FO STANDARD

With STEP 7 V5.1, Service Pack 3 and higher, you can update the firmware of the
IM151-1 FO STANDARD (via accessible nodes).
The IM151-1 FO STANDARD in the station whose firmware is to be updated must be
accessible online.
The files with the current firmware version must be available in the file system of your
Note
We recommend that you perform the firmware update via PROFIBUS DP.

8-19
Interface modules
8.6 Interface module IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE (6ES7151-1BA01-0AB0)
8.6
8.6
Interface module IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE (6ES7151-1BA01-0AB0)
Order number
6ES7151-1BA01-0AB0
Features
The IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE interface module has the following features:
Links the ET 200S with PROFIBUS DP.
prepares the data for the populated electronic modules and motor starters.
Supplies the backplane bus.
synchronizable with the DP cycle (cycle synchronization).
Via switch, the PROFIBUS DP address is adjustable from ET 200S.
If the 24 VDC power supply is disconnected, the IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE interface
module is also disconnected.
The reference potential M of the rated supply voltage of the IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE to
the rail (protective conductor) is connected by means of an RC combination, thus
permitting a floating configuration.
Class 2 services
Hardware interrupts
A maximum of 63 modules can be operated with the IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE.
6ES7151-1BA01-0AB0 and higher:
The maximum bus length on the backplane bus amounts to 2 m.
Operation as DPV1-slave on the Y switching
Security-oriented I-slave-slave-communication via PROFIBUS DP. You saw the
description of this function in the manual S7 Distributed Safety Configuration and
Programming.
Use of fault-secure RESERVE modules
Supports option handling and status byte for power modules
Firmware update via PROFIBUS DP with HW config possible.
Identification Data
8-20

Interface modules
Restrictions when operating the modules with the IM 151 HIGH FEATURE
The following modules cannot be used with the IM 151 HIGH FEATURE:
Module
Up to order number
Up to product version
1Count 24V/100kHz
6ES7138-4DA02-0AB0
1Count 5V/500kHz
6ES7138-4DE00-0AB0
1SSI
6ES7138-4DB00-0AB0
1STEP 5V/204kHz
6ES7138-4DC00-0AB0
1SI serial interface module
6ES7138-4DF00-0AB0
Modbus/USS serial interface module
6ES7138-4DF10-0AB0
2AI U; HIGH FEATURE
6ES7134-4LB00-0AB0
2AI I 2/4DMU; HIGH FEATURE
6ES7134-4MB00-0AB0
2AO U; HIGH FEATURE
6ES7135-4LB00-0AB0
Terminal assignment
The following table shows the terminal assignment of the IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE interface
module for the 24 VDC voltage supply and PROFIBUS DP:
Table 8-7
Terminal assignment of the IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE interface module

View

Signal name

Designation
1 -
2 -
3 RxD/TxD-P
Data line B
4 RTS
Request To Send
5 M5V2
6 P5V2
7 -
8 RxD/TxD-N
Data line A
9
/ / 0 0
1L+
24 VDC
2L+
1M
Chassis ground
2M

8-21
Interface modules
Block diagram
6)
%)
21
(OHFWULFDO
LVRODWLRQ
352),%86'3
FRQQHFWLRQ
$
$
%
%
%DFNSODQHEXV
(OHFWURQLF
FRPSRQHQWV
(76
EDFNSODQH
EXV
LQWHUIDFH
FRQQHFWLRQ
352),%86
DGGUHVV
3
3
3
3
,QWHUQDOSRZHU
VXSSO\
Figure 8-4
Block diagram for the IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE interface module
45 119.5 75
Weight
Approx. 150 g
Transmission rate
9.6; 19.2; 45.45; 93.75; 187.5; 500 kbps, 1.5; 3; 6;

12 Mbps
Bus protocol
PROFIBUS DP
Interface
RS 485
SYNC capability
Yes
FREEZE capability
Yes
Manufacturer ID
80E0H
Yes
Yes1

interface (5, 6)
80 mA

components (1L+)
24 VDC
P1
Yes
Min. 20 ms
Isolation
8-22
Between the backplane bus and

No
Between the PROFIBUS DP and

Yes
Between the supply voltage and

No

Interface modules
75 VDC, 60 VAC
500 VDC
Current consumption from rated supply

voltage (1L+)
Approx. 200 mA
Typ. 3.3 W
Interrupts
Yes
Diagnostic function
Yes
Group error
Red "SF" LED
Monitoring of the power supply voltage of

the electronics
Green "ON" LED
Red "BF" LED
As of 1.5 Mbps
Update of firmware for IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE

As of STEP 7 V5.1, ServicePack 3, you can update the firmware of the
IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE.
The IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE in the station whose firmware is to be updated is
accessible online.
The files with the current firmware version are available in the file system of your
Note
Be sure to use the correct firmware version for the interface module you are using for the
update. An interface module with an older issue date can not be updated with the firmware
version for an interface module with a newer issue date and vice versa.
Note
We recommend you update the firmware using PROFIBUS DP.

8-23
Interface modules
8.7 Interface module IM151-3 PN (6ES7151-3AA10-0AB0)
8.7
8.7.1
8.7
Interface module IM151-3 PN (6ES7151-3AA10-0AB0)
Features of the IM151-3 PN interface module
Order number
6ES7151-3AA10-0AB0
Features
The IM151-3 PN interface module has the following features:
It connects the ET 200S with PROFIBUS IO
Adoption of the device name and backup on SIMATIC Micro Memory Card
Firmware update via SIMATIC Micro Memory Card
The reference potential M of the rated supply voltage of the IM151-3 PN to the mounting
rail (protective conductor) is connected by means of an RC combination, thus permitting
an ungrounded configuration.
Supported Ethernet services
Network diagnostics (SNMP)
Interrupts
Hardware interrupts
The maximum address scope amounts to 256 byte I/O data.
A maximum of 63 modules can be operated with the IM151-3 PN.
The maximum bus length on the backplane bus is 2 m.
Summary of modules within a byte (packing).
Data sets for I/O devices
8-24

Interface modules
Compatibility of the interface module IM151-3 PN (6ES7151-3AA10-0AB0)

Note
Firmware version of the controller used
In order for you to be able to operate the interface module IM151-3 PN
(6ES7151-3AA10-0AB0) on a controller, this must be operated with one of the firmware
versions listed in the tables below. You can utilize the interface module IM151-3 PN
(6ES7151-3AA00-0AB0) independently of the controller firmware version.
The following firmware versions are compatible to the interface module IM 151-3 PN
(6ES7151-3AA10-0AB0):
CPU
Controller
CP
SOFTNET PNIO
315-2 PN/DP
317-2 PN/DP
443-1
343-1
SIMATIC NET-CD
V2.3.2
V2.2
2.0
V 6.3 Hotfix 1
Firmware version
Restrictions when operating the modules with the IM 151 PN

The following modules cannot be used with the IM 151-3 PN:
Module
Up to order number
Up to product version
2AO U; HIGH FEATURE
6ES7135-4LB01-0AB0
2AO I; HIGH FEATURE
6ES7135-4MB01-0AB0
1SI serial interface module
6ES7138-4DF00-0AB0
Modbus/USS serial interface module
6ES7138-4DF10-0AB0

8-25
Interface modules
Terminal assignment
The following table shows the terminal assignment of the IM151-3 PN interface module for
the 24 VDC voltage supply and PROFINET IO:
Table 8-8
Terminal assignment of the IM151-3 PN interface module

View
6KLHOG
/ / 0 0
Signal name
Designation
1 TD
Transmit Data +
2 TD_N
Transmit Data
3 RD
Receive Data +
4 GND
Ground
5 GND
Ground
6 RD_N
Receive Data
7 GND
Ground
8 GND
Ground
1L+
24 VDC
2L+
1M
Chassis ground
2M
Block diagram
,VRODWLRQ
/,1.
5;7;
6)
%)
21
%DFNSODQHEXV
(OHFWURQLFFRPSRQHQWV
8-26
5-
P&
6,0$7,&0LFUR
0HPRU\&DUG
,QWHUQDO
SRZHUVXSSO\
Figure 8-5
352),1(7
FRQQHFWLRQ
3
3
3
3
Block diagram for the IM151-3 PN interface module

Interface modules
45 x 119.5 x 75
Weight
Approx. 135 g
Transmission rate
100 Mbps full duplex
Transmission method
100BASE-TX
Autonegotiation
Yes
Bus protocol
PROFINET IO + TCP/IP
Supported Ethernet services
PROFINET IO (device),
TCP/IP Protocol Suite:
ping
arp
Network diagnostics (SNMP) / MIB-2
PROFINET interface
RJ45
Vendor ID
002AH
Device ID
0301H

components (1L+)
24 VDC
P1
Yes
Min. 20 ms
Isolation

components
No
Between Ethernet and electronic components
Yes

components
No
75 VDC, 60 VAC
500 VDC

(1L+)
Approx. 200 mA
Approx. 2 W
Interrupts
Yes
Diagnostic function
Yes
Group error
PROFINET IO bus monitoring
Red "SF" LED

electronics
Green "ON" LED
Existing connection to network
Green "LINK" LED
Send/receive via network
Yellow "RX/TX" LED

Red "BF" LED
8-27
Interface modules
8.7.2
SNMP
The IM151-3 PN supports the Ethernet service SNMP. MIB-2 (RFC1213) is supported R/W
objects are changeable using SNMP tools and are stored in the device.
Remanent stored SNMP parameters are reset to default settings (STEP 7 V5.3 SP 3 and
higher) in HW config dialog "Target system > Ethernet > Edit Ethernet nodes" "Reset" button
under "Reset to default settings".
After exchange with a factory-new device, the R/W objects in the IM151-3 PN are set to
default settings.
8.7.3
SIMATIC Micro Memory Card for IM151-3 PN
Insertion of the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card

A SIMATIC Micro Memory Card is used as storage medium for the IM151-3 PN. The
SIMATIC Micro Memory Card can be used as a portable data medium..
The following data are saved on the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card.
Technology data (device names)
Data for a firmware update
Note
On one SIMATIC Micro Memory Card, you can save either technology data or update
data.
Life of a SIMATIC Micro Memory Card

The life of an SIMATIC Micro Memory Card depends substantially on the following factors:
Number of deletion or programming operations
External factors, such as ambient temperature
At an ambient temperature up to 60 C, a SIMATIC Micro Memory Card has a useful life of
10 years at maximum 100,000 write/delete operations.
Caution
Possible data loss
If the maximum number of write/delete operations is exceeded, data loss is possible.
8-28

Interface modules
Applicable SIMATIC Micro Memory Cards

The following memory modules are available for use:
Table 8-9
Available SIMATIC Micro Memory Cards

Type
Order numbers
SIMATIC Micro Memory Card 64k
6ES7953-8LF11-0AA0
6ES7953-8LG11-0AA0
6ES7953-8LJ11-0AA0
SIMATIC Micro Memory Card 2M
6ES7953-8LL11-0AA0
6ES7953-8LM11-0AA0
6ES7953-8LP11-0AA0
For storage of the device name, a SIMATIC Micro Memory Card 64k sufficient. For a
firmware update the SIMATIC Micro Memory Cards with 2 MB or higher are required.
Inserting/replacing the card

The SIMATIC Micro Memory Card designed so that it can also be removed and inserted
under power. The beveled corner of the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card prevents it from being
inserted the wrong way around (reverse polarity protection).
The module slot on the IM 151-3 PN is located behind the front door. The front door has a
protruding edge for opening.
The socket of the module slot has an ejector enabling you to remove the card. To eject the
card, push in the ejector with a small screwdriver or ball-point pen.
Position of the module slot for the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card on the IM151-3 PN:
2
3
(6/[$$
6,(0(16
6,0$7,&
0LFUR
0HPRU\
&DUG
(76
Module slot
Ejector

8-29
Interface modules
8.7.4
Updating the firmware of the IM151-3 PN
Introduction
Starting with STEP 7 V5.3, Service Pack 1, you can update the firmware of the
IM151-3 PN.
You receive three files (*.upd) with the current firmware for the update of the firmware.
For performing the update use the file "header.upd".
Procedure
You perform the firmware update using a SIMATIC Micro Memory Card with FW update.
1. Transfer the update files using STEP 7 and your programming device to an empty
SIMATIC Micro Memory Card ( 2 MB).
2. Switch off the power to the IM151-3 PN and insert the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card with
FW update.
3. Switch on the power.
IM151-3 PN recognizes the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card with the FW update
automatically and starts the FW update. During the FW update, the SF and BF LEDs are
illuminated, and the ON LED is off.
Once the FW update is complete, the BF LED flashes at 0.5 Hz.
4. Switch off the power to the IM151-3 PN and remove the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card
with FW update.
5. Insert the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card with the device names and switch on the power
supply again.
The IM 151-3 PN powers up with the new firmware and is now ready for operation.
8-30

Terminal modules
9.1
9.1
Assignment of terminal modules to power modules and electronic

modules
Assignment of the terminal modules to power modules and electronic modules

The following table describes which electronic modules you can use with the different power
modules:
Table 9-1
Assignment of TM-P terminal modules and power modules
Power modules
Screw terminal
15S23-A1
15S23-A0
15S22-01
30S44-A0
F30S47-F1
Order number
6ES7193...
4CC20-0AA0
4CD20-0AA0
4CE00-0AA0
4CK20-0AA0
3RK1 903-3AA00
Spring terminal
15C23-A1
15C23-A0
15C22-01
30C44-A0
---
Order number
6ES7193...
4CC30-0AA0
4CD30-0AA0
4CE10-0AA0
4CK30-0AA0
---
Fast Connect
15N23-A1
15N23-A0
15N22-01
Order number
6ES7193...
4CC70-0AA0
4CD70-0AA0
4CE60-0AA0
PM-E 24 VDC
PM-E 24 to 48
VDC
PM-E 24-48 VDC/

120-230 VAC
PM-E F pm 24
VDC
PROFIsafe*
PM-E F pp 24
VDC
PROFIsafe*
PM-D F 24 VDC
PROFISafe *
The following table describes which electronic modules you can use with the different
terminal modules:

9-1
Terminal modules
9.1 Assignment of terminal modules to power modules and electronic modules
Table 9-2
Assignment of TM-E terminal modules and electronic modules
Electronic modules
Screw terminal
Order number
6ES7193...

15S26-A1
4CA400AA0
15S24-A1
4CA200AA0
15S24-01
4CB200AA0
15S23-01
4CB000AA0
15S24-AT
4CL200AA0
30S44-01
4CG200AA0
30S46-A1
4CF400AA0
Spring terminal
15C26-A1
15C24-A1
15C24-01
15C23-01
15C24-AT
30C44-01
30C46-A1
Order number
6ES7193...
4CA500AA0
4CA300AA0
4CB300AA0
4CB100AA0
4CL300AA0
4CG300AA0
4CF500AA0
Fast Connect
15N26-A1
15N24-A1
15N24-01
15N23-01
---
---
---
Order number
6ES7193...
4CA800AA0
4CA700AA0
4CB700AA0
4CB600AA0
4DI UC24..48V HF
4DI NAMUR
2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A
Standard
2DO 24-230 VAC/2 A
2RO NO 24 to 120
VDC/5 A 24 to 230
VAC/5 A
2DI 24 VDC Standard

2DI 24 VDC High
Feature
4DI 24 VDC Standard
4DI 24 VDC High
Feature
4DI 24 VDC/SRC
Standard
2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A
High Feature
4DO 24 VDC/0.5 A
Standard
2DO 24 VDC/2 A
Standard
2DO 24 VDC/2 A High
Feature
4DO 24 VDC/2 A
Standard
2RO NO/NC 24 to 48
VDC/5 A 24 to 230
VAC/5 A
2AI U Standard
2AI U High Feature
2AI U High Speed
2AI I 2WIRE High
Speed
9-2

Terminal modules
9.1 Assignment of terminal modules to power modules and electronic modules
Electronic modules
Screw terminal
Order number
6ES7193...

15S26-A1
4CA400AA0
15S24-A1
4CA200AA0
15S24-01
4CB200AA0
15S23-01
4CB000AA0
15S24-AT
4CL200AA0
30S44-01
4CG200AA0
30S46-A1
4CF400AA0
Spring terminal
15C26-A1
15C24-A1
15C24-01
15C23-01
15C24-AT
30C44-01
30C46-A1
Order number
6ES7193...
4CA500AA0
4CA300AA0
4CB300AA0
4CB100AA0
4CL300AA0
4CG300AA0
4CF500AA0
Fast Connect
15N26-A1
15N24-A1
15N24-01
15N23-01
---
---
---
Order number
6ES7193...
4CA800AA0
4CA700AA0
4CB700AA0
4CB600AA0
2AI 2/4WIRE High

Feature
2AI I 4WIRE Standard,

2AI I 4WIRE High
Speed
2AI RTD Standard
2AI TC Standard
2AI TC High Feature

2AO U Standard
2AO U High Feature

2AO I Standard
2AO I High Feature

4 IQ-SENSE
1COUNT 24V/100kHz
1SSI
1STEP 5V/204kHz
2PULSE
1COUNT 5V/500kHz
1POS INC/Digital
1POS SSI/Digital
1POS INC/Analog
1POS SSI/Analog
1SI 3964/ASCII
1SI Modbus/USS
4/8 F-DI 24 VDC

PROFIsafe*
4 F-DO 24 VDC/2 A
PROFIsafe*
RESERVE (width 15
mm)
RESERVE (width 30
mm)

9-3
Terminal modules
9.2 TM-P15S23-A1, TM-P15C23-A1, and TM-P15N23-A1 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CCx0-0AA0)
9.2
9.2
TM-P15S23-A1, TM-P15C23-A1, and TM-P15N23-A1 terminal

modules (6ES7193-4CCx0-0AA0)
Order numbers
6ES7193-4CC20-0AA0 (screw terminal)
6ES7193-4CC30-0AA0 (spring terminal)
6ES7193-4CC70-0AA0 (Fast Connect)
Features
Terminal module for power module
Infeed for a new potential group up to the next TM-P terminal module
Connection by means of screw-type terminal with the TM-P15S23-A1
Connection by means of spring terminal with the TM-P15C23-A1
Connection via Fast Connect with the TM-P15N23-A1
2 x 3 terminals
Prewiring of the terminal module
Noise diversion from the electronic module to the DIN rail by means of spring contact
Fitting of a shield contact element
Uninterrupted AUX1 bus with connection to terminals A4 and A8
Pin assignment
The following table presents the terminal assignment of the TM-P15S23-A1, TM-P15C23-A1,
and TM-P15N23-A1 terminal modules:
Table 9-3

terminal modules
View
Terminal
2 L+/L
AUX1
A A
4 8
L+/L
2
M/N
AUX1 A
4
9-4
L+/L
Designation
3 M/ N
Rated load voltage for inserted power module

and associated potential group
A AUX1
4
Any connection for PE or voltage bus up to the

maximum rated load voltage of the module
6 L+/L
7 M/ N
Rated load voltage for inserted power module

and associated potential group
A AUX1
8

M/N
A AUX1
8

Terminal modules
9.2 TM-P15S23-A1, TM-P15C23-A1, and TM-P15N23-A1 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CCx0-0AA0)
Block diagram
Block diagram of the TM-P15S23-A1, TM-P15C23-A1, and TM-P15N23-A1 terminal
modules
1
2
PM-E
3
A
4
7
A
8
3
4
5
Backplane bus
Infeed of the power buses to the electronic modules
Terminals with connection to the power module
Use of terminals A4 and A8 as protective conductor terminals or potential terminals of any

kind
Screw-type/spring terminals
Fast Connect
Weight
15 132 43
15 162 43
Approx. 65 g
Number of terminals

2x3
9-5
Terminal modules
9.3 TM-P15S23-A0, TM-P15C23-A0, and TM-P15N23-A0 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CDx0-0AA0)
9.3
9.3
TM-P15S23-A0, TM-P15C23-A0, and TM-P15N23-A0 terminal

modules (6ES7193-4CDx0-0AA0)
Order numbers
6ES7193-4CD20-0AA0 (screw terminal)
6ES7193-4CD30-0AA0 (spring terminal)
6ES7193-4CD70-0AA0 (Fast Connect)
Features
Connection by means of screw-type terminal with the TM-P15S23-A0
Connection by means of spring terminal with the TM-P15C23-A0
Connection via Fast Connect with the TM-P15N23-A0
2 x 3 terminals
Interrupted AUX1 bus with connection to terminals A4 and A8
This table shows the terminal assignment of the TM-P15S23-A0, TM-P15C23-A0, and
TM-P15N23-A0 terminal modules.
Table 9-4

terminal modules
View
Terminal
AUX1
A A
4 8
L+/L
2
M/N
3
AUX1 A
4
9-6
L+/L
M/N
L+/L
M/ N
Designation
Rated load voltage for inserted power
module and associated potential group
A AUX1
4
Any connection for PE or voltage bus up

to the maximum rated load voltage of the
module
L+/L
M/ N

A AUX1
8

module
A AUX1
8

Terminal modules
9.3 TM-P15S23-A0, TM-P15C23-A0, and TM-P15N23-A0 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CDx0-0AA0)
Block diagram
Block diagram for the TM-P15S23-A0, TM-P15C23-A0, and TM-P15N23-A0 terminal
modules
1
2
PM-E
3
A
4
7
A
8
3
4
5
Backplane bus

kind
Fast Connect
Weight
15 132 43
15 162 43
Approx. 65 g
Number of terminals

2x3
9-7
Terminal modules
9.4 TM-P15S22-01, TM-P15C22-01, and TM-P15N22-01 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CEx0-0AA0)
9.4
9.4
TM-P15S22-01, TM-P15C22-01, and TM-P15N22-01 terminal

modules (6ES7193-4CEx0-0AA0)
Order numbers
6ES7193-4CE00-0AA0 (screw terminal)
6ES7193-4CE10-0AA0 (spring terminal)
6ES7193-4CE60-0AA0 (Fast Connect)
Features
Connection by means of screw-type terminal with the TM-P15S22-01
Connection by means of spring terminal with the TM-P15C22-01
Connection via Fast Connect with the TM-P15N22-01
2 x 2 terminals
Uninterrupted AUX1 bus without a connection to the terminals
Pin assignment
The following table presents the terminal assignment of the TM-P15S22-01, TM-P15C22-01,
and TM-P15N22-01 terminal modules:
Table 9-5
Terminal assignment of the TM-P15S22-01, TM-P15C22-01, and TM-P15N22-01

terminal modules
View
Signal name
2 L+/L
3 M/ N
6 L+/L
7 M/ N
Designation
AUX1
L+/L
L+/L
2
M/N
9-8
M/N

Terminal modules
9.4 TM-P15S22-01, TM-P15C22-01, and TM-P15N22-01 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CEx0-0AA0)
Block diagram
Block diagram for the TM-P15S22-01, TM-P15C22-01, and TM-P15N22-01 terminal
modules
1
2
PM-E
2
3
Backplane bus
Fast Connect
15 x 119.5 x 43
Weight
Approx. 55 g
15 x 142 x 43
Number of terminals

2x2
9-9
Terminal modules
9.5 TM-P30S44-A0 and TM-P30C44-A0 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CKx0-0AA0)
9.5
9.5
TM-P30S44-A0 and TM-P30C44-A0 terminal modules

(6ES7193-4CKx0-0AA0)
Order numbers
6ES7193-4CK20-0AA0 (screw terminal)
6ES7193-4CK30-0AA0 (spring terminal)
Features
Terminal module for the fail-safe PM-E F 24 VDC PROFIsafe power module
Wiring of the fail-safe digital outputs of the PM-E F 24 VDC PROFIsafe
Prewiring possible
Interrupted AUX1 bus with connection to terminals A4 and A8
9-10

Terminal modules
Pin assignment
The following table presents the terminal assignment of the TM-P30S44-A0 and
TM-P30C44-A0 terminal module:
Table 9-6
Terminal assignment of the TM-P30S44-A0 and TM-P30C44-A0 terminal module

View
Terminal
2
1
3
1
60
1
4
3
A
4
1
71
A1
82
1
5
1
6
A A
4 8
24 VDC
Designation
Load voltage of 24 VDC for: inserted power
module, associated potential group. DO 0 and
DO 1 and P1 and P2 voltage buses
Chassis ground
A
4
AUX 1

24 VDC
Load voltage of 24 VDC for: inserted power

module, associated potential group. DO 0 and
DO 1 and P1 and P2 voltage buses
Chassis ground
A
8
AUX 1

DO 0 P
10
DO 0 M
Connections for fail-safe digital output 0

(switching to P/M potential)
11
DO 2 P
12
DO 2 M
Connections (relay contacts) for fail-safe

switching of the voltage buses P1 and P2.
P1 and P2 can also be used as DO 2 M and
DO 2 P (for a diagram of the wiring, see the
ET 200S Fail-Safe Modules manual).

13
DO 1 P
14
DO 1 M
15
DO 2 P
16
DO 2M
Connections for fail-safe digital output 0

(switching to P/M potential)
Connections (relay contacts) for fail-safe
switching of the voltage buses P1 and P2.
P1 and P2 can also be used as DO 2 M and
DO 2 P (for a diagram of the wiring, see the
ET 200S Fail-Safe Modules manual).
Caution
If high currents occur at DO 2 P and DO 2 M, you must wire terminals 11 and 15 (DO 2 P)
and 12 and 16 (DO 2 M) in parallel. Otherwise, the temperature of the terminals cannot be
prevented from rising due to the current load.

9-11
Terminal modules
Block diagram
Block diagram of the TM-P30S44-A0 and TM-P30C44-A0 terminal module
1
2
(OHFWULFDO
0RGXOH
(0

$

$

4
5
Backplane bus
Uninterrupted power buses from the power module
Terminals with connection to the electronic module

kind
Infeed of the AUX1 bus by means of terminals A4 and A8
30 x 132 x 43
Weight
Approx. 116 g (TM-P30S44-A0)

Approx. 100 g (TM-P30C44-A0)
Number of terminals
14
Description of the PM-E F 24 VDC PROFIsafe power module

You can find a description of the PM-E F 24 VDC PROFIsafe power module you can use
with the above terminal modules in the ET 200S Distributed I/O System, Fail-Safe Modules
manual.
9-12

Terminal modules
9.6 TM-PF30S47-F1 terminal module (for PM-D F 24 VDC) (3RK1 903-3AA00)
9.6
9.6
TM-PF30S47-F1 terminal module (for PM-D F 24 VDC)

(3RK1 903-3AA00)
Order number
3RK1 903-3AA00 (screw-type terminal)
Features
Terminal module for the fail-safe PM-D F 24 VDC PROFIsafe power module
Pin assignment
The following table shows the terminal assignment of the terminal module TM-PF30S47-F1:
Table 9-7
Terminal assignment of the TM-PF30S47-F1 terminal module

View
Terminal
2
0
2
7
2
1
2
8
Designation
20
24 VDC
Rated load voltage 24 VDC: for inserted

power module and voltage buses SG 1 to
SG 6 and U 1
21
Chassis ground
27
24 VDC
Rated load voltage 24 VDC: for inserted

power module and voltage buses SG 1 to
SG 6 and U 1
28
Chassis ground

9-13
Terminal modules
9.6 TM-PF30S47-F1 terminal module (for PM-D F 24 VDC) (3RK1 903-3AA00)
Block diagram
Block diagram of the TM-PF30S47-F1 terminal module
1
2
(OHFWULFDO
0RGXOH
(0

Backplane bus
30 196,5 102
Weight
Approx. 300 g
Number of terminals
9-14

Terminal modules
9.7 TM-E15S26-A1, TM-E15C26-A1, and TM-E15N26-A1 universal terminal modules (6ES7193-4CAx0-0AA0)
9.7
9.7
TM-E15S26-A1, TM-E15C26-A1, and TM-E15N26-A1 universal

terminal modules (6ES7193-4CAx0-0AA0)
Order numbers
6ES7193-4CA40-0AA0 (screw terminal)
6ES7193-4CA50-0AA0 (spring terminal)
6ES7193-4CA80-0AA0 (Fast Connect)
Features
Universal terminal module for the electronic modules
Connection by means of screw-type terminal with the TM-E15S26-A1
Connection by means of spring terminal with the TM-E15C26-A1
Connection via Fast Connect with the TM-E15N26-A1
2 x 6 terminals
Uninterrupted AUX1 bus with connection to terminals A4, A8 and A3, A7

9-15
Terminal modules
Pin assignment
terminal modules with the 4-channel digital electronic modules:
Table 9-8

terminal modules with the 4-channel digital electronic modules
View
4
A
4
A
3
8
A
8
A
7
Terminal
Designation
DI0/DO0
DI: Digital input
DI2/DO2
DO: Digital output
24 VDC for DI0/ M for DO0
24 VDC: Sensor supply

voltage
DI1/DO1
DI3/DO3
A
4
AUX1 bus implemented. Connection to terminals A4, A8

and A3, A7.
M: Ground load power

supply
A
3
A
8
A
7

terminal modules with the 2-channel electronic modules and technology modules:
The terminal assignment of terminals 1 to 8 corresponds to that of the TM-E15S24-01,
TM-E15C24-01, and TM-E15N24-01 terminal modules. You will find the various terminal
assignments in the technical specifications of the different electronic modules.
You can obtain the terminal assignment of terminals A4, A8 and A3, A7 from the above
table.
9-16

Terminal modules
Block diagram
Block diagram for the TM-E15S26-A1, TM-E15C26-A1, and TM-E15N26-A1 terminal
modules
(OHFWULFDO0RGXOH
(0
$ $
$ $
Backplane bus
Uninterrupted AUX1 bus with connection to terminals A4, A8 and A3, A7
Fast Connect
15 157 43
Weight
Approx. 70 g (TM-E15C26-A1)
15 202 43
Approx. 83 g (TM-E15S26-A1)
Approx. 95 g (TM-E15NS26-A1)
Number of terminals

2x6
9-17
Terminal modules
9.8 TM-E15S24-A1, TM-E15C24-A1, and TM-E15N24-A1 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CAx0-0AA0)
9.8
9.8
TM-E15S24-A1, TM-E15C24-A1, and TM-E15N24-A1 terminal

modules (6ES7193-4CAx0-0AA0)
Order numbers
6ES7193-4CA20-0AA0 (screw terminal)
6ES7193-4CA30-0AA0 (spring terminal)
6ES7193-4CA70-0AA0 (Fast Connect)
Features
Terminal module for electronic modules
Connection via Fast Connect with the TM-E15N24-A1
2 x 4 terminals
Pin assignment
The following table presents the terminal assignment of the TM-E15S24-A1, TM-E15C24-A1,
and TM-E15N24-A1 terminal modules:
Table 9-9

terminal modules
View
Terminal
1
2
Designation
The assignment depends on which electronic module is

inserted
9-18
A
4
AUX1

inserted
A
4
A
8

module
7
A
8
AUX1

module

Terminal modules
9.8 TM-E15S24-A1, TM-E15C24-A1, and TM-E15N24-A1 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CAx0-0AA0)
Block diagram
Block diagram for the TM-E15S24-A1, TM-E15C24-A1, and TM-E15N24-A1 terminal
modules
(OHFWULFDO0RGXOH
(0
$

$

3
4
5
Backplane bus
Use of terminals 4 and 8 as protective conductor terminals or potential terminals of any kind
Uninterrupted AUX1 bus with connection to terminals 4 and 8
Fast Connect
Weight
15 132 43
15 162 43
Approx. 65 g (TM-E15S24-A1 and
TM-E15C24-A1)
Approx. 72 g(TM-E15N24-A1)
Number of terminals

2x4
9-19
Terminal modules
9.9 TM-E15S24-01, TM-E15C24-01, and TM-E15N24-01 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CBx0-0AA0)
9.9
9.9
TM-E15S24-01, TM-E15C24-01, and TM-E15N24-01 terminal

modules (6ES7193-4CBx0-0AA0)
Order numbers
6ES7193-4CB20-0AA0 (screw terminal)
6ES7193-4CB30-0AA0 (spring terminal)
6ES7193-4CB70-0AA0 (Fast Connect)
Features
Connection by means of screw-type terminal with the TM-E15S24-01
Connection by means of spring terminal with the TM-E15C24-01
Connection via Fast Connect with the TM-E15N24-01
2 x 4 terminals
Uninterrupted AUX1 bus without connection to terminals 4 and 8
Pin assignment
The following table presents the terminal assignment of the TM-E15S24-01, TM-E15C24-01,
and TM-E15N24-01 terminal modules:
Table 9-10

terminal modules
View
Terminal
Designation
1 The assignment depends on which electronic module is

inserted
2
No access to the AUX1 bus.
3
Terminals not used by the electronic module can be used for
4 unneeded connecting wires. The permitted potential
5 corresponds to the potential of the electronic module used.
9-20
6
7
8

Terminal modules
Block diagram
Block diagram for the TM-E15S24-01, TM-E15C24-01, and TM-E15N24-01 terminal
modules
(OHFWULFDO0RGXOH
(0
Backplane bus
Fast Connect
Weight
15 132 43
15 162 43
Approx. 65 g (TM-E15S24-01 and
TM-E15C24-01)
Approx. 72 g (TM-E15N24-01)
Number of terminals

2x4
9-21
Terminal modules
9.10
9.10
TM-E15S23-01, TM-E15C23-01, and TM-E15N23-01 terminal

modules (6ES7193-4CBx0-0AA0)
Order numbers
6ES7193-4CB00-0AA0 (screw terminal)
6ES7193-4CB10-0AA0 (spring terminal)
6ES7193-4CB60-0AA0 (Fast Connect)
Features
Connection via Fast Connect with the TM-E15N23-01
2 x 3 terminals
Pin assignment
The following table presents the terminal assignment of the TM-E15S23-01, TM-E15C23-01,
and TM-E15N23-01 terminal modules:
Table 9-11

terminal modules
View
Terminal
Designation
The assignment depends on which electronic module is inserted
3
5
6
9-22

Terminal modules
Block diagram
Block diagram for the TM-E15S23-01, TM-E15C23-01, and TM-E15N23-01 terminal
modules
1
(OHFWULFDO0RGXOH
(0

Backplane bus
Fast Connect
Weight
15 120 43
15 142 43
Approx. 55 g (TM-E15S23-01 and
TM-E15C23-01)
Approx. 60 g (TM-E15N23-01)
Number of terminals

2x3
9-23
Terminal modules
9.11 TM-E15S24-AT and TM-E15C24-AT terminal modules (6ES7193-4CLx0-0AA0)
9.11
9.11
TM-E15S24-AT and TM-E15C24-AT terminal modules

(6ES7193-4CLx0-0AA0)
Order numbers
6ES7193-4CL20-0AA0 (screw terminal)
6ES7193-4CL30-0AA0 (spring terminal)
Features
Terminal module for the 2AI TC High Feature electronic module
Caution
You can only insert the 2AI TC HF electronic module into the
TM-E15S24-AT/TM-E15C24-AT terminal module. Inserting another electronic module
can result in the destruction of the internal reference junction of the terminal module.
Terminal module has an internal reference junction for temperature compensation.

Temperature compensation is thus possible directly at the reference junction of the
thermocouples.
Connection by means of screw-type terminal with the TM-E15S24-AT
Connection by means of spring terminal with the TM-E15C24-AT
2 x 2 terminals
9-24

Terminal modules
Pin assignment
The following table presents the terminal assignment of terminal module TM-E15S24-AT and
TM-E15C24-AT:
Table 9-12
Terminal assignment of the TM-E15S24-AT and TM-E15C24-AT terminal module

View
Terminal
Designation
1 Assignment: See electronic module 2AI TC HF

2
3 Not available
4
5 Assignment: See electronic module 2AI TC HF
1
6
7 Not available
8
Block diagram
Block diagram of the TM-E15S24-AT and TM-P15C24-AT terminal module
(OHFWULFDO0RGXOH
(0

Backplane bus

9-25
Terminal modules
Weight
15 132 43
Approx. 55 g
Number of terminals
2x2
See also
2AI TC High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7134-4NB01-0AB0) (Page 12-91)
9-26

Terminal modules
9.12 TM-E30S44-01 and TM-E30C44-01 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CGx0-0AA0)
9.12
9.12
TM-E30S44-01 and TM-E30C44-01 terminal modules

(6ES7193-4CGx0-0AA0)
Order numbers
6ES7193-4CG20-0AA0 (screw terminal)
6ES7193-4CG30-0AA0 (spring terminal)
Features
Terminal module for electronic modules with a width of 30 mm and fail-safe electronic
modules
4 x 4 terminals
Uninterrupted AUX1 bus without a connection to terminals 4 and 8 or 12 and 16.
Pin assignment
The following table presents the terminal assignment of the TM-E30S44-01 and
TM-E30C44-01 terminal modules:
Table 9-13
Terminal assignment of the TM-E30S44-01 and TM-E30C44-01 terminal module

View
Terminal
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
59
1
60
1
71
1
82
1
3
1
4
1
5
1
6
Designation

inserted
Terminals not used by the electronic module can be used for
unneeded connecting wires. The permitted potential
corresponds to the potential of the electronic module used.
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16

9-27
Terminal modules
9.12 TM-E30S44-01 and TM-E30C44-01 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CGx0-0AA0)
Block diagram
Block diagram of the TM-E30S44-01 and TM-E30C44-01 terminal module
1
2
(OHFWULFDO
0RGXOH
(0

Backplane bus
Uninterrupted AUX1 bus without a connection to terminals 4 and 8 or 12 and 16
30 132 43
Weight
Approx. 110 g (TM-E30C44-01)

Approx. 125 g (TM-E30S44-01)
Number of terminals
9-28
4x4

Terminal modules
9.13 TM-E30S46-A1 and TM-E30C46-A1 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CFx0-0AA0)
9.13
9.13
TM-E30S46-A1 and TM-E30C46-A1 terminal modules

(6ES7193-4CFx0-0AA0)
Order numbers
6ES7193-4CF40-0AA0 (screw terminal)
6ES7193-4CF50-0AA0 (spring terminal)
Features
Terminal module for the fail-safe electronic modules 4/8 F-DI 24 VDC PRFOFIsafe and
4 F-DO 24 VDC/2A PROFIsafe.
6 x 4 terminals
Uninterrupted AUX1 bus with a connection to terminals A4, A8, A3, A7 and A12, A16,
A11, A15.

9-29
Terminal modules
Pin assignment
The following table presents the terminal assignment of the TM-E30S46-A1 and
TM-E30C46-A1 terminal modules:
Table 9-14
Terminal assignment of the terminal module

View
1
2
3
4
A
4
A
3
9-30
59
1
60
1
71
1
82
AA
1
82
AA
1
71
Terminal
1
3
1
4
1
5
1
6
A
1
6
A
1
5
F-DI
F-DO
Designation
DI 0
DO 0 P
DI: Digital input
Vs1
DO 0 M
DI 2
Vs1
DO P and DO M: Connection for

fail-safe digital output (switching
to P/M potential)
DI 1
DO 1 P
Vs1
DO 1 M
DI 3
Vs1
DI 4
DO 2 P
10
Vs2
DO 2 M
11
DI 6
12
Vs2
13
DI 5
DO 3 P
14
Vs2
DO 3 M
15
DI 7
16
Vs 2
A4, A3,
A8, A7
AUX1

and A3, A7.
A12, A11,
A16, A15
AUX1

and A16, A15.
Vs1: Internal sensor supply 1 for

DI 0 to DI 3
Vs2: Internal sensor supply 2 for
DI 4 to DI 7

Terminal modules
Block diagram
Block diagram of the TM-E30S46-A1 and TM-E30C46-A1 terminal module
1
2
(OHFWULFDO
0RGXOH
(0

$$

$$

$

$

$

$

4
5
Backplane bus
Connection of terminals A4, A8, A3, A7 and A12, A16, A11, A15 as productive conductor
terminals or potential terminals of any kind
Uninterrupted AUX1 bus with a connection to terminals A4, A3, A8, A7 and A12, A11, A16,
A15
30 x 157 x 43
Weight
Approx. 158 g (TM-E30S46-A1)

Approx. 131 g (TM-E30C46-A1)
Number of terminals
6x4
Description of the electronic modules

You can find a description of the 4/8 F-DI 24VDC PROFIsafe and 4 F-DO 24 VDC/2A
PROFIsafe electronic modules you can use with the above terminal modules in the ET 200S
Distributed I/O Module, Fail-Safe Modules manual.

9-31
Terminal modules
9-32

10
Power modules
10.1
10.1
Parameters for power modules
Parameters
The following table contains the parameters of the power modules.
Table 10-1
Parameters for power modules

Value range
Power module
Default setting
Applicability
PM-E24 VDC
PM-E 24 to 48
VDC
PM-E 24 to 48
VDC/24 to 230 VAC
Diagnostics: No
load voltage
Diagnostics: No
load voltage
Diagnostics: No load
voltage
Disable/enable
Disable
Power module
---
---
Diagnostics: Fuse
blown
Disable/enable
Disable
Power module
---
---
Voltage type
DC/AC
DC
Power module
The parameters are explained below.
Diagnostics: No load voltage

You use this parameter to enable a diagnostic message about missing load voltage.
In the absence of load voltage, only the diagnostic message of the affected power module is
forwarded to the DP master. The SF error LEDs of all the modules in the affected potential
group come on.
Diagnostics: Fuse blown

You use this parameter to enable a diagnostic message about a blown fuse.
In the event of a blown fuse, only the diagnostic message of the affected power module is
forwarded to the DP master. The SF error LEDs of all the modules in the affected potential
group come on.
Voltage type
You use this parameter to select the load voltage connected to the power module: DC
voltage or AC voltage.
The correct diagnosis is thus provided in the event of missing load voltage or a blown fuse.

10-1
Power modules
10.2 PM-E 24 VDC power module (6ES7138-4CA01-0AA0)
10.2
10.2
PM-E 24 VDC power module (6ES7138-4CA01-0AA0)
Order number
6ES7138-4CA01-0AA0
Features
The PM-E 24 VDC power module monitors the supply voltage for all the electronic
modules in the potential group. The supply voltage is fed in by means of the TM-P
terminal module.
You can use any electronic module in the potential group of the PM-E 24 VDC power
module except the 2DI 120 VAC Standard, 2DI 230 VAC Standard and 2DO 24-230
VAC/1 A.
Caution
Only connect the specified rated load voltage of 24 VDC to the TM-P terminal module of
the power module.
The connected rated load voltage must correspond to the supply voltage of the electronic
modules in the potential group.
The current status of the power module is stored in the status byte in the process input
image (PII). This is updated irrespective of whether the "No Load Voltage" diagnostic has
been enabled.
Pin assignment
The following table illustrates the terminal assignment of the PM-E 24 VDC power module for
the different terminal modules:
Table 10-2
Terminal assignment of the PM-E 24 VDC power module

View
Pin assignment
Remarks
24 VDC: Rated load voltage
7036$DQG30(9'&
M: Chassis ground
AUX1: Ground terminal or usable
as any voltage bus up to the level
of the load voltage.
$8;
$ $

9'&
9'&
$8;
$

$

$8;
9'&
10-2

Power modules
View
Pin assignment
Remarks
M: Chassis ground
7036$DQG30(9'&

AUX1 is used as PE.
$8;
$

9'&
$

9'&
$

$

$8;
9'&
0
$8;
7036DQG30(9'&

M: Chassis ground
$8;
9'&
9'&
9'&
Block diagram
3:5
%DFNSODQHEXV
(76
EDFNSODQH
EXV
LQWHUIDFH
FRQQHFWLRQ
/RDG
YROWDJH
PRQLWRULQJ

9'&
3
3
Figure 10-1
Block diagram of the PM-E 24 VDC power module

10-3
Power modules

15 81 52
Weight
Approx. 35 g
Rated load voltage
24 VDC
Overvoltage protection
No
Protection with automatic circuit breakers
Yes, type C tripping characteristics
Max. current-carrying capacity (up to 60 C)
10 A
Short-circuit protection
No
Isolation
Between rated load voltage and backplane

bus
Yes
Between the power modules
Yes
500 VDC
Current consumption
From the load voltage L+ (no load)
Max. 4 mA
Typ. 100 mW

Diagnostic function
10-4
Yes
Group error
Load voltage monitoring
Red "SF" LED
Diagnostic information readable
Yes
Green "PWR" LED

Power modules
10.3 PM-E 24-48 VDC power module (6ES7138-4CA50-0AA0)
10.3
10.3
PM-E 24-48 VDC power module (6ES7138-4CA50-0AA0)
Order number
6ES7138-4CA50-0AA0
Features
The PM-E 24-48 VDC power module monitors the supply voltage for all the electronic
modules in the voltage group. The supply voltage is fed in by means of the TM-P terminal
module.
You can use all the electronic modules except the 2DI 120 VAC Standard, 2DI 230 VAC
Standard, and 2DO 24-230 VAC/1 A in the voltage group of the PM-E 24-48 VDC power
module.
Control interface (PIQ) and feedback interface (PII) in the process image for option
handling.
image (PII). This is updated irrespective of whether the "No Load Voltage" diagnosis has
been enabled.
The PM-E 24-48 VDC power module is suitable for fail-safe modules.
Caution
Only connect the specified rated load voltage of 24-48 VDC to the TM-P terminal module
of the power module.
The connected rated load voltage must correspond to the supply voltage of the electronic
modules in the voltage group.

10-5
Power modules
Pin assignment
The following table shows you the terminal assignment of the PM-E 24-48 VDC power
module for the different terminal modules:
Table 10-3
Terminal assignment of the PM-E 24-48 VDC power module

View
Pin assignment
7036$DQG30(9'&
Remarks
24-48 VDC: Rated load voltage
M: Chassis ground
$8;
$

9'&
$

9'&
$

$

$8;
9'&
0
$8;

7036$DQG30(9'&
M: Chassis ground
$8;
$ $

9'&
9'&
$8;
$

$

$8;
9'&
7036DQG30(9'&

AUX1 is used as PE.

M: Chassis ground
$8;
9'&
9'&
9'&
10-6

Power modules
Block diagram
3:5
%DFNSODQHEXV
(76
EDFNSODQH
EXV
LQWHUIDFH
FRQQHFWLRQ
/RDG
YROWDJH
PRQLWRULQJ

9'&
3
3
Figure 10-2
Block diagram of the PM-E 24-48 VDC power module
15 81 52
Weight
Approx. 35 g
Rated load voltage
P1
VDC
Yes
No
Protection with automatic circuit breakers
Yes, tripping characteristic B, C
Max. current-carrying capacity (up to 60 C)
10 A
No
Isolation

bus
Yes
Yes
500 VDC
Current consumption
Max. 12 mA
Typ. 500 mW

Diagnostic function
Yes
Group error
Red "SF" LED
Yes
Green "PWR" LED
See also

10-7
Power modules
10.4 PM-E 24-48 VDC, 24-230 VAC power module (6ES7138-4CB10-0AB0)
10.4
PM-E 24-48 VDC, 24-230 VAC power module

(6ES7138-4CB10-0AB0)
10.4
Order number
6ES7138-4CB10-0AB0
Features
The PM-E 24-48 VDC, 24-230 VAC has the following characteristic features:
Monitors the supply voltage for all the electronic modules in the voltage group. The
supply voltage is fed in by means of the TM-P terminal module.
Can be used universally and can be assigned parameters for DC and AC load voltage for
use with any electronic module.
Is required at least once for the ET 200S (to the right of the interface module).
Control interface (PIQ) and feedback interface (PII) in the process image for option
handling (see Appendix).
image (PII). This is updated irrespective of whether the "No Load Voltage" diagnostic has
been enabled (see Appendix).
Is additionally equipped with a replaceable fuse (5 mm x 20 mm).
1
2
Figure 10-3
10-8
Replacing the fuse
(1)
3-mm screwdriver
(2)
Fuse

Power modules
Note
The PM-E 24-48 VDC, 24-230 VAC power module (6ES7138-4CB10-0AB0) is not a direct
replacement for the device with the order number 6ES7138-4CB00-0AB0 for AC applications
because you have to select either AC or DC supply voltage. In the case of DC applications,
the new module is a direct replacement because the default setting of the new parameter is
"DC". If you want to replace the device 6ES7138-4CB00-0AB0 in AC applications, you have
to create a new hardware configuration and set the value "AC" for the load voltage type
parameter.
If the hardware configuration is not changed for AC applications, the SF status LED remains
on all the time. If the "No load voltage" diagnostic interrupt is enabled, several interrupts are
activated in each AC cycle. The electronic modules that are connected to the voltage group
of this PM-E continue to function normally, however.
Pin assignment
Table 10-4
The following table indicates the terminal assignment of the PM-E 24-48 VDC, 24-230 VAC
power module for the different terminal modules:
Terminal assignment of the PM-E 24-48 VDC, 24-230 VAC power module
View
Pin assignment
Remarks
24-48 VDC/ L1: Rated load voltage
7036$DQG30(9'&9$&
M/ N: Ground/neutral conductor
AUX1: Ground terminal or usable as
any voltage bus up to the level of the
load voltage.
$8;
$

$

9'&/
9'&/
01
01
$8;
$

$

$8;
9'&
$&

7036$DQG30(9'&9$&
AUX1: Ground terminal or usable as
any voltage bus up to the level of the
load voltage.
$8;
$

9'&/
$

AUX1 is used as PE.
9'&/
9'&
01
01
$8;
$

$

$8;

a $&
10-9
Power modules
View
Pin assignment
Remarks
7036DQG30(9'&9$&
$8;
9'&/
01
9'&/
9'&
$&
01
%DFNSODQHEXV
Block diagram
3
3
)6*
)XVH
PRQLWRULQJ
3:5
/RDG
YROWDJH
PRQLWRULQJ
(76
EDFNSODQH
EXV
FLUFXLW
01

9'&/

)XVHV
Figure 10-4
10-10
Block diagram of the PM-E 24-48 VDC, 24-230 VAC

Power modules
15 81 52
Weight
34 g
Rated load voltage
24 to 56.7 VDC
24 to 48 VAC/120 VAC/ 230 VAC
Yes
Max. current-carrying capacity
10 A
For 24-56.7 VDC
Up to 30 C Max. 10 A
up to 40 C: max. 9 A
For 24-48/120/230 VAC
Yes, IEC 127-2/1, 250 V, 10 A, fast fuse

(5 x 20 mm), replaceable1
Isolation
bus
Yes
1500 VAC
Current consumption from backplane bus
Max. 9.5 mA
From load voltage L1/L+ (no load)
Yes
Max. 9 mA
Max. 5 W

Diagnostic function
Yes
Group error
Red "SF" LED
Fuse
Green "FSG" LED
Diagnostic information can be displayed
Yes
Green "PWR" LED
The fuses on this module are only additional fuses. External overcurrent protection (suitable for
branch circuits in accordance with the applicable national regulations for electrical engineering) is
required in the supply lines of the load circuit.
1
See also

10-11

11.1
11.1.1
11.1
11
Parameters for digital electronic modules
Parameters for digital input modules
Introduction
The range of digital electronic modules (EM) includes input and output modules for 24 VDC.
Input and output modules for 120/230 VAC are also available.
A relay module enables the switching of voltages for AC and DC.

11-1

11.1 Parameters for digital electronic modules
Overview
This table shows the parameters for digital input modules:
Table 11-1
Parameters for digital input modules
2DI 24 VDC
High Feature
4DI 24 VDC
High Feature
4DI 24 to 48
VUC High
Feature
2DI/ 4DI 24 VDC

Standard
4DI 24 VDC/SRC
Standard
Value range
Default setting
Applicability
Hardware interrupt3
---
---
Disable
Enable
Disable
Module
---
Diagnostic
interrupt
---
Disable
Enable
Disable
Module
Input delay1
---
---
0.1 ms
0.5 ms
3 ms
15 ms
3 ms
Module
Diagnostics: Short-circuit to
M2
---
---
Disable
Enable
Disable
Module
---
Diagnostics:
Wire break4
---
Disable
Enable
Disable
Module
---
Diagnostics:
Fuse defect
---
Disable
Enable
Disable
Module
---
Diagnostics:
Load voltage
missing
---
Disable
Enable
Disable
Module
---
---
Disable
Enable
Disable
Channel 0
Trigger for
hardware
interrupt,
rising edge3
Trigger for
hardware
interrupt,
rising edge3
---
Channel 1
Channel 2
Channel 3
The input delay applies to "0" to "1" and to "1" to "0".
3Can
only be assigned parameters for the IM151-1 High Feature interface module and the IM151-7 CPU
If the wire break check is activated, all the unused inputs must be stabilized to prevent them from triggering a module
wire break. To do this, connect a resistor between terminal 24/48 V (3, A4, 7, A8) and the free input. The resistor must
provide at least 0.5 mA of input current (see "Sensor Switching" in the table of technical specifications). This ensures that
sufficient current is flowing to prevent wire break detection..
4
In the off state, a sensor must provide a minimum of 0.5 mA (otherwise a wire break is detected in the off state).
Alternatively, a resistor can be connected parallel to the sensor terminals (the current must be at least. 0.5 mA).
11-2


11.1.2
Parameters for 4DI NAMUR
List of parameters
This table shows the parameters for 4 DI NAMUR:
Table 11-2
Parameters for 4DI NAMUR
4DI NAMUR
Value range
Default setting
Applicability
Enable
Disable
Disable
Module
Sensor type
Channel disabled
NAMUR sensor
Open single contact
Single contact, closed,
with 10 k
NAMUR changeover
contact
Open changeover
contact
Changeover contact,
closed, with 10 k
Disable
Channel
Pulse stretching
None
0.5 s
1s
2s
None
Channel
Diagnostics
Enable
Disable
Disable
Module
Diagnostics: wire break
Enable
Disable
Disable
Channel
Diagnostics: wire break
Enable
Disable
Disable
Channel
Chatter monitoring:
0.5 s
1 s to 100 s (can be set
at increments of 1 s)
0.5 s
Channel
Disable
2 to 31
Disable
Channel
No sensor supply
Monitoring window*
Chatter monitoring:
Number of signal changes
* The parameters can only be set when the number of signal changes for chatter monitoring is activated

11-3

11.1.3
Parameters for digital output modules
Overview
This table shows the parameters for digital output modules:
Table 11-3
Parameters for digital output modules
2DO 24
VDC/0.50, 5
A High
Feature
2RO NO NC
24-48 VDC/5 A
24-230 VAC/ 5 A
2DO 24 to 230
VAC/
1A
Value range
Default setting Applicability
Substitute a
value
Keep last
value
Substitute a
value
Module
"0"
"1"
"0"
Channel
Disable
Enable
Disable
Module
2DO/ 4DO 24
VDC/0.5 A
Standard
2DO/ 4DO 24
VDC/2 A
Standard
2RO NO
2DO 24
24 to 120 VDC/5 A
VDC/2 A
High Feature 24 to 230 VAC/5 A
Reaction to CPU-/master-STOP
---
Substitute value 1
-----
Diagnostics:
Wire break2
---
Disable
Enable
Disable
Channel
Diagnostics:
Short-circuit
to M
---
Disable
Enable
Disable
Channel
If the interface module becomes deenergized, the digital output modules will not produce substitute values. The value
that is output = 0.
1
A wire break is only detected in the switched output state.
11-4


11.2 Parameter description for the digital electronic modules
11.2
11.2
11.2.1
Parameter description for the digital electronic modules
Hardware interrupt
Description
This parameter enables the hardware interrupts for the module.
11.2.2
Input delay
Description
You can use this parameter to suppress signal interference. Changes to the signal are
detected once the set time has elapsed.
11.2.3
Trigger for hardware interrupt, rising edge
Description
This parameter allows you to enable a hardware interrupt at a rising edge
(of a signal status change) for each channel.
11.2.4
Pulse stretching
Definition
Pulse stretching is a function that changes a digital input signal. A pulse at a digital input is
stretched to at least the assigned parameter length. If the input pulse already longer than the
assigned parameter length, the pulse is not changed.

11-5

The principle of pulse stretching

The following figure uses examples to illustrate how and when input pulses are changed.
3XOVHVWUHWFKLQJSDUDPHWHU 7
7IRU!HGJH
7IRU!HGJH
3URFHVVVLJQDO
SURFHVVHG
LQSXWVLJQDO
3XOVHLVVKRUWHUWKDQ7
DQGLVVWUHWFKHGWR7
3XOVHLVORQJHUWKDQ7DQG
LVWKXVQRWFKDQJHG
3URFHVVVLJQDO
SURFHVVHG
LQSXWVLJQDO
7KHVHFRQGSXOVHRXWSXWGXULQJDFWLYH
SXOVHVWUHWFKLQJLVVKLIWHGXQWLOWKH
FXUUHQWVWUHWFKLQJSHULRGKDVH[SLUHG
Figure 11-1
6KRUWSXOVHVRXWSXWZLWKLQD
SXOVHVWUHWFKLQJF\FOHDUH
LJQRUHG
Principle of pulse stretching
Note
If you set pulse stretching for an input channel, this also affects the chatter monitoring
enabled for this channel. The signal with a "stretched" pulse is the input signal for chatter
monitoring. Make sure, therefore, that the parameter assignment for pulse stretching and
chatter monitoring correspond with one another. By selecting the appropriate values for the
parameters you can adapt the functions to suit your process.
11-6


11.2.5
Chatter monitoring
Definition
Chatter monitoring is a process control function for digital input signals. It detects and reports
signal characteristics that are unusual from a process engineering viewpoint, such as the
input signal fluctuating too frequently between "0" and "1". If signal characteristics like these
occur, it is a sign that the sensors are faulty or that there are instabilities from a process
engineering viewpoint.
Activating chatter monitoring

You activate chatter monitoring by setting the number of signal changes for chatter
monitoring to a value other than zero.
Detecting unusual signal patterns

Each input channel has a monitoring window that has been assigned parameters. The
monitoring window is started the first time the input signal changes. If the input signal
changes more often within the monitoring window than the set number of signal changes, a
chatter error is detected. If no chatter error is detected within the monitoring window, the
monitoring window is started again at the next signal change.
Reporting a chatter error

If a chatter error has occurred, the current signal status is entered in the process image and
the value of the signal is set to "invalid". A chatter error is also entered as diagnostic
information, triggering an incoming diagnostic interrupt.
You must evaluate and process the status of the value and the diagnostic information in the
user program.
Resetting a chatter error

If no further chattering of the input signal is detected within three monitoring windows, the
diagnostic entry is removed and an outgoing diagnostic interrupt is triggered. The status of
the value of the current signal in the process image is set to "valid".

11-7

Principle
The following figure gives you another graphic illustration of the principle of chatter
monitoring.
3DUDPHWHUIRUWKHQXPEHURIVLJQDOWUDQVLWLRQV
3DUDPHWHUIRUPRQLWRULQJZLQGRZW [
[PRQLWRULQJZLQGRZW [
3URFHVV
VLJQDO
'HWHFWLRQ
'LDJQRVWLFV
,QFRPLQJIOXWWHUHUURU
PRGXOHGLDJQRVLV
PHVVDJH
Figure 11-2
11-8
0RGXOHGLDJQRVWLFV
)OXWWHUHUURUJRLQJ
UHVHW
The principle of chatter monitoring


11.3 2DI 24 VDC ST digital electronic module (6ES7131-4BB01-0AA0).
11.3
11.3
2DI 24 VDC ST digital electronic module (6ES7131-4BB01-0AA0).
Order number
6ES7131-4BB01-0AA0
Features
Digital electronic module with two inputs
Rated input voltage 24 VDC
Suitable for switches and proximity switches (BEROs)
Pin assignment
The following table illustrates the terminal assignment of the 2DI 24 VDC Standard for the
different terminal modules:
Table 11-4
Terminal assignment of the 2DI 24 VDC Standard

View
Pin assignment
Remarks
Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A4
70(6$DQG','&967
&+
DI: Input signal

voltage
&+
ZLUH
',
',
9'&
9'&
$8;HJ3(
$

$

$8;HJ3(
ZLUH
ZLUH
M: Chassis ground
$8;PXVWEHRFFXSLHG
ZLWKZLUHVDW3(
Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 4
70(6DQG',9'&6WDQGDUG
DI: Input signal
&+
&+
ZLUH
',
9'&
9'&
QF
ZLUH
',

voltage
M: Chassis ground
Terminals 4 and 8 can be
used for unneeded wires of up
to 30 VDC.
QF

11-9

View
Pin assignment
Remarks
DI: Input signal

&+
',
&+
ZLUH

voltage
ZLUH
M: Chassis ground
',
9'&
9'&
&+
70(6$XQG','&967
&+

voltage
/HLWHU
',
',
'&9
'&9
QF
QF
$8;
$8;
11-10
/HLWHU
DI: Input signal
/HLWHU
M: Chassis ground
to 30 VDC.
$8;
$8;
$8;PXVVEHL/HLWHU
DXI3(JHOHJWZHUGHQ


Block diagram
%DFNSODQHEXV
(76
EDFNSODQH
EXV
FLUFXLW
,QSXW
HOHFWURQLFV
,QSXW
HOHFWURQLFV

3
0
3
/
Figure 11-3

Block diagram of the 2DI 24 VDC Standard

11-11

15 81 52
Weight
Approx. 35 g
Number of inputs
Length of cable
Unshielded
max. 600m
Shielded
max. 1000m
Rated supply voltage (from the power module)
Reverse polarity protection
24 VDC
Yes
Isolation
between the channels
No
between the channels and backplane bus
Yes
Permissible potential difference
between the different circuits
75 VDC, 60 VAC
500 VDC
Current consumption
From supply voltage
Dependent on the sensor

Typ. 0.4 W
Status display
Diagnostic functions
Green LED per channel

No
Sensor supply output
Output voltage
with load
min. L+ (-0.5 V)
Output current
Rated value
500 mA
Permitted range
0 to 500 mA
Data for selecting a sensor
Input voltage
Rated value
24 VDC
For signal "1"
15 to 30 V
For signal "0"
-30 to 5 V
Input current
At signal "1"
Typ. 7 mA (at 24 V)
Input delay
At "0" to "1"
Typ. 3 ms (2.0 to 4.5 ms)
At "1" to "0"
Typ. 3 ms (2.0 to 4.5 ms)
Input characteristic curve
To IEC 61131, Type 1
Connection of two-wire BEROs
Possible
11-12
Permitted bias current
Max. 1.5 mA


11.4 4DI 24 VDC ST digital electronic module (6ES7131-4BD01-0AA0)
11.4
11.4
4DI 24 VDC ST digital electronic module (6ES7131-4BD01-0AA0)
Order number
6ES7131-4BD01-0AA0
Features
Digital electronic module with four inputs
Pin assignment
The following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 4DI 24 VDC Standard for the
Table 11-5
Terminal assignment of the 4DI 24 VDC Standard

View
Pin assignment
Remarks
Channel 0: Terminals 1 and 3
70(6$DQG',9'&6WDQGDUG

&+
&+
',
',
',
',
9'&
$8;HJ3(
&+
&+
ZLUH
DI: Input signal

24 VDC: Sensor supply voltage
9'&
$8;HJ3(


&+
&+
&+
&+
',
',
',
',
9'&
9'&
9'&
9'&

ZLUH

DI: Input signal

11-13

View
Pin assignment
Remarks

&+
&+
&+
&+
',
',
',
',
9'&
9'&
DI: Input signal
ZLUH


&+
&+
&+
&+
',
',
',
',
9'&
9'&
9'&
9'&
$8;HJ0
$

$

$8;HJ0
$8;HJ0
$

$

$8;HJ0
11-14

ZLUH
ZLUH
DI: Input signal



Block diagram
%DFNSODQHEXV
(76
EDFNSODQH
EXV
FLUFXLW
3
3
,QSXW
HOHFWURQLFV
,QSXW
HOHFWURQLFV
,QSXW
HOHFWURQLFV
,QSXW
HOHFWURQLFV
0

/
9'&RQO\ZLWK70(6
Figure 11-4
Block diagram of the 4DI 24 VDC Standard
15 81 52
Weight
Approx. 35 g
Number of inputs
Length of cable
Unshielded
max. 600m
Shielded
max. 1000 m
24 VDC
Yes
Isolation
No
Yes

75 VDC, 60 VAC
11-15

500 VDC
Current consumption
From supply voltage

Typ. 0.7 W

Status display

No
Output voltage
with load
min. L+ (-0.5 V)
Output current
Rated value
500 mA
Permitted range
0 to 500 mA
Input voltage
Rated value
24 VDC
For signal "1"
15 to 30 V
For signal "0"
-30 to 5 V
Input current
At signal "1"
Typ. 7 mA (at 24 V)
Input delay
At "0" to "1"
Typ. 3 ms (2.0 to 4.5 ms)
At "1" to "0"
Typ. 3 ms (2.0 to 4.5 ms)
Possible
11-16
Max. 1.5 mA


11.5 4DI 24 VDC/SRC ST digital electronic module (6ES7131-4BD51-0AA0)
11.5
4DI 24 VDC/SRC ST digital electronic module

(6ES7131-4BD51-0AA0)
11.5
Order number
6ES7131-4BD51-0AA0
Features
Source input
Pin assignment
The following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 4DI 24 VDC/SRC Standard for
Table 11-6
Terminal assignment of the 4DI 24 VDC/SRC Standard

View
Pin assignment
Remarks
70(6$DQG',9'&65&6WDQGDUG

&+
&+
&+
&+
',
',
',
',
$8;HJ9'&

ZLUH
DI: Input signal

M: Sensor supply voltage
$8;HJ9'&

11-17

View
Pin assignment
Remarks
70(6DQG',9'&65&6WDQGDUG

&+
&+
&+
&+
',
',
',
',
DI: Input signal
ZLUH

70(6DQG',9'&65&6WDQGDUG

&+
&+
&+
&+
',
',
',
',
DI: Input signal
ZLUH

70(6$DQG',9'&65&6WDQGDUG

&+
&+
&+
&+

ZLUH
',
',
',
',
$8;HJ9'&
$

$

$8;HJ9'&
$8;HJ9'&
$8;HJ9'&
11-18
ZLUH
DI: Input signal



Block diagram
%DFNSODQHEXV
(76
EDFNSODQH
EXV
FLUFXLW
3
3
,QSXW
HOHFWURQLFV
,QSXW
HOHFWURQLFV
,QSXW
HOHFWURQLFV
,QSXW
HOHFWURQLFV

0
/
0RQO\ZLWK70(6
Figure 11-5
Block diagram of the 4DI 24 VDC/SRC Standard
15 81 52
Weight
Approx. 35 g
Number of inputs
Length of cable
Unshielded
max. 600 m
Shielded
max. 1000 m
24 VDC
Yes
Isolation
No
Yes

75 VDC, 60 VAC
500 VDC
11-19

Current consumption
From supply voltage

Typ. 0.7 W
Status display
No
Output voltage
With load
Max. M +0.5 V
Output current
Rated value
Permitted range
500 mA
0 to 500 mA
Input voltage
Rated value
24 VDC
For signal "1"
-15 to -30 V1
For signal "0"
30 to -5 V1
Input current
At signal "1"
Typ. 7 mA (at 24 V)
Input delay
At "0" to "1"
At "1" to "0"
Typ. 3 ms (2.0 to 4.5 ms)
Possible
11-20
Typ. 3 ms (2.0 to 4.5 ms)
Max. 1.5 mA
Reference potential is L+


11.6 2DI 24 VDC High Feature digital electronic module (6ES7131-4BB01-0AB0)
11.6
2DI 24 VDC High Feature digital electronic module

(6ES7131-4BB01-0AB0)
11.6
Order number
6ES7131-4BB01-0AB0
Features
Supports isochronous operation
Pin assignment
The following table illustrates the terminal assignment of the 2DI 24 VDC High Feature for
Table 11-7
Terminal assignment of the 2DI 24 VDC High Feature

View
Pin assignment
Remarks
&+
&+
ZLUH
',
',
9'&
9'&
$8;HJ3(
DI: Input signal
ZLUH
ZLUH

voltage
M: Chassis ground
$8;HJ3(
$8;PXVWEHRFFXSLHG
ZLWKZLUHVDW3(

11-21

View
Pin assignment
Remarks
70(6DQG',9'&+LJK)HDWXUH
DI: Input signal
&+
&+
ZLUH

9'&
9'&
QF
ZLUH
',
',

voltage
M: Chassis ground
to 30 VDC.
QF
DI: Input signal
&+
&+
ZLUH
',
ZLUH
',
9'&
9'&

voltage
M: Chassis ground
70(6$DQG',9'&+LJK)HDWXUH
DI: Input signal

&+
&+
ZLUH

9'&
9'&

$

$
QF
$8;
$8;
11-22
ZLUH
ZLUH
',
',

voltage
M: Chassis ground
to 30 VDC.
QF
$8;
$8;
$8;PXVWEH
RFFXSLHGZLWKZLUHVDW3(


Block diagram
%DFNSODQHEXV
(76
EDFNSODQH
EXV
FLUFXLW
,QSXW
HOHFWURQLFV
,QSXW
HOHFWURQLFV

6KRUWFLUFXLW
SURWHFWLRQ
3
0
3
/
Figure 11-6
3RODULW\UHYHUVDO
SURWHFWLRQ

Block diagram of the 2DI 24 VDC High Feature
15 81 52
Weight
Approx. 35 g
Yes
Number of inputs
Length of cable
Unshielded
Shielded
max. 600 m
max. 1000 m
24 VDC
Yes
Isolation
No
Yes
75 VDC, 60 VAC
500 VDC
Current consumption
From supply voltage


Typ. 0.4 W
11-23

Status display
Interrupts
Hardware interrupt
Parameters can be assigned
Group error
Red "SF" LED

Yes

Output voltage
with load
Min.. L+ (-0.5V)
Output current
Rated value
500 mA
Permitted range
0 to 500 mA
Yes, electronic1
Input voltage
Rated value
24 VDC
For signal "1"
11 to 30 V
For signal "0"
-30 to 5 V
Input current
At signal "1"
Typ. 8 mA
Input delay (parameters can be assigned)
At "0" to "1"
0.1 ms (0.05 to 0.15 ms)

0.5 ms (0.4 to 0.6 ms)
3 ms (2.7 to 3.3 ms)
15 ms (14.85 to 15.15 ms)
At "1" to "0"
0.1 ms (0.05 to 0.15 ms)

0.5 ms (0.4 to 0.6 ms)
3 ms (2.7 to 3.3 ms)
15 ms (14.85 to 15.15 ms)
Possible
11-24
max. 1.5 mA
Per module


11.7 4DI 24 VDC High Feature digital electronic module (6ES7131-4BD01-0AB0)
11.7
4DI 24 VDC High Feature digital electronic module

(6ES7131-4BD01-0AB0)
11.7
Order number
6ES7131-4BD01-0AB0
Features
Pin assignment
The following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 4DI 24 VDC High Feature for the
Table 11-8
Terminal assignment of the 4DI 24 VDC High Feature

View
Pin assignment
Remarks
&+
&+
&+
&+
',
',
',
',
9'&
9'&
$8;HJ0
$

$

$8;HJ0

ZLUH
DI: Input signal



&+
&+
&+
&+
',
',
',
',
9'&
9'&
9'&
9'&

ZLUH

DI: Input signal

11-25

View
Pin assignment
Remarks

&+
&+
&+
&+
',
',
',
',
9'&
9'&
DI: Input signal
ZLUH


&+
&+
11-26
&+
&+
',
',
',
',
9'&
9'&
9'&
9'&
$8;HJ0
$

$

$8;HJ0
$8;HJ0
$

$

$8;HJ0

ZLUH
ZLUH
DI: Input signal



Block diagram
%DFNSODQHEXV
(76
EDFNSODQH
EXV
FLUFXLW
,QSXW
HOHFWURQLFV
,QSXW
HOHFWURQLFV
,QSXW
HOHFWURQLFV
,QSXW
HOHFWURQLFV

6KRUWFLUFXLW
SURWHFWLRQ
3
3
0
3RODULW\UHYHUVDO
SURWHFWLRQ
/

9'&RQO\ZLWK70(6DQG70(6$
Figure 11-7
Block diagram of the 4DI 24 VDC High Feature
15 81 52
Weight
Approx. 35 g
Yes
Number of inputs
Length of cable
Unshielded
max. 600 m
Shielded
max. 1000 m
24 VDC
Yes
Isolation

No
11-27

Yes
75 VDC, 60 VAC
500 VDC
Current consumption
From supply voltage
Typ. 0.7 W
Status display
Interrupts
Hardware interrupt
Group error
Red "SF" LED
Yes

Output voltage
with load
Min.. L+ (-0.5V)
Output current
Rated value
500 mA
Permitted range
0 to 500 mA
Yes, electronic1
Input voltage
Rated value
24 VDC
For signal "1"
11 to 30 V
For signal "0"
-30 to 5 V
Input current
At signal "1"
Typ. 8 mA
Input delay (parameters can be assigned)
At "0" to "1"
0.1 ms (0.05 to 0.15 ms)

0.5 ms (0.4 to 0.6 ms)
3 ms (2.7 to 3.3 ms)
15 ms (14.85 to 15.15 ms)
At "1" to "0"
0.1 ms (0.05 to 0.15 ms)

0.5 ms (0.4 to 0.6 ms)
3 ms (2.7 to 3.3 ms)
15 ms (14.85 to 15.15 ms)
Possible
11-28
max. 1.5 mA
Per module


11.8 4DI 24-48 VUC High Feature digital electronic module (6ES7131-4CD00-0AB0)
11.8
4DI 24-48 VUC High Feature digital electronic module

(6ES7131-4CD00-0AB0)
11.8
Order number
6ES7131-4CD00-0AB0
Features
Rated input voltage 24-48 VAC/VDC
Parameter assignment length: 3 bytes
Diagnostics: Wire break
Diagnostics: Fuse blown
Diagnostics: Load voltage missing
Pin assignment
The following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 4DI 24 to 48 VUC High Feature
for the different terminal modules:
Table 11-9
Terminal assignment of the 4DI 24-48 VUC High Feature
View
Pin assignment
Remarks
70(6$DQG',98&+LJK)HDWXUH
&+
&+
&+
&+
',
',
',
',
9$&9'&
9$&9'&
$8;3(
ZLUH
ZLUH

DI: Input signal
VDC sensor supply
PE: Chassis ground
$8;3(

11-29

View
Pin assignment
Remarks
70(6DQG',98&+LJK)HDWXUH

&+
&+
&+
&+
DI: Input signal
ZLUH
VDC sensor supply
',
',
',
',
9$&9'&
9$&9'&
9$&9'&
9$&9'&

70(6DQG',98&+LJK)HDWXUH

&+
&+
&+
&+
',
',
',
',
9$&9'&
9$&9'&
ZLUH
ZLUH
DI: Input signal

VDC sensor supply

70(6$DQG',98&+LJK)HDWXUH
&+
&+
',
&+
&+
',
',
',
9$&9'&
9$&9'&
9$&9'&

$

$
9$&9'&

$

$
$8;3(
$8;3(
11-30

ZLUH
ZLUH
DI: Input signal

VDC sensor supply
AUX: Terminals A4, A3, A8
DC/AC and A7 can be used
for unused cables up to
30 VDC.
$8;3(
$8;3(


Block diagram
%DFNSODQHEXV
(76
EDFNSODQHEXV
LQWHUIDFH
FRQQHFWLRQ
,QSXW
HOHFWURQLFV
,QSXW
HOHFWURQLFV
,QSXW
HOHFWURQLFV
,QSXW
HOHFWURQLFV
6KRUWFLUFXLW
SURWHFWLRQ
3
3
0
5HYHUVH
SRODULW\
SURWHFWLRQ
/
Figure 11-8

Block diagram of the 4DI 24-48 VUC High Feature
Dimensions W H D
15 81 52 (mm)
Weight
Approx. 35 g
Yes
Number of inputs
Length of cable
Unshielded
Max. 600 m
Shielded
Max. 1000 m
Voltage, currents, potentials
Horizontal installation
up to 60 C
Vertical installation
up to 40 C
P1
24-48 VAC/VDC
AC or DC automatically
Isolation
Between the channels
No
Between channels and backplane bus
Yes

11-31

Between the different circuits
75 VDC, 60 VAC
2500 VDC
Current consumption
From the power supply L+
From the backplane bus
Max. 10 mA
Typ. 0.7 W
Status display
Green LEDs per channel
Group error display

Red LEDs (SF)
Sensor power supply outputs
Output voltage
With load
Min. L+ (-0.5 V)
Output current
Rated value
500 mA
Permitted range
0 to 500 mA
Yes (per module)

Input voltage
Rated value
24 to 48 VUC
For signal "1"
-15 VDC to -57.6 VDC

15 VDC to 57.6 VDC
15 VAC to 48 VAC
For signal "0"
-6 VDC to 6 VDC 0
VAC to 5 VAC
Frequency range
47 Hz to 63 Hz
Input current
At signal "1"
From 4 mA to 10 mA
Input delay
At "0" to "1"
At "1" to "0"
Max. 15 ms
Max. 15 ms
Input characteristic curve1

Possible
Max. 0.5 to 2 mA2

Sensor switching
Resistance circuit of the sensor for wire break

monitoring
Nominal voltage
24 V (15 V to 35 V)
Nominal voltage
48 V (30 V to 60 V)
18 k
39 k
IEC 61131 does not provide technical specifications for UC modules. However, the values have
been adjusted to IEC 61131 as closely as possible.
1
11-32
Minimum load current is required in the case of wire-break monitoring.


11.9 4DI NAMUR digital electronic module (6ES7131-4RD00-0AB0)
11.9
11.9
4DI NAMUR digital electronic module (6ES7131-4RD00-0AB0)
Order number
6ES7131-4RD00-0AB0
Features
8.2 VDC sensor supply
Suitable for NAMUR sensors and both closed and open mechanical contacts
Terminal assignment of NAMUR sensors and sensors to IEC 60947-5-6

This table shows the terminal assignment of NAMUR sensors and sensors according to
IEC 60947-5-6.
Table 11-10 Terminal assignment of NAMUR sensors and sensors to IEC 60947-5-6
View
Pin assignment
Remarks
Sensor 1:
70(6$DQG',1$085

Sensor 2:
&+
&+
&+
&+
',
',
',
9V
9V

Sensor 3:

RU
',
$8;3(
([DPSOHRIDFKDQQHO
FRQQHFWLRQ
Sensor 4:
DI: Input signal
Vs: Sensor supply voltage
$8;3(

11-33

Terminal assignment of NAMUR changeover contacts or sensors to IEC 60947-5-6

This table shows the terminal assignment of NAMUR changeover contacts or sensors
according to IEC 60947-5-6.
Table 11-11 Terminal assignment of NAMUR changeover contact or sensor to IEC 60947-5-6
View
Pin assignment
Changeover contact 1:
70(6DQG',1$085
&+
&+
&+
&+
',
',
',
',
9V
9V
9V
Changeover contact 2
terminals 2, 6 and 7
DI: Input signal
12FRQWDFW
RU

9V
([DPSOHIRUFRQQHFWLRQ
RIFKDQQHO

Remarks
1&FRQWDFW
Terminal assignment of a single, closed contact with 10 k (mechanical normally open contact)
This table shows the terminal assignment of a single, closed contact with 10 k
(mechanical normally open contact).
Table 11-12 Terminal assignment of a single, closed contact with 10 k (mechanical normally open contact)
View
Pin assignment
Remarks
Single contact 1:
70(6DQG',1$085

Single contact 2:
&+
&+
&+
&+
',
',

',
9V
9V

Single contact 3:
Single contact 4:
N
',
11-34
([DPSOHIRUFRQQHFWLRQRI
FKDQQHO

DI: Input signal


Terminal assignment of a closed changeover contact with 10 k (mechanical changeover contact)

This table shows the terminal assignment of a closed changeover contact with 10 k
(mechanical normally open contact).
Table 11-13 Terminal assignment of a closed changeover contact with 10 k (mechanical changeover contact)
View
Pin assignment
Terminals 1, 5 and 3
70(6DQG',1$085
&+
&+
Terminals 2, 6 and 7
&+
FKDQQHODQGFKDQQHO
&+
N

',

',
',
',
9V
9V
9V
9V
Remarks
DI: Input signal

Terminal assignment of an open single contact (mechanical normally open contact with single
contact)
This table shows the terminal assignment of an open single contact
(mechanical normally open contact with single contact).
Table 11-14 Terminal assignment of an open single contact (mechanical normally open contact with single contact)
View
Pin assignment
Remarks
Single contact 1:
70(6DQG',1$085
&+
&+
&+
&+
',
',
',
',
9V
9V
9V
9V
([DPSOHIRUFRQQHFWLRQ
RIFKDQQHO

Single contact 2:
Single contact 3:

Single contact 4:
DI: Input signal

11-35

Terminal assignment of an open changeover contact (mechanical changeover contact)

This table shows the terminal assignment of an open changeover contact
(mechanical changeover contact).
Table 11-15 Terminal assignment of an open changeover contact (mechanical changeover contact)
View
Pin assignment
Remarks
70(6$DQG',1$085
&+
&+
&+
&+

',
',
9V
9V
9V
$8;
$8;

$
DI: Input signal

',
',
9V
FKDQQHODQGFKDQQHO
$8;
$8;
Block diagram
%DFNSODQHEXV
,QSXWZLULQJ
(76
EDFNSODQHEXV
LQWHUIDFH
FRQQHFWLRQ
w&
,QSXWV

9
33
0XOWLSOH[HU
FRPSDUDWRU

9

Figure 11-9
11-36
9V
Block diagram of the 4DI NAMUR


15 81 52
Weight
Approx. 35 g
Number of inputs
Length of cable
Shielded
Max. 200 m
Voltage, currents, potentials

Number of inputs that can be triggered
simultaneously
Horizontal installation up to 60 C
All other mounting positions up to 40 C
Isolation
No
Yes
Between channels and load voltage
Yes
Between load voltage and backplane bus
Yes
Between different circuits
75 VDC, 60 VAC
Insulation tested with:
Channels against the backplane bus and

load voltage
500 VDC
Load voltage against the backplane bus
500 VDC
Current consumption
From load voltage L+
Typ. 1.6 W
Status display
Interrupts
Hardware interrupt
No
Yes, can be set
Group error display

Red "SF" LED

Possible
Monitoring for
Short circuit
Wire break
I > 7 mA*
I < 0.35 mA*
Input current for NAMUR sensors
At signal "1"
At signal "0"
according to NAMUR or IEC 60947-5-6

2.1 mA to 7 mA
0.35 mA to 1.2 mA
Input current for a closed contact

11-37

At signal "1"
2.1 mA to 7 mA
For signal "0"
0.35 mA to 1.2 mA
Input current for an open contact
At signal "1"
Typ. 8 mA
0.5 mA
Input delay
At "0" to "1"
Max. 4.6 ms
At "1" to "0"
Max. 4.6 ms
Tolerated switchover time with changeover

contacts
300 ms
Parallel connection of inputs
No
Number of outputs
Output voltage
With load
Min. 8.2 V
Output current
Rated value
45 mA
Additional (redundant) supply
Not permissible
Yes, electronic
* Only for NAMUR sensors and closed contacts.
Value status
The value status provides additional binary information on a digital input signal. The value
status is entered in the process input image at the same time as the signal, and it provides
information on the validity of the input signal. The value status is affected by:
Wire break check/short circuit
Flutter monitoring
Pulse extension
Validity check of changeover contact sensor types
Meaning of the value status:
"1": input signal is valid
"0": Input signal is invalid
11-38


Assignment in the process input image

The data is transferred to the process image in two bytes (16 bits).

%\WH
,QSXWVLJQDOIRUFKDQQHO
9DOXHVWDWXVIRUFKDQQHO
%\WH
XQDVVLJQHG
0HDQLQJ
6LJQDOYDOLG
6LJQDOLQYDOLG
&KDQQHOQRWIRUHQFRGHUW\SHFKDQJHRYHUFRQWDFW
Figure 11-10 Assignment in the process input image for 4DI NAMUR
Diagnosis for changeover contact sensor types

When a diagnosis is made for the changeover contact sensor type, the digital electronic
module controls the switchover between two input channels. If there is no signal change in
the normally closed contact after the set switchover time (see technical specifications), the
module reports a diagnosis.
Purpose of changeover contact diagnostics

You can use the diagnosis for the following:
A diagnosis of the sensor
To make absolutely sure that there has been a switchover between a normally open
contact and normally closed contact
Principle of changeover contact diagnostics

If the digital inputs of a channel group are assigned parameters as changeover contacts, the
module carries out a diagnosis for changeover contact sensor types for this channel group.
The tolerated switchover time between the two channels is fixed at 300 ms.
If the validity check is negative, the following applies:
The module designates the value status of the normally open contact channel as invalid.
The module creates a diagnostic entry for the NO contact channel.
The module triggers a diagnostic interrupt.

11-39

The digital input signal and the value status are only updated for the NO contact channel
(channel 0 and 2). In the case of the NC contact channel (channel 1 and 3) the digital input
signal is fixed at "zero" and the value status is "invalid" because this channel is only used for
a validity check of the sensor.
Note the following points when carrying out a diagnosis for a changeover contact sensor
type:
If there is already an error on the NO contact channel (wire break, for example), the
module will not carry out a diagnosis for changeover contact errors. The diagnosis for
changeover contact errors continues to be carried out on the second channel.
You will find additional points to note in the following table:
Table 11-16 Diagnosis for changeover contacts
Changeover contact
A negative check means...
Changeover contact as
NAMUR
Short circuit or
Wire break
Closed changeover contact
Defective sensor or short circuit
Additionally:
No distinction can be made here between a defective sensor

and short circuit
Open changeover contact
11-40
Changeover contact error

or external fault (in the
case of DP diagnosis)
Attention: No distinction possible between

Signal "0" and wire break
Signal "1" and short circuit


11.10 2DI 120 VAC Standard digital electronic module (6ES7131-4EB00-0AB0)
11.10
2DI 120 VAC Standard digital electronic module

(6ES7131-4EB00-0AB0)
11.10
Order number
6ES7131-4EB00-0AB0
Features
Rated input voltage 120 VAC
Suitable for switches
Pin assignment
The following table illustrates the terminal assignment of the 2DI 120 VAC Standard for the
Table 11-17 Terminal assignment of the 2DI 120 VAC Standard
View
Pin assignment
70(6$DQG',9$&6WDQGDUG
&+
Channel 1:
Terminals 5 to A8
DI: Input signal
&+
ZLUH
',
',
/
/
$

$

1
$8;HJ3(
Remarks
Channel 0:
Terminals 1 to A4
ZLUH
ZLUH
L1: Sensor supply voltage

N: Neutral conductor
$8;HJ3(
$8;PXVWEHRFFXSLHGZLWK
ZLUHVDW3(
70(6DQG',9$&6WDQGDUG
DI: Input signal
&+
&+
ZLUH
',
',
/
/
QF
ZLUH

to 120 VAC.
QF

11-41

View
Pin assignment
Remarks
DI: Input signal
&+
&+
ZLUH
',
',
/
/
ZLUH
DI: Input signal
&+
&+
ZLUH
',
',
/
/
QF
QF
$8;
$8;
11-42
ZLUH
ZLUH
to 120 VAC.
$8;
$8;
$8;PXVWEHRFFXSLHGZLWK
ZLUHVDW3(


Block diagram

%DFNSODQHEXV
(76
EDFNSODQH
EXVFLUFXLW

/

3
3
Figure 11-11 Block diagram of the 2DI 120 VAC Standard
15 81 52
Weight
Approx. 31 g
No
Number of inputs
Length of cable
Unshielded
Shielded
Max. 600 m
Max. 1000 m
Supply voltage (from the power module)
Frequency
120 VAC
47 to 63 Hz
Isolation
No
Yes
between Minternal and the inputs
1500 VAC
2500 VDC
Typ. 0.5 W
Status display
No

11-43

Input voltage
Rated value
120 VAC
For signal "1"
79 to 132 VAC
For signal "0"
0 to 20 VAC
Input current
At signal "1"
3 to 9 mA
Input delay
At "0" to "1"
15 ms
At "1" to "0"
25 ms
No
11-44
Max. 1 mA


11.11 2DI 230 VAC Standard digital electronic module (6ES7131-4FB00-0AB0)
11.11
2DI 230 VAC Standard digital electronic module

(6ES7131-4FB00-0AB0)
11.11
Order number
6ES7131-4FB00-0AB0
Features
Rated input voltage 230 VAC
Suitable for switches
Pin assignment
The following table illustrates the terminal assignment of the 2DI 230 VAC Standard for the
Table 11-18 Terminal assignment of the 2DI 230 VAC Standard
View
Pin assignment
&+
Channel 1:
Terminals 5 to A8
DI: Input signal
&+
ZLUH
',
',
/
/
$

$

1
$8;HJ3(
Remarks
Channel 0:
Terminals 1 to A4
ZLUH
ZLUH

$8;HJ3(
$8;PXVWEHRFFXSLHG
ZLWKZLUHVDW3(
DI: Input signal
&+
&+
ZLUH
',
',
/
/
QF
QF
ZLUH


to 230 VAC.
11-45

View
Pin assignment
Remarks
DI: Input signal
&+
&+
ZLUH
',
',
/
/
ZLUH
DI: Input signal
&+
&+
ZLUH
',
',
/
/
QF
QF
$8;
$8;
11-46
ZLUH
ZLUH
to 230 VAC.
$8;
$8;
$8;PXVWEH
RFFXSLHGZLWKZLUHVDW3(


Block diagram

%DFNSODQHEXV
(76
EDFNSODQH
EXV
FLUFXLW

/

3
3
Figure 11-12 Block diagram of the 2DI 230 VAC Standard
15 81 52
Weight
Approx. 31 g
No
Number of inputs
Length of cable
Unshielded
Shielded
Max. 600 m
Max. 1000 m
Supply voltage (from the power module)
Frequency
230 VAC
47 to 63 Hz
Isolation
No
Yes
between Minternal and the inputs
1500 VAC
4000 VDC
Typ. 0.7 W

Status display
No

11-47

Input voltage
Rated value
230 VAC
For signal "1"
164 to 264 VAC
For signal "0"
0 to 40 VAC
Input current
At signal "1"
5 to 30 mA
Input delay
At "0" to "1"
15 ms
At "1" to "0"
45 ms
Connection of two-wire
BEROs
No
11-48
Max. 2 mA


11.12 2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A Standard digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BB01-0AA0)
11.12
2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A Standard digital electronic module

(6ES7132-4BB01-0AA0)
11.12
Order number
6ES7132-4BB01-0AA0
Features
Digital electronic module with two outputs
Output current 0.5 A per output
Rated load voltage 24 VDC
Suitable for solenoid valves, DC contactors, and indicator lights
Peculiarity
When you supply the 24 VDC rated load voltage at the power module by means of a
mechanical contact, depending on the circuit the digital outputs carry the "1" signal for
approximately 50 s. You need to take this into account if you connect the module to fast
counters.
Pin assignment
The following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 2DO 24 VDC, 0.5 A Standard for
Table 11-19 Terminal assignment of the 2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A Standard
View
Pin assignment
Remarks
70(6$DQG'29'&R$6WDQGDUG
DO: Output signal (maximum 0.5
A per channel)
&+
'2
'2
9'&
9'&
$8;HJ3(
&+
ZLUH
ZLUH
ZLUH
M: Ground load power supply
$8;HJ3(
$8;PXVWEHRFFXSLHG
ZLWKZLUHVDW3(

11-49

View
Pin assignment
Remarks
70(6DQG'29'&$6WDQGDUG
A per channel)
&+
&+
ZLUH
'2
'2
9'&
9'&
QF
QF
ZLUH

Terminals 4 and 8 can be used for
unneeded wires of up to 30 VDC.
A per channel)
&+
&+
ZLUH
'2
'2
9'&
9'&
ZLUH
70(6$DQG'29'&$6WDQGDUG
A per channel)
&+
&+
ZLUH
'2
'2
9'&
9'&
QF
QF
$8;HJ0
$8;HJ0
11-50
ZLUH

$8;HJ0
$8;HJ0


Block diagram
%DFNSODQHEXV
(76
EDFNSODQH
EXV
FLUFXLW
3
3
0
/
5HYHUVHSRODULW\
SURWHFWLRQ LQWHUQDO
SRZHUVXSSO\

Figure 11-13 Block diagram of the 2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A Standard

11-51

15 81 52
Weight
Approx. 40 g
Yes
Number of outputs
Length of cable
Unshielded
Shielded
Max. 600 m
Max. 1000 m
Rated load voltage L+ (from the power module)
P1
24 VDC
Yes1
Total current of the outputs (per module)
1A
Isolation
No
Yes
75 VDC, 60 VAC
Insulation tested
500 VDC
Current consumption
Max. 5 mA per channel

Typ. 0.4 W

Status display
No
Data for selecting an actuator
Output voltage
At signal "1"
Min.. L+ (-1V)
Output current
At signal "1"
Rated value
Permitted range
0.5 A
7 mA up to 0.6 A
With signal "0" (leakage current)
Max. 0.3 mA
Output delay (for resistive load)
At "0" to "1"
Max. 200 s
At "1" to "0"
Max. 1.3 ms
Load resistor range
48 to 3.4 k
Lamp load
Max. 5 W
Connecting two outputs in parallel
For redundant triggering of a load
Yes (per module)
To increase performance
No
Control of a digital input
11-52
Yes


Switch rate
For resistive load
100 Hz
With inductive load
2 Hz
For lamp load
10 Hz
Limitation (internal) of the voltage induced on

circuit interruption
Typ. L+ (-55 to -60 V)
Reverse-voltage proof
Yes, if using the same load voltage as at the

power module
Short-circuit protection of the output
Yes2
Threshold on
Typ. 0.7 to 1.8 A
Polarity reversal can lead to the digital outputs being connected through
Per channel

11-53

11.13 4DO 24 VDC/0.5 A Standard digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BD01-0AA0)
11.13
4DO 24 VDC/0.5 A Standard digital electronic module

(6ES7132-4BD01-0AA0)
11.13
Order number
6ES7132-4BD01-0AA0
Features
Digital electronic module with four outputs
Peculiarity
counters.
Pin assignment
The following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 4DO 24 VDC, 0.5 A Standard for
Table 11-20 Terminal assignment of the 4DO 24 VDC/0.5 A Standard
View
Pin assignment
Remarks

&+
&+
&+
&+
ZLUH
'2
'2
0
$8;HJ3(
11-54
'2
'2
0

A per channel)
$8;HJ3(


View
Pin assignment
Remarks
&+
&+
&+
&+
'2
'2
'2
'2

A per channel)
ZLUH


&+
&+
'2
&+
&+

'2
'2
'2

A per channel)
ZLUH

&+
&+
&+
&+
'2
'2
'2
'2
$8;HJ3(
$8;HJ3(

ZLUH

A per channel)
$8;HJ3(
$8;HJ3(

11-55

Block diagram
%DFNSODQHEXV
(76
EDFNSODQH
EXV
FLUFXLW
0
3
3
/
5HYHUVHSRODULW\
SURWHFWLRQDQG
LQWHUQDOSRZHUVXSSO\

0RQO\ZLWK70(6
Figure 11-14 Block diagram of the 4DO 24 VDC/0.5 A Standard
11-56


15 81 52
Weight
Approx. 40 g
No
Number of outputs
Length of cable
Unshielded
Shielded
Max. 600 m
Max. 1000 m
P1
24 VDC
Yes1
2A
Isolation
No
Yes
75 VDC, 60 VAC
Insulation tested
500 VDC
Current consumption

Typ. 0.8 W

Status display
No
Output voltage
At signal "1"
Min.. L+ (-1V)
Output current
At signal "1"
Rated value
Permitted range
0.5 A
7 mA up to 0.6A
Max. 0.3 mA
At "0" to "1"
Max. 100 s
At "1" to "0"
Max. 300 s
Load resistor range
48 to 3.4 k
Lamp load
Max. 5 W
Yes (per module)
No

Yes
11-57

Switch rate
For resistive load
100 Hz
With inductive load
2 Hz
For lamp load
10 Hz

Typ. L+ (-55 to -60 V)

power module2
Yes3
11-58
Threshold on
Typ. 0.7 to 1.5 A
The module must be supplied with voltage.
Per channel


11.14 2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A High Feature digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BB01-0AB0)
11.14
2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A High Feature digital electronic module

(6ES7132-4BB01-0AB0)
11.14
Order number
6ES7132-4BB01-0AB0
Features
Peculiarity
When you connect the 24 VDC rated load voltage to the power module by means of a
counters.
Pin assignment
The following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 2DO 24 VDC, 0.5 A High
Feature for the different terminal modules:
Table 11-21 Terminal assignment of the 2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A High Feature
View
Pin assignment
Remarks
70(6$DQG'29'&$+LJK)HDWXUH
A per channel)
&+
'2
'2
9'&
9'&
0
0
$8;HJ3(
&+
ZLUH
ZLUH
ZLUH
$8;HJ3(
$8;PXVWEHRFFXSLHG
ZLWKZLUHVDW3(

11-59

View
Pin assignment
Remarks
70(6DQG'29'&$+LJK)HDWXUH
A per channel)
&+
&+
ZLUH
'2
'2
9'&
9'&
QF
QF
ZLUH

A per channel)
&+
&+
ZLUH
'2
'2
9'&
9'&
ZLUH
A per channel)
&+
&+
ZLUH
'2
'2
9'&
9'&
QF
QF
$8;
$8;
11-60
ZLUH

$8;
$8;


Block diagram
%DFNSODQHEXV
(76
EDFNSODQH
EXV
FLUFXLW
3
3
0
/
5HYHUVHSRODULW\
SURWHFWLRQDQGLQWHUQDO
SRZHUVXSSO\

Figure 11-15 Block diagram of the 2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A High Feature

11-61

15 81 52
Weight
Approx. 40 g
Yes
Number of outputs
Length of cable
Unshielded
Shielded
Max. 600 m
Max. 1000 m
P1
24 VDC
Yes1
1A
Isolation
No
Yes
75 VDC, 60 VAC
Insulation tested
500 VDC
Current consumption

Typ. 0.4 W

Status display
Group error
Diagnostic functions readable
Red "SF" LED

Yes
Output voltage
At signal "1"
Min. L+ (-1V)
Output current
At signal "1"
Rated value
Permitted range
0.5 A
7 mA up to 0.6A
Max. 0.3 mA
At "0" to "1"
At "1" to "0"
Max. 100 s
Max. 400 s
Load resistor range
48 to 3.4 k
Lamp load
Max. 2.5 W
11-62
Yes (per module)


No
Yes
Switch rate
For resistive load
100 Hz
With inductive load
2 Hz
For lamp load
10 Hz

Typ. L+ (-55 to -60 V)

power module
Yes2
Threshold on
Typ. 1.5 A
Per channel

11-63

11.15 2DO 24 VDC/2 A Standard digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BB31-0AA0)
11.15
2DO 24 VDC/2 A Standard digital electronic module

(6ES7132-4BB31-0AA0)
11.15
Order number
6ES7132-4BB31-0AA0
Features
Output current 2 A per output
Peculiarity
counters.
Pin assignment
The following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 2DO 24 VDC, 2 A Standard for
Table 11-22 Terminal assignment of the 2DO 24 VDC/2 A Standard
View
Pin assignment
Remarks
DO: Output signal (maximum 2 A
per channel)
&+
'2
'2
9'&
9'&
$8;HJ3(
&+
ZLUH
ZLUH
ZLUH
$8;HJ3(
$8;PXVWEHRFFXSLHG
ZLWKZLUHVDW3(
11-64


View
Pin assignment
Remarks
per channel)
&+
&+
ZLUH
'2
'2
9'&
9'&
QF
QF
ZLUH

per channel)
&+
&+
ZLUH
'2
'2
9'&
9'&
ZLUH
per channel)
&+
&+
ZLUH
'2
'2
9'&
9'&
QF
QF
$8;
$8;
ZLUH

$8;
$8;

11-65

Block diagram
%DFNSODQHEXV
(76
EDFNSODQH
EXVFLUFXLW
3
3
0
/
5HYHUVHSRODULW\
SRZHUVXSSO\

Figure 11-16 Block diagram of the 2DO 24 VDC/2 A Standard
11-66


15 81 52
Weight
Approx. 40 g
Supports clocked operation
No
Number of outputs
Length of cable
Unshielded
Shielded
Max. 600 m
Max. 1000 m
Polarity reversal
24 VDC
Yes1
4A
Isolation
No
Yes
75 VDC, 60 VAC
Insulation tested
500 VDC
Current consumption
From rated load voltage L+ (no load)

Typ. 1.4 W

Status display
No
Output voltage
At signal "1"
Min. L+ (-1V)
Output current
At signal "1"
Rated value
Permitted range
2A
7 mA to 2.4 A
Max. 0.5 mA
At "0" to "1"
Max. 200 s
At "1" to "0"
Max. 1.3 ms
Load resistor range
12 to 3.4 k
Lamp load
Max. 10 W
Yes (per module)
No

Yes
11-67

Switch rate
For resistive load
100 Hz
With inductive load
2 Hz (0.5 H)
For lamp load
10 Hz

Typ. L+ (-55 to -60 V)

power module
Yes2
11-68
Threshold on
Typ. 2.8 to 7.2 A
Per channel


11.16 4DO 24 VDC/2 A Standard digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BD31-0AA0)
11.16
4DO 24 VDC/2 A Standard digital electronic module

(6ES7132-4BD31-0AA0)
11.16
Order number
6ES7132-4BD31-0AA0
Features
Peculiarity
counters.
Pin assignment
The following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 4DO 24 VDC, 2 A Standard for
Table 11-23 Terminal assignment of the 4DO 24 VDC/2 A Standard
View
Pin assignment
Remarks

ZLUH

per channel)
$8;HJ3(
$8;HJ3(

11-69

View
Pin assignment
Remarks

&+
&+
&+
&+
'2
'2
'2
'2

per channel)
ZLUH


&+
&+
'2
&+
&+

'2
'2
'2

per channel)
ZLUH


&+
&+
'2
'2
'2
'2
$8;HJ3(
$8;HJ3(
11-70
&+
&+
ZLUH

per channel)
$8;HJ3(
$8;HJ3(


Block diagram
%DFNSODQHEXV
(76
EDFNSODQH
EXVFLUFXLW
3
3
0
/
5HYHUVHSRODULW\
SRZHUVXSSO\

0RQO\ZLWK70(6
Figure 11-17 Block diagram of the 4DO 24 VDC/2 A Standard

11-71

15 81 52
Weight
Approx. 40 g
No
Number of outputs
Length of cable
Unshielded
Shielded
Max. 600 m
Max. 1000 m
Polarity reversal
24 VDC
Yes1
4A
Isolation
No
Yes
75 VDC, 60 VAC
Insulation tested
500 VDC
Current consumption

Typ. 1.6 W

Status display
No
Output voltage
At signal "1"
Min. L+ (-1V)
Output current
At signal "1"
Rated value
Permitted range
2A
7 mA to 2.4 A
Max. 0.5 mA
At "0" to "1"
Max. 200 s
At "1" to "0"
Max. 1.3 ms
Load resistor range
12 to 3.4 k
Lamp load
Max. 10 W
Yes (per module)
No
11-72
Yes


Switch rate
For resistive load
100 Hz
With inductive load
2 Hz (0.5 H)
For lamp load
10 Hz

Typ. L+ (-55 to -60 V)

power module
Yes2
Threshold on
Typ. 2.8 to 7.2 A
Per channel

11-73

11.17 2DO 24 VDC/2 A High Feature digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BB31-0AB0)
11.17
2DO 24 VDC/2 A High Feature digital electronic module

(6ES7132-4BB31-0AB0)
11.17
Order number
6ES7132-4BB31-0AB0
Features
Peculiarity
counters.
Pin assignment
The following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 2DO 24 VDC, 2 A High Feature
for the different terminal modules:
Table 11-24 Terminal assignment of the 2DO 24 VDC/2 A High Feature
View
Pin assignment
Remarks
per channel)
&+
'2
'2
9'&
9'&
$8;HJ3(
&+
ZLUH
ZLUH
ZLUH
$8;HJ3(
$8;PXVWEHRFFXSLHG
ZLWKZLUHVDW3(
11-74


View
Pin assignment
Remarks
per channel)
&+
&+
ZLUH
'2
'2
9'&
9'&
QF
QF
ZLUH

per channel)
&+
&+
ZLUH
'2
'2
9'&
9'&
ZLUH
per channel)
&+
&+
ZLUH
'2
'2
9'&
9'&
QF
QF
$8;
$8;
ZLUH

$8;
$8;

11-75

Block diagram
%DFNSODQHEXV
(76
EDFNSODQH
EXVFLUFXLW
0
3
3
/
5HYHUVHSRODULW\
SRZHUVXSSO\

Figure 11-18 Block diagram of the 2DO 24 VDC/2 A High Feature
11-76


15 81 52
Weight
Approx. 40 g
Yes
Number of outputs
Length of cable
Unshielded
Shielded
Max. 600 m
Max. 1000 m
Polarity reversal
24 VDC
Yes1
4A
Isolation
No
Between the channels and backplane bus
Yes
75 VDC, 60 VAC
Insulation tested
500 VDC
Current consumption

Typ. 1.4 W

Status display
Group error
Red "SF" LED

Yes
Output voltage
At signal "1"
Min. L+ (-1V)
Output current
At signal "1"
Rated value
Permitted range
2A
7 mA to 2.4 A
Max. 0.5 mA
At "0" to "1"
At "1" to "0"
Max. 100 s
Max. 400 s
Load resistor range
12 to 3.4 k
Lamp load
Max. 5 W

Yes (per module)
11-77

No
Yes
Switch rate
For resistive load
100 Hz
With inductive load
2 Hz (0.5 H)
For lamp load
10 Hz

Typ. L+ (-55 to -60 V)

power module
Yes2
11-78
Threshold on
Typ. 4 A
Per channel


11.18 Digital electronic module 2DO 24 to 230 VAC (6ES7132-4FB00-0AB0)
11.18
11.18
Digital electronic module 2DO 24 to 230 VAC (6ES7132-4FB00-0AB0)
Order number
6ES7132-4FB00-0AB0
Features
Rated load voltage 24-48/120/230 VAC
Substitute value
Suitable for solenoid valves, AC contactors, and indicator lights
Pin assignment
The following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 2DO 24 to 230 VAC for the
Table 11-25 Terminal assignment of the 2DO 24-230 VAC
View
Pin assignment
Remarks
70(6$DQG'29$&
per channel)
&+
'2
1
$8;HJ3(
&+

$

$

'2
1
$8;HJ3(
$8;PXVWEHDVVLJQHGWR3(

11-79

View
Pin assignment
70(6DQG'29$&
Remarks
per channel)
&+
'2
&+


unneeded wires of up to 230
VAC.
'2
70(6DQG'29$&
per channel)
&+
'2
&+

'2
70(6$DQG'29$&
per channel)
&+
'2
QF
1
QF
$8;
$8;
11-80
&+
'2

unneeded wires of up to 230
VAC.
1
QF
QF
$8;
$8;


Block diagram
=&

%DFNSODQHEXV
(76
EDFNSODQH
EXV
FLUFXLW
3
3
=&

1
/
Figure 11-19 Block diagram of the 2DO 24-230 VAC
15 81 52
Weight
Approx. 37 g
No
Number of outputs
Length of cable
Unshielded
Max. 600 m
Shielded
Max. 1000 m
Rated load voltage L1 (from the power module)
Frequency
24-230 VAC
47 to 63 Hz
Up to 40 C
Max. 2 A*
Up to 60 C
Max. 1 A*
Isolation
Insulation tested
No
Yes
2500 VDC
Current consumption
Max. 18 mA
From rated load voltage L1 (no load)

11-81

Max. 4 W
Status display
No
Output voltage
At signal "1"
Min. L (-1.5 V)
Output current (per channel)
At signal "1"
Rated value
Permitted range
2A
0.1 mA to 2.2 A
Max. 3 mA
At "0" to "1"
At "1" to "0"
Zero cross inhibit voltage
Max. 15 ms
Max. 15 ms
Max. 25 V
Motor starter size
Up to 40 C
Max. size in accordance with NEMA: 5
Up to 60 C
Max. size in accordance with NEMA: 4
Lamp load
Max. 100 W
Yes (per module)

No
Possible
Switch rate
For resistive load
Max. 10 Hz
With inductive load
Max. 0.5 Hz
For lamp load
Max. 1 Hz
Yes, by means of fuse in the power module
* Total current of the outputs (per module), see figure below
11-82


Total current of the outputs

7HPSHUDWXUH
r&
r&
r&
7RWDOFXUUHQWSHUPRGXOH
$
$
$
Figure 11-20 Total current of the outputs for 2DO 24 to 230 VAC

11-83

11.19 2RO NO 24-120 VDC/5 A, 24-230 VAC/5 A digital electronic module (6ES7132-4HB01-0AB0)
11.19

(6ES7132-4HB01-0AB0)
11.19
Order number
6ES7132-4HB01-0AB0
Note
If you connect an extra-low voltage system (SELV/PELF) on one channel of the
2RO NO 24-120 VDC/5 A, 24-230 VAC/5 A, you can only use an extra-low voltage system
(SELV/PELF) on the other channel.
As of version 2 of the 2RO NO 24-120 VDC/5 A, 24-230 VAC/5 A there is no longer an
internal jumper between terminals 2 and 6. If you need this jumper, you can replace it with
an external jumper between terminals 3 and 7 (see block diagram below).
Features
Digital electronic module with two relay outputs
Rated load voltage up to 120 VDC and up to 230 VAC
Isolated from the supply voltage
Caution
The rated supply voltage of the 2RO NO 24-120 VDC/5 A, 24-230 VAC/5 A is 24 VDC.
The 2RO NO 24-120 VDC/5 A, 24-230 VAC/5 A can only be located in a potential group
with 24 VDC (from the power module).
11-84


Pin assignment
The following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 2RO NO 24-120 VDC/5 A,
24-230 VAC/5 A (as of version 2) for the different terminal modules:
Table 11-26 Terminal assignment of the 2RO NO 24-120 VDC/5 A, 24-230 VAC/5 A (as of Version 2)
View
Pin assignment
Remarks
70(6$DQG5212
9'&$9$&$
&+
13, 14: Normally open contact
channel 0:
&+

channel 1:
Internal jumper between
terminals 2 and 3, 6 and 7

$8;HJ3(
$

$

$8;HJ3(
$8;UDLOPXVWEH
DVVLJQHGWR3(
70(6DQG5212
9'&$9$&$
&+
channel 0:
&+

channel 1:

Terminals 4 and 8 can be used

for unneeded wires up to the
load voltage used.


QF
QF
&+
70(6DQG5212
9'&$9$&$
&+

channel 1:



channel 0:
11-85

View
Pin assignment
Remarks
70(6$DQG5212
9'&$9$&$
&+

channel 1:
Terminals 4 and 8 can be used
for unneeded wires up to the
load voltage used.

QF
$8;
$8;

channel 0:
&+

QF

$8;
$8;
Block diagram
%DFNSODQHEXV
(76
EDFNSODQH
EXV
FLUFXLW

3
3
0
/
3RODULW\UHYHUVDO
SURWHFWLRQ
)URPSURGXFWOHYHORIWKH52129'&9$&$WKHLQWHUQDO
EULGJHEHWZHHQWHUPLQDOVDQGLVQRWLQVWDOOHG,I\RXUHTXLUHWKLVEULGJHLWFDQEH
UHSODFHGE\DQH[WHUQDOEULGJHEHWZHHQWHUPLQDOVDQG
Figure 11-21 Block diagram of the 2RO NO 24-120 VDC/5 A, 230 VAC/5 A
11-86


15 81 52
Weight
Approx. 50 g
No
Number of outputs
Length of cable
Unshielded
Shielded
Max. 600 m
Max. 1000 m
Rated supply voltage L+ (from the power

module)
24 VDC
Reverse polarity protection Current per channel Yes
Up to 50 C
Max. 5 A
Up to 60 C
Max. 4 A
Isolation
Yes
Yes
Between the channels and supply voltage
Yes
Between the supply voltage and backplane

bus
Yes

bus
75 VDC, 60 VAC
240 VAC
Insulation tested
240 VAC
Yes

bus
500 VDC
1500 VAC
1500 VAC
Current consumption
Max. 30 mA
Typ. 0.6 W

Status display
No
Output current
Continuous thermal current
Max. 5 A
Min. load current
8 mA
Min. voltage
17 V

11-87

No
No
Yes
Switch rate
For resistive load
2 Hz
With inductive load
0.5 Hz
For lamp load
2 Hz

No
Short-circuit protection of the output 1
No
11-88
The relay outputs must be fused externally with 6A.


Switching capacity and lifetime of the contacts

With an external protective circuit, the contacts will last longer than specified in the table.
This table shows the switching capacity and endurance of the relay contacts:
Table 11-27 Switching capacity and lifetime of the relay contacts
Resistive load
For resistive load
Voltage
24 VDC
For inductive load in

accordance with IEC
947-5-1 DC 13/ AC 15
Operating cycles
(typical)
5.0 A
0.1 million
4.0 A
0.2 million
2.0 A
0.5 million
1.0 A
1.6 million
0.5 A
4 million
0.1 A
7 million
60 VDC
0.5 A
1.6 million
120 VDC
0.2 A
1.6 million
48 VAC
2.0 A
1.6 million
60 VAC
2.0 A
1.2 million
120 VAC
5.0 A
0.1 million
3.0 A
0.2 million
2.0 A
0.4 million
1.0 A
0.8 million
0.5 A
1.5 million
5.0 A
0.1 million
3.0 A
0.2 million
2.0 A
0.4 million
1.0 A
0.8 million
0.5 A
1.5 million
2.0 A
0.1 million
1.0 A
0.2 million
0.5 A
0.5 million
60 VDC
0.5 A
0.2 million
120 VDC
0.2 A
0.5 million
48 VAC
1.0 A
0.7 million
60 VAC
1.0 A
0.5 million
120 VAC
2.0 A
0.1 million
230 VAC

accordance with IEC
947-5-1 DC 13/ AC 15
Current
24 VDC
230 VAC

1.0 A
0.3 million
0.5 A
1 million
0.1 A
2 million
2.0 A
0.1 million
1.0 A
0.3 million
0.5 A
1 million
11-89

11.20 2RO NO/NC 24-48 VDC/5 A 24-230 VAC/5 A digital electronic module (6ES7132-4HB10-0AB0)
11.20

(6ES7132-4HB10-0AB0)
11.20
Features
Digital electronic module with two relay outputs
Substitute value
Isolated from the supply voltage
Normally open contact and normally closed contact
Note
If you connect an extra-low voltage system (SELV/ PELV) on one channel of the relay
module, you can only use an extra-low voltage system (SELV/ PELV) on the other
channel.
Pin assignment
The following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 2RO NO/NC 24-48 VDC/5 A,
24-230 VAC/5 A for the different terminal modules:
Table 11-28 Terminal assignment of the 2RO NO/NC 24-48 VDC/5 A, 24-230 VAC/5 A
View
Pin assignment
Remarks
70(6$DQG52121&
9'&$9$&$
&+

&RPPRQ
12FRQWDFW
12FRQWDFW
1&FRQWDFW
1&FRQWDFW
$8;HJ3(
$

$

$8;HJ3(
1, 2: normally open contact

channel 0
1, 3: normally closed contact
channel 0
&+
&RPPRQ

channel 1
channel 1
$8;UDLOPXVWEH
DVVLJQHGWR3(
11-90


View
Pin assignment
70(6DQG52121&
9'&$9$&$
&+
&+
&RPPRQ
12FRQWDFW
1&FRQWDFW
&RPPRQ
Remarks
channel 0
channel 0
12FRQWDFW

channel 1
1&FRQWDFW

channel 1
&+
&RPPRQ
12FRQWDFW

1&FRQWDFW
70(6DQG52121&
9'&$9$&$
&+

channel 0
&RPPRQ
12FRQWDFW

channel 1
1&FRQWDFW

channel 1

channel 0
70(6$DQG52121&
9'&$9$&$
&+
&RPPRQ
&+

12FRQWDFW

1&FRQWDFW
$8;
$8;
&RPPRQ

channel 0
channel 0
12FRQWDFW

channel 1
1&FRQWDFW

channel 1
$8;
$8;

11-91

Block diagram
%DFNSODQHEXV
(76
EDFNSODQHEXV
LQWHUIDFH
FRQQHFWLRQ

3
3
0
/
3RODULW\
UHYHUVDO
SURWHFWLRQ
Figure 11-22 Block diagram of the 2RO NO/NC 24-48 VDC/5 A 24-230 VAC/5 A
Dimensions W H D
15 81 52 (mm)
Weight
Approx. 50 g
No
Number of outputs
Length of cable
Unshielded
Max. 600 m
Shielded
Max. 1000 m
Rated supply voltage L+ (from the power

module)
24 VDC
Reverse polarity protection Current per channel Yes
Up to 50 C
Max. 5 A
Up to 60 C
Max. 4 A
Isolation
11-92
Yes
Yes
Yes

bus
Yes



bus
75 VDC, 60 VAC
240 VAC
240 VAC
Insulation tested

bus
500 VDC
2500 VDC
2500 VDC
Current consumption
Max. 30 mA
Max. 10 mA
Typ. 0.6 W
Status display
Green LEDs per channel
No
Output current
Continuous thermal current
Max. 5 A
Min. load current
8 mA
No
No
Yes
Switch rate
For resistive load
2 Hz
With inductive load
0.5 Hz
For lamp load
2 Hz

No
Short-circuit protection of the output 1
No
The relay outputs must be protected externally with a 6 A fuse. For installation in a hazardous area
in accordance with the National Electric Code (NEC), only remove the fuse using a suitable tool if the
module is not in a potentially explosive area.
1

11-93

Switching capacity and lifetime of the contacts

With an external protective circuit, the contacts will last longer than specified in the following
table.
The normally open and normally closed contacts of the relay vary in their length of service
life. This table shows the switching capacity and lifetime of the contacts.
Table 11-29 Switching capacity and lifetime of the contacts
Resistive load
For resistive load
Voltage
24 VDC
Operating cycles
(typ.)
Normally open
contact
Operating cycles
(typ.)
Normally closed
contact
5,0 A
0.1 million
0.15 million
4.0 A
0.2 million
0.175 million
2.0 A
0.45 million
0.3 million
0.5 A
1.4 million
1.1 million
0.1 A
1.5 million
1.5 million
2.0 A
0.15 million
0.11 million
1.0 A
0.3 million
0.2 million
0.5 A
0.6 million
0.6 million
0.1 A
0.8 million
0.6 million
48 VAC
2.0 A
0.45 million
0.35 million
60 VAC
2.0 A
0.45 million
0.35 million
120 VAC
5.0 A
0.1 million
0.1 million
3.0 A
0.2 million
0.2 million
2.0 A
0.4 million
0.3 million
1.0 A
0.8 million
0.6 million
0.5 A
1.5 million
1.0 million
5.0 A
0.1 million
0.1 million
3.0 A
0.2 million
0.2 million
2.0 A
0.4 million
0.3 million
1.0 A
0.8 million
0.6 million
0.5 A
1.5 million
1.0 million
48 VDC
230 VAC
11-94
Current


Resistive load
Voltage
Current
Operating cycles
(typ.)
Normally open
contact
Operating cycles
(typ.)
Normally closed
contact

24 VDC
accordance with IEC
947-5-1 DC 13/ AC15
2.0 A
0.1 million
0.1 million
1.0 A
0.2 million
0.2 million
0.5 A
0.5 million
0.5 million
48 VDC
2.0 A
0.07 million
0.05 million
1.0 A
0.15 million
0.1 million
0.5 A
0.4 million
0.25 million
48 VAC
1.0 A
0.5 million
0.3 million
60 VAC
1.0 A
0.5 million
0.3 million
120 VAC
2.0 A
0.1 million
0.1 million
1.0 A
0.3 million
0.1 million
0.5 A
0.9 million
0.6 million
0.1 A
1.5 million
1.0 million
2.0 A
0.1 million
0.1 million
1.0 A
0.5 million
0.3 million
0.5 A
0.9 million
0.6 million
0.1 A
1.0 million
1.0 million
230 VAC

11-95

11-96


12.1
12.1
12
Introduction
Analog electronic module range

The range of analog electronic modules (EM) includes modules for measuring voltages and
currents. For time-critical measuring of voltage and current, you can use the HIGH SPEED
modules. The HIGH FEATURE modules provide a higher resolution and greater accuracy.
There are also modules available for connecting thermocouples and resistance
thermometers or resistors.
Modules for connecting loads/actuators to current and voltage outputs complete the range.
12.2
12.2.1
12.2
Analog value representation
Overview
Electronic modules with analog inputs

You can use electronic modules with analog inputs to record, evaluate, and convert
continuously changing signals to digital values that you can process further. Examples of
such continuously changing signals are those that occur when measuring temperature or
pressure.
Electronic modules with analog outputs

The electronic modules with analog outputs allow digitized values that are input by means of
a controller to be converted in an analog output module to a corresponding analog signal
(current or voltage) to control actuators (setpoint input for speed controllers, temperature
controllers, etc.).

12-1

12.2 Analog value representation
Measured values in the case of a wire break depending on diagnostic being enabled
The rules and additions outlined below apply to the following measuring ranges:
V to 5 V, 4 mA to 20 mA
Temperature sensor Pt xxx Standard and Climatic, Ni xx Standard and Climatic, Cu 10
Standard and Climatic
Thermocouple type E, N, J, K, L, S, R, B, C, T
The following additions and rules apply:
Table 12-1
Format
Measured values in the case of a wire break depending on diagnostic being enabled
Measured values
Decimal
S7
Explanation
Hexadecimal
Enable "Wire break" diagnostics (at 1

to 5 V, 4 to 20 mA, RTD)1
32767
7FFFH
"Open circuit" diagnostic message
"Wire break check" enabled (in the

case of TC)
32767
7FFFH
"Open circuit" diagnostic message
"Wire break" diagnostics disabled (at

1 to 5 V, 4 to 20 mA, RTD)1
"Overflow/underflow" enabled
-32767
8000H
Measured value after leaving the

underrange
"Lower limit value violated"
diagnostic message
"Wire break" diagnostics disabled (at

1 to 5 V, 4 to 20 mA, RTD)1
"Overflow/underflow" disabled
-32767
8000H
Measured value after leaving the

underrange
"Wire break check" disabled (in the

case of TC)
---
---
Open input: undefined measured

value
Measuring range limits for detection of wire break/underrange:

1 to 5 V: for 0, 296 V
4 to 20 mA: for 1,185 mA
12.2.2
Analog value representation for measuring ranges with SIMATIC S7
Analog value representation

The digitized analog value for input and output values is the same in the same rated range.
Analog values are represented in twos complement.
The following table shows the analog value representation of the analog electronic modules.
Table 12-2
Analog value representation (SIMATIC S7 format)
Resolution
Analog value
Bit number
15
14
13
12
11
10
Significance of the bits
214
213
212
211
210
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
12-2


Sign
The sign (S, +/-) of the analog value is always in bit number 15:
"0" +
"1"
Measured-value resolution
In the table below, you will find the representation of the binary analog values and the
associated decimal and hexadecimal representation of the units of the analog values.
The following table shows the resolutions 11, 12, 13, and 15 bits + sign. Each analog value
is entered in the accumulator with left justification. The bits marked "x" are set to "0".
Table 12-3
Measured-value resolution of the analog values (SIMATIC S7 format)
Resolution in bits
Units
Analog value
Decimal
Hexadecimal
High byte
Low byte
11+ sign (S)
16
10H
S0000000
001xxxx
12 + sign (S)
8H
S0000000
0001xxx
13 + sign (S)
4H
S0000000
00001xx
15 + sign (S)
1H
S0000000
0000001
Note
This resolution does not apply to temperature values. The converted temperature values are
the result of a conversion in the analog electronic module.
Note
The following applies to temperature measurements: In the overrange and underrange, the
gradient of the characteristic curve at the point where the linearized rated range is left is
retained.

12-3

12.2.3
Measuring ranges of the analog input modules in SIMATIC S7 format for voltage,
current, and resistance-type sensors
Introduction
The following tables contain the digitized analog values for the measuring ranges of the
analog input modules.
The binary representation of the analog values is always the same, so these tables only
compare the measuring ranges and the units.
Measuring ranges for voltage: 80 mV, 2.5 V, 5 V, 10 V

Table 12-4
SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring ranges 80 mV, 2.5 V, 5 V, and 10 V
Measuring
range 80 mV
Measuring
range 2.5 V
Measuring
range 5 V
> 94,071
94,071
:
80,003
80,000
60,000
:
- 60,000
- 80,000
- 80,003
:
- 94,074
< - 94,074
> 2,9397
2,9397
:
2,5001
2,5
1,86
:
- 1,86
- 2,50
- 2,5001
:
- 2,9397
< - 2,9397
> 5,8794
5,8794
:
5,0002
5,00
3,75
:
- 3,75
- 5,00
- 5,0002
:
- 5,8796
< - 5,8796
Measuring
range
10 V
> 11,7589
11,7589
:
10,0004
10,00
7,50
:
- 7,50
- 10,00
- 10,0004
:
- 11,759
< - 11,759
Decimal
Units
Hexadecimal
32767
32511
:
27649
27648
20736
:
-20736
-27648
-27649
:
-32512
-32768
7FFF H
7EFFH
:
6C01H
6C00H
5100H
:
AF00H
9400H
93FFH
:
8100H
8000H
Range
Overflow
Overrange
Rated range
Underrange
Underflow
Measuring ranges for voltage and current: 1 to 5 V, 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA

Table 12-5
SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring ranges 1 to 5 V, 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA
Measuring range 1
to 5 V
> 5,704
5,704
:
5,000145
5,000
4,000
:
1,000
0,999855
:
0,296
< 0,296
12-4
Measuring range
0 to 20 mA
> 23,5178
23,5178
:
20,0007
20,0000
15,0000
:
0,0000
Negative values
not possible
Measuring range
4 to 20 mA
> 22,8142
22,8142
:
20,0005
20,0000
16,0000
:
4,0000
3,9995
.
1,1852
< 1,1852
Decimal
32767
32511
:
27649
27648
20736
:
0
-1
:
-4864
-32768
Units
Hexadecimal
7FFFH
7EFFH
:
6C01H
6C00H
5100H
:
0H
FFFFH
:
ED00H
8000H
Range
Overflow
Overrange
Rated range
Underrange
Underflow


Measuring range for current: 20 mA

Table 12-6
SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring range 20 mA
Measuring range 20 mA
Range
Units
Decimal
Hexadecimal
> 23,5150
32767
7FFFH
23,5150
32511
7EFFH
20,0007
27649
6C01H
20,0000
27648
6C00H
14,9980
20736
5100H
- 14,9980
-20736
AF00H
- 20,0000
-27648
9400H
- 20,0007
-27649
93FFH
- 23,5160
-32512
8100H
< - 23,5160
-32768
8000H
Overflow
Overrange
Rated range
Underrange
Underflow
Measuring ranges for resistance-type sensors: 150 , 300 , 600 , 3000

Table 12-7
SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring ranges 150 , 300 , 600 , 3000
Measuring range
150
Measuring range
300
Measuring range
600
Measuring range
3000
Range
Decimal
> 176.38
> 352,77
> 705,53
> 3527,67
32767
7FFFH
176,38
352,77
705,53
3527,67
32511
7EFFH
Units
Hexadecimal
150,005
300,01
600,02
3000,11
27649
6C01H
150,00
300,00
600,00
3000,00
27648
6C00H
112,50
225,00
450,00
2250,00
20736
5100H
0,00
0,00
0,00
0,00
(Negative values not physically possible)
0H
-1
FFFFH
-4864
ED00H
-32768
8000H
Overflow
Overrange
Rated range
Underrange*
Underflow*
* If the resistors are connected incorrectly

12-5

12.2.4
Measuring ranges of the analog input modules in SIMATIC S7 format for

resistance thermometer
Measuring ranges for resistance thermometer Pt x00 Standard

Table 12-8
SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring ranges Pt 100, 200, 500, 1000 Standard in C and F
Pt x00 Standard in C
(1 digit = 0.1C)
Pt x00 Standard in F
(1 digit = 0.1 F)
Decimal
Hexadecimal
Decimal
Hexadecimal
> 1000,0
32767
7FFFH
> 1832,0
32767
7FFFH
1000,0
:
10000
2710H
1832,0
18320
4790H
850,1
8501
2135H
1562,1
15621
3D05H
850,0
8500
2134H
1562,0
15620
3D04H
Units
Range
Units
-200,0
-2000
F830H
-328,0
-3280
F330H
-200,1
-2001
F82FH
-328,1
-3281
F32FH
-243,0
-2430
F682H
-405,4
-4054
F02AH
< - 243,0
-32768
8000H
< - 405,4
-32768
8000H
Overflow
Overrange
Rated range
Underrange
Underflow
Measuring ranges for resistance thermometer Pt x00 Climatic

Table 12-9
SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring ranges Pt 100, 200, 500, 1000 Climatic in C and F
Pt x00 Climatic in C
(1 digit = 0.01C)
Decimal
Hexadecimal
> 155,00
32767
155,00
:
12-6
Pt x00 Climatic in F
(1 digit = 0.01 F)
Decimal
Hexadecimal
7FFFH
> 311,00
32767
7FFFH
15500
3C8CH
311,00
31100
797CH
130,01
13001
32C9H
266,01
26601
67E9H
130,00
13000
32C8H
266,00
26600
67E8H
Units
Range
Units
-120,00
-12000
D120H
-184,00
-18400
B820H
-120,01
-12001
D11FH
-184,01
-18401
B81FH
-145,00
-14500
C75CH
-229,00
-22900
A68CH
< - 145,00
-32768
8000H
< - 229,00
-32768
8000H
Overflow
Overrange
Rated range
Underrange
Underflow


Measuring ranges for resistance thermometer Ni x00 Standard

Table 12-10 SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring ranges Ni 100, 200, 500, 1000 Standard in C and F
Ni x00 Standard in C
(1 digit = 0.1C)
Ni x00 Standard in F
(1 digit = 0.1 F)
Decimal
Hexadecimal
Decimal
Hexadecimal
> 295,0
32767
7FFFH
> 563,0
32767
7FFFH
295,0
:
2950
B86H
563,0
5630
15FEH
250,1
2501
9C5H
482,1
4821
12D5H
250,0
2500
9C4H
482,0
4820
12D4H
Units
Range
Units
-60,0
-600
FDA8H
-76,0
-760
FD08H
-60,1
-601
FDA7H
-76,1
-761
FD07H
-105,0
-1050
FBE6H
-157,0
-1570
F9DEH
< -105,0
-32768
8000H
< -157,0
-32768
8000H
Overflow
Overrange
Rated range
Underrange
Underflow
Measuring ranges for resistance thermometer Ni x00 Climatic

Table 12-11 SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring ranges Ni 100, 200, 500, 1000 Climatic in C and F
Ni x00 Climatic in C
(1 digit = 0,01C)
Decimal
Hexadecimal
Ni x00 Climatic in F
(1 digit = 0.01 F)
Decimal
Hexa
decimal
> 295,00
32767
7FFFH
> 325,11
32767
7FFFH
295,00
:
29500
733CH
327,66
32766
7FFEH
250,01
25001
61A9H
280,01
28001
6D61H
250,00
25000
61A8H
280,00
28000
6D60H
Units
Range
Units
-60,00
-6000
E890H
-76,00
-7600
E250H
-60,01
-6001
E88FH
-76,01
-7601
E24FH
-105,00
-10500
D6FCH
-157,00
-15700
C2ACH
< - 105,00
-32768
8000H
< - 157,00
-32768
8000H

Overflow
Overrange
Rated range
Underrange
Underflow
12-7

Measuring ranges for resistance thermometer Cu 10 Standard

Table 12-12 SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring ranges Cu 10 Standard in C und F
Cu 10 Standard in C
(1 digit = 0.1C)
Cu 10 Standard in F
(1 digit = 0.1 F)
Decimal
Hexadecimal
Decimal
Hexadecimal
> 312,0
32767
7FFFH
> 593,6
32767
7FFFH
312,0
:
3120
C30H
593,6
5936
1730H
260,1
2601
A29H
500,1
5001
12D5H
260,0
2600
A28H
500,0
5000
1389H
Units
Range
Units
-200,0
-2000
F830H
-328,0
-3280
F330H
-200,1
-2001
F82FH
-328,1
-3281
F32FH
-240,0
-2400
F6A0H
-400,0
-4000
F060H
< - 240,0
-32768
8000H
< - 400,0
-32768
8000H
Overflow
Overrange
Rated range
Underrange
Underflow
Measuring ranges for resistance thermometer Cu 10 Climatic

Table 12-13 SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring ranges Cu 10 Climatic in C und F
Cu 10 Climatic in C
(1 digit = 0.01C)
Decimal
Hexadecimal
> 180,00
32767
180,00
18000
12-8
Cu 10 Climatic in F
(1 digit = 0.01 F)
Decimal
Hexadecimal
7FFFH
> 325,11
32767
7FFFH
4650H
327,66
32766
7FFEH
Units
Range
Units
150,01
15001
3A99H
280,01
28001
6D61AH
150,00
15000
3A98H
280,00
28000
6D60H
-50,00
-5000
EC78H
-58,00
-5800
E958H
-50,01
-5001
EC77H
-58,01
-5801
E957H
-60,00
-6000
E890H
-76,00
-7600
E250H
< - 60,00
-32768
8000H
< - 76,00
-32768
8000H
Overflow
Overrange
Rated range
Underrange
Underflow


12.2.5
Measuring ranges of the analog input modules in SIMATIC S7 format for

thermocouples
Measuring range for thermocouple: Type B

Table 12-14 SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring range Type B in C and F
Type B in C
Type B in F
Units
Decimal
Hexadecimal
> 2070,0
32767
7FFFH
2070,0
20700
1820,1
1820,0
Range
Units
Decimal
Hexadecimal
> 3276,6
32767
7FFFH
50DCH
3276,6
32766
7FFEH
18201
4719H
2786,6
27866
6CDAH
18200
4718H
2786,5
27865
6CD9H
0,0
0000H
32
320
0140H
-0,1
-1
FFFFH
31,9
319
013FH
-120,0
-1200
FB50H
-184,0
-1840
F8D0H
< -120,0
-32768
8000H
< -184,0
-32768
8000H
Overflow
Overrange
Rated range
Underrange
Underflow
Measuring range for thermocouple: Type C

Table 12-15 SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring range Type C in C and F
Type C in C
Type C in F
Units
Decimal
Hexadecimal
> 2500,0
32767
7FFFH
2500,0
25000
2315,1
23151
5A6FH
2315,0
23150
5A6EH
Range
Units
Decimal
Hexadecimal
> 3276,6
32767
7FFFH
61A8H
3276,6
32766
7FFEH
2786,6
27866
6CDAH
2786,5
27865
6CD9H
0,0
0000H
32,0
320
0140H
0,1
-1
FFFFH
31,9
319
013FH
-120,0
-1200
FB50H
-184,0
-1840
F8D0H
< -120,0
-32768
8000H
< -184,0
-32768
8000H

Overflow
Overrange
Rated range
Underrange
Underflow
12-9

Measuring range for thermocouple type E

Table 12-16 SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring range Type E in C and F
Type E in C
> 1200,0
1200,0
:
1000,1
1000,0
:
-270,0
< -270,0
Decimal
32767
12000
:
10001
10000
:
-2700
- 32768
Units
Hexadecimal
7FFFH
2EE0H
:
2711H
2710H
:
F574H
8000H
Type E in F
> 2192,0
2192,0
:
1832,1
1832,0
:
-454,0
< -454,0
Units
Decimal
Hexadecimal
32767
7FFFH
21920
55A0H
:
:
18321
4791H
18320
4790H
:
:
-4540
EE44H
- 32768
8000H
Range
Overflow
Overrange
Rated range
Underflow
Measuring range for thermocouple type J

Table 12-17 SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring range Type J in C and F
Type J in C
> 1450,0
1450,0
:
1200,1
1200,0
:
-210,0
< -210,0
Decimal
32767
14500
:
12010
12000
:
-2100
- 32768
Units
Hexadecimal
7FFFH
38A4H
:
2EEAH
2EE0H
:
F7CCH
8000H
Type J in F
> 2642,0
2642,0
:
2192,1
2192,0
:
-346,0
< -346,0
Units
Decimal
Hexadecimal
32767
7FFFH
26420
6734H
:
:
21921
55A1H
21920
55A0H
:
:
-3460
F27CH
- 32768
8000H
Range
Overflow
Overrange
Rated range
Underflow
Measuring range for thermocouple type K

Table 12-18 SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring range Type K in C and F
Type K in C
> 1622,0
1622,0
:
1372,1
1372,0
:
-270,0
< -270,0
12-10
Decimal
32767
16220
:
13721
13720
:
-2700
- 32768
Units
Hexa-decim
al
7FFFH
3F5CH
:
3599H
3589H
:
F574H
8000H
Type K in F
> 2951,6
2951,6
:
2501,7
2501,6
:
-454,0
< -454,0
Units
Decimal Hexa-deci
mal
32767
7FFFH
29516
734CH
:
:
25062
61B9H
61B8H
25061
:
:
-4540
EE44H
- 32768
8000H
Range
Overflow
Overrange
Rated range
Underflow


Measuring range for thermocouple type L

Table 12-19 SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring range Type L in C and F
Type L in C
> 1150,0
1150,0
:
900,1
900,0
:
-200,0
< -200,0
Decimal
32767
11500
:
9001
9000
:
-2000
-32768
Type L in F
Units
Hexadecimal
7FFFH
2CECH
:
2329H
2328H
:
F830H
8000H
> 2102,0
2102,0
:
1652,1
1652,0
:
-328,0
< -328,0
Units
Decimal
Hexadecimal
32767
7FFFH
21020
521CH
:
:
16521
4089H
16520
4088H
:
:
-3280
F330H
-32768
8000H
Range
Overflow
Overrange
Rated range
Underflow
Measuring range for thermocouple type N

Table 12-20 SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring range Type N in C and F
Type N in C
> 1550,0
1550,0
:
1300,1
1300,0
:
-270,0
< -270,0
Decimal
32767
15500
:
13001
13000
:
-2700
-32768
Type N in F
Units
Hexadecimal
7FFFH
3C8CH
:
32C9H
32C8H
:
F574H
8000H
> 2822,0
2822,0
:
2372,1
2372,0
:
-454,0
< -454,0
Units
Decimal
Hexadecimal
32767
7FFFH
28220
6E3CH
:
:
23721
5CA9H
23720
5CA8H
:
:
-4540
EE44H
-32768
8000H
Range
Overflow
Overrange
Rated range
Underflow
Measuring range for thermocouple types R, S

Table 12-21 SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring range Type R, S in C and F
Types R, S in C
> 2019,0
2019,0
:
1769,1
1769,0
:
-50,0
-50,1
:
-170,0
< -170,0
Decimal
32767
20190
:
17691
17690
:
-500
-510
:
-1700
-32768
Units
Hexadecimal
7FFFH
4EDEH
:
451BH
451AH
:
FE0CH
FE0BH
:
F95CH
8000H
Types R, S in F

> 3276,6
3276,6
:
3216,3
3216,2
:
-58,0
-58,1
:
-274,0
< -274,0
Units
Decimal
Hexadecimal
32767
7FFFH
32766
7FFEH
:
:
32163
7DA3H
7DA2H
32162
:
:
-580
FDBCH
-581
FDBBH
:
:
-2740
F54CH
-32768
8000H
Range
Overflow
Overrange
Rated range
Underrange
Underflow
12-11

Measuring range for thermocouple type T

Table 12-22 SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring range Type T in C and F
Type T in C
Type T in F
Units
Decimal
Hexadecimal
> 540,0
32767
7FFFH
540,0
5400
400,1
4001
0FA1H
400,0
4000
0FA0H
Range
Units
Decimal
Hexadecimal
> 1004,0
32767
7FFFH
1518H
1004,0
10040
2738H
752,1
7521
1DC1H
752,0
7520
1D60H
-270,0
-2700
F574H
-454,0
-4540
EE44H
< -270,0
-32768
8000H
< -454,0
-32768
8000H
12.2.6
Overflow
Overrange
Rated range
Underflow
Output ranges of the analog output modules in SIMATIC S7 format for voltage and
current
Output modules for voltage and current: 5V; 10V; 20mA

Table 12-23 SIMATIC S7 format: Output ranges 5 V; 10 V; 20 mA
Output range 5 V
12-12
Output range 10 V
Output range 20
mA
Decimal
Hexadecimal
Range
Units
> 32511
> 7EFFH
5,8800
11,7589
23,5150
32511
7EFFH
5,0002
10,0004
20,0007
27649
6C01H
5,0000
10,0000
20,0000
27648
6C00H
3,7500
7,5000
14,9980
20736
5100H
- 3,7500
- 7,5000
- 14,9980
-20736
AF00H
- 5,0000
- 10,0000
- 20,0000
-27648
9400H
- 5,0002
- 10,0004
- 20,0007
-27649
93FFH
- 5,8800
- 11,7589
- 23,5160
-32512
8100H
< - 23,5160
< -32512
< 8100H
Overflow
Overrange
Rated range
Underrange
Underflow


12.3 Fundamentals of analog value processing
Output modules for voltage and current: 1 to 5 V; 4 to 20 mA

Table 12-24 SIMATIC S7 format: Output ranges 1 to 5V; 4 to 20mA
12.3
12.3.1
12.3
Output range
Up to 5 V
Output range
Up to 20 mA
Range
Decimal
Hexadecimal
> 32511
> 7EFFH
5,7000
22,8100
32511
7EFFH
5,0002
20,0005
27649
6C01H
5,0000
20,0000
27648
6C00H
Units
1,0000
4,0000
0H
0,9998
3,9995
-1
FFFFH
-6912
E500H
< -6913
< E4FFH
Overflow
Overrange
Rated range
Underrange
Underflow
Fundamentals of analog value processing
Connecting measuring sensors
Introduction
You can connect different measuring sensors to the analog input modules, depending on the
type of module involved:
Voltage sensor
Current sensors as:
2-wire measuring transducer
4-wire measuring transducer
Resistance-type sensor
In this chapter you will find out how to connect the measuring sensors and what to watch for
when doing so.

12-13

Lines for analog signals

You should use shielded and twisted-pair lines for the analog signals. This reduces the effect
of interference. You should ground the shield of the analog lines at both ends of the line. If
there are differences in potential between the ends of the line, a compensating current flows
via the shield that can interfere with the analog signals. If this is the case, you should only
ground the shield at one end of the line.

In the case of the analog input modules there is electrical isolation:
Between the logic circuitry and backplane bus
Between the load voltage and the channels. The following differences exist:
No isolation: Link between MANA and central grounding point
Isolation: No link between MANA and the central grounding point (UISO)

In the case of the analog output modules there is generally electrical isolation:
Between the logic circuitry and backplane bus
Between the load voltage and MANA.
Note
Ensure that this potential difference UISO does not exceed the permitted value. If there is
a possibility of exceeding the permitted value, make a connection between terminal MANA
and the central grounding point.
Connecting measuring sensors to analog inputs

Between the measuring lines M- of the input channels and the reference point of the
measuring circuit MANA there can be only a limited potential difference UCM (common-mode
voltage). To ensure that the permitted value is not exceeded, you must take different steps
depending on the whether the sensors are isolated or non-isolated. The steps you have to
take are described in this chapter.
Generally speaking, however, when connecting two-wire measuring transducers for current
measurement and when connecting resistance-type sensors, you should not make a
connection from M- to MANA. This also applies to inputs that have been assigned parameters
correspondingly but unused.
Note
For the analog input modules 2AI U, 2AI RTD, and 2AI TC, you must short-circuit unused
analog inputs.
12-14


Abbreviations used
The meanings of the abbreviations in the figures below are as follows:
M+
Measuring line (positive)
M-
Measuring line (negative)
MANA
Reference potential of the analog measuring circuit
Frame connection
L+
UCM
Potential difference between inputs and reference potential of the measuring

circuit MANA
UISO
Potential difference between MANA and central grounding point
Isolated measuring sensors

The isolated measuring sensors are not connected to the local ground potential. They can be
floating. Depending on local conditions or interference, potential differences UCM (static or
dynamic) can occur between the measuring lines M- of the input channels and the reference
point of the measuring circuit MANA.
To ensure that the permitted value for UCM is not exceeded in environments with strong EMC
interference, the following applies:
In the case of the analog input modules 2AI U, 2AI I 4WIRE, and 2AI TC: Connect Mwith MANA!
When connecting two-wire measuring transducers for current measurement and when
connecting resistance-type sensors, you must not connect M- to MANA.

12-15

The following figure illustrates the connection of isolated measuring sensors to the floating
analog input modules.
Connection of isolated measuring sensors to a floating analog input module:
/
0
0
0
0
0
8&0
1
$'8
0$1$
5
8,62
Logic
Backplane bus
Ground bus
Central grounding point
Recommended connection
Isolated measuring sensors
Non-isolated measuring sensors

The non-isolated measuring sensors are connected to the local ground potential. You must
connect MANA to the ground potential. Depending on local conditions or interference,
potential differences UCM (static or dynamic) can occur between the locally distributed
measuring points.
If the permitted value for UCM is exceeded, there must be equipotential bonding conductors
between the measuring points.
The following figure illustrates the connection of non-isolated measuring sensors to a floating
analog input module.
12-16


Connection of non-isolated measuring sensors to a floating analog input module:
/
0
0
0
0
0
8&0
1
$'8
0$1$
4
8,62
Logic
Backplane bus
Ground bus
Equipotential bonding conductor
Non-isolated measuring sensors
Operating four-wire measuring transducers on an external voltage supply

If there is isolation between the output and the supply of the measuring transducer, you can
connect it to the 2AI I 4WIRE without additional connections.
If there is no isolation between the output and the supply of the measuring transducer, you
can connect it to the 2AI I 4WIRE only if the reference potential of the power supply voltages
(24 VDC) is the same.
If there is an increase in interference radiation, a connection between M- and MANA on the
terminal module of the 2AI I 4WIRE is recommended.

12-17

12.3.2
Connecting thermocouples
Introduction
This section contains additional information on connecting thermocouples.
Compensation of the reference junction temperature

There are various ways of obtaining the reference junction temperature in order to get an
absolute temperature value from the temperature difference between the reference junction
and the measuring point.
Table 12-25 Compensation of the reference junction temperature
Option
Explanation
Reference junction parameters
No compensation
You record not only the temperature of the

measurement point. The temperature of the
reference junction (transition from Cu line to
thermocouple line) also affects the
thermo-electromotive force. The measured value
is thus errored.
None
Use of a compensating
box on the incoming lines
of a single thermocouple
You compensate using a compensating box. The

compensating box is the transition point from the
Cu line to the thermocouple line. No further
processing is necessary through the 2AI TC
Standard.
None
Use of a Pt100 Climatic

Range resistance
thermometer to record the
reference junction
temperature (best method)
You can record the reference junction

temperature using a resistance thermometer
(Pt100 Climatic Range). Given appropriate
parameter assignment, this temperature value in
the ET 200S is distributed to the 2AI TC Standard
modules and calculated in the modules together
with the temperature value obtained for the
measurement point.
The parameter assignment of the IM151-1

and the 2AI TC must be coordinated:
AI RTD Standard assigned
parameters to the Pt100 climatic
range at the correct slot;
AI TC ST: Reference junction : RTD;
select reference junction number 1
IM : Assignment of the reference
junction to a slot with the 2AI RTD
Standard; selection of a channel;
Number of reference junctions: 1 1

Internal compensation in
the case of the 2AI TC
High Feature
There is a temperature sensor in the

TM-E15S24-AT and TM-E15C24-AT terminal
modules. The temperature sensor reports the
temperature of the terminals to the 2AI TC High
Feature. This value is then calculated together
with the measured value from the channel of the
electronic module.
AI TC High Feature:
Reference junction: yes
Extension to a reference junction

The thermocouples can be extended from their connection point by means of equalizing
lines to the reference junction (transition to Cu line) or the compensating box. The reference
junction can also be an ET 200S terminal module.
The equalization lines are made of the same material as the wires of the thermocouple. The
incoming lines are made of copper. Ensure correct polarity when connecting.
12-18


Use of a compensating box

The influence of the temperature on the reference junction of a thermocouple (for example,
terminal boxes) can be adjusted with a compensating box.
The compensating box contains a bridge circuit that is adjusted for a certain reference
junction temperature (compensating temperature). You connect the thermocouples or their
adjustment lines to the compensating box. The compensating box then forms the reference
junction.
If the actual reference temperature differs from the compensating temperature, the
temperature-dependent bridge resistance changes. A positive or negative compensation
voltage occurs that is added to the thermo-electromotive force.
Compensating boxes with a reference junction temperature of 0 C must be used for the
compensation of the analog input modules.
Please note:
The compensating box must be supplied on an isolated basis.
The power supply unit must have adequate interference filtering (by means of a grounded
shielding winding, for example).

12-19

Compensation by means of a resistance thermometer at the 2AI RTD

If thermocouples that are connected to the inputs of the 2AI TC have the same reference
junction, compensate by means of a 2AI RTD.
For both channels of the 2AI TC module, you can select "RTD" or "None" as the reference
junction. If you select "RTD," the same reference junction (RTD channel) is always used for
both channels.
$,57'
$,7&
$EEUHYLDWLRQVXVHG
00HDVXULQJFDEOHSRVLWLYH
00HDVXULQJFDEOHQHJDWLYH
,&&RQVWDQWFXUUHQWFDEOHSRVLWLYH
,&&RQVWDQWFXUUHQWFDEOHQHJDWLYH
$,57'FRQILJXUHGIRU
PHDVXULQJUDQJH3WFOLPDWH
UDQJH
0
,QVXODWHG
WKHUPRFRXSOHVZLWK
H[WHUQDOFRPSHQVDWLRQ
E\PHDQVRIUHVLVWLYH
WKHUPRPHWHU
FRQQHFWHGWR$,57'
FKDQQHO
Figure 12-1
12-20
0

0
0
,&
,&
Compensation by means of the 2AI RTD


Parameter assignment of the reference junction for the 2AI TC and the interface module
You set the reference junctions for the 2AI TC electronic modules by means of the following
parameters:
Table 12-26 Reference junction parameters
Parameters
Module
Value range
IM 151
Explanation
This parameter allows you to assign a
slot (none, 2 to 12 or 2 to 63) where the
channel for measuring the reference
temperature is located (calculation of
the compensation value).
None, 2 to 12
(IM151-1 BASIC)
None, 2 to 63
(IM151-1 HIGH
FEATURE
IM 151-1 STANDARD
IM 151-1FO
STANDARD)
IM 151
RTD at channel 0
This parameter allows you to set the

channel (0/1) for measuring the
reference temperature (calculation of
the compensation value) for the
assigned slot.
RTD at channel 1
Reference junction E0 and

reference junction E1
AI TC
None, RTD
This parameter allows you to enable

the use of the reference junction.
Reference junction number
AI TC
This parameter allows you to assign the

reference junction (1) that contains the
reference temperature (compensation
value).
Example of assigning parameters of reference junctions

Setup: For simplification, only RTD and TC modules are shown in the following figure:
5HIHUHQFH
MXQFWLRQ
6ORW
$,7&

(

(
$,7&

(

(
(

(
(
(

$,7&
$,57'
&RPSHQVDWLRQYLD$,57'PRGXOHV
Figure 12-2
Example of assigning parameters of reference junctions

12-21

Relevant parameters to be set for the interface module:
Parameters
Value
RTD at channel 0
(Relevant) parameters for 2AI RTD and 2AI TC:

Slot
Parameters
Value
3 (2AI RTD)
Type/range of measurement E0
RTD-4L Pt100 Climatic
5 (2AI TC)
Reference junction E0
RTD
None
TC-EL Type...
(any)
RTD
RTD
TC-EL Type...
8 (2AI TC)
11 (2AI TC)
TC-EL Type...
None
RTD
(any)
TC-EL Type...
Non-isolated thermocouples
When you use non-isolated thermocouples, you must comply with the permitted
common-mode voltage.
12-22


12.3.3
Connecting unused channels of analog input modules
Rules
Note the following when connecting unused channels:
Deactivate unused input channels during parameter assignment.
A deactivated channel always returns a value of 7FFFH.
In the case of the standard modules 2AI U, 2AI I 2WIRE, 2AI I 4WIRE, 2AI RTD
Standard, 2AI RTD High Feature, 2AI TC Standard, and 2AI TC High Feature, the cycle
time of the module is halved.
The cycle time remains unchanged for the 4AI I 2WIRE standard module.
In the case of the HIGH SPEED modules 2AI U, 2AI I 2WIRE, and 2AI I 4WIRE, the cycle
time remains unchanged at 1 ms.
To adhere to the permissible potential differences (UCM), you must wire jumpers on the
terminal module for the unused channels. This is necessary in the case of the following
modules:
Analog input module
TM terminal
Channel 0
1
Channel 1
4
2AI U Standard
2AI RTD Standard, 2AI RTD High

Feature, 2AI TC High Feature
2AI TC Standard
2AI U High Speed

12-23

12.4 Behavior of the analog modules during operation and in the event of problems
12.4
12.4.1
Behavior of the analog modules during operation and in the event of

problems
12.4
Influence of supply voltage and operating state on analog input and output values
Principle
The input and output values of the analog modules are dependent on the supply voltage for
electronic components/sensors and on the operating mode of the PLC (CPU of the DP
master).
Table 12-27 How the analog input/output values depend on the operating mode of the PLC (CPU of the DP master) and
the supply voltage L +
Operating mode of the
PLC (CPU of the DP
master)
Power on
Power on
Power off
12-24
RUN
STOP
Input value of the electronic module

with analog inputs (evaluation
possible in the CPU of the DP
master)
Supply voltage L +
to ET 200S (power
module)
L + applied
Output value of the electronic

module with analog outputs
Process values
PLC values
7FFFH until the first conversion after

switching on or after assigning
parameters to the module
Until the first value output:

After switching on, a signal
of 0 mA or 0 V is output
Dependent on the
"Behavior at
CPU-Master-STOP"
parameter
L + not applied
7FFFH
L + applied
Process value
Dependent on the "Behavior at

CPU-Master-STOP" parameter
L + not applied
7FFFH
L + applied
Dependent on the "Behavior at

CPU-Master-STOP" parameter
L + not applied


12.4 Behavior of the analog modules during operation and in the event of problems
12.4.2
Effect of the value range for the analog input
Principle
The behavior of the electronic modules with analog inputs depends on where the input
values are in the value range.
Table 12-28 Behavior of the analog modules depending on the position of the analog input value in the value range
Measured value in
Input value in SIMATIC S7 format
Input value in SIMATIC S5 format
Rated range
Measured value
Measured value
Overrange/underrange
Measured value
Measured value
Overflow
7FFFH
End of the overrange +1 plus overflow

bit
Underflow
8000H
End of the underrange -1 plus overflow

bit
Before assigning parameters or in the

case of incorrect parameter
assignment1
7FFFH
7FFFH
1 The following applies to 2AI U Standard, 2AI I 2WIRE Standard, 2AI I 4WIRE Standard, 2AI RTD Standard, and 2AI TC
Standard with product version 1: If you assign a parameter incorrectly and trigger the diagnostic message for a parameter
assignment error (for example, wire break for measuring range 20 mA), the SF LED lights up on the module and you can
evaluate the diagnostics. In this state, correct input values are delivered to the DP master.
12.4.3
Effect of the value range for the analog output
Principle
The behavior of the electronic modules with analog outputs depends on where the output
values are in the value range. The following table indicates this:
Table 12-29 Behavior of the analog modules depending on the position of the analog output value in the value range
Output value in
Output value in SIMATIC S5/S7 format
Rated range
Value from DP master
Overrange/underrange
Value from DP master
Overflow
0 signal
Underflow
0 signal
Before assigning parameters or in the case of incorrect

parameter assignment1
0 signal
The following applies to 2AO U Standard, 2AO I Standard with product version 1: If the assigned substitute value is
outside the nominal range, a diagnostic message for parameter error is entered and the SF LED lights up. In this state, the
output values transmitted by the DP master are output at the analog output modules.
1

12-25

12.5 Parameters for analog electronic modules
12.4.4
Use of the shield connection
Rules
12.5
12.5.1
To avoid interference with analog electronic modules, we recommend the following:

Use shielded cables for the sensors/actuators.
Apply the cable shields on the shield connection element.
Connect the shield connection to the ground bus.
12.5
Parameters for analog electronic modules
Parameters for analog electronic modules 2AI U ST, 2AI I 2WIRE ST,
4AI I 2WIRE ST, and 2AI I 4WIRE ST
Overview
Table 12-30 Parameters for analog input modules U, I Standard
2AI U
Standard
2AI I 2WIRE
2AI I 4WIRE
Standard
Standard
4AI I 2WIRE
Standard
Group diagnosis (parameter assignment error,
internal error)
Diagnostics: Diagnostics/ underflow
Diagnostics:
wire break2
Smoothing
Diagnostics:
wire break
Type/range
of measurement
---
---
---
Type/range of
measurement
---
---
---
1
2
Diagnostics:
wire break1
Type/range of
measurement
Value range
Disable
Enable
Disable
Enable
Disable
Enable
None
Weak
Medium
Strong
Deactivated
5V
Up to 5 V
10V
Deactivated
2 WIRE: 4 to 20 mA
Deactivated
4 WIRE: 4 to 20 mA
4 WIRE: 20 mA
Default setting
Applicability
Disable
Module
Disable
Module
Disable
Channel
None
Channel
10V
Channel
2 WIRE: 4 to 20 mA
Channel
2 WIRE: 4 to 20 mA
Channel
Only in the measuring range 4 to 20 mA

Only in the measuring range 1 to 5 V
See also
12-26


12.5.2
Parameters for analog electronic modules 2AI U HF and 2AI I 2/4WIRE HF
Overview
Table 12-31 Parameters for analog electronic modules U, I High Feature
2AI U High Feature
Value range
Default setting
Applicability

internal error)
Disable
Enable
Disable
Module
Disable
Enable
Disable
Module
---
Disable
Enable
Disable
Channel
None
Weak
Medium
Strong
None
Channel
Diagnostics: Wire break1
Smoothing
Type/range of
measurement
---
Deactivated
5V
1 to 5 V
10V
10V
Channel
---
Type/range of measurement
Deactivated
4 to 20 mA
20mA
4 to 20 mA
Channel
Disable
Enable
Disable
Module
Run-time calibration
Disable
Enable
Disable
Module
Only in the measuring range 4 to 20 mA
See also

12-27

12.5.3
Parameters for analog electronic modules 2AI U High Speed, 2AI I 2WIRE High
Speed, and 2AI I 4WIRE High Speed
Parameters
Table 12-32 Parameters for analog input modules U, I High Speed
2AI U High Speed
2AI I 2WIRE High

Speed
2AI I 4WIRE High

Speed
Value range
Default setting
Applicability
Group diagnosis (parameter assignment error, internal

error)
Disable
Enable
Disable
Module
Disable
Enable
Disable
Module
Disable
Enable
Disable
Channel
None
Weak
Medium
Strong
None
Channel
---
Diagnostics: Wire
break
Diagnostics: Wire
break
Smoothing
Type/range of
measurement
---
---
Deactivated
10 V
5 V
2,5 V
Up to 5 V
10V
Channel
---
Type/range of
measurement
---
Deactivated
4 to 20 mA
0 to 20 mA
4 to 20 mA
Channel
---
---
Type/range of
measurement
Deactivated
4 to 20 mA
0 to 20 mA
20mA
4 to 20 mA
Channel
Note
If you deactivate a channel of the HIGH SPEED module, you do not achieve any speed
advantage on account of the measuring procedure used.
See also
12-28


12.5.4
Parameters for analog electronic modules 2AI RTD ST, 2AI TC ST,
and 2AI TC HF
Parameters
Table 12-33 Parameters for analog input modules RTD, TC
2AI RTD
Standard
2AI TC Standard
2AI TC High
Feature
Value range
Default setting
Applicability

internal error)
Disable
Enable
Disable
Module
Disable
Enable
Disable
Module
Diagnostics:
Wire break2
Disable
Enable
Disable
Channel
None
Weak
Medium
Strong
None
Channel
Celsius
Fahrenheit
Celsius
Module
None
RTD
None
Channel
None
Yes (i.e. internal)
None
Channel
None
1 to 8
(in the case of the IM151-1
STANDARD and IM151-1
FO STANDARD)
1
(in the case of the IM151-1
BASIC and IM151-1 HIGH
FEATURE)
None
Module
Deactivated
150 ohms
300 ohms
600 ohms
Pt100 Climatic
Ni100 Climatic Range
Pt100 Standard
Ni100 Standard
Pt100
Standard
Channel
Diagnostics: Wire break check1
Smoothing
Temperature
unit
---
Reference junction ---
-----
Reference
junction
Reference junction --number
Type/range of
measurement
---

12-29

---
2AI RTD
Standard
2AI TC Standard
Type/range of
measurement
2AI TC High
Feature
Value range
Default setting
Applicability
---
Deactivated
Voltage 80 mV
TC-EL type T (Cu-CuNi)
TC-EL type K (NiCr-Ni)
TC-EL type B (PtRh-PtRh)
TC-EL type N (NiCrSi-NiSi)
TC-EL type E (NiCr-CuNi)
TC-EL type R (PtRh-Pt)
TC-EL type S (PtRh-Pt)
TC-EL type J (Fe-Cu-Ni)
TC-EL type L (Fe-Cu-Ni)
TC-EL type K
(NiCr-Ni)
Channel
Type/range
of
measuremen
t
Deactivated
Voltage 80 mV
TC-EL type T (Cu-CuNi)
TC-EL type K (NiCr-Ni)
TC-EL type B (PtRh-PtRh)
TC-EL type C (WRe-WRe)
TC-EL type N (NiCrSi-NiSi)
TC-EL type E (NiCr-CuNi)
TC-EL type R (PtRh-Pt)
TC-EL type S (PtRh-Pt)
TC-EL type J (Fe-Cu-Ni)
TC-EL type L (Fe-Cu-Ni)
TC-EL type K
(NiCr-Ni)
Channel
Only with thermocouples. A parameter assignment error occurs when the wire break diagnosis is enabled in the voltage
measuring range.
The module does not start up.
The wire break is only detected with constant-current lines.
See also
12-30


12.5.5
Parameters for 2AI RTD High Feature analog electronic module
Parameters
Table 12-34 Parameters for 2AI RTD High Feature analog electronic module
Parameters
Value range
Default setting
Applicability
Group diagnosis
Disable
Enable
Disable
Module
Diagnostics: Diagnostics/
underflow
Disable
Enable
Disable
Module
Diagnostics: Wire break
Disable1
Enable
Disable
Channel
Smoothing
None
Weak
Medium
Strong
None
Channel
Temperature unit
Celsius
Fahrenheit
Celsius
Module
Type of measurement
Deactivated
Four-conductor resistor
Three-conductor resistor
Two-conductor resistor
Four-conductor thermal
resistor
Three-conductor thermal
resistor
Two-conductor thermal
resistor
Four-conductor thermal
resistor
Channel
Pt 0,003850
Pt 0,003916
Pt 0,003902
Pt 0,003920
Pt 0.003851
Ni 0,006180
Ni 0,006720
Ni 0.005000
Cu 0,00427)
Pt 0.003851
Channel
Temperature coefficient

12-31

Parameters
Measuring range
Value range
150
300
600
3000
PTC
Pt100 Climatic
Ni100 Climatic Range
Pt100 Standard
Ni100 Standard
Pt500 standard range
Ni1000 standard range
Pt200 climatic range
Ni1000 climatic range
Cu10 climatic range
Cu10 standard range
Default setting
Pt100 Standard
Applicability
Channel
Wire break diagnostic is disabled if - Type of measurement = "deactivated" or Measuring Range = "PTC" was assigned.
12-32


Type of measurement - temperature coefficient - measuring range

The following table lists the temperature coefficients and measuring ranges you can set for
each measurement type:
Type of measurement
Deactivated
Four-conductor resistor
Three-conductor resistor
Two-conductor resistor
Three-conductor thermal resistor
150 / 300 / 600 / 3000
Pt 0.003850/ Pt 0.003916 /
Pt 0.003902 / Pt 0.003920 /
Pt 0.0038511
150 / 300 / 600 / 3000 / PTC
Ni 0.0061801 / Ni 0.006720
Ni100 climatic range /

NI100 standard range /
Ni120 standard range /
Ni 0.005000
Ni 1000 climatic range2

Ni 1000 standard range2
Cu10 climatic range /
Cu10 standard range
Cu 0.004271
Two-conductor thermal resistor
Four-conductor thermal resistor
Measuring range
Pt100 climatic range /

Pt100 standard range /
Pt 0.003850 / Pt 0.003916 /
Pt 0.003902 / Pt 0.003920 /
Pt 0.003851

Ni 0.006180) / Ni 0.006720

Ni 0.005000
Ni 1000 climatic range2

Ni 1000 standard range2
1 The default settings for the temperature coefficients are valid for Europe.
2 For LG-Ni 1000 sensors from Siemens Building Ltd (Landis & Stfa)

12-33

The correction factor for the temperature coefficient (-value) specifies how much the
resistance of a certain material changes when the temperature is raised by 1 C.
The temperature coefficient depends on the chemical composition of the material. Only one
value is used in Europe for each type of sensor (default value).
Additional values enable you to make a sensor-specific setting for the temperature
coefficient, therefore ensuring more accuracy.
See also
12.5.6
Parameters for analog electronic modules 2AO U ST, 2AO U HF and 2AO I ST,
2AO I HF
Overview
Table 12-35 Parameters for analog output modules U, I
2AO U Standard, 2AO I Standard,
2AO U High
2AO I High
Feature
Feature
Group diagnosis (parameter
assignment error, internal error)
Diagnostics:
--Short-circuit to M
--Diagnostics:
Wire break
Reaction to CPU-/master-STOP
Type/range of
output
---
---
Type/range of
output
Substitute value 1
Value range
Default setting
Disable
Enable
Disable
Enable
Disable
Enable
Output de-energized
Substitute a value
Keep last value
Deactivated
1 to 5 V
10V
Deactivated
4 to 20 mA
20mA
To 65535 (value range must be
within the nominal range)
Applicability
Disable
Module
Disable
Channel
Disable
Channel
Output de-energized
Module
10V
Channel
4 to 20mA
Channel
10V/ 20V: 0 V
Channel
4 to 20mA: 4 mA
1 to 5V: 1V
1 If there is no voltage going to the IM but the supply to the analog output modules continues, the substitute values that
have been assigned parameters are output. Substitute values must be within the nominal range. You can assign as
parameters values from -27648 to +27648 (in the case of parameter assignment by means of the device database file).
See also
12-34


12.5.7
Parameter description for the analog electronic modules
Smoothing
The individual measured values are smoothed by means of digital filtering. The smoothing
can be adjusted in 4 steps, where the smoothing factor k multiplied by the cycle time of the
electronic module corresponds to the time constant of the smoothing filter. The greater the
smoothing, the greater the time constant of the filter.
The figures below show the step response for the different smoothing factors depending on
the number of module cycles.
ZHDNN
1RQHN
PHGLXPN
VWURQJN
6WHSUHVSRQVH
[ [

0RGXOHF\FOHV
Figure 12-3
Smoothing in the case of the 2AI U Standard, 2AI U High Feature, 2AI I 2WIRE
Standard, 2AI I 4WIRE Standard, 2AI I 2/4WIRE High Feature, 2AI RTD Standard,
2AI RTD High Feature, 2AI TC Standard, 2AI TC High Feature

12-35

ZHDNN
1RQHN
PHGLXPN
VWURQJN
6WHSUHVSRQVH
[ [

0RGXOHF\FOHV
Figure 12-4
Smoothing with 4AI I 2WIRE ST
ZHDNN
1RQHN
PHGLXPN
VWURQJN
6WHSUHVSRQVH
[

0RGXOHF\FOHV
Figure 12-5
Smoothing in the case of the 2AI U High Speed, 2AI I 2WIRE High Speed, 2AI I 4WIRE
High Speed

The 2AI U High Feature and 2AI I 2/4WIRE High Feature analog input modules support the
interference frequency suppression setting (50 Hz or 60 Hz) for the interface module. These
HIGH FEATURE analog input modules also allow you to disable interference frequency
suppression, thus enabling you to forego the setting on the interface module. If you disable
interference frequency suppression, the conversion and cycle times become faster for these
modules.
12-36


12.6 2AI U Standard analog electronic module (6ES7134-4FB01-0AB0)
Run-time calibration
2AI U High Feature
Run-time calibration can be enabled at module parameter assignment for the 2AI U High
Feature analog electronic module to adjust for component drift due to changes in ambient
temperature. During the calibration interval, the updating of data is delayed by 250 ms.
Calibration takes place each time the ambient temperature changes by 5 C.
Run-time calibration can be enabled at module parameter assignment for the 2AI I
2/4WIRE High Feature analog electronic module to periodically adjust for the offset
voltage drift of the A/D converter. During the calibration interval, the updating of data is
delayed by 200 ms. The accuracy limits of the module will be met without run-time
calibration.
Reference junction, reference junction number

See "Connecting thermocouples."
See also
12.6
12.6
2AI U Standard analog electronic module (6ES7134-4FB01-0AB0)
Order number
6ES7134-4FB01-0AB0
Features
2 inputs for measuring voltage
Input ranges:
10 V, resolution 13 bits + sign
1 to 5 V, resolution 13 bits
Isolated from the load voltage L+
Permitted common-mode voltage 2 VSS AC

12-37

Pin assignment
The following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 2AI U Standard for the different
terminal modules:
Table 12-36 Terminal assignment of the 2AI U Standard
View
Pin assignment
Remarks
70(6$DQG'$86WDQGDUG
M+: Input signal "+"
&+
M-: Input signal "-"
&+
0
0
0
0
Mana: Ground of the module

9
0 DQD
0 DQD
$8;HJ3(
$

$

$8;HJ3(
$8;PXVWEH
DVVLJQHGWR3(
70(6DQG$,86WDQGDUG
&+
&+
0
0
0
0
0 DQD
0 DQD

9
QF

QF
70(6DQG$,86WDQGDUG
&+
&+
0
0
0
0
0 DQD
0 DQD
12-38


View
Pin assignment
Remarks
70(6$DQG$,86WDQGDUG
&+
&+
0
0
0
0
0 DQD
0 DQD
QF
QF
$8;
$8;

$8;
$8;
Block diagram
%DFNSODQHEXV

08;
(76
EDFNSODQHEXV
LQWHUIDFH
FRQQHFWLRQ
Figure 12-6

/
3
3
$'8
9
0 $1$

0
Block diagram of the 2AI U Standard
Dimensions W x H x D (mm)
Weight
15 x 81 x 52
Approx. 40 g
No
Number of inputs
Length of cable
Shielded

Max. 200 m
12-39

P1
24 VDC
Yes
Isolation
Yes
Between the channels and load voltage L+
Yes
No
Between the inputs and MANA (UCM)
2 VACSS
Between MANA and the central grounding

point (UISO)
75 VDC/60 VAC
Insulation tested
500 VDC
Current consumption
Max. 30 mA
Typ. 0.6 W
Group error
Red "SF" LED
Yes
Analog value generation
Measuring principle
Integrative
Integration and cycle time/resolution per

channel:
Integration time can be assigned parameters
Yes
Interference frequency suppression in Hz
60
50
Integration time in milliseconds
16,7
20
Conversion time in ms
55
65
Cycle time in ms
Number of active channels per module x

conversion time
Resolution (including overrange)
10 V/13 bits + sign

5 V/13 bits + sign
1 to 5 V/13 bits
Suppression of interference, limits of error

Interference voltage suppression for
f = n x (f1 1%), (f1 = interference frequency)
12-40
Common-mode interference (USS)

Series-mode interference
min. 90 dB
min. 70 dB
(peak interference value < nominal value of

input range)
Crosstalk between the inputs
min. -50dB
Operational limit
(over the entire temperature range, relative to
the input range)
0,6%
Basic error limit (operational limit at 25 C

relative to input range)
0,4%


12.7 2AI U High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7134-4LB00-0AB0)
Temperature error (with reference to the input
range)
0.01%/K
Linearity error (with reference to the input range)
0,01%
Repeatability (in steady state at 25 C with

reference to input range)
0,05 %

Input range (rated value)/input resistance
Voltage
5V/min. 100 k
1 to 5 V/min.100 k
10V/min. 100 k
Permitted input voltage (destruction limit)
35 V continuous, 75 V for max. 1 ms (pulse duty

factor 1:20)
Smoothing of the measured values
Yes, can be assigned parameters in 4 steps by

means of digital filtering
Step Time constant
None 1 x cycle time
Weak 4 x cycle time
Medium 32 x cycle time
Strong 64 x cycle time
12.7
12.7
2AI U High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7134-4LB00-0AB0)
Order number
6ES7134-4LB00-0AB0
Features
Input ranges:
Permitted common-mode voltage between the channels 100 VAC

12-41

Pin assignment
The following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 2AI U High Feature for the
Table 12-37 Terminal assignment of the 2AI U High Feature
View
Pin assignment
Remarks
70(6$DQG$,8+LJK)HDWXUH
&+
&+
0
0
0
0
QF
QF
$

$

$8;HJ3(
$8;HJ3(
$8;PXVWEHDVVLJQHG
WR3(
70(6DQG$,8+LJK)HDWXUH
&+
&+
0
0
0
0
QF
QF
QF
QF
Terminals 4 and 8 can be used for unneeded

wires of up to 30 VDC.
9
&+
&+
0
0
0
0
QF
QF
12-42


View
Pin assignment
Remarks
Terminals 4 and 8 can be used for unneeded

wires of up to 30 VDC.
&+
0
&+
0
0
0
QF
QF
QF
QF
$8;
$8;
$8;
$8;
Block diagram
%DFNSODQHEXV

08;
(76
EDFNSODQHEXV
LQWHUIDFH
FRQQHFWLRQ
3
3

$'8

/
9
0 $1$
0
Figure 12-7
Block diagram of the 2AI U High Feature
Weight
Number of inputs
Length of cable
Shielded


15 x 81 x 52
Approx. 40 g
No
2
Max. 200 m
12-43

Rated load voltage L+ (from the power
module)
VDC
P1
Yes
Isolation
Yes
Yes
Between the channels and PE
Yes
No
140 VDC/100 VAC
Insulation tested
500 VDC
Current consumption
Max. 53 mA
Typ. 0.85 W
Group error
Red "SF" LED
Diagnostic functions readable (wire break

diagnosis is not supported on the module.)
Yes

Measuring principle
Integrative

channel
Integration time can be assigned

parameters
Yes
60
50
No
16,67
20
7,5
1 channel active per module
2 channels active per module
25
58,3
30
70
10
26
Cycle time in ms
75
175
90
210
30
78
10 V/15 bits + sign

5 V/15 bits + sign
1 to 5 V/15 bits
12-44


f = n x (f1 0.5%), (f1 = interference
frequency)

Min. 100dB
min. 90dB
peak interference value < rated value of

input range)
min. -100dB
Operational limit
(entire temperature range with reference to
input range; calibration enabled1)
0,1%
Operational limit
(entire temperature range with reference to
input range; calibration disabled)
0,5%
Basic error limit (operational limit at 25 C with

reference to input range; calibration enabled1)
0,05%
Temperature error (with reference to input

range; calibration enabled1)
0.003%/K
Temperature error (with reference to input

range; calibration disabled)
0.015%/K
Linearity error (with reference to the input

range)
0,03%
Repeatability
(in steady state at 25C with reference to input
range)
0,01%

Voltage
10 V/min. 1 M
5 V/min. 1 M
1 to 5 V/min.1 M
35 V continuous, 75 V for max. 1 ms

Step Time constant
None 1 x cycle time
Weak 4 x cycle time
1Run-time
calibration can be enabled during module parameter assignment to adjust for component
drift due to changes in ambient temperature. During the calibration interval, the updating of data is
delayed by 250 ms. Calibration takes place each time the ambient temperature changes by 5 C.

12-45

12.8 2AI U High Speed analog electronic module (6ES7134-4FB51-0AB0)
12.8
12.8
2AI U High Speed analog electronic module (6ES7134-4FB51-0AB0)
Order number
6ES7134-4FB51-0AB0
Features
Input ranges:
2,5 V, resolution 13 bits + sign
Permitted common-mode voltage 100 VSS AC
Minimum time for the isochronous DP cycle (TDPmin): 2.5 ms
Minimum conversion time of the input modules (TWEmin): 1.1 ms
Pin assignment
The following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 2AI U High Speed for the
Table 12-38 Terminal assignment of the 2AI U High Speed
View
Pin assignment
Remarks
&+
&+
0
0
0
0
QF
QF
$

$

$8;HJ3(

9
$8;HJ3(
$8;PXVWEHDVVLJQHG
WR3(
12-46


View
Pin assignment
Remarks
&+
&+
0
0
9
0
0
QF
QF
QF
QF

&+
&+
0
0
0
0
QF
QF

&+
0
&+
0
0
0
QF
QF
QF
QF
$8;
$8;

$8;
$8;

12-47

Block diagram
%DFNSODQHEXV

08;
(76
EDFNSODQHEXV
LQWHUIDFH
FRQQHFWLRQ
3
3

$'8

/
0 $1$
9
0
Figure 12-8
Block diagram of the 2AI U High Speed
15 x 81 x 52
Weight
Approx. 40 g
Yes
Number of inputs
Length of cable
Shielded
Max. 200 m

module)
24 VDC
P1
Yes
Isolation
Between the channels and backplane

bus
Yes
Between the channels and load voltage

L+
Yes
No
100 VSS AC
Between MANA and the central

grounding point (UISO)
75 VDC/60 VAC
Insulation tested
500 VDC
Current consumption
Power supply and load voltage L+ (no

load)
12-48
Max. 35 mA
Typ. 0.8 W


Interrupts
Process interrupt
Can be assigned parameters1
Group error display
Red "SF" LED
Diagnostic information can be displayed Possible2
Measuring principle
Instantaneous value encoding
Cycle time/resolution:
Conversion time in ms (per channel)
0,1
Cycle time in ms (per module)
1
10 V/13 bits + sign
5 V/13 bits + sign
2,5 V/13 bits + sign
1 to 5 V/13 bits
Common mode interference (Ucm) < 100 > 70 dB
VSS)
> 50 dB
Operational limit
0,3%
(in the entire temperature range, with
reference to the input range)
0,2%
with reference to input range)
Temperature error (with reference to the
0.01%/K
input range)
0,01%
range)
Repeatability
0,05%
(in steady state at 25C with reference to
input range)
Input ranges (rated value)/input resistance
Voltage
10 V/min. 100k
5 V/min. 100 k
2.5 V/min. 100 k
1 - 5 V/min. 100 k
Maximum input voltage for voltage input
50 V continuous, 100 V for max. 1 ms (pulse duty
(destruction limit)
factor 1:20)
Connection of the sensors
For measuring voltage
Possible
Yes, can be assigned parameters in 4 steps by means
of digital filtering
Step Time constant
None 1 x cycle time
Weak 64 x cycle time
1 DPV1 only
2 Parameter assignment error
Violation of lower limit value
Violation of upper limit value
Open circuit (only with 1 to 5 V)
Process interrupt lost

12-49

12.9 2AI I 2WIRE Standard analog electronic module (6ES7134-4GB01-0AB0)
12.9
2AI I 2WIRE Standard analog electronic module

(6ES7134-4GB01-0AB0)
12.9
Order number
6ES7134-4GB01-0AB0
Features
2 inputs for measuring current
Input range:
4 to 20 mA, resolution 13 bits
Pin assignment
The following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 2AI I 2WIRE Standard for the
Table 12-39 Terminal assignment of the 2AI I 2WIRE Standard
View
Pin assignment
Remarks
70(6$DQG$,,6WDQGDUG
&+
0
&+

Mana: Ground (of power module)
0
P$
0
0
0 DQD
0 DQD
$8;HJ3(
$

$

$8;HJ3(
P$
2-wire measuring transducer is supplied

by means of the measuring circuits.
$8;PXVWEH
DVVLJQHGWR3(
12-50


View
Pin assignment
70(6DQG$,,:,5(6WDQGDUG
Remarks
&+
&+
0
0

P$
0
0
0 DQD
0 DQD
QF
QF

&+
0
&+

0
P$
0
0
0 DQD
0 DQD

70(6$DQG$,,6WDQGDUG
&+
&+
0
0
0
0
0 DQD
0 DQD
QF
QF
$8;
$8;

P$

$8;
$8;

12-51

Block diagram

%DFNSODQHEXV
08;
(76
EDFNSODQHEXV
LQWHUIDFH
FRQQHFWLRQ
3
3
/
$'&
9
0 $1$

0
&XUUHQW
OLPLWLQJ
Figure 12-9
Block diagram of the 2AI I 2WIRE Standard
15 x 81 x 52
Weight
Approx. 40 g
No
Number of inputs
Length of cable
Shielded
Max. 200 m

module)
24 VDC
P1
Yes
Power supply of the transmitters
Yes
Yes, (destruction limit 35 mA per channel)
Isolation
Yes

L+
No
Insulation tested
No
500 VDC
Current consumption
12-52
Max. 80 mA
Typ. 0.6 W


Group error
Red "SF" LED
Yes
Measuring principle
Integrative

channel:

parameters
Yes
60
50
16,7
20
55
65
Cycle time in ms
Number of active channels per module x conversion

time
4 to 20 mA/13 bits

f = n x (f11%), (f1 = interference frequency)
(peak interference value < rated value of
input range)
Min. 70 dB
Min. -50 dB
Operational limit
0,6%

0,4%
Temperature error (with reference to the input 0,005%/K

range)
range)
0,01%
Repeatability
input range)
0,05%

Current
4 to 20 mA/50
Permitted input current (destruction limit)
40 mA
Load of the two-wire measuring transducer
Max. 750

Step Time constant
None 1 x cycle time
Weak 4 x cycle time

12-53

12.10 Analog electronic module 4AI I 2WIRE ST (6ES7134-4GD00-0AB0)
12.10
12.10
Analog electronic module 4AI I 2WIRE ST (6ES7134-4GD00-0AB0)
Order number
6ES7134-4GD00-0AB0
Features
Input range:
Pin assignment
The following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 4AI I 2WIRE ST for the different
terminal modules:
Table 12-40 Terminal assignment of the 4AI I 2WIRE ST
View
Pin assignment
Remarks
0
&+
&+
&+
0
0
0
0
0
0
M-: Input signal ""
0
2-wire measuring transducer is

supplied by means of the measuring
circuits.
P$
&+
70(6$DQG$,,:,5(6WDQGDUG

0
&+
&+
&+
0
0
0
0
P$
2-wire measuring transducer is

supplied by means of the measuring
circuits.
&+
0
0
$8;
$

$

$8;
$8;
12-54
M-: Input signal ""
0
$8;


%DFNSODQHEXV
Block diagram
(76
EDFNSODQHEXV
LQWHUIDFH
FRQQHFWLRQ

(OHFWULFDO
LVRODWLRQ
$'&
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
, , , ,
3
3
/
'&'&FRQYHUWHU
0 $1$
0
,QSXWFXUUHQW
OLPLW
6KRUWFLUFXLW
SURWHFWLRQ
Figure 12-10 Block diagram of the 4AI I 2WIRE ST
15 81 52
Weight
Approx. 40 g
No
Number of inputs
Length of cable
Shielded
Max. 200 m

module)
P1
24 VDC
Yes
Yes
Yes (approx. 200 mA for module)
Isolation
Between the channels and load voltage L+ No
Insulation tested

Yes
No
500 VDC
12-55

Current consumption of the module
From the load voltage L+ (with sensor
Max. 125 mA
supply)
Typ. 0.6 W
Group error
Red "SF" LED
Yes
Measuring principle
Integrative
channel:
Yes
parameters
60
50
16,7
20
Cycle time per module in ms
33
40
4 to 20 mA/13 bits
Interference voltage suppression for f = n x
(f11%), (f1 = interference frequency)
Min. 70 dB
input range)
Min. -50 dB
Operational limit
0,4 %
Basic error limit (operational limit at 25 C with 0,3 %
Temperature error (with reference to the input 0,003 %/K
range)
0,01 %
range)
Repeatability
0,05 %
range)
Current
4 to 20 mA/25
Approx. 30 mA (limited electronically)
Max. 750
Yes, can be assigned parameters in 4 steps
Step Time constant
None 1 x cycle time
Weak 4 x cycle time
12-56


12.11 2AI I 2WIRE High Speed analog electronic module (6ES7134-4GB51-0AB0)
12.11
2AI I 2WIRE High Speed analog electronic module

(6ES7134-4GB51-0AB0)
12.11
Order number
6ES7134-4GB51-0AB0
Features
Current-limited sensor supply (90 mA)
Input ranges:
Pin assignment
The following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 2AI I 2WIRE High Speed for the
Table 12-41 Terminal assignment of the 2AI I 2WIRE High Speed
View
Pin assignment
Remarks
70(6$DQG$,,:,5(+LJK6SHHG
&+
&+
0
0
0
0
0 DQD
0 DQD
$8;HJ3(
$

$

$8;HJ3(

P$
P$
2-wire measuring transducer is supplied by

means of the measuring circuits.
$8;PXVWEH
DVVLJQHGWR3(

12-57

View
Pin assignment
70(6DQG$,,:,5(+LJK6SHHG
Remarks
&+
&+
0

0
P$
0
0
0 DQD
0 DQD
QF
QF

&+
&+

0
0
0
0
0 DQD
0 DQD
P$
&+
&+
0
0
0
0
0 DQD
0 DQD
QF
QF
$8;
$8;
12-58

P$

$8;
$8;


Block diagram

%DFNSODQHEXV
08;
(76
EDFNSODQHEXV
LQWHUIDFH
FRQQHFWLRQ
3
3
/

$'&
9
0 $1$

0
&XUUHQWOLPLW
Figure 12-11 Block diagram of the 2AI I 2WIRE High Speed
15 x 81 x 52
Weight
Approx. 40 g
Yes
Number of inputs
Length of cable
Shielded
Max. 200 m
24 VDC
P1
Yes
Yes, (destruction limit 35 mA per channel)
Isolation
Yes
Between channels and load voltage L+
No
No
Between MANA and Minternal (UISO)
75 VDC, 60 VAC
500 VDC
Current consumption
Power supply and load voltage L+ (no load)

Max. 35 mA1
Typ. 0.8 W
12-59

Interrupts
Process interrupt
Parmeterizable2
Group error display
Red "SF" LED
Possible3
Measuring principle
0,1
4 to 20 mA/13 bits
0 to 20 mA/13 bits

> 50 dB
Operational limit
(in the entire temperature range, with reference
to the input range)
0,3%

0,2%
Temperature error (with reference to the input

range)
0,01%/K
Linearity error (with reference to the input range)
0,01%
Repeatability
range)
0,05%

Number of outputs
Output voltage
With load
L+ (-2.5 V)
Output current
Rated value
Permitted range
90 mA (both channels)
0 mA to 90 mA
Yes, electronic
Input range (rated value/input resistance)
Current
To 20 mA/50
To 20 mA/50
12-60
For current measurement as two-wire

transmitter
Possible
Max. 670
Maximum input current for current input

(destruction limit)
60 mA



Step Time constant
None 1 x cycle time
Without sensor supply voltage
DPV only

Open circuit (only with 4 to 20 mA)
12.12
2AI I 4WIRE Standard analog electronic module

(6ES7134-4GB11-0AB0)
12.12
Order number
6ES7134-4GB11-0AB0
Features
Input ranges:
20 mA, resolution 13 bits + sign
to 20 mA, resolution 13 bits
Permitted common-mode voltage 2 VACSS

12-61

Pin assignment
The following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 2AI I 4WIRE Standard for the
Table 12-42 Terminal assignment of the 2AI I 4WIRE Standard
View
Pin assignment
Remarks
&+
0
&+

0
0
0
9'&
0 DQD
ZLUH
DC 24V: Power supply for four-wire

measuring transducer
P$

means of the module.
9'&
0 DQD
70(6$DQG$,,:,5(6WDQGDUG
&+
&+
0
0
0
0
9'&
9'&
0 DQD
0 DQD
ZLUH
P$
$8;
$8;
12-62

DC 24V: Power supply for four-wire
measuring transducer
$8;
$8;


Block diagram
%DFNSODQHEXV
08;
(76
EDFNSODQHEXV
LQWHUIDFH
FRQQHFWLRQ
3
3
/
$'&

9
0 $1$
0
&XUUHQW
OLPLWLQJ

Figure 12-12 Block diagram of the 2AI I 4WIRE Standard
15 x 81 x 52
Weight
Approx. 40 g
No
Number of inputs
Length of cable
Shielded
Max. 200 m

module)
P1
24 VDC
Yes
Yes
Yes, 60 mA (for both channels)
Isolation

bus
Yes

L+
No
No
Insulation tested
500 VDC
Current consumption

Max. 30 mA
Typ. 0.6 W
12-63

Group error
Red "SF" LED
Yes
Measuring principle
Integrative

channel:

parameters
Interference frequency suppression in Hz 60
50
16,7
20
55
65
Cycle time in ms

time
20 mA/13 bits + sign
Yes
4 to 20 mA/13 bits
(f11%),
(f1 = interference frequency)
input range)
Min. 70 dB
Min. -50 dB
Operational limit (in the entire temperature

range, with reference to the input range)
0,6%

0,4%

input range)
0.005%/K

range)
0,01%
Repeatability
0,05%
input range)
Current
20 mA/50
4 to 20 mA/50
40 mA
Step Time constant
None 1 x cycle time
Weak 4 x cycle time
12-64


12.13 2AI I 2/4WIRE High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7134-4MB00-0AB0)
12.13
2AI I 2/4WIRE High Feature analog electronic module

(6ES7134-4MB00-0AB0)
12.13
Order number
6ES7134-4MB00-0AB0
Features
Input ranges:
Permitted common-mode voltage between the channels 100 VAC
Supports two-wire or four-wire measuring transducers
Pin assignment
The following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 2AI I 2/4WIRE High Feature for
Table 12-43 Terminal assignment of the 2AI I 2/4WIRE High Feature
View
Pin assignment
70(6DQG$,,:,5(+LJK)HDWXUH
Remarks
M+ : Input signal "+"
ZLUH
&+
0
&+

ZLUHPHDVXULQJWUDQVGXFHU
0
P$
DC+ 24V: Power supply for four-wire measuring

transducer
DC -24V: Return circuit for measuring
transducer supply
0
0
It is possible to supply four-wire measuring

transducers by means of the module.
9'&
9'&
9'&
9'&
To support isolation between the channels, use

an external supply to feed one of the measuring
transducers.

12-65

View
Pin assignment
Remarks
$OWHUQDWLYHWHUPLQDODVVLJQPHQWIRU:,5(
M+ : Input signal "-"
M- : Connect to 24 VDC
ZLUH
&+
&+
DC+ 24V: Input signal "+"
0
0
0
0
9'&
9'&
9'&
9'&
2-wire measuring transducers are supplied by

Mixing two-wire and four-wire measuring
transducers is permitted.
P$

transducers.
M+ : Input signal "+"
&+
&+
0
0
0
0
9'&
9'&
$8;
$8;
ZLUH
M- : Input signal "-"
DC+ 24V: Power supply for four-wire measuring

transducer
DC -24V: Return circuit for measuring
transducer supply
P$
It is possible to supply four-wire measuring

transducers by means of the module.
9'&

transducers.
9'&
$8;
$8;
$OWHUQDWLYHWHUPLQDODVVLJQPHQWIRU:,5(
&+
&+
0
0
0
0
9'&
9'&
9'&
9'&
$8;
$8;
12-66
M+ : Input signal "-"
ZLUH
M- : Connect to 24 VDC
DC+ 24V: Input signal "+"
P$
2-wire measuring transducers are supplied by

Mixing two-wire and four-wire measuring
transducers is permitted.
transducers.
$8;
$8;


Block diagram

%DFNSODQHEXV
08;

(76
EDFNSODQHEXV
LQWHUIDFH
FRQQHFWLRQ
3
3
/
$'&

0 $1$
9
0
&XUUHQW
OLPLWLQJ

Figure 12-13 Block diagram of the 2AI I 2/4WIRE High Feature
15 x 81 x 52
Weight
Approx. 40 g
No
Number of inputs
Length of cable
Shielded
Max. 200 m

module)
P1
24 VDC
Yes
Yes
Yes, 60 mA (for both channels)
Isolation

bus
Yes

L+
Yes
Between the channels and PE
Yes
No

140 VDC/100 VAC (with isolated power supply of

measuring transducers)
12-67

Insulation tested
500 VDC
Current consumption
Max. 53 mA
Typ. 0.85 W
Group error
Red "SF" LED
Yes
Measuring principle
Integrative

channel:

parameters
Yes
60
50
No
16,67
20
7,5
25
58,3
30
70
10
26
Cycle time in ms
75
175
90
210
30
78

4 to 20 mA/15 bits

(f10.5%), (f1 = interference frequency)

Min. 100dB

input range)
limit1
12-68
min. 90dB
Min. -100 dB
Operational
(over the entire temperature range, with
0,1%
Basic error limit1

operational limit at 25 C with reference to
input range
0,05%

input range)
0,003%/K

range)
0,03%
Repeatability
input range)
0,01%


Current
20 mA/50
4 to 20 mA/50
40 mA (on a single channel)
Max. 750

Step Time constant
None 1 x cycle time
Weak 4 x cycle time
Run-time calibration can be enabled during module parameter assignment to periodically adjust for
the offset voltage drift of the A/D converter. During the calibration interval, the updating of data is
delayed by 200 ms. The accuracy limits of the module will be met without run-time calibration.
1
12.14
2AI I 4WIRE High Speed analog electronic module

(6ES7134-4GB61-0AB0)
12.14
Order number
6ES7134-4GB61-0AB0
Features
Current-limited sensor supply (90 mA)
Input ranges:

12-69

Pin assignment
The following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 2AI I 4WIRE High Speed for the
terminal module.
Table 12-44 Terminal assignment of the 2AI I 4WIRE High Speed
View
Pin assignment
Remarks
&+
0
&+

ZLUH
DC 24V: Power supply for four-wire measuring

transducer
0
P$
0
0
9'&
9'&
0 DQD
0 DQD

&+
0
&+

0
0
0
9'&
0 DQD
$8;
$8;
12-70
ZLUH
P$
9'&

DC 24V: Power supply for four-wire measuring
transducer
0 DQD
$8;
$8;


Block diagram

%DFNSODQHEXV
08;
(76
EDFNSODQHEXV
LQWHUIDFH
FRQQHFWLRQ
3
3
/
$'&

9
0 $1$
0
&XUUHQWOLPLW

Figure 12-14 Block diagram of the 2AI I 4WIRE High Speed
15 x 81 x 52
Weight
Approx. 40 g
Yes
Number of inputs
Length of cable
Shielded
Max. 200 m

module)
P1
24 VDC
Yes
Isolation
Yes
Between channels and load voltage L+
No
No
75 VDC, 60 VAC
500 VDC
Current consumption
Power supply and load voltage L+ (no

load)

Max. 35 mA1
Typ. 0.8 W
12-71

Interrupts
Process interrupt
Can be assigned parameters2
Group error display
Red "SF" LED
Possible3
Measuring principle
0,1
4 to 20 mA/13 bit
0 to 20 mA/13 bit

> 50 dB
Operational limit
0,3%
Basic error limit (operational limit

at 25 C with reference to input range)
0,2%

input range)
0,01%/K

range)
0,01%
Repeatability
input range)
0,05%

Number of outputs
Output voltage
With load
L+ (-2.5 V)
Output current
Rated value
Permitted range
90 mA (both channels)
0 mA to 90 mA
Yes, electronic
Current
4 to 20 mA/50
0 to 20 mA/50
20 mA/50
For current measurement as two-wire

transmitter
Possible
12-72
Max. 670


12.15 2AI RTD Standard analog electronic module (6ES7134-4JB50-0AB0)
Maximum input current for current input
(destruction limit)
60 mA

Step Time constant
None 1 x cycle time
Without encoder supply voltage
DPV1 only

Open circuit (only with 4 to 20 mA)
12.15
12.15
2AI RTD Standard analog electronic module (6ES7134-4JB50-0AB0)
Order number
6ES7134-4JB50-0AB0
Features
2 inputs for resistance thermometers or resistance measurement
Input ranges:
Resistance thermometers: Pt100, Ni100; resolution 15 bits + sign
Resistance measurement: 150 ; 300 ; 600 , resolution max. 15 bits + sign
Linearization of the sensor characteristic curves
Pin assignment
The resistance thermometers/resistors are measured in a four-conductor connection.
Constant current is fed to the resistance thermometers/resistors by means of connections
IC + and IC -. The voltage generated at the resistance thermometer/resistor is measured by
means of the connections M + and M -. This ensures highly accurate measurement results
with the four-conductor connection.
With the two/three-conductor connection, you must apply corresponding jumpers to the
module between M+ and Ic+ or M- and Ic- . However, you have to expect a loss of accuracy
in the measurement results.

12-73

The following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 2AI RTD Standard on the
terminal module.
Table 12-45 Terminal assignment of the 2AI RTD Standard
View
Pin assignment
Remarks
70(6DQG$,57'6WDQGDUG
M+: Measuring line positive
&+
&+
0
0
0
0
, &
, &
, &
, &
IC-: Constant-current line negative

ZLUH
ZLUH
ZLUH
M- : Measuring line negative

IC+: Constant-current line positive
70(6$DQG$,57'6WDQGDUG
&+
&+
0
0
0
, &
, &
, &
, &

$

$
$8;
$8;
ZLUH
ZLUH
ZLUH
M-: Measuring line negative

0
$8;
$8;
Note
A wire break in the measuring lines of the temperature sensors for three- or four-conductor
connections (connections 1 and 2, or 5 and 6) is not detected. Undefined values can be
reported.
12-74


Block diagram

%DFNSODQHEXV
08;
(76
EDFNSODQHEXV
LQWHUIDFH
FRQQHFWLRQ
3
3
/

$'&
0 $1$
9
08;
0

Figure 12-15 Block diagram of the 2AI RTD Standard
15 x 81 x 52
Weight
Approx. 40 g
No
Number of inputs
Length of cable
Shielded
Max. 200 m

module)
P1
24 VDC
Yes
Yes
Constant-current supply for

resistance-type sensors
Approx. 1.5 mA
Yes
Isolation
between the channels and backplane

bus
Yes
Between the channels and load

voltage L+
Yes

Insulation tested
Current consumption

No
75 VDC/60 VAC
500 VDC
max. 30mA
Typ. 0.6 W
12-75

Group error
Red "SF" LED

Yes
Measuring principle
Integrative

channel:

parameters
Yes
Interference frequency suppression in

Hz
60
50
16,7
20
110
130
Cycle time in ms
Number of active channels per module x conversion time
Pt100, Ni100/ 15 bits + sign

150 /14 bits/
300 , 600 /15 bits

f = n x (f11%), (f1 = interference
frequency)

Min. 90dB
min. 70dB
peak interference value < rated value

of input range)
Min. -50 dB
Operational limit (in the entire temperature 0,6%

0,4%

input range)
0.005%/K

range)
0,01%
Repeatability (in steady state at 25 C with 0,05%

150 /min. 2 M
300 /min. 2 M
600 /min. 2 M
Resistance thermometers
Pt100/min. 2 M
Ni100/min. 2 M
12-76
Max. 9 V


12.16 2AI RTD High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7134-4NB51-0AB0)
For measuring resistance

Two and three-conductor
connection
Yes, line resistances are also measured, jumpers at TR

Yes
Four-conductor connection
Characteristic curve linearization
Yes, parameters can be assigned for Pt100, Ni100
Yes, can be assigned parameters in 4 steps by means of

digital filtering
Step Time constant
None 1 x cycle time
Weak 4 x cycle time

12.16
2AI RTD High Feature analog electronic module

(6ES7134-4NB51-0AB0)
12.16
Order number
6ES7134-4NB51-0AB0
Features
2 inputs for resistance thermometers or resistance measurement
Input ranges
Resistance thermometers: Pt100; Ni100; Ni120; Pt200; Ni200; Pt500; Ni500; Pt1000;
Ni1000; Cu10;resolution max. 15 bits + sign
Resistance measurement: 150 ; 300 ; 600 ; 3000 ; PTC; resolution max. 15 bits
Automatic compensation of line resistances in the case of a three-conductor connection
Temperature coefficient can be assigned parameters for resistance-type sensors
High degree of accuracy
Isolated from the load voltage
Parameter length 7 bytes
Permitted common-mode voltage 5 VACss
Recording of reference junction temperature (together with the 2AI TC Standard
electronic module)
Compatible with the 2AI RTD Standard (6ES7134-4JB50-0AB50)

12-77

Note
The EM 2AI RTD High Feature can replace a 2AI RTD Standard in an existing system.
The wiring does not have to be changed. The additional bridges on the terminal module
of the 2AI RTD Standard do not have to be removed.
The configuration (in HW Config or the GSD file) does not have to be changed. Only the
new functions of the 2AI RTD High Feature cannot be assigned parameters in this
instance.
Pin assignment
The following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 2AI RTD High Feature on the
terminal modules.
Table 12-46 Terminal assignment of the 2AI RTD High Feature
View
Pin assignment
Remarks
70(6DQG$,57'+LJK)HDWXUH
&+
&+
0
0
0
0
, &
, &

ZLUH
ZLUH
70(6$DQG$,57'+LJK)HDWXUH
&+
&+
0
0
0
0
, &
, &
$8;HJ3(
12-78

ZLUH
ZLUH
$8;HJ3(


View
Pin assignment
Remarks
70(6DQG$,57'+LJK)HDWXUH
&+
&+
0
0
0
0
, &
, &
, &
, &

ZLUH
ZLUH
ZLUH

70(6$DQG$,57'+LJK)HDWXUH
&+
0
0
, &
, &
$8;
$8;
&+

ZLUH
ZLUH
ZLUH
0
0
, &
, &
$8;
$8;
Block diagram

%DFNSODQHEXV
08;
3
3
(76
EDFNSODQHEXV
LQWHUIDFH
FRQQHFWLRQ
/
$'&

9
0 $1$
08;
0

Figure 12-16 Block diagram of the 2AI RTD High Feature

12-79

Weight
Number of inputs
Length of cable
Shielded

15 x 81 x 52
Approx. 40 g
No
2
Max. 200 m
24 VDC
module)
P1
Yes
Yes
Constant-current supply for
Approx. 1.25 mA
resistance-type sensors
Yes
Isolation
between the channels and backplane
Yes
bus
Yes
voltage L+
No
75 VDC/60 VAC
Insulation tested
500 VDC
Current consumption
max. 30mA
Typ. 0.6 W
Group error
Red "SF" LED
Yes
Measuring principle
Integrating (sigma-delta)
channel:
Yes
parameters
Interference frequency suppression in 60
50
Hz
16,7
20
Basic conversion time including
50
60
Additional conversion time for wire
5
5
break check diagnosis in ms
Additional conversion time in ms for
50
60
line compensation in three-conductor
connections
Cycle time in ms
Pt 100; Ni 100; Ni120; Pt 200; Ni 200; Pt 500; Ni 500; Pt
1000; Ni 1000; Cu 10 / 15 bits + sign
150; 300; 600; 3000; / 15 bits
PTC1 / 1 bit
12-80


frequency)
Min. 90dB
min. 70dB
peak interference value < rated value
of input range)
Min. -50 dB
0,1%
Pt100, Pt200, Pt500, Pt1000 Standard 1.0K
Pt100, Pt200, Pt500, Pt1000 Climatic
0.25K
Ni100, Ni120, Ni200, Ni500, Ni 1000
0.4K
Cu10
1.5K
Basic error limit for resistance-type
sensors (operational limit at 25 C with
0,05%
Pt100, Pt200, Pt500, Pt1000 Standard 0.6K
Pt100, Pt200, Pt500, Pt1000 Climatic
0.13K
Ni100, Ni120, Ni200, Ni500, Ni 1000
0.2K
Cu10
1.0K
0.0009%/K
input range)
Linearity error (with reference to the input 0,01%
range)
Repeatability (in steady state at 25 C with 0,05%
150 /min. 10 M
300 /min. 10 M
600 /min. 10 M
3000 /min. 10 M
PTC min 10 M
Resistance thermometers
Pt100/min. 10 M
Ni100/min. 10 M
Ni120/min. 10 M
Pt200/min. 10 M
Ni200/min. 10 M
Pt500/min. 10 M
Ni500/min. 10 M
Pt1000/min. 10 M
Ni1000/min. 10 M
Cu10/min. 10 M
Max. 9 V

12-81

For measuring resistance
2-conductor connection
Yes,
Yes, internal compensation of line resistances
Yes
Yes, can be assigned parameters for Ptxxx, Nixxx
digital filtering
Step Time constant
None 1 x cycle time
Weak 4 x cycle time
1In accordance with VDE 0660 Part 302/303, Type A
Use of Cu10 sensors

Select "Three-conductor thermal resistor" and "Cu10" at parameter assignment.
Wire the Cu10 sensor in accordance with the three-conductor connection method.
Automatic, internal compensation of line resistance for the missing measuring line occurs
during operation.
Note
Please note the following to ensure optimum line compensation in the case of Cu10:
The sum of the cable resistance and measurement resistance must not exceed 31 .
The cable must have a resistance of no more than 8 if you want to use the temperature
range up to and above 312 C. Example: A 200 m Cu cable with a 0.5 mm2 conductor
cross-section has approximately 7 . A smaller cross-section shortens the permissible
cable length accordingly.
12-82


Using PTC resistors

PTCs are suitable for temperature monitoring and as thermal protective devices for complex
drives and transformer windings.
Select "Two-conductor resistor" and "PTC" at parameter assignment:
Connect the PTC in accordance with the two-conductor connection method.
Apply PTC resistors of type A (PTC thermistors) in accordance with DIN / VDE 0660, Part
302.
Sensor data for the PTC resistor:
Feature
Switching points
Technical
specifications
Remarks
Behavior with rising temperature

< 550
Normal range:
SIMATIC S7: Bit 0 = "0", Bit 2 = "0" (in the PII)
550 to 1650
Prewarning range:
> 1650
Addressable range:
Behavior with rising temperature

> 750
Addressable range:
750 to 540
Prewarning range:
< 540
Normal range:
(TNF-5) C
Max. 550
TNF= rated operating temperature
(TNF+5) C
Min. 1330
(TNF+15) C
Min. 4000
Measuring voltage
Max. 7.5 V
Voltage on the PTC
Assignment in the process input image (PII) in the case of SIMATIC S7

12-83

7 6
0
IB x
5 4 3
0 0 0
2 1
between prewarning threshold: 1

and response threshold
IB x + 1
7 6
5 4 3
2 1
0 0 0
0 0
0: Measured resistance < response threshold

1: Measured resistance > response threshold
0
0
Assignment in the process input image (PII) in the case of SIMATIC S5
,%[

between prewarning threshold: 1

and response threshold
,%[
0HDVXUHGUHVLVWDQFHUHVSRQVHWKUHVKROG
0HDVXUHGUHVLVWDQFH!UHVSRQVHWKUHVKROG

Notes on programming
Notice
Only the bits 0+2 or 3+5 are relevant for the purposes of evaluation in the process input
image. You can use bits 0+2 or 3+5 to monitor the temperature of a motor, for example.
Bits 0+2 or 3+5 in the process input image does not have a retentive function. Make sure
at parameter assignment that motor start-up is controlled (by means of an
acknowledgment), for example.
Bits 0+2 or 3+5 cannot be set at the same time, but set one after the other.
For security reasons, always evaluate the diagnostic inputs of the 2AI RTD High Feature
because measurement is not possible when the EM is removed, when the power supply
to the EM has failed, or in the event of a wire break or short-circuit of the measuring lines.
12-84


12.17 2AI TC Standard analog electronic module (6ES7134-4JB00-0AB0)
Example
The diagram below shows the temperature pattern and the switching points belonging to it.
7>r&@

1RUPDO
UDQJH
12.17
12.17
3UHZDUQLQJ
UDQJH
$GGUHVVDEOHUDQJH
3UHZDUQLQJ
UDQJH
1RUPDO
UDQJH
2AI TC Standard analog electronic module (6ES7134-4JB00-0AB0)
Order number
6ES7134-4JB00-0AB0
Features
2 inputs for thermocouple or voltage measurement
Input ranges:
Voltage measurement: 80 mV, resolution 15 bits + sign
Thermocouples: Type E, N, J, K, L, S, R, B, T, resolution 15 bits + sign
Permitted common-mode voltage 2 VACSS

12-85

Pin assignment
The following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 2AI TC Standard for the different
terminal modules:
Voltage measurement as for 2AI U ST.
Table 12-47 Terminal assignment of the 2AI TC Standard
View
Pin assignment
Remarks
70(6$DQG'$7&6WDQGDUG
&+
&+
0
0
0
0
0 DQD
0 DQD
$8;HJ3(
$

$

$8;HJ3(

$8;PXVWEH
DVVLJQHGWR3(
70(6DQG$,7&6WDQGDUG
&+
&+

0
0
0
0
0 DQD
0 DQD
QF
QF
70(6DQG$,7&6WDQGDUG
&+
12-86
&+
0
0
0
0
0 DQD
0 DQD


View
Pin assignment
Remarks
70(6$DQG'$7&6WDQGDUG
&+
&+
0
0
0
0
0 DQD
0 DQD
QF
QF
$8;
$8;

$8;
$8;
Block diagram

%DFNSODQHEXV
08;

(76
EDFNSODQHEXV
LQWHUIDFH
FRQQHFWLRQ
3
3
/
$'&

9
0 $1$

0
Figure 12-17 Block diagram of the 2AI TC Standard
15 x 81 x 52
Weight
Approx. 40 g
No
Number of inputs
Length of cable
Shielded

Max. 50 m
12-87

module)
24 VDC
P1
Yes
Isolation

bus
Yes

voltage L+
Yes
No
Between the channels and 24 V supply Yes

voltage

grounding point (Uiso)
75 VDC/60 VAC
2 VACSS
Insulation tested
500 VDC
Current consumption
max. 30mA
Typ. 0.6 W
Group error
Red "SF" LED
Yes
Measuring principle
Integrative
Integration time/conversion time/resolution

per channel:
12-88

parameters
Yes

Hz
60
50
16,7
20

55
65
Additional conversion time for wire

break check diagnosis in ms
20
20
Cycle time in ms
15 bits plus sign


frequency)

(peak interference value < rated value
of input range)
Min. 90 dB
Min. 70 dB
Min. -50 dB
Operational limit (over the entire

temperature range, with reference to the
input range)1
0,6%

with reference to input range)1
0,4%

input range)
0,005%/K

range)
0,01%
Repeatability
input range)
0,05%

Voltage
80 mV/min. 1 M
Thermocouple
Type E, N, J, K, L, S, R, B, T/min. 1 M
10 V, continuous
Possible
Yes, can be assigned parameters for type E, N, J, K, L,

S, R, B, T to IEC 584
Temperature compensation
Internal temperature compensation
External temperature compensation by Possible, one external compensating box per channel
looping a compensating box into the
measuring circuit
External compensation by means of

temperature value obtained at an
analog module of the same ET 200S
station
Not possible
Yes

digital filtering
Step Time constant
None 1 x cycle time
Weak 4 x cycle time

1
for Type N: from -150C, Typ B: from 200C, Typ T: from -230C

12-89

Compensation of thermocouples with a compensating box

As well as the error limits of the 2AI TC Standard electronic module (see Table "Technical
specifications" in this chapter) you must also take the accuracy of the compensating box into
account.
Compensation of thermocouples with a Pt100 on the 2AI RTD Standard

Factors affecting the accuracy of the temperature measurement
Wiring rules
Ensure there is good thermal contact between the reference

junction and the Pt100 used for compensation.
We recommend that you wire the Pt100 with a four-conductor
connection.
Additional technical specifications The accuracy of the thermal resistor (Pt100) used for
on the error limits of the 2AI TC
compensation must be taken into account.*
The error of the measurement input (2AI RTD Standard) used for
compensation must be taken into account.*
* In the case of thermocouples with a characteristic curve with a very shallow gradient, these errors
can lead to a major measurement discrepancy.
For the following thermocouples, this causes a limitation of the input range of the thermocouples in
which the accuracy information in the manual applies:
Type N: -100C
Type K: -230C
Type E: -230C
See also
2AI U Standard analog electronic module (6ES7134-4FB01-0AB0) (Page 12-37)
12-90


12.18 2AI TC High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7134-4NB01-0AB0)
12.18
2AI TC High Feature analog electronic module

(6ES7134-4NB01-0AB0)
12.18
Order number
6ES7134-4NB01-0AB0
Features
2 inputs for thermocouple or voltage measurement
Input ranges:
Voltage measurement: 80 mV, resolution 15 bits + sign
Thermocouples: Types E, N, J, K, L, S, R, B, T, C, resolution 15 bits + sign
2AI TC High-Feature is inserted on the TM-E15S24-AT or TM-E15C24-AT
Permitted common-mode voltage 140 VDC/100 VAC
Internal reference junction in connection with TM-E15S24-AT or TM-E15C24-AT
Pin assignment
The following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 2AI TC High Feature for the
TM-E15S24-AT or TM-E15C24-AT terminal modules
Voltage measurement as for 2AI U ST.
Table 12-48 Terminal assignment of the 2AI TC High Feature
View
Pin assignment
Remarks
70(6$DQG$,7&+LJK)HDWXUH
&+
&+
0
0
0
0

12-91

Block diagram

%DFNSODQHEXV
08;

(76
EDFNSODQHEXV
LQWHUIDFH
FRQQHFWLRQ
3
3
/
$'&

9
0
0 $1$
,QWHUQDO
UHIHU
HQFH
MXQFWLRQ
9
70(6$7
Figure 12-18 Block diagram of the 2AI TC High Feature
15 x 81 x 52
Weight
Approx. 40 g
No
Number of inputs
Length of cable
Shielded
Max. 50 m

module)
24 VDC
P1
Yes
Isolation

bus
Yes

L+
Yes
No
Between the channels and 24 V supply

voltage
Yes
Between MANA and the central grounding 75 VDC/60 VAC

point (Uiso)
Insulation tested
12-92
140 VDC/100 VAC

500 VDC


Current consumption
Max. 30 mA
Typ. 0.6 W
Group error
Red "SF" LED

Yes
Measuring principle
Integrative
Integration time/conversion time/resolution

per channel:

parameters
Yes

Hz
60
50
16,7
20

66
80
Additional conversion time for wire break 5

check diagnosis in ms
Cycle time in ms

time
15 bits plus sign

frequency)

Min. 90dB
min. 70dB

input range)
Min. -50 dB
Operational limit for 80 mV (over the entire

temperature range with reference to the
input range)
0,1%
Operational limit for thermocouples (over

the entire temperature range with reference
to the input range)1
1.5 K
Operational limit for thermocouple type C (in 7 K

the entire temperature range with reference
to the input range)1
Basic error limit for 80 mV (operational
limit at 25 C with reference to the input
range)
0,05%
Basic error limit for thermocouples

(operational limit at 25 C with reference to
input range)1
1K

12-93

Basic error limit for thermocouples of type C 5 K
(operational limit at 25 C with reference to
the input range)1
0,005%/K
input range)
0,01%
range)
Repeatability
0,05%
input range)
Overall error limits using internal
compensation
Operational limit (in the entire
2.5 K
temperature range with a static, thermal
state, ambient temperature change <0.3
K/min)2
Basic error limit (operational limit at
1.5 K
25C with a static, thermal state,
ambient temperature change < 0.3
K/min)3
Voltage
Thermocouple
80 mV/min. 1 M
Type E, N, J, K, L, S, R, B, T, C/min. 1 M
20 V, continuous
Possible
Yes, can be assigned parameters for types E, N, J, K,

L, S, R, B, T, C to IEC 584
Temperature compensation
Internal temperature compensation
Possible with TM-E15S24-ATTM-E15C24-AT
External temperature compensation by

looping a compensating box into the
measuring circuit
Possible, one external compensating box per channel

Step
None
Weak
Medium
Strong
Time constant
1 x cycle time
4 x cycle time
32 x cycle time
64 x cycle time
The specified error limits apply starting with the following temperatures:
Thermocouple Type T: -200C
Thermocouple Type K: -100C
Thermocouple Type B: +700C
Thermocouple Type N: -150C
Thermocouple Type E: -150C
Thermocouple Type R: +200C
Thermocouple Type S: +100C
2 In the case of thermocouple type C: 8K
3 In the case of thermocouple type C: 6K
1
12-94


12.19 2AO U Standard analog electronic module (6ES7135-4FB01-0AB0)
Compensation of thermocouples with a compensating box

In addition to the error limits of the 2AI TC High Feature electronic module (see the table
entitled "Technical specifications" in this chapter), you must take into account the accuracy
of the compensating box.
Internal compensation with TM-E 15S24-AT or TM-E15C24-AT

Factors affecting the accuracy of the temperature measurement
Rules on using internal
temperature compensation
The connected channel with internal compensation must be

assigned parameters separately.
Don't insert the 2AI TC High Feature directly next to a power
module with high incoming current ( >3 A). An incoming current of
10 A can result in a further 2 K error.
Additional technical specifications The station must be in a static state* to ensure that the specified
for the error limits of the 2AI TC
accuracy is achieved.
High Feature
Accuracy is achieved 30 minutes after the static state has been
achieved.
The overall malfunction of the channel is caused by the
combination of the input error and the internal compensation
error.
* The static state is defined by an almost constant ambient temperature (no draft, for example, in a
closed cabinet!)
See also
2AI U Standard analog electronic module (6ES7134-4FB01-0AB0) (Page 12-37)
12.19
12.19
2AO U Standard analog electronic module (6ES7135-4FB01-0AB0)
Order number
6ES7135-4FB01-0AB0
Features
2 outputs for voltage output
Output range:

12-95

Pin assignment
The following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 2AO U Standard for the terminal
module:
Table 12-49 Terminal assignment of the 2AO U Standard
View
Pin assignment
70(6DQG$286WDQGDUG
Remarks
QV: Analog output voltage
S+: Detector line positive
&+
&+
49
49
6
6
0 DQD
0 DQD
6
6
ZLUH
ZLUH

S-: Detector line negative
70(6$DQG$286WDQGDUG
&+
49
49
6
6
0 DQD
0 DQD
6
6
$8;
$8;
12-96
&+
ZLUH
ZLUH

$8;
$8;


Block diagram

%DFNSODQHEXV
'$&
0 $1$

(76
EDFNSODQHEXV
LQWHUIDFH
FRQQHFWLRQ
3
3

'$&
0 $1$

/
9
0 $1$
0
Figure 12-19 Block diagram of the 2AO U Standard
15 x 81 x 52
Weight
Approx. 40 g
No
Number of outputs
Length of cable
Shielded
max. 200m

module)
24 VDC
Yes
Isolation
Yes
Yes
No

point (Uiso)
Insulation tested
75 VDC/60 VAC
500 VDC
Current consumption

max. 130mA
Max. 2 W
12-97

Group error
Red "SF" LED
Yes
10 V/13 bits + sign

1 to 5 V/12 bits
Cycle time
Max. 1.5 ms
Settling time
For resistive load
0.1 ms
For capacitive load
0.5 ms
For inductive load
0.5 ms
Substitute value can be assigned parameters
Yes

Crosstalk between the outputs
min. -40dB

range, with reference to the output range)
0,4%

reference to output range)
0,2%

output range)
0,01%/K
Linearity error (with reference to the output

range)
0,02%
Repeatability
output range)
0,05%
Output ripple (with reference to output range,

bandwidth 0 to 50 kHz)
0,02%

Output range (rated value)
10 V
1 to 5 V
Load resistance
Min. 1.0 k
For capacitive load
Max. 1 F
Yes
Short-circuit current
Approx. 25mA
Destruction limit against voltages/currents

applied from outside
Voltage at the outputs to MANA
Max. 15 V continuous; 75 V for max. 1 s (pulse duty

factor 1:20)
Current
Max. DC 50 mA
Connection of actuators
12-98
Possible, without compensation of the line

resistances
Yes


12.20 2AO U High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7135-4LB01-0AB0)
12.20
2AO U High Feature analog electronic module

(6ES7135-4LB01-0AB0)
12.20
Order number
6ES7135-4LB01-0AB0
Features
2 outputs for voltage output
Output range:
Minimum conversion time of the output modules: (TWAmin): 1.5 ms
Pin assignment
The following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 2AO U High Feature for the
terminal module:
Table 12-50 Terminal assignment of the 2AO U High Feature
View
Pin assignment
70(6DQG$28+LJK)HDWXUH
Remarks
&+
&+
49
49
6
6
0 DQD
0 DQD
6
6
ZLUH
ZLUH


12-99

View
Pin assignment
Remarks
70(6$DQG$28+LJK)HDWXUH
&+
&+
49
49
6
6
0 DQD
0 DQD
6
6
$8;
$8;
ZLUH
ZLUH

$8;
$8;
Block diagram

%DFNSODQHEXV
'$&
0 $1$

(76
EDFNSODQHEXV
LQWHUIDFH
FRQQHFWLRQ
'$&
0 $1$

/
3
3

9
0 $1$
0
Figure 12-20 Block diagram of the 2AO U High Feature
Weight
15 x 81 x 52
Approx. 40 g
Yes
Number of outputs
Length of cable
12-100
Shielded
max. 200m


module)
24 VDC
Yes
Isolation
Yes
Yes
No

point (Uiso)
Insulation tested
75 VDC/60 VAC
500 VDC
Current consumption
max. 130mA
Max. 2 W
Group error display
Red "SF" LED

Possible
Substitute values can be applied
Yes, parameters can be assigned

Resolution (including sign)
10 V/16 bits
1 to 5 V/14 bits
Conversion time (per channel)
Max. 1.0 ms
Settling time
For resistive load
0.1 ms
For capacitive load
0.5 ms
For inductive load
0.5 ms
> 60 dB
Operational limit
reference to the output range)
0,07%

0,03%

output range)
0.001%/K

range)
0,02%
Repeatability (in steady state at 25C with

0,01%

0,02%

12-101

12.21 2AO I Standard analog electronic module (6ES7135-4GB01-0AB0)
10 V
1 to 5 V
Load impedance (in the rated range of the

output)
At voltage outputs
Min. 1.0 k
max. 1 F
Capacitive load
Voltage output
Short-circuit current
Yes
Approx. 25 mA


factor 1:20)
Current
Max. DC 50 mA
Voltage output
Possible, without compensation of the line
resistances
Possible
12.21
12.21
2AO I Standard analog electronic module (6ES7135-4GB01-0AB0)
Order number
6ES7135-4GB01-0AB0
Features
2 outputs for current output
Output range:
12-102


Pin assignment
The following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 2AO I Standard for the different
terminal modules:
Table 12-51 Terminal assignment of the 2AO I Standard
View
Pin assignment
Remarks
70(6$DQG$2,6WDQGDUG
QI: Analog output current
&+
&+
4,
4,
QF
QF
0 DQD
0 DQD
$8;HJ3(
$

$

$8;HJ3(

70(6DQG$2,6WDQGDUG
&+
&+
4,
4,
QF
QF
0 DQD
0 DQD
QF
QF
70(6DQG$2,6WDQGDUG
Terminals 2 and 6 and 4 and 8 can be

used for unneeded wires of up to 30 VDC.
&+
&+
4,
4,
QF
QF
0 DQD
0 DQD


12-103

View
Pin assignment
Remarks
70(6$DQG$2,6WDQGDUG
&+
4,
QF
QF
0 DQD
0 DQD
QF
$8;
$8;
Terminals 2 and 6 and 4 and 8 can be

used for unneeded wires of up to 30 VDC.
4,
QF
&+
$8;
$8;
Block diagram

%DFNSODQHEXV
'$&
0 $1$

(76
EDFNSODQHEXV
LQWHUIDFH
FRQQHFWLRQ
3
3

'$&
0 $1$

/
9
0 $1$
0
Figure 12-21 Block diagram of the 2AO I Standard
15 x 81 x 52
Weight
Approx. 40 g
No
Number of outputs
Length of cable
12-104
Shielded
max. 200m


module)
24 VDC
Yes
Isolation
Yes
Yes
No
Between MANA and the central grounding 75 VDC/60 VAC

point (Uiso)
Insulation tested
500 VDC
Current consumption
Max. 150 mA
Max. 2 W
Group error
Red "SF" LED

Yes

4 to 20 mA/13 bits
Cycle time
Max. 1.5 ms
Settling time
For resistive load
0.1 ms
For capacitive load
0.5 ms
For inductive load
0.5 ms
Yes

min. -40dB

0,5%

with reference to output range)
0,3%

output range)
0.01%/K

range)
0,02%
Repeatability
output range)
0,05%

0,02%

12-105

12.22 2AO I High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7135-4MB01-0AB0)
20 mA
4 to 20 mA
Load resistance
Max. 500
For inductive load
1 mH
No-load voltage
18 V


factor 1:20)
Current
Max. DC 50 mA
12.22
Yes
No
2AO I High Feature analog electronic module

(6ES7135-4MB01-0AB0)
12.22
Order number
6ES7135-4MB01-0AB0
Features
2 outputs for current output
Output range:
Minimum conversion time of the output modules: (TWAmin): 1.5 ms
12-106


Pin assignment
The following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 2AO I High Feature for the
Table 12-52 Terminal assignment of the 2AO I High Feature
View
Pin assignment
Remarks
70(6$DQG$2,+LJK)HDWXUH
&+
&+
4,
4,
QF
QF
0 DQD
0 DQD
$8;HJ3(
$

$

$8;HJ3(

70(6DQG$2,+LJK)HDWXUH
&+
&+
4,
4,
QF
QF
0 DQD
0 DQD
QF
QF
70(6DQG$2,+LJK)HDWXUH
Terminals 2 and 6 and 4 and 8 can be used

for unneeded wires of up to 30 VDC.
&+
&+
4,
4,
QF
QF
0 DQD
0 DQD


12-107

View
Pin assignment
Remarks
70(6$DQG$2,+LJK)HDWXUH
&+
4,
QF
QF
0 DQD
0 DQD
QF
QF
$8;
Terminals 2 and 6 and 4 and 8 can be used

for unneeded wires of up to 30 VDC.
4,
$8;
&+
$8;
$8;
Block diagram

%DFNSODQHEXV
'$&
0 $1$

(76
EDFNSODQHEXV
LQWHUIDFH
FRQQHFWLRQ
3
3

'$&
0 $1$

/
9
0 $1$
0
Figure 12-22 Block diagram of the 2AO I High Feature
15 x 81 x 52
Weight
Approx. 40 g
Yes
Number of outputs
Length of cable
12-108
Shielded
Max. 200 m


Rated supply voltage of the electronics L+
P1
24 VDC
Yes
Isolation
Between channels and power supply of the Yes

electronics
Yes
No
75 VDC/60 VAC
Insulation tested
500 VDC
Current consumption
Max. 150 mA
Max. 2 W
Group error display
Red "SF" LED
Yes
Yes, parameters can be assigned

Resolution (including sign)
20 mA/16 bits
4 to 20 mA/15 bits
Conversion time (per channel)
Max. 1.0 ms
Settling time
For resistive load
0.25 ms
For capacitive load
1.0 ms
For inductive load
0.5 ms
> 60 dB

0.07% (at 250 load impedance)

0,03% (at 250 load impedance)

output range)
0.001%/K

range)
0,02%
Repeatability
output range)
0,01%

0,02%

0.3% (for all other load impedances)

0,26% (for all other load impedances)
12-109

20 mA
4 to 20 mA
Load impedance (in the rated range of the

output)
For current outputs

For inductive load
Max. 500
1mH
Current output
No-load voltage
18 V


factor 1:20)
Current
Max. DC 50 mA
Current output
Possible
12-110

4 IQ-SENSE
13.1
13.1
13
Features of 4 IQ-SENSE
Order number
6ES7138-4GA00-0AB0
Features
The 4 IQ-SENSE has the following features:
Connection of sensors with IQ-SENSE, photoelectric proximity switches: for example,
reflex sensors, diffuse sensors, and laser sensors.
You can connect up to 4 sensors. Each sensor requires a two-wire cable.
Excess gain and monitoring
Time functions, switching hysteresis, synchronization groups that can be assigned
parameters
Sensitivity and distance values can be specified (IntelliTeach using the "IQ-SENSE Opto"
FB)
Teach-in
Module can be removed and inserted during operation (restart the Teach-in using the
"IQ-SENSE Opto" function block or the button on the sensor)
Sensors can be removed and inserted during operation (automatic reassignment of
parameters)
Supports sensors with alignment tool
The 4 IQ-SENSE is a single-width (15 mm) electronic module that can be used with the
following terminal modules:
TM-E15S24-01, TM-E15C24-01 and TM-E15N24-01
TM-E15S26-A1, TM-E15C26-A1 and TM-E15N26-A1

13-1

13.1 Features of 4 IQ-SENSE
You set the parameters for the 4 IQ-SENSE using the STEP 7 parameter assignment
software.
Configuration rules
With STEP 7 as of V5.1, Service Pack 3
Contained in the hardware catalog of HW
Config. A GSD file is not required.
With STEP 7 as of V5.1, Service Pack 3 or other

configuration software
IM151-1 BASIC: GSD file SIEM80F3.GSx as of
09/02 (as of V1.0)
IM151-1 STANDARD: GSD file SIEM806A.GSx as
of 10/01 (as of V1.0)
IM151-1 FO STANDARD: GSD file SIEM806B.GSx
as of 10/01 (as of V1.5)
IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE: GSD file
SIR380E0.GSx as of 12/01 (as of V1.0)
IM 151-3 PN (6ES7151-3AA10-0AB0)
13-2


13.2 Parameters for the 4 IQ-SENSE
13.2
13.2.1
13.2
Parameters for the 4 IQ-SENSE
Overview
Parameters
Table 13-1
Parameters for the 4 IQ-SENSE
Parameters
Value range
Default setting
Applicability
Disable
Enable
Disable
Module
Synchronization group
1
2
3
4
Module
Sensor type
Reflex sensor
Diffuse sensor
Deactivated
Reflex sensor
Channel
Switching hysteresis
5%
10 %
20 %
50 %
20 %
Channel
Time functions
None
Return delay
Pickup delay
Pickup and return delay
Momentary impulse
None
Channel
Time value
5 ms
10 ms
20 ms
50 ms
100 ms
200 ms
500 ms
1s
2s
5s
10 s
5 ms
Channel
Teach-in disable
Teach-in with button
Channel
Group diagnosis
Teach-in with button
possible
Teach-in with button not
possible
possible

13-3

Note
Unused channels of the module must be deactivated otherwise the wire break diagnosis will
be reported.
Measurement type parameter: deactivated
All the diagnostics are suppressed.
Sensitivity/distance values and circuit states are set to "0".
The sensor is switched off
13.2.2
Group diagnostics parameter
Features
If you enable group diagnosis, a queued diagnostic message is entered.
See also
13.2.3
Synchronization group parameter
Features
Sensors of different modules of the 4 IQ-SENSE can affect one another with scattered
light, for example.
To prevent this interference between adjacent sensors on different modules, you can
assign each module a separate synchronization group with this parameter. Modules with
different synchronization groups do not affect each other.
It is not possible for sensors on the same module to affect one another.
13-4


Operating principle
The following figure illustrates how the synchronization group parameter works:

,QWHUIDFH
PRGXOH
30
6ORW
,46(16(
3DUDPHWHUV

Figure 13-1
6\QFKURQL]DWLRQ
JURXS
Synchronization group
It is only possible for the sensors of the modules in slots 2 and 6 to interfere with one another
because they are in the same synchronization group: group 1.
Note
When you install sensors of the same synchronization group, you must ensure that the
minimum clearance is adhered to (see the sensor information leaflet) to prevent any
interference between the sensors.

13-5

13.2.4
Sensor type parameter
Features
You use this parameter to set the sensor type for each channel.
Reflex sensor
Diffuse sensor
Deactivated
Diffuse sensor
Table 13-2
Diffuse sensor
Diffuse sensor
Object
Transmitter
Circuit state 0: No object detected. In

other words, the object is not in the path
of the beams. The receiver cannot see
any light
Receiver
Transmitter
Circuit state 1: Object detected. In other

words, the object is in the path of the
beams. The receiver cannot see any light.
Receiver
Reflex sensor
Table 13-3
Reflex sensor
Reflex sensor
Transmitter
Receiver
Transmitter
Receiver
13-6
Object
Circuit state 0: No object detected. In
other words, the object is not in the path
of the beams. The receiver sees some
light.
Circuit state 1: Object detected. In other

words, the object is in the path of the
beams. The receiver cannot see any light.


13.2.5
Switching hysteresis parameter
Features
Faults with the diffuse sensor or in the production process can result in signal wobbles. The
measured value then changes the switching threshold by 100 % (object detected - object not
detected). You can prevent this switching threshold wobble using the switching hysteresis
parameter. This will ensure a stable output signal on the sensor.
You can assigned parameters to 5%/10%/20%/50% for switching hysteresis.
Requirements
You can only set the switching hysteresis parameter for diffuse sensors with background
fadeout.
Operating principle
5HFHLYLQJOHYHO

6ZLWFKLQJ
WKUHVKROG
'LIIHUHQWLDOWUDYHO
7LPH

6ZLWFKLQJRXWSXWRQVHQVRU

7LPH
Figure 13-2
Switching hysteresis parameter

13-7

13.2.6
Time functions and time value parameters
Features
Using these parameters you can customize the electronic module to suit your application.
Operating principle
7LPHU
1RQH
GHIDXOW
6ZLWFKLQJVWDWXV
&XUYH

5HVHWGHOD\HG

3LFNXSGHOD\HG
3LFNXSDQG
UHVHWWLQJGHOD\

0RPHQWDU\
LPSXOVH

2EMHFWGHWHFWHG
6ZLWFKLQJVWDWH
RQVHQVRU
2EMHFWQRWGHWHFWHG
7 WLPHYDOXHSDUDPHWHU
Figure 13-3
Time value, time functions parameters
13.2.7
Teach-in disable parameter
Features
Using this parameter you can disable the Teach-in button on the sensor.
13-8


13.3 Control and feedback interface (PIQ/PII)
13.3
13.3.1
13.3
Control and feedback interface (PIQ/PII)
Fundamentals of the control and feedback interface (PIQ/PII)
Introduction
You can configure the address space of the control and feedback interfaces of the
4 IQ-SENSE. You can choose between Standard and Enhanced.
Standard features
The 4 IQ-SENSE occupies 4 bits in the feedback interface.
You can evaluate the circuit state of each channel using the feedback interface.
Enhanced features
The 4 IQ-SENSE occupies one byte in the control interface and one in the feedback
interface.
You can use the control interface to specify the sensitivity and distance values for each
channel (IntelliTeach via "IQ-SENSE Opto" FB) and execute Teach-in.
You can use the feedback interface to evaluate the acquired sensitivity and distance
values (switching threshold) and the circuit state for each channel.
Requirements:
You can use the "IQ-SENSE Opto" function block. The FB facilitates easy access to the
control and feedback interface.
Please note that in this case PII equals PIQ.
You can download the function block and the relevant product information on the Internet
at http://www.ad.siemens.de/csi_e/gsd.
Configuring the address space

Address area
With STEP 7 as of V5.1, Service

Pack 3
With STEP 7 as of V4.02 or COM

PROFIBUS or other configuration software
Standard
In the hardware catalog of HW

Config, choose 4IQ-SENSE
Opto S
From the GSD file, choose

S 6ES7138-4GA00-0AB0 IQ-SENSE Opto
Enhanced
In the hardware catalog of HW

Config, choose 4IQ-SENSE
Opto E
From the GSD file, choose

E 6ES7138-4GA00-0AB0 IQ-SENSE Opto

13-9

13.3.2
Standard
Feedback interface (PII)

Table 13-4
Standard feedback interface
Address
Byte 0
Assignment
Bit 7:
0 (not assigned)
Bit 6:
0 (not assigned)
Bit 5:
0 (not assigned)
Bit 4:
0 (not assigned)
Bit 3:
Circuit state sensor on channel 3

1: Object detected
0: Object not detected
Bit 2:

1: Object detected
Bit 1:

1: Object detected
Bit 0:

1: Object detected
13-10


13.3.3
Enhanced
Feedback interface (PII)

Table 13-5
Enhanced feedback interface
Address
Byte 0
Assignment
Bit 0:
Designation on
"IQ-SENSE Opto" FB
Q_CH0
1: Object detected
Byte1
Bit 1 to bit 7:
Acquired sensitivity/distance values on channel 0 by
Teach in *
TEACH_VAL_OUT
Bit 0:
Q_CH1

1: Object detected
Byte 2
Bit 1 to Bit 7:
Teach in *
TEACH_VAL_OUT
Bit 0:
Q_CH2

1: Object detected
Byte 3
Bit 1 to Bit 7:
Teach in *
TEACH_VAL_OUT
Bit 0:
Q_CH3

1: Object detected
Bit 1 to Bit 7:
Teach in *
TEACH_VAL_OUT
*: The current sensitivity/distance value is entered:

- After teach-in is completed on the sensor
- After teach-in is completed via the "IQ-SENSE Opto"

13-11

Control interface (PIQ)

Table 13-6
Enhanced control interface
Address
Byte 0
Assignment
Specify sensitivity/distance value on channel 0
Bit 0:
1: Transfer sensitivity/distance value to the sensor on
channel 2 (using rising edge)
0: deactivated
Bit 1 to 7:
Specify sensitivity/distance value on channel 0: 1 to 126
(sensor-dependent)
Teach-in on the sensor on channel 0

Bit 0:
1: Start teach-in on the sensor on channel 0 (at the rising
edge)
0: deactivated
Bit 1 to 7: 0
Byte1

Bit 0:
0: deactivated
Bit 1 to 7:
(sensor-dependent)
Bit 0:
edge)
0: deactivated
Bit 1 to 7: 0
Byte 2

Bit 0:
0: deactivated
Bit 1 to 7:
(sensor-dependent)
Teach-in on channel 2
Bit 0:
edge)
0: deactivated
Bit 1 to 7: 0
13-12
Designation on
"IQ-SENSE Opto" FB
WR_TEACH_VAL
TEACH_VAL_IN
START_TEACH
WR_TEACH_VAL
TEACH_VAL_IN
START_TEACH
WR_TEACH_VAL
TEACH_VAL_IN
START_TEACH


Address
Byte 3
Assignment
Bit 0:
0: deactivated
Bit 1 to 7:
(sensor-dependent)
Bit 0:
edge)
0: deactivated
Bit 1 to 7: 0
Designation on
"IQ-SENSE Opto" FB
WR_TEACH_VAL
TEACH_VAL_IN
START_TEACH
Principle of operation: Specifying a sensitivity/distance value (IntelliTeach)
6WDQGDUGPRGH
YDOLGVHQVLWLYLW\
GLVWDQFHYDOXH
3UHVHWVHQVLWLYLW\GLVWDQFH
YDOXHWR
DWELWWRLQWKH3,4
6HQVLWLYLW\GLVWDQFHYDOXH
WUDQVIHUUHGWRVHQVRUE\ULVLQJ
HGJHDWELWLQWKH3,4
Figure 13-4
Principle of operation: Specifying a sensitivity/distance value (IntelliTeach)

13-13

Principle of operation: Teach-in
1RUPDORSHUDWLRQ
6HWYDOXHDWELWWRLQ
3,4
6WDUW7HDFKLQE\
ULVLQJHGJHDW
ELWLQWKH3,4
7HDFKLQLVH[HFXWHG
7HDFKLQHQGHG
E\IDOOLQJHGJHDW
ELWLQWKH3,4
9DOLGVHQVLWLYLW\
GLVWDQFHYDOXHGHWHFWHG
1RYDOLGVHQVLWLYLW\
GLVWDQFHYDOXHGHWHFWHG
2SWLRQ
7HDFKLQHUURU
/HDUQHGVHQVLWLYLW\
GLVWDQFHYDOXH
ELWWRLQWKH3,,
2SWLRQ
3UHVHWRID
VHQVLWLYLW\GLVWDQFH
YDOXH,QWHOOL7HDFK
Figure 13-5
13-14
Principle of operation: Teach-in


13.4 Technical specifications
13.4
13.4
Pin assignment
The following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 4 1Q-SENSE for the different
terminal modules:
Table 13-7
Terminal assignment of the 4 IQ-SENSE

View
Pin assignment
Remarks
70(6DQG,46(16(

&+
&+
&+
&+
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

6HQVRU
6HQVRU

70(6$DQG,46(16(

&+
&+
&+
&+
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
$8;
$

$

$8;
$8;
$

$

$8;
0

6HQVRU
6HQVRU
Note
The connections to the sensors are protected against polarity reversal.
The minimum conductor cross-section for the sensors is 0.25 mm2.
The connecting cable for the sensors is described in the appendix.

13-15

Block diagram

&XUUHQW
OLPLW

%DFNSODQHEXV
(76
EDFNSODQH
EXV
FLUFXLW
w&
08;

3
0
3
/
Figure 13-6
13-16
,QWHUQDO
SRZHU
VXSSO\
Block diagram of the 4 IQ-SENSE


15 x 81 x 52
Weight
Approx. 35g
Number of inputs
Length of cable
Unshielded
Max. 50 m
Shielded
Max. 50 m
P1
24 VDC
Yes
Isolation
No
Yes
75 VDC, 60 VAC
500 VDC
Current consumption
From supply voltage
Max. 0.3 A
Typ. 0.85 W
Status display
Group error
Red "SF" LED
Yes

Connectable sensors
Photoelectric proximity switch with IQ-SENSE

Response Times
Cycle time
Max. 3.24 ms
See also
Order numbers for connecting cables for 4 IQ-SENSE electronic module (Page A-9)

13-17
RESERVE modules
14.1
14.1
14
RESERVE modules
Order numbers
6ES7138-4AA01-0AA0 (installation width 15 mm)
6ES7138-4AA11-0AA0 (installation width 30 mm)
Features
The RESERVE module has the following characteristic features:
Suitable for all TM-E terminal modules (installation widths 15 mm and 30 mm)
Reserves a slot for any electronic module slot. Insert the RESERVE module in the
reserved slot of the ET 200S configuration.
Note
Note the following for IM 151 (6ES7151-1AA01-0AB0, 6ES7151-1AA02-0AB0),
IM 151 FO (6ES7151-1AB00-0AB0, 6ES7151-1AB01-0AB0), and IM 151/ CPU
(6ES7151-7AA00-0AB0):
If you remove an electronic module during operation of the ET 200S and replace it with a
RESERVE module, you must then cycle the supply voltage (power OFF/power ON) on
the interface module.
Note the following for IM 151 (6ES7151-1AA00-0AB0):
The RESERVE module cannot be used in the ET 200S.
Parameter assignment (without option handling)

In STEP 7 or COM PROFIBUS, assign parameters to the electronic module you want to
use for future applications, such as 4DI DC High Feature, on the slot of the RESERVE
module.
Drag the module to the configuration table
Assign the parameters
Assign parameters to the interface module as follows:

14-1
RESERVE modules
14.1 RESERVE modules
Parameters
Setting
Operation at Preset <> Actual

Configuration
Enable
If you have assigned parameters to an electronic module with inputs for the RESERVE
module, the following substitute values are reported:
Digital input modules: 0
Analog input modules: 7FFFH
Function module: 0
Note
If you use RESERVE modules:
The SF LED lights up on the interface module
A channel-specific diagnostic and module status "10B: Wrong module" are reported for
the RESERVE module slot.
Pin assignment
The RESERVE module has no connection to the terminals of the TM-E terminal module.
This enables you to fully wire the TM-E terminal module and prepare it for the subsequent
application.
15 x 81 x 52
30 x 81 x 52
Weight
Approx. 33 g (installation width 15 mm)

Approx. 55g (installation width 30 mm)
Typ. 0.025 W
Status display
No
No
See also
Basic principles of option handling on PROFIBUS DP (Page 3-30)
Example: Use of RESERVE modules (Page 3-33)
14-2

Order numbers
A.1
A.1
Module order numbers
Introduction
You will find below the order numbers for the ET 200S distributed I/O system and the
PROFIBUS accessories that you may need to use with the ET 200S.
Interface module
This table shows the order numbers for interface modules.
Table A-1
Interface module order numbers

Designation
Order number
IM151-1 BASIC interface module and terminating module,

1 unit
6ES7151-1CA00-0AB0
IM151-1 STANDARD interface module and terminating module,

1 unit
6ES7151-1AA04-0AB0
IM151-1 FO STANDARD interface module and terminating module,

1 unit,
6ES7151-1AB03-0AB0
IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE interface module and terminating module,

1 unit
6ES7151-1BA01-0AB0
IM151-3 PN interface module and terminating module,

1 unit
6ES7151-3AA10-0AB0

A-1
Order numbers
A.1 Module order numbers
Terminal modules
([SODQDWLRQRIWKHDEEUHYLDWHGGHVLJQDWLRQ
7036
8QLQWHUUXSWHG$8;EXVZLWKRXWDFRQQHFWLRQWRWKH
WHUPLQDOV
$8QLQWHUUXSWHG$8;EXVZLWKFRQQHFWLRQWRWKH
WHUPLQDOV
$
,QWHUUXSWHG$8;EXVZLWKFRQQHFWLRQWRWKH
WHUPLQDOV
1XPEHURIWHUPLQDOVFROXPQV[URZV
66FUHZW\SHWHUPLQDO
&6SULQJWHUPLQDO
1)DVW&RQQHFW
:LGWKLQPLOOLPHWHUV
33RZHUPRGXOH
((OHFWURQLFPRGXOH
7HUPLQDOPRGXOH
Figure A-1
Explanation of the abbreviated designation
This table shows the order numbers for terminal modules.

Table A-2
Terminal module order numbers

Designation
Order number
TM-P15S23-A1 (screw-type terminal), 1 unit
A-2
6ES7193-4CC20-0AA0
TM-P15C23-A1 (spring terminal), 1 unit
6ES7193-4CC30-0AA0
TM-P15N23-A1 (Fast Connect), 1 unit
6ES7193-4CC70-0AA0
6ES7193-4CD20-0AA0
6ES7193-4CD30-0AA0
TM-P15N23-A0 (Fast Connect), 1 unit
6ES7193-4CD70-0AA0
TM-P15S22-01 (screw-type terminal), 1 unit
6ES7193-4CE00-0AA0
TM-P15C22-01 (spring terminal), 1 unit
6ES7193-4CE10-0AA0
TM-P15N22-01 (Fast Connect), 1 unit
6ES7193-4CE60-0AA0
6ES7193-4CK20-0AA0
6ES7193-4CK30-0AA0
TM-PF30S47-F1 (screw-type terminal), 1 unit
3RK1 903-3AA00
TM-E15S26-A1 (screw-type terminal), 5 units
6ES7193-4CA40-0AA0
TM-E15C26-A1 (spring terminal), 5 units
6ES7193-4CA50-0AA0
TM-E15N26-A1 (Fast Connect), 5 units
6ES7193-4CA80-0AA0
TM-E15S24-A1 (screw-type terminal), 5 units
6ES7193-4CA20-0AA0
TM-E15C24-A1 (spring terminal), 5 units
6ES7193-4CA30-0AA0
TM-E15N24-A1 (Fast Connect), 5 units
6ES7193-4CA70-0AA0

Order numbers
Designation
Order number
TM-E15S24-01 (screw-type terminal), 5 units
6ES7193-4CB20-0AA0
TM-E15C24-01 (spring terminal), 5 units
6ES7193-4CB30-0AA0
TM-E15N24-01 (Fast Connect), 5 units
6ES7193-4CB70-0AA0
TM-E15S23-01 (screw-type terminal), 5 units
6ES7193-4CB00-0AA0
TM-E15C23-01 (spring terminal), 5 units
6ES7193-4CB10-0AA0
TM-E15N23-01 (Fast Connect), 1 unit
6ES7193-4CB60-0AA0
TM-E15S24-AT (screw-type terminal), 5 units
6ES7193-4CL20-0AA0
TM-E15C24-AT (spring terminal), 5 units
6ES7193-4CL30-0AA0
TM-E30S44-01 (screw-type terminal), 1 unit
6ES7193-4CG20-0AA0
TM-E30C44-01 (spring terminal), 1 unit
6ES7193-4CG30-0AA0
TM-E30S46-A1 (screw-type terminal), 1 unit
6ES7193-4CF40-0AA0
TM-E30C46-A1 (spring terminal), 1 unit
6ES7193-4CF50-0AA0
Power modules
This table shows the order numbers for power modules.
Table A-3
Power module order numbers

Designation
Order number
PM-E 24 VDC, 1 unit
6ES7138-4CA01-0AA0
PM-E 24-48 VDC/24-230 VAC, 1 unit
6ES7138-4CB10-0AB0
PM-E 24-48 VDC, 1 unit
6ES7138-4CA50-0AB0

This table shows the order numbers for digital electronic modules.
Table A-4
Digital electronic module order numbers

Designation
Order number
2DI 24 VDC Standard, 5 units
6ES7131-4BB01-0AA0
4DI 24 VDC Standard, 5 units
6ES7131-4BD01-0AA0
4DI 24 VDC/SRC Standard, 5 units
6ES7131-4BD51-0AA0
2DI 24 VDC High Feature, 5 units
6ES7131-4BB01-0AB0
4DI 24 VDC High Feature, 5 units
6ES7131-4BD01-0AB0
4DI 24-48 VUC High Feature, 5 units
6ES7131-4CD00-0AB0
4DI NAMUR
6ES7131-4RD00-0AB0
2DI 120 VAC Standard, 5 units
6ES7131-4EB00-0AB0
2DI 230 VAC Standard, 5 units
6ES7131-4FB00-0AB0
2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A Standard, 5 units
6ES7132-4BB01-0AA0
4DO 24 VDC/0.5 A Standard, 5 units
6ES7132-4BD01-0AA0
2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A High Feature, 5 units
6ES7132-4BB01-0AB0
2DO 24 VDC/2 A Standard, 5 units
6ES7132-4BB31-0AA0

A-3
Order numbers
Designation
Order number
4DO 24 VDC/2 A Standard, 5 units
6ES7132-4BD31-0AA0
2DO 24 VDC/2 A High Feature, 5 units
6ES7132-4BB31-0AB0
2DO 24-230 VAC/2 A, 5 units
6ES7132-4FB00-0AB0
2RO NO 24-120 VDC/5 A, 24-230 VAC/5 A, 5 units
6ES7132-4HB01-0AB0
2RO NO/NC 24-48 VDC/5 A, 24-230 VAC/5 A, 5 units
6ES7132-4HB10-0AB0
4 IQ-SENSE, 5 units
6ES7138-4GA00-0AB0

This table shows the order numbers for analog electronic modules.
Table A-5
Analog electronic module order numbers

Designation
A-4
Order number
2AI U Standard, 1 unit
6ES7134-4FB01-0AB0
2AI U High Feature, 1 unit
6ES7134-4LB00-0AB0
2AI U High Speed, 1 unit
6ES7134-4FB51-0AB0
2AI I 2WIRE Standard, 1 unit
6ES7134-4GB01-0AB0
6ES7134-4GD00-0AB0
2AI I 2WIRE High Speed, 1 unit
6ES7134-4GB51-0AB0
6ES7134-4GB11-0AB0
2AI I 2/4WIRE High Feature, 1 unit
6ES7134-4MB00-0AB0
2AI I 4WIRE High Speed, 1 unit
6ES7134-4GB61-0AB0
2AI RTD Standard, 1 unit
6ES7134-4JB50-0AB0
2AI RTD High Feature, 1 unit
6ES7134-4NB51-0AB0
2AI TC Standard, 1 unit
6ES7134-4JB00-0AB0
2AI TC High Feature, 1 unit
6ES7134-4NB01-0AB0
2AO U Standard, 1 unit
6ES7135-4FB01-0AB0
2AO U High Feature, 1 unit
6ES7135-4LB01-0AB0
2AO I Standard, 1 unit
6ES7135-4GB01-0AB0
2AO I High Feature, 1 unit
6ES7135-4MB01-0AB0

Order numbers
Technology modules
This table shows the order numbers for technology modules.
Table A-6
Process-related module order numbers

Designation
Order number
1Count 24V/100kHz, 1 unit
6ES7138-4DA03-0AB0
1Count 5V/500kHz, 1 unit
6ES7138-4DE01-0AB0
1 SSI, 1 unit
6ES7138-4DB01-0AB0
1 STEP 5 V/204 kHz, 1 unit
6ES7138-4DC00-0AB0
2PULSE, 1 unit
6ES7138-4DD00-0AB0
1POS INC/Digital
6ES7138-4DG00-0AB0
1POS SSI/Digital
6ES7138-4DH00-0AB0
1POS INC/Analog
6ES7138-4DJ00-0AB0
1POS SSI/Analog
6ES7138-4DK00-0AB0
1SI 3964/ASCII serial interface module
6ES7138-4DF01-0AB0
1SI Modbus/USS serial interface module
6ES7138-4DF11-0AB0
SIWAREX CS weighing module
7MH4 910-0AA01
RESERVE modules
This table shows the order numbers for reserve modules.
Table A-7
Reserve module order numbers

Designation
Order number
RESERVE (with 15 mm), 5 unit
6ES7138-4AA01-0AA0
RESERVE (with 30 mm), 1 unit
6ES7138-4AA11-0AA0

A-5
Order numbers
A.2 Order numbers for ET 200S accessories
A.2
A.2
Order numbers for ET 200S accessories
ET 200S accessories
This table shows the order numbers for ET 200S accessories.
Table A-8
ET 200S accessories order numbers
Designation
Order number
Shield connection:
Shield connection element, 5 units
6ES7193-4GA00-0AA0
Power rail, 1 units at 1 m, 3x10 mm
8WA2 842
Shield terminal, 5 units
6ES7193-4GB00-0AA0
Grounding terminal
8WA2 868
DIN A4 labeling sheet, white, 10 units
6ES7193-4BA00-0AA0
DIN A4 labeling sheet, red, 10 units
6ES7193-4BD00-0AA0
DIN A4 labeling sheet, yellow, 10 units
6ES7193-4BB00-0AA0
DIN A4 labeling sheet, petrol, 10 units
6ES7193-4BH00-0AA0
Color identification labels (10 strips each containing 20 items in

each color)
A-6
White
6ES7193-4LA10-0AA0
Red
6ES7193-4LD10-0AA0
Yellow
6ES7193-4LB10-0AA0
Yellow-green
6ES7193-4LC10-0AA0
Brown
6ES7193-4LG10-0AA0
Blue
6ES7193-4LF10-0AA0
Turquoise
6ES7193-4LH10-0AA0
Slot number labels, 10x (1 to 20), 200 units
8WA8 861-0AB
Slot number labels, 5x (1 to 40), 200 units
8WA8 861-0AC
Terminating module, 1 unit
6ES7193-4JA00-0AA0

Order numbers
A.3 Order numbers for ET 200S network components
A.3
A.3
Order numbers for ET 200S network components
Network components for ET 200S

The tables below lists all the network components for the ET 200S distributed I/O system
that you may require to use the ET 200S.
Table A-9
Network components (PROFIBUS DP) for ET 200S order numbers

Designation
Order number
RS 485 repeater, PROFIBUS DP, IP 20
6ES7972-0AA00-0XA0
PROFIBUS bus connector (12 Mbps)

Anthracite (without programming port)
Anthracite (with programming port)
6ES7972-0BA11-0XA0
6ES7972-0BB11-0XA0
Bus cable
Normal
Drum cable
Direct-buried cable
6XV1 830-0EH10
6XV1 830-3BH10
6XV1 830-3AH10
Repeater adapter
6GK1510-1AA00
Active RS 485 terminating element
66ES7972-0DA00-0AA0
Optical link modules for glass fiber-optic cable
6GK1502-3AB10
6GK1502-4AB10
PROFIBUS connecting cable
6ES7901-4BD00-0XA0
Fiber-optic cable
SIMATIC NET PROFIBUS plastic fiber-optic, duplex core (50 m

ring)
6XV1 821-2AN50
SIMATIC NET PROFIBUS plastic fiber optic, standard cable

Sold by the meter
50 m ring
100 m ring
6XV1 821-0AH10
6XV1 821-0AN50
6XV1 821-0AT10
SIMATIC NET PROFIBUS PCF fiber optic, standard cable, various

lengths from 50 m to 300 m
6XV1 821-1Bxxx
Plugs for fiber-optic cable

Package of 100 simplex plugs and 5 polishing sets
Package of 50 plug adapters

6GK1901-0FB00-0AA0
6ES7195-1BE00-0XA0
A-7
Order numbers
A.4 Order numbers for ET 200S spare parts
Table A-10
Network components (PROFINET IO) for ET 200S order numbers

Designation
A.4
A.4
Order number
Industrial Ethernet FC RJ45 Plug 90 (RJ45 plug for Industrial Ethernet

with robust metal housing and integrated cutting/clamping contacts for
connecting the Industrial Ethernet FC installation cables; with 90
cable outlet.
1 unit
10 units
50 units
6GK1 901-1BB20-2AA0
6GK1 901-1BB20-2AB0
6GK1 901-1BB20-2AE0
Industrial Ethernet Fast Connect installation cables

Fast Connect standard cable
Fast Connect trailing cable
Fast Connect marine cable
6XV1 840-2AH10
6XV1 840-3AH10
6XV1 840-4AH10
Industrial Ethernet Fast Connect stripping tool
6GK1 901-1GA00
Order numbers for ET 200S spare parts
Spare parts
This table shows the order numbers for the fuses for digital input module and power module.
Table A-11
A-8
Fuse for digital input module and power module
Designation
Order number
Fuse for 4DI 24-48 VUC HF

ET200S Spare Fuse Kit 1 A, (10 ea.)
6ES7193-4KA00-0AA0
Fuse for PM-E 24-48 VDC/24-230 VAC

ET200S Spare Fuse Kit 10 A, (ea.)
6ES7193-4KA10-0AA0

Order numbers
A.5 Order numbers for connecting cables for 4 IQ-SENSE electronic module
A.5
A.5
Order numbers for connecting cables for 4 IQ-SENSE electronic

module
Order numbers for connecting cables for 4 IQ-SENSE electronic module

The following table contains the connecting cables for the sensors on the 4 IQ-SENSE
electronic module. You will also find these connecting cables in the NS BERO catalog (in the
chapter on 3RX1 plug connections).
Table A-12
A.6
A.6
Connecting cable for 4 IQ-SENSE electronic module
Designation
Order number
Cable box (M12) for screw-type attachment with 5 m PUR

connecting cable 3 x 0.34 mm2
3RX1 533
Cable box (M12) for screw-type attachment with 5 m PUR

connecting cable 4 x 0.34 mm2
3RX1 536
Order numbers for manuals

This table shows the order numbers for the documentation packages and manuals for
ET 200S.
Table A-13
ET 200S documentation packages or manuals

Designation
Order number
ET 200S Distributed I/O System model.
Available only on the Internet
ET 200S Motor Starter manual
ET 200S Interface Module IM 151-7 CPU manual and instruction
list
ET 200S Technological Functions manual
ET 200S Positioning manual
ET 200S Serial Interface Module manual
ET 200S Distributed I/O System Fail-Safe Modules manual

ET 200S FC Frequency Converter Operating Instructions
ET 200S FC Frequency Converter List Manual)

They are also available on the Internet in German, English, French, Spanish, and Italian (see Service
& Support on the Internet).

A-9
Order numbers
A.6 Order numbers for manuals
STEP 7 and SIMATIC S7

To program and commission the ET 200S with STEP 7 , you require one of the following
manuals.
The STEP 7 and SIMATIC S7 manuals are listed in this table.
Table A-14
Designation
Contents
S7-300 Programmable Controller

documentation package consisting of:
Among others,
Reference Manual
CPU data: CPU 312 IFM to 318-2 DP
and instruction list
CPU data: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x and
instruction list
Manual
CPU 31xC: Process-related functions
including CD with examples
Description of the different process-related

functions
Installation manual
S7-300 Programmable Controller:
Setup: CPU 312 IFM to 318-2 DP
S7-300 Programmable Controller:
Setup: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
Description of the configuration, mounting,

wiring, networking and commissioning of an
S7-300
Reference manual:
S7-300 Programmable Controller
Module Specifications
Functional descriptions and technical

specifications of the signal modules, power
supply modules and interface modules
Getting Started
Examples of different commissioning steps

leading up to a functional application.
A-10
STEP 7 and SIMATIC S7 manuals
Operating instructions and a description of the

functions and technical specifications of the
CPUs
List of the instruction set of CPUs and their
execution times List of executable blocks and
their execution times
Programmable Controllers S7 F/FH manual
Among others,
Description of the tasks that have to be
executed to create and commission a fail-safe
S7 F Systems system
S7 Distributed Safety Configuring and

Programming manual
Among others,
Description of the tasks that have to be
executed to create and commission a fail-safe
S7 Distributed Safety system
S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controllers

Hardware and Installation
Among others,
Description of the PROFIBUS DP master
interface in S7-400 and M7-400
Installing a PROFIBUS DP network
RS 485 repeater
System Software for S7-300/400

Program Design
Programming Manual
Among others,
System Software for S7-300/400

System and Standard Functions
Reference Manual
Description of the SFCs in STEP 7
Description
SIMATIC NET PROFIBUS networks, laying of lines

and cables (primarily)
Description of addressing and diagnostics in

SIMATIC S7

Order numbers
ET 200 in SIMATIC S5
To program and commission the ET 200S with STEP 7 and COM PROFIBUS, you need the
following manual.
The STEP 7 and SIMATIC S7 manuals are listed in this table.
Table A-15
STEP 7 and SIMATIC S7 manuals

Designation
ET 200 Distributed I/O System
Contents
Among others,
Description of the IM308-C master interface for
S5-115U/H, S5-135U, and S5-155U/H
Description of the S5-95U with the PROFIBUS
DP master interface
Description of the procedure for installing a DP
system and an FMS system with the CP 5412
(A2) as master
Handling COM PROFIBUS
Working with the FB IM308C/FB 230
Decentralizing with PROFIBUS DP technical guide

This table shows the order numbers of the technical guide to PROFIBUS DP and SIMATIC
S7.
Table A-16
Technical Guide to PROFIBUS DP and SIMATIC S7

Technical guide
Decentralizing with PROFIBUS DP

- Aufbau, Projektierung und Einsatz des
PROFIBUS DP mit SIMATIC S7 (Structure,
Configuration, and Use of the PROFIBUS
DP with the SIMATIC S7)
Josef Weigmann, Gerhard Kilian
Publicis MCD Verlag, 1998

Order numbers
From booksellers:
ISBN 3-89578-074-X
From your Siemens
branch office:
A19100-L531-B714
Contents
Instruction manual for a
simple introduction to the
PROFIBUS DP and
implementation of
automation tasks with the
PROFIBUS DP and
SIMATIC S7.
Use of the PROFIBUS DP is
illustrated for the
SIMATIC S7 with a large
number of practical
examples.
A-11
Order numbers
A-12

Dimension drawings
B.1
B.1
PP
30 (0 (0 (0 30
(0 (0 (0
PP
PP
PP
PP
Figure B-1
PP
PP
Minimum clearances

B-1
Dimension drawings
B.2 Interface modules
B.2
B.2
Interface modules
Interface module

IM151-1 interface module drawing (dimensions in mm):

Rail support
119.5
66.5
IM151-3 PN interface module drawing (dimensions in mm):
53
45
B-2
67
Rail support

Dimension drawings
B.3 Terminal modules (screw-type/spring terminals) with an electronic module inserted
B.3
B.3
Terminal modules (screw-type/spring terminals) with an electronic

module inserted
Terminal modules (screw-type/spring terminals) with an electronic module inserted

The dimensions of the terminal modules with the power module inserted are identical.

Dimension drawing of terminal modules (screw-type/spring terminals) with an electronic

module inserted (dimensions in mm):

Rail support

B-3
Dimension drawings



B-4

Rail support

Dimension drawings



Rail support

B-5
Dimension drawings
66.5
Dimension drawing of terminal modules (screw-type terminals) with an electronic module

inserted (dimensions in mm):
130
196.5
30
B-6
67
Rail support

Dimension drawings
B.4 Terminal modules (Fast Connect) with an electronic module inserted
B.4
B.4
Terminal modules (Fast Connect) with an electronic module inserted
Terminal modules (Fast Connect) with an electronic module inserted
The dimensions of the terminal modules with the power module inserted are identical.
Dimension drawing of terminal modules (Fast Connect) with an electronic module inserted
(dimensions in mm):

B-7

Dimension drawings

B-8

Rail support

Dimension drawings

Dimension drawing of terminal modules (Fast Connect) with an electronic module inserted
(dimensions in mm):

Rail support

B-9
Dimension drawings
B.5 Terminating module
B.5
B.5
Terminating module
Terminating module

Terminating module drawing (dimensions in mm):

B.6
B.6
Rail support
Shield connection
Shield connection

Shield connection (dimensions in mm):

Figure B-2
B-10
Shield connection dimension drawing

Address space of the inputs and outputs
C.1
C.1
Address space of the modules

This table shows the address spaces of the inputs and outputs of the ET 200S
Table C-1
Address spaces of the inputs and outputs of the ET 200S

Module

No grouping
with
grouping1
Address space of the outputs

No grouping
with grouping1
Power modules
With status byte (S)2
1 bytes
---
8 bytes
8 bytes
With status byte and option

handling (SO)2
9 bytes
9 bytes (9th byte not relevant)
1 bytes
With option handling
(O)2
2 bits (2DI)
---
---
4 bits (4DI)
4DI NAMUR
2 bytes
---
-----
1 bytes
2 bits (2DO)
4 bits (4DO)
4 bytes (2AI)
---
---
8 bytes (4AI)
---
---
4 bytes
1COUNT 24V/100kHz
8 bytes
8 bytes
1COUNT 5V/500kHz
8 bytes
8 bytes
1SSI
8 bytes
8 bytes
1SSI fast
4 bytes
---
1STEP 5V/204kHz
8 bytes
8 bytes
2PULSE
8 bytes
8 bytes
1POS INC/Digital
8 bytes
8 bytes
1POS SSI/Digital
8 bytes
8 bytes
1POS INC/Analog
8 bytes
8 bytes
1POS SSI/Analog
8 bytes
8 bytes
1SI 3964/ASCII serial

interface module
4/8 bytes
4/8 bytes
1SI Modbus/USS serial

interface module
4/8 bytes
4/8 bytes

C-1

C.1 Address space of the inputs and outputs
4IQ-SENSE (standard)
1 bytes
4IQ-SENSE (enhanced)
4 bytes
4 bytes
ET 200S FC frequency
converter
8 bytes
8 bytes
1See
---
Address space of the outputs

---
sections on configuring the ET 200S
2Additional
optional entries you can select from the GSD file
Address area for option handling and status byte

You can control and monitor option handling, and evaluate the status byte of the power
module using the control (PIQ) and feedback interface (PII).
The address range of the control (PIQ) and feedback interface (PII) depends on the
configuration or selection of the corresponding entry in the configuration software.
This table shows the PII feedback interface and the PIQ control interface for different entries.
Table C-2
PII feedback interface and PIQ control interface
In STEP 7/HW Config or

COM PROFIBUS or other
configuration software
Feedback interface PII
Control interface PIQ
---
---
Usual entry for the power

module
Ends in ...S
IBx
Ends in ...O
IBx
...
Status byte
Option handling
Option handling
...
Option handling
QBx+7
IBx+7
IBx+8
Option handling
QBx
IBx
...
...
QBx+7
IBx+7
Ends in ...SO
--QBx
Status byte
QBx+8
Not relevant
Option handling in PIQ/PII

$%(%[
$%(%[
$%(%[
$%(%[
$%(%[
$%(%[
$%(%[
$%(%[
(*)
C-2

Not relevant


PIQ: QB x to QB x+7
Slots 2 to 63:
Parameter assignment for option handling applies. RESERVE

modules are permitted:
Parameter assignment for option handling is cancelled.

RESERVE modules are not accepted on this slot:
The RESERVE module, an incorrect module, or no module is

on the slot.
The configured module is on the slot.
PII: IB x to IB x+7
Slots 1 to 63:
Status byte power modules

,%[

%LWQR
/RDGYROWDJHPLVVLQJ
/RDGYROWDJHSUHVHQW
6HQVRURUORDGYROWDJHPLVVLQJ
SUHVHQWLQDOO30(SRZHUPRGXOHV
GHIHFWLYHIXVHRQO\LQWKHFDVHRIWKH30(9'&
9$&
'LDJQRVWLFELWVRIWKHSRZHUPRGXOHV
Figure C-1
Assignment of status byte for power modules

C-3

C-4

Response Times
D.1
D.1
Overview
Introduction
The figure below shows the different response times between the DP master and the ET
200S.
'3PDVWHU
&38
'3
LQWHUIDFH
'3F\FOH
'3VODYH
(76
(76
,0
Figure D-1
D.2
D.2
',
'2
$,
$2
66,
Response times between the DP master and the ET 200S
Response times at the DP master

You will find information on the response times in the manual for the DP master.

D-1
Response Times
D.3 Response times for the ET 200S
D.3
D.3
Response times for the ET 200S
Calculating the response time for IM151-1 BASIC

The following formula enables you to make an approximate calculation of the ET 200S
response time:
Response time [s] = 156 m + 33 do + 486 ai + 374 ao + 1633 t + 934
Explanation of the parameters:
m: Total number of all modules (power modules, digital electronic modules, analog
electronic modules, IQ-SENSE electronic modules, process-related modules, and motor
starters)
do: Sum of all the digital output modules
ai: Sum of all the analog input modules and 1SSI fast electronic modules
ao: Sum of all the digital output modules
t: Number of all process-related modules (except 1SSI fast)
Example of the calculation of the ET 200S response time in the case of the IM151-1 BASIC

$2,
'2'&9
'2'&9
30'
%XVWHUPLQDWRU

'6
'6
'6
','&9
','&9
Figure D-2

$,8
','&9
30('&9
,0%$6,&
6ORW
Example setup for calculating the response time in the case of the IM151-1 BASIC
Calculation method:
m = 12; do=2; ai=1; ao=1; t=0
Response time = 156 m + 33 do + 486 ai + 374 ao + 1633 t + 934
Response time = 156 12 + 33 2 + 486 1 + 374 1 + 1633 0 + 934
Response time = 3732 s
D-2

Response Times
Calculation of the response time in the case of the IM151-1 STANDARD and IM151-1 FO
STANDARD
response time:
Response time [s]* = 55 m + 110 a + 400 t + 190
* Bus length parameter > 1m: The response time is increased by an additional 40%.
starters)
a: Sum of all the analog electronic modules, 4 IQ-SENSE electronic modules, and 1SSI
fast electronic modules
t: Number of all process-related modules (except 1SSI fast)
Note
The formula specified applies to cyclic data transfer. The following prerequisites must be
fulfilled:
No diagnoses are reported.
No modules are removed and inserted.
Example for the calculation of the ET 200S response time for the IM151-1 STANDARD and
IM151-1 FO STANDARD
'6
%XVWHUPLQDWRU
'6
'6
30'
'29
'29
30($&
'2'&9
'2'&9
'2'&9

'2'&9
','&9
30('&9
66,IDVW
52
66,
$,8
','&9
Figure D-3
$2,
','&9
30('&9
,067$1'$5'
6ORW
Example of the calculation of the response time in the case of the IM151-1 STANDARD,
IM 151-1 FO STANDARD

D-3
Response Times
Calculation method:
m = 21; a = 3; t = 1
Response time = 55 m +110 a + 400 t + 190
Response time = 55 21 +110 3 + 400 1 + 190
Response time = 2075 s
Calculation of the reaction time for IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE (6ES7151-1BA00-0AB0)

When you calculate the ET 200S response time, you have to choose between 2 setup
variants:
1. If there are only power modules, digital electronic modules, and motor starters in your
ET 200S setup (exception: no no motor starters; High Feature), the following formula
applies:
Response time [s] = response timePII + response timePIQ + 1000*
Response timePII [s] = 55 m +130
Response timePIQ [s] = 10 mdo +90
2. If your ET 200S setup differs from no.1, the following formula applies:
Response time [s] = response timePII + response timePIQ + 1000*
Response timePII [s] = 55 m +125 ai + 175 t +250
Response timePIQ [s] = 10 mdo +125 ao + 175 t +130
starters)
mdo: Slot number of the last digital output module, 4 IQ-SENSE electronic module, or
motor starter in the ET 200S setup. You should place these modules or motor starters on
the front slots to improve the response time.
ai: Sum of all the analog input modules
ao: Sum of all the analog output modules
t: Number of all technological modules
*: In the case of isochronous mode, this value can be increased per configuration
(settings on the DP master system in HW Config: equidistant DP cycle). Note: This value
(1000 s) must be included in the calculation even if you have not set isochronous mode.
D-4

Response Times
Example of the calculation of the ET 200S response time with IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE
(6ES7151-1BA00-0AB0)
','&9
%XVWHUPLQDWRU
','&9
','99
','&9
52
52
','&9
'2'&9

30('&9
'2'&9
Figure D-4

','&9
','&9
','&9
','&9

','&9
52
30('&9
,0
+,*+)($785(
6ORW
Example setup for the calculation of the ET 200S response time with IM151-1 HIGH
FEATURE (6ES7151-1BA00-0AB0)
Calculation method:
m = 17; mdo = 6
Response timePII [s] = 55 m +130 = 55 17 + 130 = 1065 s
Response timePIQ [s] = 10 mdo +90 = 10 6 + 90 = 150 s
Response time [s] = response timePII + response timePIQ + 1000
Response time [s] = 1065 + 150 + 1000 = 2215 s
Calculation of the reaction time for IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE (6ES7151-1BA01-0AB0)

response time:
Reaction time [s] = 22 m + 14 b + 213
m: Total number of all configured modules
b: Sum of all input and output bytes (without bitgranular modules)

D-5
Response Times
D.4 Response times for the digital input modules
Example of the calculation of the ET 200S response time with IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE
(6ES7151-1BA01-0AB0)
','&9
%XVWHUPLQDWRU
','99
','&9
','&9
52
52
','&9
'2'&9

30('&9
'2'&9

','&9
','&9
','&9
','&9

','&9
52
30('&9
,0
+,*+)($785(
6ORW
Example setup for the calculation of the ET 200S response time with IM151-1 HIGH
FEATURE (6ES7151-1BA01-0AB0)
Calculation method:
m = 17; b = 0
Reaction time [s] = 22 m + 14 b + 213 = 22 17 + 14 0 + 213 = 587 s
Reaction time [s] = 587 s
D.4
D.4
Response times for the digital input modules
Input delay
The response times of the digital input modules depend on the input delay.
See also
4DO 24 VDC/2 A Standard digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BD31-0AA0) (Page 11-69)
2DI 24 VDC ST digital electronic module (6ES7131-4BB01-0AA0). (Page 11-9)
(6ES7132-4HB10-0AB0) (Page 11-90)
(6ES7132-4HB01-0AB0) (Page 11-84)
Digital electronic module 2DO 24 to 230 VAC (6ES7132-4FB00-0AB0) (Page 11-79)
2DO 24 VDC/2 A High Feature digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BB31-0AB0) (Page 1174)
2DO 24 VDC/2 A Standard digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BB31-0AA0) (Page 11-64)
2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A High Feature digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BB01-0AB0)
(Page 11-59)
4DO 24 VDC/0.5 A Standard digital electronic module(6ES7132-4BD01-0AA0) (Page 11-54)
2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A Standard digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BB01-0AA0) (Page 11-49)
D-6

Response Times
D.5 Response times for the digital output modules
2DI 230 VAC Standard digital electronic module (6ES7131-4FB00-0AB0) (Page 11-45)
2DI 120 VAC Standard digital electronic module (6ES7131-4EB00-0AB0) (Page 11-41)
4DI NAMUR digital electronic module(6ES7131-4RD00-0AB0) (Page 11-33)
4DI 24-48 VUC High Feature digital electronic module(6ES7131-4CD00-0AB0) (Page 11-29)
4DI 24 VDC High Feature digital electronic module(6ES7131-4BD01-0AB0) (Page 11-25)
2DI 24 VDC High Feature digital electronic module (6ES7131-4BB01-0AB0) (Page 11-21)
4DI 24 VDC/SRC ST digital electronic module (6ES7131-4BD51-0AA0) (Page 11-17)
4DI 24 VDC ST digital electronic module (6ES7131-4BD01-0AA0) (Page 11-13)
D.5
D.5
Response times for the digital output modules
Output delay
The response times correspond to the output delay.
See also
Parameters for power modules (Page 10-1)
D.6
D.6
Response times for analog input modules
Conversion time
The conversion time consists of the basic conversion time and the processing time for wire
break check diagnostics.
In integrative conversion processes, the integration time is included directly in the conversion
time.
Cycle time
The analog/digital conversion and the transfer of the digitized measured values to memory or
to the backplane bus take place sequentially. In other words, the analog input channels are
converted one after the other. The cycle time, that is, the time until an analog output value is
converted again, is the sum of the conversion times of all the activated analog output
channels of the analog input modules. You should deactivate unused analog input channels
during parameter assignment in order to reduce the cycle time. The conversion and
integration time for a deactivated channel is 0.
The following figure provides you with an overview of what makes up the cycle time for an
n-channel analog input module.

D-7
Response Times
D.7 Response times for analog output modules
&KDQQHOFRQYHUVLRQWLPH
&\FOHWLPH
Figure D-5
Cycle time of the analog input module
See also
2AI TC Standard analog electronic module (6ES7134-4JB00-0AB0) (Page 12-85)
2AI TC High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7134-4NB01-0AB0) (Page 12-91)
D.7
D.7
Response times for analog output modules
Conversion time
The conversion time of the analog output channels comprises the time for the transfer of the
digitized output values from internal memory and the digital/analog conversion.
Cycle time
The conversion of the analog output channels for the module takes place with a processing
time and sequentially with a conversion time for channels 0 and 1.
The cycle time, that is, the time until an analog output value is converted again, is the sum of
the conversion times of all the activated analog output channels and of the processing time
of the analog output module.
The following figure provides you with an overview of what makes up the cycle time for an
analog output module.
D-8

Response Times
D.7 Response times for analog output modules
0RGXOHSURFHVVLQJWLPH
&\FOHWLPH
Figure D-6
Cycle time of the analog output module
Settling time
The settling time (t2 to t3) - that is, the time from the application of the converted value until
the specified value is obtained at the analog output - depends on the load. A distinction must
be drawn between resistive, capacitive, and inductive loads.
Response time
The response time (t1 to t3) - that is, the time from the application of the digital output values
in internal memory until the specified value is obtained at the analog output - is, in the most
unfavorable case, the sum of the cycle time and the settling time. The most unfavorable case
is when the analog channel is converted shortly before the transfer of a new output value
and is not converted again until after the conversion of the other channels (cycle time).
This figure shows the response time of an analog output channel:
W$
W(
W=
W
W
Figure D-7
W
Response time of an analog output channel
tA
Response time
tZ
Cycle time, corresponding to the processing time of the module and the conversion time of
the channel
tE
Settling time
t1
New digital value applied
t2
Output value transferred and converted
t3
Specified output value obtained

D-9
Response Times
D.8 Response times for a 4 IQ-SENSE electronic module
D.8
D.8
Response times for a 4 IQ-SENSE electronic module

The response time of the 4 IQ-SENSE electronic module is specified as a cycle time in the
technical specifications.
D.9
D.9
Response times for technological modules

The response times of the technological modules are indicated as response time or update
rate in the technical specifications. See the ET 200S Technological Functions manual.
D.10
D.10
Response times of PROFINET IO

The response time of PROFINET IO basically corresponds to the response time of
PROFIBUS DP DPV1 with a 1.5 Mbps transmission rate.
Depending on the setup of the ET 200S, the device cycle increases by approximately 25% to
100% with IM151-3 PN (6ES7151-3AA00-0AB0) as compared to an ET 200S with
IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE (6ES7151-1BA00-0AB0)..
An IM151-3 PN (6ES7151-3AA10-0AB0) has in comparison to a 6ES7151-3AA00-0AB0 a
25% to 30% better performance. The margin of deviation of the cycle in the IM151-3 PN
(6ES7151-3AA10-0AB0) is approx. 50 % smaller as for 6ES7151-3AA00-0AB0.
D-10

Determining the Leakage Resistance of an ET 200S Station
Ohmic resistance
When determining the leakage resistance for an ET 200S station (for a ground-fault detector,
for example), you must take into account the ohmic resistance from the RC combination of
each module:
Module
Ohmic resistance from RC network
Interface module
10 M (5%)
PM-E 24 VDC power module
10 M (5%)
PM-E 24 VDC / 120/230 VAC power module
---
Formula
You can use the following formula to calculate the leakage resistance of an ET 200S station
if you protect all the modules listed above with one single ground-fault detector:
RET200S
50RGXO
1
RET200S
Leakage resistance of the ET 200S station
Rmodule
Leakage resistance of a module
Number of power/interface modules in the ET 200S station
RIM 151
RPM-E 24 VDC = Rmodule = 9.5 M
RIM 151
Leakage resistance of the IM151-1 interface module
RPM-E 24 VDC
Leakage resistance of the PM-E 24 VDC power module
If you secure the modules listed above in an ET 200S station with a number of ground-fault
detectors, you must obtain the leakage resistance for each ground-fault detector.
Example
An ET 200S configuration contains an IM151-1 STANDARD, two PM-E 24 VDC power
modules, and various input and output modules. The entire ET 200S station is equipped with
one single ground-fault detector:
5(76
0

Figure E-1
0
Example calculation for leakage resistance

E-1
Determining the Leakage Resistance of an ET 200S Station

D.10 Response times of PROFINET IO
E-2

Special Measures for Interference-Free Operation
Inductive voltages
Overvoltage occurs when sources of inductance are switched off. Examples of this are relay
coils and contactors.
Integrated overvoltage protection

The digital output modules of the ET 200S have an integrated overvoltage protection device.
Additional overvoltage protection

Inductance can only be wired with additional overvoltage protection devices in the following
cases:
If digital output circuits can be switched off by additionally installed contacts, such as
relay contacts.
If the inductance cannot be controlled by digital output modules.
Note: Find out from the supplier of the inductance what dimensions the overvoltage
protection device should have.
Example
The following figure shows an output circuit that requires additional overvoltage protection
devices.
Relay contact for emergency stop in the output circuit:

F-1

1
'&9
Contact in the output circuit
Inductance requires a circuit(see the following figures)
Wiring of DC-operated coils

DC-operated coils are wired with diodes and Zener diodes as illustrated in the following
figure.
1
With diode
With Zener diode
A circuit with diodes/Zener diodes has the following properties:

Switching overvoltages can be completely avoided.
A Zener diode has higher circuit interruption voltage.
Long switch-off delay (6 to 9 times longer than without a protective circuit).
A Zener diode switches off quicker than a diode circuit
F-2


Wiring of AC-operated coils

AC-operated coils are wired with varistors or RC elements as illustrated in the figure.
1
With varistor
With RC element
A circuit with varistors has the following properties:

The amplitude of the switching overvoltage is limited but not dampened.
The gradient of the overvoltage remains the same.
The switch-off delay is short.
A circuit with RC elements has the following properties:
The amplitude and gradient of the switching overvoltage are reduced.
The switch-off delay is short.

F-3

F-4

Glossary
Aggregate current
The sum of the currents of all the output channels of a digital output module.
AUX1 bus
Power modules permit you to connect additional potential (up to 230 VAC), which you can
apply by means of the AUX(iliary) bus. You can set the AUX(iliary) bus individually:
As a protective conductor bar
Additionally required voltage
Backplane bus
The backplane bus is a serial data bus via which the IM151-1 interface communicates with
the electronic modules/motor starters, supplying them with the required voltage. The
connection between the individual modules is established by means of the terminal modules.
Bus
A common transfer route connecting all notes and having two defined ends.
In the case of the ET 200, the bus is a two-wire or fiber-optic cable.
Bus connector
A physical connection between the bus nodes and the bus line.
Chassis ground
Chassis ground refers to all the interconnected inactive parts of a piece of equipment that,
even in the event of a fault, cannot carry voltage that is dangerous to the touch.
Configuration
The systematic arrangement of the different ET 200S modules (setup).
Connecting to common potential

The opening of a new potential group by a power module. This permits the individual
grouping of the sensor and load supplies.

Glossary-1
Glossary
Device names
Before an IO device can be addressed by an IO controller, it must have a device name. This
procedure was selected for PROFINET because names are easier to handle than complex
IP addresses.
Assignment of a device name for a concrete IO device can be compared with the setting of
the PROFIBUS address for a DP slave.
An IO device does not have a device name upon delivery. An IO device can only be
addressed by an IO controller - i.e., for transferring configuration data (including the IP
address) during startup or for user data exchange during cyclic operation - after it has been
assigned a device name with the programming device/PC.
Diagnostics
Diagnostics involves the identification, localization, classification, display, and further
evaluation of errors, faults, and messages.
Diagnostics includes monitoring functions that run automatically while the system is in
operation. This increases the availability of systems by reducing setup times and downtimes.
Direct starter
A direct starter is a motor starter that switches a motor on or off directly. It consists of a
circuit breaker and a contactor.
Distributed IO systems
These are input/output units that are not located in the base unit; instead, they are
distributed at some distance from the CPU.
The following are examples of such units:
ET 200M, ET 200X, ET 200L, ET 200S DP/AS-i Link
S5-95U with PROFIBUS DP slave interface
Other DP slaves from either Siemens or other vendors
The distributed IO systems are connected to the DP master by means of PROFIBUS DP.
DP master
A master that complies with the standard IEC 61784-1:2002 Ed1 CP 3/1
is known as a DP master.
DP slave
A slave running on the PROFIBUS on the basis of the PROFIBUS DP protocol in
accordance with IEC 61784-1:2002 Ed1 CP 3/1 is known as a DP slave.
DP standard
The DP standard is the bus protocol of the ET 200 distributed IO system in accordance with
IEC 61784-1:2002 Ed1 CP 3/1.
Glossary-2

Glossary
Equipotential bonding
Electrical connection (equipotential bonding conductor) that brings the exposed conductive
parts of electrical equipment and other conductive parts to the same or approximately the
same potential in order to prevent troublesome or dangerous voltages arising between these
parts.
ET 200
The ET 200 distributed IO system with the PROFIBUS DP protocol enables distributed IO
devices to be connected to a CPU or an appropriate DP master. A feature of the ET 200 is
its fast response times, since only a small amount of data (bytes) is transferred.
The ET 200 is based on IEC 61784-1:2002 Ed1 CP 3/1.
The ET 200 works on the master/slave principle. Examples of DP masters are the IM308-C
master interface or the CPU 315-2 DP.
DP slaves can be the distributed IO devices ET 200M, ET 200X, ET 200L, or ET 200S or DP
slaves from Siemens or other vendors.
FREEZE
This is a control command of the DP master to a group of DP slaves.
When a DP slave receives the FREEZE control command, it freezes the current status of the
inputs and transfers them cyclically to the DP master.
After each subsequent FREEZE control command, the DP slave freezes the status of the
inputs again.
The input data is not transferred from the DP slave to the DP master again cyclically until the
DP master sends the UNFREEZE control command.
Ground
The conductive mass of earth, the electrical potential of which is equivalent to zero. In the
vicinity of grounding electrodes, the potential may not be zero. The term "reference ground"
is often used here.
Grounding
Grounding means connecting an electrically conductive part to a grounding electrode by
means of a grounding system.
GSD file
The properties of a PROFINET device are described in a GSD (General Station Descriptor)
file that contains all required information for configuration.
As with PROFIBUS, you can link a PROFINET device in STEP 7 by means of a GSD file.
In PROFINET IO, the GSD file is always in XML format. The structure of the GSD file
corresponds to ISO 15734, the worldwide standard for device descriptions.
In PROFIBUS, the GSD file is in ASCII format (as defined in IEC 61784-1:2002 Ed1 CP 3/1).

Glossary-3
Glossary
Hot swapping
This is the removal and insertion of modules during the operation of the ET 200S.
Isolated
In the case of isolated input/output modules, the reference potentials of the control and load
circuit are galvanically isolated - for example, by means of optical isolators, relays, or
transformers. Input/output circuits can be grouped.
MAC address
Each PROFINET device has a factory-assigned worldwide unique device identification. This
6-byte device identification is the MAC address.
The MAC address consists of:
3-byte manufacturer ID
3-byte device ID (serial number)
As a rule, the MAC address can be read on the front of the device,
e. g.: 08-00-06-6B-80-C0
Master
When it has a token, a master can send data to and request data from other nodes
(= active participants). Examples of DP masters are the CPU 315-2 DP or the IM308-C.
Motor starter (MS)

Motor starter is the generic term for direct and reversing starters. The startup and
direction of rotation of a motor are determined by motor starters.
Node
A device that can send, receive, or repeat data on the bus
for example, a DP master, DP slave, or RS 485 repeater.
Non-isolated
In the case of non-isolated input/output modules, the reference potentials of the control and
load circuits are electrically connected.
Parameter assignment is the transfer of slave parameters from the DP master to the DP
slave.
PELV
Protective Extra Low Voltage = extra low voltage with safe isolation
Glossary-4

Glossary
Power buses (P1/ P2)

Two internal buses (P1 and P2) that supply the electronic modules with voltage. The power
buses are fed by the power module and connected by means of the terminal modules.
Prewiring
The wiring of the terminal modules before the electronic modules are inserted.
Process image
The process image is a component of the system memory of the DP master. The signal
states of the input modules are transferred to the process-image input area at the beginning
of the cyclic program. At the end of the cyclic program, the values of the process-image
output area are transferred to the DP slave as the signal states.
PROFIBUS
PROcess FIeld BUS, process field bus standard specified in IEC 61784-1:2002 Ed1 CP 3/1.
It defines functional, electrical, and mechanical properties for a bit-serial field bus system.
PROFIBUS is available with the protocols DP (which stands for distributed peripherals, that
is, distributed or remote IO), FMS (which stands for field bus message specification),
PA (= process automation), or TF (= technological functions).
PROFIBUS address
Each bus node must receive a PROFIBUS address to identify it uniquely on the PROFIBUS.
The PC/programming device has the PROFIBUS address "0".
The PROFIBUS addresses 1 to 125 are permitted for the ET 200S distributed IO system.
PROFINET
Within the context of Totally Integrated Automation (TIA), PROFINET is the systematic
development of the following systems:
PROFIBUS DP, the established field bus
Industrial Ethernet, the communication bus for the cell level
Experiences from both systems have been and are being integrated in PROFINET.
PROFINET as the Ethernet-based automation standard of PROFIBUS International (formerly
PROFIBUS Nutzerorganisation e.V.) defines a cross-vendor communication, automation,
and engineering model.

Glossary-5
Glossary
PROFINET component
A PROFINET component includes all data of the hardware configuration, the parameters of
the modules, and the associated user program. The PROFINET component comprises the
following elements:
Technological function
The (optional) technological (software) function includes the interface to other PROFINET
components as interconnectable inputs and outputs.
Device
The device represents the physical automation device or field device, including the IO,
sensors and actuators, mechanical system, and device firmware.
PROFINET device
A PROFINET device always has at least one Industrial Ethernet connection. In addition, a
PROFINET device can also have a PROFIBUS connection and even act as a master with
proxy functionality. In exceptional cases, a PROFINET device can also have several
PROFIBUS connections (e. g. CP 5614).
PROFINET IO
Within the context of PROFINET, PROFINET IO is a communication concept for
implementing modular, distributed applications.
With PROFINET IO, you can create automation solutions using the trusted and familiar
methods of PROFIBUS.
PROFINET IO is implemented with the PROFINET standard for automation devices on the
one hand and the STEP 7 engineering tool on the other hand.
This means that you have the same application layer in STEP 7 - regardless of whether you
configure PROFINET devices or PROFIBUS devices. The programming of your user
program is identical for PROFINET IO and PROFIBUS DP when you use the blocks and
system status lists expanded for PROFINET IO.
PROFINET IO controller
Device by means of which connected IO devices are addressed. This means: that the IO
controller exchanges input and output signals with assigned field devices. The IO controller
is often the controller in which the automation program is executed.
PROFINET IO device
Distributed field device assigned to one of the IO controllers
(e.g. remote IO, valve terminals, frequency converters, or switches).
Programmable controller
An automation system is a programmable logic controller consisting of at least one CPU,
various input and output modules, and operator control and monitoring devices.
Glossary-6

Glossary
Provider-consumer principle
Unlike PROFIBUS DP, both partners on PROFINET IO are independent providers for
transmission of data.
Real time
Real time means that a system processes external events within a defined time.
Determinism means that a system responds in a predictable (deterministic) manner.
Both requirements are important for industrial networks. PROFINET satisfies these
requirements. Thus, as a deterministic real-time network, PROFINET is designed as follows:
The transfer of time-critical data between different stations via a network is guaranteed
within a defined interval of time.
To this end, PROFINET has an optimized communication channel for real-time
communication: Real time (RT).
The time of transfer can be accurately determined.
It is ensured that seamless communication can take place in the same network by means
of other standard protocols, such as industrial communication for PG/PC.
Reference data companions

A value is assigned to every peripheral module in the input or output data telegram which
gives evidence about the quality of this reference date. For example outputs of a module can
thus be switched off without influencing other modules.
Reference potential
Potential from which the voltages of the circuits involved can be observed and/or measured.
Reversing starter
A reversing starter is a motor starter that determines the direction of rotation of a motor. It
consists of a circuit breaker and two contactors.
Segment
The bus line between two terminating resistors forms a segment. A segment contains 0 to 32
bus nodes. Segments can be interconnected by means of RS 485 repeaters.
SELV
Safety Extra Low Voltage
Slave
A slave can only exchange data with a master when requested by it to do so. By slaves we
mean, for example, all DP slaves such as ET 200X, ET 200M, ET 200S, etc.

Glossary-7
Glossary
SNMP
SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) is the standardized protocol for performing
diagnostics and assigning parameters to the Ethernet network infrastructure.
In the office setting and in automation engineering, devices from many different vendors
support SNMP on the Ethernet.
SNMP-based applications can be operated on the same network in parallel to applications
with PROFINET.
The scope of supported functions depends on the device type. For example, a switch has
more function than a CP 1616.
SSI
The positional information is transferred synchronously on the basis of the SSI (synchronous
serial interface) protocol. The SSI protocol is used with absolute encoders.
Stationary wiring
All the wiring-carrying elements (terminal modules) are mounted on a rail. The power and
electronic modules are inserted in the terminal modules.
Switch
PROFIBUS is a linear network. The communication nodes are linked by means of a passive
cable the bus.
By contrast, Industrial Ethernet consists of point-to-point connections: each communication
node is directly connected to exactly one communication node.
If a communication node is linked to several communication nodes, this communication node
is connected to the port of an active network component the switch. Additional
communication nodes (including switches) can now be connected to the other ports of the
switch. The connection between a communication node and the switch remains a
point-to-point connection.
A switch also has the task of regenerating and distributing received signals. The switch
"learns" the Ethernet address(es) of a connected PROFINET device or additional switches
and only forwards those signals that are intended for the connected PROFINET device or
switch.
A switch has a specific number of ports. You connect at most one PROFINET device or
additional switch to each port.
SYNC
This is a control command of the DP master to a group of DP slaves.
By means of the SYNC control command, the DP master causes the DP slave to freeze the
current statuses of the outputs. With the subsequent frames, the DP slave stores the output
data, but the statuses of the outputs remain unchanged.
After each new SYNC control command, the DP slave sets the outputs that it has stored as
output data. The outputs are not cyclically updated again until the DP master sends the
UNSYNC control command.
Glossary-8

Glossary
Technological modules
Modules that are equipped with technological functions, such as counting pulses,
positioning, and controlling stepping motor power units.
Terminating module
The ET 200S distributed IO system is completed by the terminating module. If you have not
inserted a terminating module, the ET 200S is not ready for operation.
Transmission rate
The transmission rate of a data transfer is measured in bits transmitted per second.
In the case of the ET 200S, transmission rates of 9.6 kbps to 12 Mbps are possible.
Voltage group
A group of electronic modules supplied by a power module.

Glossary-9
Glossary
Glossary-10

Index
1
1COUNT 24V/100kHz, 6-18
Error types, 6-46
1COUNT 5V/500kHz, 6-19
Error types, 6-46
1POS INC/Analog
Error types, 6-47
1POS INC/Digital
Error types, 6-47
1POS INC/Digital, 1POS SSI/Digital, 1POS
INC/Analog, 1POS SSI/Analog, 6-23
1POS SSI/Analog
Error types, 6-47
1POS SSI/Digital
Error types, 6-47
1SI 3964/ASCII
Error types, 6-48
1SI 3964/ASCII and 1SI Modbus/USS serial
interface modules, 6-25
1SI Modbus/USS
Error types, 6-48
1SSI, 6-20
Error types, 6-45
1STEP 5V/204kHz, 6-21
Error types, 6-46
2
24 VDC supply, 5-2
2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A Standard digital electronic
module
Block diagram, 11-51
Features, 11-49
Pin assignment, 11-49
Technical specifications, 11-52
2PULSE, 6-22
Error types, 6-47
2RO NO 24-120 VDC/5 A, 24-230 VAC/5 A digital

electronic module, 11-84

Switching capacity and lifetime of the
contacts, 11-89
4
4 IQ-SENSE, 6-26, 13-1
Error types, 6-48
4-wire measuring transducer, 12-17
A
Address area, 6-4
Address scope, 6-60
Address space, 3-45, C-1
Analog electronic module 2AI I 2/4WIRE High
Feature, 12-65
Features, 12-65
Analog electronic module 2AI I 2WIRE High
Speed, 12-57
Features, 12-57
Analog electronic module 2AI I 2WIRE
Standard, 12-50, 12-54
Features, 12-50
Analog electronic module 2AI I 4WIRE High
Speed, 12-69
Features, 12-69
Index-1
Index
Analog electronic module 2AI I 4WIRE
Standard, 12-61
Features, 12-61
Analog electronic module 2AI RTD High
Feature, 12-77
Analog electronic module 2AI RTD Standard, 12-73
Features, 12-73
Analog electronic module 2AI TC High Feature,
12-91
Features, 12-91
Analog electronic module 2AI TC Standard, 12-85
Features, 12-85
Analog electronic module 2AI U High Feature,
12-41
Features, 12-41
Analog electronic module 2AI U High Speed, 12-46
Features, 12-46
Analog electronic module 2AI U Standard, 12-37
Features, 12-37
Analog electronic module 2AO I High Feature, 12106
Features, 12-106
Analog electronic module 2AO I Standard, 12-102
Features, 12-102
Index-2
Analog electronic module 2AO U High Feature,

12-99
Features, 12-99
Analog electronic module 2AO U Standard, 12-95
Features, 12-95
Analog electronic module 4AI I 2WIRE ST
Features, 12-54
Analog electronic modules, 6-17, 12-1
Analog input modules, 12-14
Error types, 6-44
Analog output modules, 12-14
Error types, 6-44
Analog output modules in SIMATIC S7 format,
12-12
Analog value representation, 12-1, 12-13
for resistance thermometers, 12-6, 12-7, 12-8
for thermocouples, 12-9, 12-10, 12-11, 12-12
Applications, 3-6, 3-9
Approval
FM, 7-3
Marine type, 7-4
Assigning a device name, 5-30
AUX(iliary) bus (AUX 1), 3-4
B
Backplane bus
Interruption, 6-72
Behavior of the analog modules, 12-24
during operation, 12-24
in the event of problems, 12-24
Brief instructions on commissioning
ET 200S on PROFINET IO, 2-10
ET 200S on the PROFIBUS DP, 2-1
Burst pulses, 7-6
Bus cable, 1-6
C
Calculation of the response time, D-4
CE
Certification, 7-1
Certification
CE, 7-1

Index
Certifications and approvals
Standards, 7-1
Changes
in the manual, iii
Changes in the manual, iii
Changing the PROFIBUS address, 4-18
Channel diagnostics, 6-68
Channel-specific diagnostics, 6-40
Climatic environmental conditions, 7-8
Color identification labeling, 1-6
Commissioning, 6-1
PROFIBUS DP, 6-10
PROFINET IO, 6-61
Requirements, 6-62
Commissioning the ET 200S, 6-62
Compensation of the reference junction
temperature, 12-18
Components and protective measures, 5-4
Configuration, 6-59
ET 200S, 6-59
Configuration examples for ET 200S, 3-1
Configuration examples of terminal modules for
electronic modules, 3-20
Configuration examples of terminal modules for
power modules, 3-16
Configuration options for the interface modules, 3-6
Connecting cable shields, 5-13
Connecting measuring sensors to analog
inputs, 12-14
Connecting PROFIBUS DP, 5-18, 5-23
Connecting the supply voltage, 5-18, 5-23
Connecting to common potential, 3-4
Connection, 12-13, 12-18
Control interface, 3-36
Conversion time, D-8
Cycle time, D-7, D-8
D
Definition
Station status, 6-34
Degree of protection IP 20, 7-11
Diagnostics, 6-1, 6-68
After IO controller STOP, 6-75
After recovery of IO device, 6-75
Bus interruption, 6-72
Diagnostics readout, 6-29, 6-30
Diagnostics using LED display, 6-63
Dielectric test, 7-11
Digital electronic module 2DI 120 VAC

Standard, 11-41
Features, 11-41
Digital electronic module 2DI 230 VAC
Standard, 11-45
Features, 11-45
Digital electronic module 2DI 24 VDC High
Feature, 11-21
Digital electronic module 2DI 24 VDC Standard,
11-9
Digital electronic module 2DI 24-48 VUC High
Feature, 11-29
Features, 11-29
Digital electronic module 2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A High
Feature, 11-49, 11-59
Features, 11-59
Digital electronic module 2DO 24 VDC/2 A High
Feature, 11-74
Features, 11-74
Digital electronic module 2DO 24 VDC/2 A
Standard, 11-64
Features, 11-64
Digital electronic module 2DO 24-230 VAC, 11-79
Features, 11-79
Index-3
Index
Digital electronic module 2RO NO/NC
24-48 VDC/5 A, 24-230 VAC/5 A, 11-90
Switching capacity and lifetime of the
contacts, 11-94
Digital electronic module 4DI 24 VDC High
Feature, 11-25
Digital electronic module 4DI 24 VDC Standard,
11-13
Digital electronic module 4DI 24 VDC/SRC
Standard
Digital electronic module 4DI 24<SP>VDC/SRC
Standard, 11-17
Digital electronic module 4DI NAMUR, 11-33
Features, 11-33
Digital electronic module 4DO 24 VDC/0.5 A High
Feature, 11-54
Digital electronic module 4DO 24 VDC/0.5 A
Standard
Features, 11-54
Digital electronic module 4DO 24 VDC/2 A
Standard, 11-69
Features, 11-69
Digital electronic modules, 6-16
Error types, 6-42
Digital Electronic Modules, 11-1
Digital input modules, 6-4, 6-60
Digital output modules, 6-4, 6-60
Index-4
Dimensions
Terminal modules (Fast Connect) with a power
module inserted, B-7
Terminal modules (Fast Connect) with an
electronic module inserted, B-7
Terminal modules with a power module
inserted, B-3
Terminal modules with an electronic module
inserted, B-3
Terminating module, B-10
Discretely modular system, 3-1
Distributed I/O System Range of Application, 1-1
DP master, 1-1
DP slave, 1-1
E
Electromagnetic compatibility, 7-6
Electronic module, 1-6, 3-9, 5-26
Replacing, 5-27
Type change, 5-26
Electronic modules, 3-12, 5-25, 5-26, 5-27, 5-28,
9-1
Identifying, 5-25
Inserting, 5-25
Removing, 5-26
Removing and inserting during operation, 5-28
Electrostatic discharge, 7-6
EMC, 7-6
Emergency stop devices, 5-1
Emission of radio interference, 7-7
ET 200S, 5-3, 5-5, 6-1, 6-10, 6-61
Commissioning, 6-10
Configuration, 6-59
Configuring, 6-1
Features and benefits, 1-9
Overall configuration, 5-5
with grounded reference potential, 5-3
ET 200S components, 1-6
ET 200S distributed I/O system
Area of application, 1-4
Definition, 1-4
Terminal modules and electronic modules, 1-4
View, 1-5
ET 200S FC frequency converter
Variations in technical specifications, 7-12
Example configuration of a fiber-optic cable network
with IM151-1 FO STANDARD, 3-8
Example of a project design, 6-8

Index
F
Failure of the load voltage, 6-75
Fault types
Channel-specific diagnostics, 6-40
FB 192, 6-30
Feedback interface, 3-36
Fiber-optic cable
Bending radius, 5-22
Order number, A-7
Fiber-optic duplex cable, 1-6
FM
Approval, 7-3
Frequency converter
Variations in technical specifications, 7-12
Fundamentals, 12-13
G
General rules, 5-1
General technical specifications, 7-1
Grounded incoming supply, 5-3
GSD file, 6-2, 6-59
Guide
to the manual, v
H
Heat dissipation, 4-3
I
Identification data, 3-38
Identifier-related diagnostics, 6-36
IEC 204, 5-1
IEC 61131, 7-4
IEC 61784-1
2002 Ed1 CP 3/1, 1-2
IM151-1 BASIC interface module
Parameters, 8-1
IM151-1 BASIC/ IM151-1 STANDARD/ IM151-1 FO
STANDARD/ IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE, 6-14
Status and error displays, 6-14
IM151-1 FO STANDARD
Plug adapters, 5-21
IM151-1 interface module, 1-6
IM151-1 STANDARD interface module, 8-12, 8-13
Terminal assignment, 8-13

IM151-3 PN
Micro Memory Card, 8-28
SNMP, 8-28
Updating firmware, 8-30
IM151-3 PN interface module, 1-6, 8-24, 8-26
Parameters, 8-3
Installation, 4-1
Installation rules, 4-1
Installing simplex connectors, 5-21
Integrating the GSD file in SIMATIC S5, 6-3
Integrating the GSD file in SIMATIC S7, 6-3
Integrating the GSD file in the configuration
software, 6-60
Interface module, 3-6
Interface module IM151-1 BASIC, 8-9
Interface module IM151-1 FO STANDARD, 8-17
Block diagram, 8-17
Interface module IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE, 8-20,
8-21
Interface module IM151-3 PN, 8-26
Block diagram, 8-26
Interface modules, 8-1
Interface modules and applications, 3-6
interface modules IM151-1 STANDARD and
IM151-1 FO STANDARD
Parameters, 8-2
Interference frequency suppression, 12-36
IO controller STOP
Diagnostics afterwards, 6-75
Isolated measuring sensors, 12-15
Isolation, 5-6
L
Labeling sheet, 1-6
Length of the diagnostics frame, 6-29
Life of a SIMATIC Micro Memory Card, 8-28
Lines for analog signals, 12-14
Load voltage
Failure, 6-75
Index-5
Index
M
Manual
Purpose, iii
Manuals
Other, v
Manufacturer ID, 6-36
Marine type
Approval, 7-4
Marking for Australia, 7-4
Master PROFIBUS address, 6-35
Maximum configuration, 3-43
Measured-value resolution, 12-3
Measuring ranges with SIMATIC S7, 12-2
Measuring sensors, 12-13
Mechanical environmental conditions, 7-9
Minimum clearances, 4-3
Minimum clearances for mounting, wiring, and heat
dissipation, B-1
Shield connection, B-10
Module status, 6-37
Motor starter, 6-60
Motor starters, 6-4
Mounting, 4-4, 4-11, 4-13, 4-15
Color-coding plates, 4-15
Interface module, 4-4
Shield connection, 4-13
Slot number plates, 4-15
Terminating module, 4-11
Mounting dimensions, 4-2
Mounting position, 4-1
Mounting rail, 1-6, 4-2
Mounting TM-E, 4-6
TM-P terminal modules, 4-6
N
No grouping, 6-9
Non-isolated measuring sensors, 12-16
O
Option handling, 3-30
Features, 3-30
Parameter assignment, 3-34
Principle of operation, 3-30
Requirements, 3-32
Options, 6-30, 6-68
Index-6
Order numbers, A-1

Analog electronic modules, A-4
Digital electronic modules, A-3
ET 200 manual in SIMATIC S5, A-11
ET 200S accessories, A-6
Interface module, A-1
Network components for ET 200S, A-7
Power modules, A-3
RESERVE modules, A-5
STEP 7 and SIMATIC S7 manuals, A-9, A-10
Technical guide to PROFIBUS DP with SIMATIC
S7 and STEP 7, A-11
Technology modules, A-5
Terminal modules, A-2
Order numbers for brief guide, 2-11
Order numbers for example configuration
on the PROFIBUS DP, 2-2
Output ranges, 12-12
P
Parameter assignment of the reference
junction, 12-21
Parameter length in bytes, 3-43
Parameters, 8-1
for analog electronic modules, 12-26
for digital electronic modules, 11-1
for digital input modules, 11-1
for digital output modules, 11-4
For power modules, 10-1
IM151-3 PN interface module, 8-3
interface modules IM151-1 STANDARD and
IM151-1 FO STANDARD, 8-2
PII, 3-36
PIQ, 3-36
Placing and Connecting to Common Potential, 3-4
Placing power modules and connecting them to
common potential, 3-4
Plug adapters
for IM151-1 FO STANDARD, 5-21
Order number, A-7
PM-E 24 to 48 VDC power module, 10-5
Block diagram, 10-7
PM-E 24 to 48 VDC/24 to 230 VAC power
module, 10-8
Features, 10-8

Index
PM-E 24 VDC power module, 10-2
Block diagram, 10-3
Features, 10-2
Pollution degree, 7-11
Power module, 1-6
Power module PM-E 24-28 VDC
Features, 10-5
Power modules, 3-11, 6-15, 9-1
Error types, 6-42
Parameters, 10-1
Power modules and electronic modules, 3-15
Power supply, 3-4
PROFIBUS DP, 1-1, 1-2
Devices, 1-2
PROFIBUS DP network
Structure, 1-2
PROFIBUS standard, 7-4
PROFINET IO
Network structure, 1-3
Project design, 6-1
ET 200S, 6-1
Protection against outside electrical influences, 5-2
Protection class, 7-11
Pulse-shaped interferences, 7-6
R
Rated voltage, 7-11
Reading out the diagnostics, 6-68
Recovery of IO device
Diagnostics afterwards, 6-75
Redundancy, 3-41
Regulations, 5-1
Removing and inserting
Electronic modules, 5-28
Repetitive shock, 7-10
Replacement of terminal box
On the terminal module, 4-9
Required level of knowledge, iii
RESERVE
RESERVE modules, 14-1
Use of, 3-33
Response time, D-9
Response Times, D-1
analog output modules, D-8
digital input modules, D-6
digital output modules, D-7
Technological modules, D-10
Rules for fiber-optic cable network, 3-8

S
Safety isolation, 5-3
Scope
of the manual, iii
Self-coding, 5-25
Setting the PROFIBUS address, 4-17
Settling time, D-9
SFC 13, 6-31
Shield connection, 1-6, 12-26
Shock, 7-10
Applicable SIMATIC Micro Memory Cards, 8-29
Service life, 8-28
Simplex connector
Order number, A-7
Sinusoidal interferences, 7-7
Slave diagnostic, 6-29
Slave diagnostics, 6-32
Slot number plates, 1-6
Smoothing, 12-35
Commissioning, 6-61
Commissioning PROFIBUS DP, 6-10
Specific application, 5-1
Standards, certifications, and approvals, 7-1
Startup, 6-10, 6-61
Startup of the ET 200S, 6-11, 6-62
Startup of the system after certain events, 5-1
Station status 1
Structure, 6-34
Station status 2
Structure, 6-35
Station status 3
Structure, 6-35
Station statuses 1 to 3, 6-34
IM151-1 BASIC/IM151-1 STANDARD/IM151-1
FO STANDARD/IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE, 6-14
IM151-3 PN, 6-64
STEP 5 user program, 6-30
STEP 7, 6-68
STEP 7 user program, 6-31
Storage conditions, 7-8
Structure, 6-32
T
Climatic environmental conditions, 7-8
Electromagnetic compatibility, 7-6
Mechanical environmental conditions, 7-8
Index-7
Index
Terminal box on the terminal module
Replacing, 4-9
Terminal module, 1-6, 5-7, 5-8, 5-9
Wired with Fast Connect, 5-9
Wiring with screw terminals, 5-7
Wiring with spring terminals, 5-8
Terminal module TM-E15S24-01, TM-E15C24-01,
and TM-E15N24-01, 9-20
Block diagram, 9-21
Features, 9-20
Terminal module TM-E15S24-AT and
TM-E15C24-AT, 9-24
Block diagram, 9-25
Features, 9-24
Terminal module TM-E30S46-A1 and
TM-E30C46-A1, 9-29
Features, 9-10, 9-29
Pin assignment, 9-11, 9-30
Terminal module TM-PF30S47-F1, 9-13
Block diagram, 9-14
Features, 9-13
Terminal modules, 5-10, 5-13, 9-1, 9-4
Wired with Fast Connect, 5-10
Wiring for digital, analog, and technology
modules, 5-13
Wiring for power modules, 5-13
Terminal modules and electronic modules, 3-12,
9-1
Terminal modules and power modules, 3-11, 9-1
Terminal modules TM-E15S23-01, TM-E15C23-01,
and TM-E15N23-01, 9-22
Block diagram, 9-23
Features, 9-22
Terminal modules TM-E15S24-A1, TM-E15C24-A1,
and TM-E15N24-A1, 9-18
Features, 9-18, 9-19
Terminal modules TM-E15S26-A1, TM-E15C26-A1,
and TM-E15N26-A1, 9-15
Block diagram, 9-17
Features, 9-15
Index-8
Terminal modules TM-P15S22-01, TM-P15C22-01,

and TM-P15N22-01, 9-8
Block diagram, 9-9
Features, 9-8
Pin assignment, 9-8
Terminal modules TM-P15S23-A0, TM-P15C23-A0,
and TM-P15N23-A0, 9-6
Block diagram, 9-7
Features, 9-6
Terminal modules TM-P15S23-A1, TM-P15C23-A1,
and TM-P15N23-A1, 9-4
Block diagram, 9-5
Features, 9-4
Pin assignment, 9-4
Terminal modules TM-P30S44-A0 and
TM-P30C44-A0, 9-10
Terminating module, 1-6
Test voltage, 7-11
Thermocouples, 12-18
TM-E30S44-01 and TM-E30C44-01 terminal
modules, 9-27
Block diagram, 9-12, 9-28, 9-31
Features, 9-27
Technical specifications, 9-12, 9-28, 9-31
Transport conditions, 7-8
Type-coded, 5-25
U
Universal terminal modules TM-E15S26-A1,
TM-E15C26-A1, and TM-E15N26-A1, 9-15
Use in industrial environment, 7-4
Use in residential areas, 7-5
V
Vibrations, 7-10
Voltage group, 3-4
Voltage ratios
For ET 200S with IM151-1, 5-6

Index
W
Wiring, 5-17, 5-20
IM151-1 BASIC interface module, 5-17
IM151-1 FO STANDARD interface module, 5-20
IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE interface module,
5-17
IM151-1 STANDARD interface module, 5-17
Wiring and assembling, 5-1
Wiring rules, 5-7
Wiring terminal modules, 5-12
Y
Y switching, 3-41

Index-9
Index
Index-10

s
SIMATIC
Product Information
01/2005
Use of subassemblies/modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area
Language
Titel
Page
Deutsch
Einsatz der Baugruppen/Module im explosionsgeschtzten Bereich Zone 2
English
Use of subassemblies/modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area
Franais
Utilisation des modules / coupleurs dans la zone risque d'explosion 2
Espaol
Aplicacin de los mdulos / tarjetas en reas con peligro de explosin, zona 2
Italiano
Impiego delle unit/moduli nell'area a pericolo di esplosione zona 2
11
Nederlands
Gebruik van de componenten/modulen in het explosief gebied zone 2
13
Dansk
Brug af komponenter/moduler i det eksplosionsfarlige omrde zone 2
15
Suomi
Rakenneryhmien/moduulien kytt rjhdysvaarannetuilla alueilla, vyhyke 2
17
Svenska
Anvndning av komponentgrupperna/modulerna i explosionsriskomrde zon 2
19
Portugus
Uso de grupos construtivos/mdulos em rea exposta ao perigo de exploso 2
21
/ , 2
23
Pouit konstruknch skupin / modul v prosted s nebezpem vbuchu Zna 2
25
Estnisch
Slmede/moodulite kasutamine plahvatusohtliku piirkonna tsoonis 2
27
Latviski
Ieru/moduu pielietojums sprdzienbstamas teritorijas zon 2
29
Konstrukcini grupi/moduli panaudojimas sprogioje 2 zonos aplinkoje
31
A fegysgek/modulok alkalmazsa a 2. zna robbansveszlyes krnyezetben
33
Malti
Tqegid tal-Komponenti / Modules fi-ona 2, fejn hemm Riskju ta' Splujoni
35
Polski
Zastosowanie grup konstrukcyjnych / moduw w 2 strefie zagroenia wybuchem
37
Slovensky
Pouitie kontruknch skupn / modulov v prostred s nebezpeenstvom vbuchu zny 2
39
Slovensko
Uporaba sklopov/modulov v eksplozivno ogroenem obmoju cone 2
41
Patlama tehlikesi olan Alan 2 blgesinde nite gruplarnn/modllerin kullanlmas
43
esky
Lietuvika
Magya
Trke
Copyright Siemens AG 2005

Siemens Aktiengesellschaft
A5E00352937-02
Product Information on the Use of subassemblies/modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area

A5E00352937-02
Deutsch
Einsatz der Baugruppen/Module im explosionsgefhrdeten Bereich Zone 2

Zone 2
Explosionsgefhrdete Bereiche werden in Zonen eingeteilt. Die Zonen werden
nach der Wahrscheinlichkeit des Vorhandenseins einer explosionsfhigen
Atmosphre unterschieden.
Zone
Explosionsgefahr
Beispiel
explosive Gasatmosphre tritt

nur selten und kurzzeitig auf
Bereiche um Flanschverbindungen mit

Flachdichtungen bei Rohrleitungen in
geschlossenen Rumen
sicherer
Bereich
nein
x auerhalb der Zone 2

x Standardanwendungen von dezentraler
Peripherie
Nachfolgend finden Sie wichtige Hinweise fr die Installation der

Baugruppen/Module im explosionsgefhrdeten Bereich.
Weitere Informationen
Weitere Informationen zu den Baugruppen/Modulen finden Sie im dazugehrigen
Handbuch.
Fertigungsort / Zulassung
II 3 G
EEx nA II T3 .. T6
nach EN 50021 : 1999
Prfnummer: siehe Tabelle

Fertigungsort
Siemens AG, Bereich A&D
Werner-von-Siemens-Strae 50
92224 Amberg
Germany

stliche Rheinbrckenstr. 50
76187 Karlsruhe
Germany
Baugruppen/Module
Prfnummer
ET 200S
ET 200S Fehlersichere Module
KEMA 01
ATEX 1238X
S7-300
ET 200M
Buskopplung DP/PA
Diagnoserepeater
S7-300 Fehlersichere Baugruppen
KEMA 02
ATEX 1096X
S7-400
KEMA 03
ATEX 1125X
S7-300 CP
TS Adapter II
KEMA 03
ATEX 1228X
SIMATIC NET
KEMA 03
ATEX 1226X
Hinweis
Baugruppen/Module mit der Zulassung
II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 drfen nur in
SIMATIC-Systemen der Gertekategorie 3 eingesetzt werden.
A5E00352937-02
Deutsch
Instandhaltung
Fr eine Reparatur mssen die betroffene Baugruppen/Module an den
Fertigungsort geschickt werden. Nur dort darf die Reparatur durchgefhrt werden.
Besondere Bedingungen
1. Baugruppen/Module mssen in einen Schaltschrank oder ein metallisches
Gehuse eingebaut werden. Diese mssen mindestens die Schutzart IP 54
(nach EN 60529) gewhrleisten. Dabei sind die Umgebungsbedingungen zu
bercksichtigen, in denen das Gert installiert wird. Fr das Gehuse muss
eine Herstellererklrung fr Zone 2 vorliegen (gem EN 50021).
2. Wenn am Kabel bzw. an der Kabeleinfhrung dieses Gehuses unter Betriebsbedingungen eine Temperatur > 70 C erreicht wird oder wenn unter Betriebsbedingungen die Temperatur an der Aderverzweigung > 80 C sein kann,
mssen die Temperatureigenschaften der Kabel mit den tatschlich
gemessenen Temperaturen bereinstimmen.
3. Die eingesetzten Kabeleinfhrungen mssen der geforderten IP-Schutzart und
dem Abschnitt 7.2 (gem EN 50021) entsprechen.
4. Alle Gerte, einschlielich Schalter etc., die an den Ein- und Ausgngen von
SIMATIC-Systemen angeschlossen werden, mssen fr den Explosionsschutz
Typ EEx nA oder EEx nC genehmigt sein.
5. Es mssen Manahmen getroffen werden, dass die Nennspannung durch
Transienten um nicht mehr als 40 % berschritten werden kann.
6. Umgebungstemperaturbereich: 0 C bis 60 C
7. Innerhalb des Gehuses ist an einem nach dem ffnen gut sichtbaren Platz ein
Schild mit folgender Warnung anzubringen:
Warnung
Das Gehuse darf nur kurze Zeit geffnet werden, z. B. fr visuelle Diagnose.
Bettigen Sie dabei keine Schalter, ziehen oder stecken keine Baugruppen und
trennen keine elektrischen Leitungen (Steckverbindungen).
Diese Warnung kann unbercksichtigt bleiben, wenn bekannt ist, dass keine
explosionsgefhrdete Atmosphre herrscht.
Liste der zugelassenen Baugruppen/Module
Die Liste mit den zugelassenen Baugruppen/Module finden Sie im Internet:
http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/
unter der Beitrags-ID 13702947.

A5E00352937-02
English
Use of subassemblies/modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous

Area
Zone 2
Hazardous areas are divided up into zones. The zones are distinguished according
to the probability of the existence of an explosive atmosphere.
Zone
Explosion Hazard
Example
Explosive gas atmosphere

occurs only seldom and for a
short time
Areas around flange joints with flat

gaskets in pipes in enclosed spaces
Safe area
No
x Outside zone 2
x Standard distributed I/O applications
Below you will find important information on the installation of the

subassemblies/modules in a hazardous area.
Further Information
You will find further information on the subassemblies/modules in the
corresponding manual.
Production Location / Certification

II 3 G
EEx nA II T3 .. T6
to EN 50021 : 1999
Test number: see table below
Production Location
92224 Amberg
Germany

76187 Karlsruhe
Germany
Subassemblies/Modules
Test Number
ET-200S
ET 200S fault-tolerant modules
KEMA 01
ATEX 1238X
S7-300
ET-200M
DP/PA bus interface
Diagnostics repeater
S7-300 fault-tolerant modules
KEMA 02
ATEX 1096X
S7-400
KEMA 03
ATEX 1125X
S7-300 CP
TS Adapter II
KEMA 03
ATEX 1228X
SIMATIC NET
KEMA 03
ATEX 1226X
Note
Subassemblies/modules with
II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 certification can only be
used in SIMATIC systems rated as category 3 equipment.

A5E00352937-02
English
Maintenance
If repair is necessary, the affected subassemblies/modules must be sent to the
production location. Repairs can only be carried out there.
Special Conditions
1. Subassemblies/modules must be installed in a cabinet or metal housing. These
must comply with the IP 54 degree of protection as a minimum. The
environmental conditions under which the equipment is installed must be taken
into account. There must be a manufacturer's declaration for zone 2 available
for the housing (in accordance with EN 50021).
2. If a temperature of > 70 C is reached in the cable or at the cable entry of this
housing under operating conditions, or if a temperature of > 80 C can be
reached at the junction of the conductors under operating conditions, the
temperature-related properties of the cables must correspond to the
temperatures actually measured.
3. The cable entries used must comply with the required IP degree of protection
and Section 7.2 (in accordance with EN 50021).
4. All devices (including switches, etc.) that are connected to the inputs and
outputs of SIMATIC systems must be approved for EEx nA or EEx nC explosion
protection.
5. Steps must be taken to ensure that the rated voltage through transients cannot
be exceeded by more than 40 %.
6. Ambient temperature range: 0 C to 60 C
7. A sign containing the following warning must be put up inside the housing in an
easily visible position when the housing is opened:
Warning
The housing can only be opened for a short time (e.g. for visual diagnostics). If
you do this, do not operate any switches, remove or install any modules or
disconnect any electrical cables (plug-in connections).
You can disregard this warning if you know that the atmosphere is not hazardous
(i.e. there is no risk of explosion).
List of Approved Subassemblies/Modules

You will find the list of approved subassemblies/modules under the ID 13702947
on the Internet:
http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/.

A5E00352937-02
Franais
Utilisation des modules / coupleurs dans la zone

risque d'explosion 2
Zone 2
Les environnements risque d'explosion sont rpartis en zones. Les zones se
distinguent par la probabilit de prsence d'une atmosphre explosive.
Zone
Risque d'explosion
Exemple
Formation rare et brve d'une

atmosphre gazeuse explosive
Environnement de raccords joints plats

dans le cas de conduites dans des locaux
ferms
Zone sre
Non
x A l'extrieur de la zone 2
x Utilisation standard de priphrie
dcentralise
Vous trouverez ci-aprs des remarques importantes pour l'installation de la station

de priphrie dcentralise des modules / coupleurs dans la zone risque
d'explosion.
Informations complmentaires
Des informations complmentaires sur les modules / cartouches se trouvent dans
le manuel correspondant.
Lieu de fabrication / Homologation

II 3 G
EEx nA II T3 .. T6
Numro de contrle :
selon EN 50021 : 1999
voir tableau
Lieu de fabrication
Modules / coupleurs

ET 200S
Werner-von-Siemens-Strae 50 Modules scurit intrinsque
92224 Amberg
ET 200S
Germany
S7-300
ET 200M
Couplage de bus DP/PA
Rpteur de diagnostic
Modules scurit intrinsque
S7-300
76187 Karlsruhe
Germany
Numro de
contrle
KEMA 01
ATEX 1238X
KEMA 02
ATEX 1096X
S7-400
KEMA 03
ATEX 1125X
S7-300 CP
TS Adapter II
KEMA 03
ATEX 1228X
SIMATIC NET
KEMA 03
ATEX 1226X

A5E00352937-02
Franais
Nota
Les modules / coupleurs homologus
II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 ne peuvent
tre utiliss que dans des systmes SIMATIC de catgorie 3.
Entretien
Si une rparation est ncessaire, le module / coupleur concern doit tre expdi
au lieu de production. La rparation ne doit tre effectue qu'en ce lieu.
Conditions particulires
1. Les modules / coupleurs doivent tre installs dans une armoire ou un botier
mtallique. Ceux-ci doivent assurer au moins l'indice de protection IP 54. Il faut
alors tenir compte des conditions d'environnement dans lesquelles l'appareil est
install. Le botier doit faire lobjet dune dclaration de conformit du fabricant
pour la zone 2 (selon EN 50021).
2. Si dans les conditions dexploitation, une temprature > 70 C est atteinte au
niveau du cble ou de lentre du cble dans ce botier, ou bien si la
temprature au niveau de la drivation des conducteurs peut tre > 80 C, les
capacits de rsistance thermique des cbles doivent corespondre aux
tempratures effectivement mesures.
3. Les entres de cbles utilises doivent avoir le niveau de protection IP exig et
tre conformes au paragraphe 7.2 (selon EN 50021).
4. Tous les appareillages (y compris les interrupteurs, etc.) raccords aux entres
et sorties de systmes SIMATIC doivent tre homologus pour la protection
antidflagrante type EEx nA ou EEx nC.
5. Il faut prendre des mesures pour que la tension nominale ne puisse pas tre
dpasse de plus de 40% sous linfluence de transitoires.
6. Plage de temprature ambiante : 0 C 60 C
7. A lintrieur du botier, il faut placer, un endroit bien visible aprs ouverture,
une plaquette comportant lavertissement suivant :
Avertissement
Ouvir le botier le moins longtemps possible, par exemple pour effectuer un
diagnostic visuel. Ce faisant, nactionnez aucun commutateur, ne dconnectez
aucun module et ne dbanchez pas de cbles lectriques (connexions).
Le respect de cet avertissement nest pas impratif sil est certain que
lenvironnement ne prsente pas de risque dexplosion.
Liste des modules / coupleurs homologus
Vous trouverez sur Internet la liste des modules / coupleurs homologus :
rfrence ID 13702947.

A5E00352937-02
Espaol
Aplicacin de los mdulos / tarjetas en reas con

peligro de explosin, zona 2
Zona 2
Las reas con peligro de explosin se clasifican en zonas. Las zonas se
diferencian segn la probabilidad de la existencia de una atmsfera capaz de sufrir
una explosin.
Zona
2
Peligro de explosin
Ejemplo
La atmsfera explosiva de gas reas alrededor de uniones abridadas con juntas

slo se presenta rara vez y muy planas en tuberas en locales cerrados
brevemente
x fuera de la zona 2
rea segura no
x Aplicaciones estndar de la periferia

descentralizada
A continuacin encontrar importantes informaciones para la instalacin de los

mdulos / tarjetas en reas con peligro de explosin.
Otras informaciones
Encontrar otras informaciones relativas a los mdulos / tarjetas en el Manual
correspondiente.
Lugar de fabricacin / Homologacin

II 3 G
EEx nA II T3 .. T6
Nmero de comprobacin:
segn norma EN 50021 : 1999
vase tabla
Lugar de fabricacin
Mdulos / tarjetas
Nmero de
comprobacin

Werner-von-SiemensStrae 50
92224 Amberg
Germany
ET 200S
Grupos ET 200S a prueba de fallos
KEMA 01
ATEX 1238 X
S7-300
ET 200M
Acoplamiento de bus DP/PA
Repetidor de diagnstico
Grupos S7-300 a prueba de fallos
KEMA 02
ATEX 1096 X

stliche Rheinbrckenstr.
50 76187 Karlsruhe
Germany
S7-400
KEMA 03
ATEX 1125 X
S7-300 CP
TS Adapter
KEMA 03
ATEX 1228 X
SIMATIC NET
KEMA 03
ATEX 1226 X

A5E00352937-02
Espaol
Nota
Los mdulos / tarjetas con la homologacin
II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 pueden
utilizarse nicamente en los sistemas SIMATIC de la categora de equipo 3.
Mantenimiento
Para una reparacin se ha de remitir el mdulo / tarjeta afectado al lugar de
fabricacin. Slo all se puede realizar la reparacin.
Condiciones especiales
1. Los mdulos / tarjetas se han de montar en un armario elctrico de distribucin
o en una carcasa metlica. stos deben garantizar como mnimo el grado de
proteccin IP 54 (conforme a EN 60529). Para ello se han de tener en cuenta
las condiciones ambientales, en las cuales se instala el equipo. La caja deber
contar con una declaracin del fabricante para la zona 2 (conforme a
EN 50021).
2. Si durante la operacin se alcanzara una temperatura > 70 C en el cable o la
entrada de cables de esta caja o bien una temperatura > 80 C en la
bifurcacin de hilos, debern adaptarse las propiedades trmicas de los cables
a las temperaturas medidas efectivamente.
3. Las entradas de cable utilizadas deben cumplir el grado de proteccin IP
exigido y lo expuesto en el apartado 7.2 (conforme a EN 50021).
4. Todos los dispositivos inclusive interruptores, etc. conectados a las entradas
y salidas de sistemas SIMATIC deben estar homologados para la proteccin
contra explosiones del tipo EEx nA o EEx nC.
5. Es necesario adoptar las medidas necesarias para evitar que la tensin
nominal pueda rebasar en ms del 40 % debido a efectos transitorios.
6. Margen de temperatura ambiente: 0 C hasta 60 C
7. Dentro de la caja deber colocarse en un lugar perfectamente visible tras su
apertura un rtulo con la siguiente advertencia:
Precaucin
Abrir la caja slo brevemente, p.ej. para el diagnstico visual. Durante este
tiempo Ud. no deber activar ningn interruptor, desenchufar o enchufar mdulos
ni separar conductores elctricos (conexiones enchufables).
Esta advertencia puede ignorarse si Ud. sabe que en la atmsfera existente no
hay peligro de explosin.
Lista de los mdulos / tarjetas homologados

En la internet hallar Ud. una lista con los mdulos / tarjetas homologados:
bajo el ID de asignacin 13702947.
10

A5E00352937-02
tIaliano
Impiego delle unit/moduli nell'area a pericolo di

esplosione zona 2
Zona 2
Le aree a pericolo di esplosione vengono suddivise in zone. Le zone vengono
distinte secondo la probabilit della presenza di un'atmosfera esplosiva.
Zona
Pericolo di esplosione
Esempio
L'atmosfera esplosiva si
presente solo raramente e
brevemente
Aree intorno a collegamenti a flange con

guarnizioni piatte nelle condotte in ambienti
chiusi
Area sicura
No
x Al di fuori della zona 2

x Applicazioni standard di periferia
decentrata
Qui di seguito sono riportate delle avvertenze importanti per l'installazione delle
unit/moduli nell'area a pericolo di esplosione.
Ulteriori informazioni
Ulteriori informazioni sulle unit/moduli si trovano nel corrispondente manuale.
Luogo di produzione / Omologazione

II 3 G
EEx nA II T3 .. T6
secondo EN 50021 : 1999
Numero di controllo: ve di tabella

Luogo di produzione
Unit/moduli
Numero di controllo

92224 Amberg
Germany
ET 200S
Unit ad elevata sicurezza
ET 200S
KEMA 01
ATEX 1238X
S7-300
ET 200M
Accoppiamento di bus DP/PA
Repeater di diagnostica
Unit ad elevata sicurezza
S7-300
KEMA 02
ATEX 1096X

76187 Karlsruhe
Germany
S7-400
KEMA 03
ATEX 1125X
S7-300 CP
TS Adapter II
KEMA 03
ATEX 1228X
SIMATIC NET
KEMA 03
ATEX 1226X

A5E00352937-02
11
tIaliano
Avvertenza
Le unit/moduli con l'omologazione
II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 possono essere
impiegati solo nei sistemi SIMATIC della categoria di apparecchiature 3.
Manutenzione
Per una riparazione, le unit/i moduli interessati devono essere inviati al luogo di
produzione. La riparazione pu essere effettuata solo l.
Condizioni particolari
1. Le unit/i moduli devono essere montati in un armadio elettrico o in un
contenitore metallico. Questi devono assicurare almeno il tipo di protezione
IP 54. In questo caso bisogna tenere conto delle condizioni ambientali nelle
quali l'apparecchiatura viene installata. Per il contenitore deve essere presente
una dichiarazione del costruttore per la zona 2 (secondo EN 50021).
2. Se nei cavi o nel loro punto di ingresso in questo contenitore viene raggiunta in
condizioni di esercizio una temperatura > 70 C o se in condizioni di esercizio la
temperatura nella derivazione dei fili pu essere > 80 C, le caratteristiche di
temperatura dei cavi devono essere conformi alla temperatura effettivamente
misurata.
3. Gli ingressi dei cavi usati devono essere conformi al tipo di protezione richiesto
e alla sezione 7.2 (secondo EN 50021).
4. Tutte le apparecchiature, inclusi interruttori, ecc. che vengono collegati agli
ingressi/uscite di sistemi SIMATIC, devono essere stati omologati per la
protezione da esplosione tipo EEx nA o EEx nC.
5. Devono essere prese delle misure per evitare che la tensione nominale possa
essere superata per pi del 40% da parte di transienti.
6. Campo termico ambientale: da 0 C a 60 C
7. Allinterno del contenitore va apportata, in un luogo ben visibile dopo lapertura,
una targhetta con il seguente avvertimento:
Attenzione
Il contenitore pu rimanere aperto solo per breve tempo, ad esempio per una
diagnostica a vista. In tal caso non azionare alcun interruttore, non disinnestare o
innestare unit e non staccare connessioni elettriche (connettori).
Non necessario tenere conto di questo avvertimento se noto che non c
unatmosfera a rischio di esplosione
Elenco delle unit/moduli omologati

L'elenco con le unit/moduli omologati si trova in Internet al sito:
allID di voce 13702947.
12

A5E00352937-02
Nederlands
Gebruik van de componenten/modulen in het explosief

gebied zone 2
Zone 2
Explosieve gebieden worden ingedeeld in zones. Bij de zones wordt
onderscheiden volgens de waarschijnlijkheid van de aanwezigheid van een
explosieve atmosfeer.
Zone
Explosiegevaar
Voorbeeld
Een explosieve gasatmosfeer

treedt maar zelden op en voor
korte duur
Gebieden rond flensverbindingen met

pakkingen bij buisleidingen in gesloten
vertrekken
Veilig
gebied
neen
x Buiten de zone 2
x Standaardtoepassingen van decentrale
periferie
Hierna vindt u belangrijke aanwijzingen voor de installatie van de

componenten/modulen in het explosief gebied.
Verdere informatie
In het bijhorende handboek vindt u verdere informatie over de
componenten/modulen
Productieplaats / Vergunning
II 3 G
EEx nA II T3 .. T6
conform EN 50021 : 1999
Keuringsnummer: zie tabel
Productieplaats
Werner-von-SiemensStrasse 50
92224 Amberg
Germany

76187 Karlsruhe
Germany
Componenten/modulen
Keuringsnummer
ET 200S
ET 200S tegen fouten
beveiligde componenten
KEMA 01
ATEX 1238X
S7-300
ET 200 M
Buskoppeling DP/PA
Diagnoserepeater
S7-300 tegen fouten beveiligde
componenten
KEMA 02
ATEX 1096X
S7-400
KEMA 03
ATEX 1125X
S7-300 CP
TS Adapter II
KEMA 03
ATEX 1228X
SIMATIC NET
KEMA 03
ATEX 1226X

A5E00352937-02
13
Nederlands
Opmerking
Componenten/modulen met de vergunning
II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 mogen
slechts worden gebruikt in SIMATIC-systemen van de apparaatcategorie 3.
Instandhouding
Voor een reparatie moeten de betreffende componenten/modulen naar de plaats
van vervaardiging worden gestuurd. Alleen daar mag de reparatie worden
uitgevoerd.
Speciale voorwaarden
1. Componenten/modulen moeten worden ingebouwd in een schakelkast of in een
behuizing van metaal. Deze moeten minstens de veiligheidsgraad IP 54
waarborgen. Hierbij dient rekening te worden gehouden met de
omgevingsvoorwaarden waarin het apparaat wordt genstalleerd. Voor de
behuizing dient een verklaring van de fabrikant voor zone 2 te worden
ingediend (volgens EN 50021).
2. Als aan de kabel of aan de kabelinvoering van deze behuizing onder
bedrijfsomstandigheden een temperatuur wordt bereikt > 70 C of als onder
bedrijfsomstandigheden de temperatuur aan de adervertakking > 80 C kan
zijn, moeten de temperatuureigenschappen van de kabel overeenstemmen met
de werkelijk gemeten temperaturen.
3. De aangebrachte kabelinvoeringen moeten de vereiste IP-veiligheidsgraad
hebben en in overeenstemming zijn met alinea 7.2 (volgens EN 50021).
4. Alle apparaten, schakelaars enz. inbegrepen, die worden aangesloten op de inen uitgangen van SIMATIC-systemen, moeten zijn goedgekeurd voor de
explosiebeveiliging type EEx nA of EEx nC.
5. Er dienen maatregelen te worden getroffen, zodat de nominale spanning door
transinten met niet meer dan 40 % kan worden overschreden.
6. Omgevingstemperatuurbereik: 0 C tot 60 C
7. Binnen de behuizing dient op een na het openen goed zichtbare plaats een
bord te worden aangebracht met de volgende waarschuwing:
Waarschuwing
De behuizing mag slechts voor korte tijd worden geopend, bijv. voor een visuele
diagnose. Bedien hierbij geen schakelaar, trek of steek geen modulen en
ontkoppel geen elektrische leidingen (steekverbindingen).
Deze waarschuwing kan buiten beschouwing blijven, indien bekend is dat er
geen explosieve atmosfeer heerst.
Lijst van de toegelaten componenten/modulen

De lijst met de toegelaten componenten/modulen vindt u in het internet:
onder de bijdrage-ID 13702947.
14

A5E00352937-02
Dansk
Brug af komponenter/moduler i det eksplosionsfarlige

omrde zone 2
Zone 2
Eksplosionsfarlige omrder inddeles i zoner. Zonerne adskiller sig indbyrdes efter
hvor sandsynligt det er, at der er en eksplosiv atmosfre.
Zone
Eksplosionsfare
Eksempel
Eksplosiv gasatmosfre
optrder kun sjldent og varer
kort
Omrder rundt om flangeforbindelser med

flade pakninger ved rrledninger i lukkede
rum
Sikkert
omrde
Nej
x Uden for zone 2

x Standardanvendelser decentral periferi
I det flgende findes vigtige henvisninger vedr. installation af komponenter/moduler

i det eksplosionsfarlige omrde.
Yderligere informationer
Yderligere informationer om komponenterne/modulerne findes i den pgldende
manual.
Produktionssted / Godkendelse
II 3 G
EEx nA II T3 .. T6
efter EN 50021 : 1999
Kontrolnummer: se tabel
Produktionssted
92224 Amberg
Germany

76187 Karlsruhe
Germany
Komponenter/moduler
Kontrolnummer
ET 200S
ET 200S fejlsikre
komponenter
KEMA 01
ATEX 1238X
S7-300
ET 200M
Buskobling DP/PA
Diagnoserepeater
S7-300 fejlsikre komponenter
KEMA 02
ATEX 1096X
S7-400
KEMA 03
ATEX 1125X
S7-300 CP
TS Adapter II
KEMA 03
ATEX 1228X
SIMATIC NET
KEMA 03
ATEX 1226X
Bemrk
Komponenter/moduler med godkendelsen
II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 m kun
monteres i SIMATIC-systemer for udstyrskategori 3.

A5E00352937-02
15
Dansk
Vedligeholdelse
Hvis de pgldende komponenter/moduler skal repareres, bedes De sende dem
til produktionsstedet. Reparation m kun udfres der.
Srlige betingelser
1. Komponenterne/modulerne skal monteres i et kontrolskab eller et metalkabinet.
Disse skal mindst kunne sikre beskyttelsesklasse IP 54. I denne forbindelse
skal der tages hjde for de omgivelsestemperaturer, i hvilke udstyret er
installeret. Der skal vre udarbejdet en erklring fra fabrikanten for kabinettet
for zone 2 (iht. EN 50021).
2. Hvis kablet eller kabelindfringen p dette hus nr op p en temperatur p
> 70 C under driftsbetingelser eller hvis temperaturen p reforegreningen kan
vre > 80 C under driftsbetingelser, skal kablernes temperaturegenskaber
stemme overens med de temperaturer, der rent faktisk mles.
3. De benyttede kabelindfringer skal vre i overensstemmelse med den
krvede IP-beskyttelsestype og afsnittet 7.2 (iht. EN 50021).
4. Alle apparater, inkl. kontakter osv., der forbindes med ind- og udgangene til
SIMATIC-systemerne, skal vre godkendt til eksplosionsbeskyttelse af
type EEx nA eller EEx nC.
5. Der skal trffes foranstaltninger, der srger for, at den nominelle spnding via
transienter ikke kan overskrides mere end 40 %.
6. Omgivelsestemperaturomrde: 0 C til 60 C
7. I kabinettet skal der anbringes et skilt, der skal kunne ses, nr kabinettet bnes.
Dette skilt skal have flgende advarsel:
Advarsel
Kabinettet m kun bnes i kort tid, f.eks. til visuel diagnose. Tryk i denne
forbindelse ikke p kontakter, trk eller ist ikke komponenter og afbryd ikke
elektriske ledninger (stikforbindelser).
Der skal ikke tages hjde for denne advarsel, hvis man ved, at der ikke er nogen
eksplosionsfarlig atmosfre.
Liste over godkendte komponenter/moduler

Listen med de godkendte komponenter/moduler findes p internettet:
under bidrags-ID 13702947.
16

A5E00352937-02
Suomi
Rakenneryhmien/moduulien kytt
rjhdysvaarannetuilla alueilla, vyhyke 2
Vyhyke 2
Rjhdysvaarannetut alueet jaetaan vyhykkeisiin. Vyhykkeet erotellaan
rjhdyskelpoisen ilmakehn olemassa olon todennkisyyden mukaan.
Vyhyke
Rjhdysvaara
Esimerkki
Rjhtv kaasuilmakeh
ilmaantuu vain harvoin ja
lyhytaikaisesti
Alueet putkistojen lattatiivisteill varustuilla

laippaliitoksilla suljetuissa tiloissa
turvallinen
alue
ei
x vyhykkeen 2 ulkopuolella
x Hajautetun ulkopiirin vakiosovellukset
Seuraavasta lydtte trkeit ohjeita rakenneryhmien/moduulien asennukseen

rjhdysvaarannetuilla alueilla.
Listietoja
Listietoja rakenneryhmiin/moduuleihin lydtte niihin kuuluvista ohjekirjasta.
Valmistuspaikka / Hyvksynt
II 3 G
EEx nA II T3 .. T6
EN 50021 mukaan: 1999
Tarkastusnumero: katso taulukko

Valmistuspaikka
Rakenneryhmt/moduulit

ET 200S
Werner-von-Siemens-Strae 50 ET 200S lpi-iskuvarmat
92224 Amberg
rakenneryhmt
Germany
S7-300
ET 200M
Vylkytkin DP/PA
Dignoositoistin
S7-300 lpi-iskuvarmat
rakenneryhmt
76187 Karlsruhe
Germany
Tarkastusnumero
KEMA 01
ATEX 1238X
KEMA 02
ATEX 1096X
S7-400
KEMA 03
ATEX 1125X
S7-300 CP
TS Adapter II
KEMA 03
ATEX 1228X
SIMATIC NET
KEMA 03
ATEX 1226X
Ohje
Rakenneryhmt/moduulit hyvksynnn
II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 kanssa
saadaan kytt ainoastaan laitekategorian 3 SIMATIC-jrjestelmiss.
A5E00352937-02
17
Suomi
Kunnossapito
Korjausta varten tytyy kyseinen rakenneryhm/moduuli lhett
valmistuspaikkaan. Korjaus voidaan suorittaa ainoastaan siell.
Erityiset vaatimukset
1. Rakenneryhmt/moduulit tytyy asentaa kytkentkaappiin tai metalliseen
koteloon. Niden tytyy olla vhintn kotelointiluokan IP 54 mukaisia. Tllin
on huomioitava ympristolosuhteet, johon laite asennetaan. Kotelolle tytyy
olla valmistajaselvitys vyhykett 2 varten (EN 50021 mukaan).
2. Kun johdolla tai tmn kotelon johdon sisnviennill saavutetaan > 70 C
lmptila tai kun kyttolosuhteissa lmptila voi piuhajaotuksella olla > 80 C,
tytyy johdon lmptilaominaisuuksien vastata todellisesti mitattuja lmptiloja.
3. Kytettyjen johtojen sisnohjauksien tytyy olla vaaditun IP-kotelointiluokan ja
kohdan 7.2 (EN 50021 mukaan) mukaisia.
4. Kaikkien laitteiden, kytkimet jne. mukaan lukien, jotka liitetn SIMATICjrjestelmien tuloille ja lhdille, tytyy olla hyvksyttyj tyypin EEx nA tai
EEx nC rjhdyssuojausta varten.
5. Toimenpiteet tytyy suorittaa, ettei nimellisjnnite voi transienttien kautta ylitty
enemmn kuin 40 %.
6. Ympristlmptila-alue: 0 C ... 60 C
7. Kotelon sislle, avauksen jlkeen nkyvlle paikalle, on kiinnitettv kilpi, jossa
on seuraava varoitus:
Varoitus
Kotelo saadaan avata ainoastaan lyhyeksi ajaksi, esim. visuaalista diagnoosia
varten. l tllin kyt mitn kytkimi, ved tai liit mitn rakenneryhmi,
lk erota mitn shkjohtoja (pistoliittimi).
Tt varoitusta ei tarvitse huomioida, kun on tiedossa, ett minknlaista
rjhdysvaarannettua ilmakeh ei ole olemassa.
Hyvksyttyjen rakenneryhmien/moduulien lista

Lista hyvksytyist rakennesarjoista/moduuleista lytyy internetist osoitteesta:
kyttjtunnuksella 13702947.
18

A5E00352937-02
Svenska
Anvndning av komponentgrupperna/modulerna i
explosionsriskomrde zon 2
Zon 2
Explosionsriskomrden delas in i zoner. Zonerna delas in enligt sannolikheten att
en atmosfr med explosionsfara freligger.
Zon
Explosionsfara
Exempel
Explosiv gasatmosfr uppstr

endast sllan eller kortvarigt
Omrden kring flnsfrbindelser med

packningar vid rrledningar i slutna
utrymmen
Skert
omrde
Nej
x Utanfr zon 2
x Standardanvndning av decentral
periferi
Nedan fljer viktiga anvisningar om installationen av

komponentgrupperna/modulerna i ett explosionsriskomrde.
Ytterligare information
Ytterligare information om komponentgrupperna/modulerna finner du i tillhrande
handbok.
Tillverkningsort / Godknnande
II 3 G
EEx nA II T3 .. T6
enligt EN 50021 : 1999
Kontrollnummer: se tabell
Tillverkningsort
92224 Amberg
Germany

76187 Karlsruhe
Germany
Komponentgrupper/
moduler
Kontrollnummer
ET 200S
ET 200S Felskra
komponentgrupper
KEMA 01
ATEX 1238X
S7-300
ET 200M
Busskoppling DP/PA
Diagnosrepeater
S7-300 Felskra
komponentgrupper
KEMA 02
ATEX 1096X
S7-400
KEMA 03
ATEX 1125X
S7-300 CP
TS Adapter II
KEMA 03
ATEX 1228X
SIMATIC NET
KEMA 03
ATEX 1226X

A5E00352937-02
19
Svenska
Anvisning
Komponentgrupper/moduler med godknnande
II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 fr
endast anvndas i SIMATIC-system i apparatgrupp 3.
Underhll
Vid reparation mste den aktuella komponentgrupperna/modulerna insndas till
tillverkaren. Reparationer fr endast genomfras dr.
Srskilda villkor
1. Komponentgrupperna/modulerna mste monteras i ett kopplingsskp eller
metallhus. Dessa mste minst vara av skyddsklass IP 54. Drvid ska
omgivningsvillkoren dr enheten installeras beaktas. Fr kpan mste en
tillverkardeklaration fr zon 2 freligga (enligt EN 50021).
2. Om en temperatur p > 70C uppns vid husets kabel resp kabelinfring under
driftvillkor eller om temperaturen vid trdfrgreningen kan vara > 80C under
driftvillkor, mste kabelns temperaturegenskaper verensstmma med den
verkligen uppmtta temperaturen.
3. De anvnda kabelinfringarna mste uppfylla kraven i det krvda IPskyddsutfrandet och i avsnitt 7.2 (enligt EN 50021).
4. Alla apparater, inklusive brytare osv, som ansluts till in- och utgngarna p
SIMATIC-system, mste vara godknda fr explosionsskydd av typ EEx nA
eller EEx nC.
5. tgrder mste vidtas s, att mrkspnningen ej kan verskridas med mer n
40 % genom transienter.
6. Omgivningstemperatur: 0 C till 60 C
7. Nr huset ppnats ska en skylt med fljande varning monteras p ett tydligt
synligt stlle huset:
Varning
Huset fr endast ppnas under kort tid, t ex fr visuell diagnos. Anvnd drvid
inga brytare, lossa eller anslut inga enheter och frnskilj inga elektriska ledningar
(insticksanslutningar).
Ingen hnsyn mste tas till denna varning om det r skert att det inte rder
ngon explosionsfarlig atmosfr.
Lista ver godknda komponentgrupper/moduler

Lista ver godknda komponentgrupper/moduler finns p Internetadressen:
under bidrags-ID 13702947.
20

A5E00352937-02
Portugus
Uso de grupos construtivos/mdulos em rea exposta

ao perigo de exploso 2
Zona 2
As reas expostas ao perigo de exploso so divididas em zonas. As zonas so
diferenciadas de acordo com a probabilidade da existncia de uma atmosfera
explosiva.
Zona
2
Perigo de exploso
S raramente e por um breve
perodo de tempo surgem
atmosferas explosivas
Exemplo
reas em torno de ligaes flangeadas
com vedaes chatas em tubulaes em
recintos fechados
x fora da zona 2
rea segura no
x Aplicaes descentralizadas de
periferia descentralizada
A seguir, o encontrar avisos importantes para a instalao de grupos

construtivos/ mdulos em rea exposta ao perigo de exploso.
Mais informaes
Para obter mais informaes sobre grupos construtivos/mdulos, consulte o
respectivo manual.
Local de produo / Licena

II 3 G
EEx nA II T3 .. T6
seg. EN 50021 : 1999
Nmero de ensaio: veja a tabela
Local de produo
92224 Amberg
Alemanha

76187 Karlsruhe
Alemanha
Grupos
construtivos/mdulos
N de ensaio
ET 200S
ET 200S Grupos construtivos
protegidos contra erro
KEMA 01
ATEX 1238X
S7-300
ET 200M
Acoplador bus DP/PA
Repetidor de diagnstico
S7-300 Grupos construtivos
protegidos contra erro
KEMA 02
ATEX 1096X
S7-400
KEMA 03
ATEX 1125X
S7-300 CP
TS Adapter II
KEMA 03
ATEX 1228X
SIMATIC NET
KEMA 03
ATEX 1226X

A5E00352937-02
21
Portugus
Aviso
Os grupos construtivos/mdulos com a licena
II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 s
podem ser aplicados em sistemas SIMATIC da categoria de aparelho 3.
Reparo
Os grupos construtivos/mdulos em questo devem ser remetidos para o local de
produo a fim de que seja realizado o reparo. Apenas l deve ser efetuado o
reparo.
Condies especiais
1. Os grupos construtivos/mdulos devem ser montados em um armrio de
distribuio ou em uma caixa metlica. Estes devem garantir no mnimo o tipo
de proteco IP 54. Durante este trabalho devero ser levados em
considerao as condies locais, nas quais o aparelho ser instalado. Para a
caixa dever ser apresentada uma declarao do fabricante para a zona 2 (de
acordo com EN 50021).
2. Caso no cabo ou na entrada do cabo desta carcaa sob as condies
operacionais seja atingida uma temperatura de > 70 C, ou caso sob condies
operacionais a temperatura na ramificao do fio poder atingir > 80 C, as
caratersticas de temperatura devero corresponder s temperaturas realmente
medidas.
3. As entradas de cabo utilizadas devem corresponder ao tipo exigido de
proteco IP e seo 7.2 (de acordo com o EN 50021).
4. Todos os aparelhos, inclusive as chaves, etc., que estejam conectadas em
entradas e sadas dos sistemas SIMATIC devem possuir a licena para a
proteco de exploso do tipo EEx nA ou EEx nC.
5. Precisam ser tomadas medidas para que a tenso nominal atravs de
transitrios no possa ser ultrapassada em mais que 40 %.
6. rea de temperatura ambiente: 0 C at 60 C
7. No mbito da carcaa deve ser colocada, aps a abertura, em um ponto bem
visvel uma placa com a seguinte advertncia:
Advertncia
A carcaa deve ser aberta apenas por um breve perodo de tempo, por ex. para
diagnstico visual. No acione nenhum interruptor, no retire ou conecte nenhum
mdulo e no separe nenhum fio eltrico (ligaes de tomada).
Esta advertncia poder ser ignorada caso se saiba que no h nenhuma
atmosfera sujeita ao perigo de exploso.
Lista dos grupos construtivos/mdulos autorizados

A lista com os grupos construtivos/mdulos autorizados encontram-se na Internet:
sob o nmero de ID 13702947.
22

A5E00352937-02
/
, 2
2
.
.
x 2
x

/ .

/
.
/
II 3 G
EEx nA II T3 .. T6
EN 50021 : 1999

ET 200S
ET 200S
92224 Amberg

Germany

76187 Karlsruhe
Germany
.
KEMA 01
ATEX 1238X
S7-300
ET 200M
DP/PA

S7-300

KEMA 02
ATEX 1096X
S7-400
KEMA 03
ATEX 1125X
S7-300 CP
TS Adapter II
KEMA 03
ATEX 1228X
SIMATIC NET
KEMA 03
ATEX 1226X

A5E00352937-02
23
/
II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6
SIMATIC
3.
/
. .

1. /
.
IP 54 ( EN 60529).
,
.
2 ( EN 50021).
2.
70 C

80 C,
.
3.
IP 54 7.2 (
EN 50021).
4. , ..,
SIMATIC,
EEx nA EEx nC.
5. ,
40 %.
6. : 0 C 60 C
7.
:
, ..
. ,

( ).
,
.
/
/ :
13702947.
24

A5E00352937-02
esky
Pouit konstruknch skupin / modul v prosted s

nebezpem vbuchu Zna 2
Zna 2
Oblasti s nebezpem vbuchu jsou rozdleny do zn. Zny jsou rozlieny podle
pravdpodobnosti vskytu explosivn atmosfry.
Zna
Nebezpe exploze
Pklad
Explosivn plynov atmosfra

se vyskytuje pouze zdka a
krtkodob
Oblasti kolem prubovch spoj s

plochm tsnnm u potrub v uzavench
prostorech
Bezpen
oblast
nen
x Mimo znu 2
x Standardn aplikace necentrlnch
periferi
Dle naleznete dleit pokyny pro instalaci konstruknch skupin/modul v

oblastech s nebezpem vbuchu.
Dal informace
Dal informace ke konstruknm skupinm/modulm naleznete v pslun
pruce.
Msto vroby / Registrace

II 3 G
EEx nA II T3 .. T6
dle EN 50021 : 1999
Zkuebn slo: viz tabulka
Msto vroby
92224 Amberg
Germany

76187 Karlsruhe
Germany
Konstrukn skupiny/Moduly
ET 200S
ET 200S Konstrukn skupiny
odoln proti chybm
Kontroln slo
KEMA 01
ATEX 1238X
S7-300
KEMA 02
ET 200M
ATEX 1096X
Spojka sbrnice DP/PA
Diagnostick translan rel
S7-300 Konstrukn skupiny odoln
proti chybm
S7-400
KEMA 03
ATEX 1125X
S7-300 CP
TS Adapter II
KEMA 03
ATEX 1228X
SIMATIC NET
KEMA 03
ATEX 1226X

A5E00352937-02
25
esky
Upozornn
Konstrukn skupiny/Moduly s osvdenm
II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 smj bt
pouity pouze v systmech SIMATIC, pstrojov kategorie 3.
drba
K oprav mus bt pslun konstrukn skupiny/moduly zaslny do vrobnho
msta. Oprava sm bt provedena pouze zde.
Zvltn podmnky
1. Konstrukn skupiny/moduly mus bt zabudovny v rozvadi nebo kovovm
krytu. Ty mus minimln zajiovat druh ochrany IP 54 (dle EN 60529). Pitom
je nutno respektovat okoln podmnky, v nich je pstroj instalovn. Pro kryt
mus bt k dispozici prohlen vrobce pro znu 2 (dle EN 50021).
2. Pokud je na kabelu pop. kabelovm veden tohoto krytu dosaeno za
provoznch podmnek teploty > 70 C, nebo kdy za provoznch podmnek
me bt na kabelovch vtvch teplota > 80 C, mus teplotn vlastnosti kabelu
souhlasit se skuten namenmi teplotami.
3. Pouit kabelov pvody mus odpovdat poadovanmu druhu ochrany IP a
odstavci 7.2 (dle EN 50021).
4. Vechny pstroje, vetn spna atd. napojench na vstupy a vstupy systm
SIMATIC, mus mt osvden vi vbuchu typu EEx nA nebo EEx nC.
5. Mus bt provedena opaten k zamezen pechodnho pekroen jmenovitho
napt, nepesahujc vce ne 40 %.
6. Rozsah teploty okol: 0 C do 60 C
7. Uvnit krytu je nutno na dobe viditelnm mst po oteven pipevnit ttek s
nsledujcm varovnm:
Varovn
Kryt sm bt oteven pouze krtce, nap. pro vizuln diagnostiku. Nepouvejte
pitom dn spna, nevytahujte ani nezasunujte dn konstrukn skupiny a
neoddlujte dn elektrick veden (konektorov spoje).
Toto varovn nemuste respektovat, pokud je znmo, e se na mst nevyskytuje
explozivn atmosfra.
Seznam konstruknch skupin/modul s osvdenm

Seznam konstruknch skupin/modul s osvdenm naleznete na Internetu:
pod identifikac pspvku ID 13702947.
26

A5E00352937-02
Estnisch
Slmede/moodulite kasutamine plahvatusohtliku

piirkonna tsoonis 2
Tsoon 2
Plahvatusohtlikud piirkonnad jagatakse tsoonideks. Tsoone eristatakse vastavalt
plahvatusohtliku keskkonna esinemise tenosusele.
Tsoon
Plahvatusoht
Nide
ldine plahvatav keskkond

esineb ainult harva ja
lhiajaliselt
Piirkonnad lamedate rngastihenditega

torustike rikliidete mbruses suletud
ruumides
ohutu
piirkond
ei
x vljaspool tsooni 2
x Mittstsentraalse vlisseadme
standardsed rakendused
Jrgnevalt leaite Te olulisi juhiseid slmede/moodulite paigaldamiseks

plahvatusohtlikus piirkonnas.
Tiendav info
ksikasjalik info slmede/moodulite kohta on toodud seadme juurde kuuluvas
ksiraamatus.
Valmistamiskoht / Kasutusluba
II 3 G
EEx nA II T3 .. T6
vastavalt standardile EN 50021 : 1999
Katsetusnumber: vaadake tabelit
Valmistamiskoht
92224 Amberg
Germany

76187 Karlsruhe
Germany
Slmed/moodulid
Katsetusnumber
ET 200S
ET 200S Rikkekindlad slmed
KEMA 01
ATEX 1238X
S7-300
ET 200M
Siinhendus DP/PA
Diagnostikarepiiter
S7-300 Rikkekindlad slmed
KEMA 02
ATEX 1096X
S7-400
KEMA 03
ATEX 1125X
S7-300 CP
TS Adapter II
KEMA 03
ATEX 1228X
SIMATIC NET
KEMA 03
ATEX 1226X
Juhis
Slmi/mooduleid kasutusloaga
II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 tohib kasutada ainult
SIMATIC-ssteemides, mille seadmeklass on 3.
A5E00352937-02
27
Estnisch
Korrashoid
Parandamiseks tuleb slmed/moodulid saata valmistamiskohta. Parandustid tohib
teha ainult seal.
Eritingimused
1. Slmed/moodulid tuleb monteerida jaotuskarpi vi metallkorpusesse. Need
peavad tagama kaitseastme vhemalt IP 54 (vastavalt standardile EN 60529).
Seejuures peab arvesse vtma seadme paigaldamise keskkonna tingimusi.
Korpuse jaoks peab tsooni 2 jaoks olema tootja juhis (vastavalt standardile
EN 50021).
2. Kui selle korpuse kaabli juures vi kaabelvaheliku (kaabelsisestuse) juures
ttingimustes saavutatakse temperatuur > 70 C vi, kui ttingimustes
temperatuur soone hargnemiskoha juures vib olla > 80 C, peavad kaabli
termilised omadusd olema vastavuses tegelikult mdetud temperatuuridega.
3. Kasutatavad kaabelvahelikud (kaabelsisestused) peavad vastama nutud IPkaitseastmele ja osas 7.2 toodud nuetele (vastavalt standardile EN 50021).
4. Kik seadmed, kaasa arvatud llitid, jt., mis SIMATIC-ssteemide sisendite ja
vljundite klge hendatakse, peavad vimaldama plahvatuskaitse
tpi EEx nA vi EEx nC.
5. Peab rakendama abinusid, et nimipinget leminekute tttu ei saaks letatada
le 40 %.
6. mbritseva keskkona temperatuurivahemik: 0 C kuni 60 C
7. Korpuse sisse tuleb sellisesse kohta, mis prast avamist on hsti nhtav, panna
silt jrgmise hoiatusega:
Ettevaatust
Korpust tohib avada ainult lhikeseks ajals, niteks visuaalse diagnostika jaoks.
Seejuures rge kasutage htegi llitit ega vtke vlja ega pange sisse htegi
slme ega lahutage htegi elektrijuhet (pistikhendused).
Seda hoiatust vib mitte arvesse vtta, kui on teada, et ei esine mingit
plahvatusohtlikku keskkonda.
Lubatud slmede/moodulite loetelu

Lubatud slmede/modulite loetelu leiate Te internetist:
lisas-ID 13702947.
28

A5E00352937-02
Latviski
Ieru/moduu pielietojums sprdzienbstamas

teritorijas zon 2
Zona 2
Sprdzienbstams teritorijas ir sadaltas zons. s zonas atir pc
sprdzienbstamas atmosfras pastvanas iespjambas.
Zona
Sprdzienbstamba
Piemrs
eksplozva gzes atmosfra

izveidojas reti un uz su laiku
Teritorijas ap atloku savienojumiem ar

plakaniem blvjumiem uz cauruvadiem
slgts telps
droa
teritorija
x rpus zonas 2
x Decentraliztas perifrijas ierces
standartlietojumi
Turpmk atrodamas svargas nordes par ieru/moduu uzstdanu

sprdzienbstamaj zon.
Turpmka informcija
Turpmka informcija par iercm/moduiem ir atrodama attiecgaj rokasgrmat.
Izgatavoanas vieta / Atauja

II 3 G
EEx nA II T3 .. T6
saska ar EN 50021 : 1999
Prbaudes numurs: skatt tabulu
Izgatavoanas vieta
92224 Amberg
Germany

76187 Karlsruhe
Germany
Ierces/modui
Prbaudes
numurs
ET 200S
KEMA 01
ATEX 1238X
S7-300
ET 200M
Kopnes savienotjs DP/PA
Diagnostikas atkrtotjs
S7-300 Pret kdm aizsargtas
ierces
KEMA 02
ATEX 1096X
S7-400
KEMA 03
ATEX 1125X
S7-300 CP
TS Adapter II
KEMA 03
ATEX 1228X
SIMATIC NET
KEMA 03
ATEX 1226X

A5E00352937-02
29
Latviski
Norde
Ierces/modui ar atauju
II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 var tikt pielietotas tikai
3.kategorijas SIMATIC sistms.
Tehnisk apkope
Attiecgu ieru/moduu remontam tie ir jnosta raotjam. Remontu drkst veikt
tikai tur.
pai apstki
1. Ierces/modui jiebv sadales skap vai metla korpus. Tiem jnodroina
aizsardzbas lmenis ne mazks k IP 54 (saska ar EN 60529). Turklt,
ierces uzstdan jievro apkrtjas vides apstki. Korpusam ir
nepiecieams izgatavotja apliecinjums zonai 2 (saska ar EN 50021).
2. Ja uz kabea vai korpusa kabeu ievades ekspluatcijas apstkos tiek
sasniegta temperatra > 70 C vai ja ekspluatcijas apstkos uz kabea
atzariem var bt temperatra > 80 C, kabeu temperatras pabm jatbilst
faktiski nomrtm temperatrm.
3. Pielietojamm kabeu ievadm jatbilst nepiecieamajam aizsardzbas veidam
IP un sadaai 7.2 (saska ar EN 50021).
4. Vism iercm, ieskaitot prslgus utt., kas tiek pieslgti pie SIMATIC sistmu
ievadm un izvadm, jbt ataujm EEx nA vai EEx nC tipa
sprdzienaizsardzbai.
5. Nepiecieams veikt paskumus, lai prejas spriegums neprsniegtu nominlo
spriegumu vairk k par 40 %.
6. Apkrtjas temperatras diapazons: 0 C ldz 60 C
7. Korpusa iekpus, viet, kas ir labi redzama, atverot to, ir jizvieto plksne ar
sekojoo brdinjumu:
Brdinjums
Korpusu var atvrt tikai slaicgi, piemram, vizulai diagnostikai. Pie tam
nenospiediet nekdus sldus, neievietojiet un neizemiet nekdas ierces un
neprtrauciet elektrisks lnijas (spraudsavienojumus).
is brdinjums var tikt neemts vr, ja ir zinms, ka nepastv sprdzienbstama
atmosfra.
Pieaujamo ieru/moduu saraksts

Pieaujamo ieru/moduu saraksts ir atrodams Internet:
zem datu ID 13702947.
30

A5E00352937-02
Lietuvika
Konstrukcini grupi/moduli panaudojimas

sprogioje 2 zonos aplinkoje
Zona 2
Sprogi aplinka yra apibdinama keliomis zonomis. Zonos skirstomos pagal galimos
sprogios terps atsiradimo tikimyb.
Zona
Sprogimo pavojus
Pavyzdys
sprogi atmosfera bna retai ir

trumpai
Udar patalp vamzdynuose - flano su

tarpikliais sujungim vietose
saugioji
sritis
nra
x ne zonoje 2
x Standartin periferin sistema
Toliau pateikiamas informacija apie konstrukcini grupi ir moduli montavim

sprogioje aplinkoje.
Papildoma informacija
Papildomos informacijos apie konstrukcines grupes/modulius rasite eksploatacijos
vadove.
Pagaminimo vieta / Saugos reikalavimai

II 3 G
EEx nA II T3 .. T6
pagal EN 50021 : 1999
Patikros numeris: ir. lentelje
Pagaminimo vieta
Konstrukcins grups/moduliai
Patikros
numeris

92224 Ambergas
Vokietija
ET 200S
ET 200S nuo trukdi apsaugotos
konstrukcins grups
KEMA 01
ATEX 1238X
S7-300
ET 200M
Magistralin jungtis DP/PA
Diagnozs retransliatorius
S7-300 nuo trukdi apsaugotos
konstrukcins grups
KEMA 02
ATEX 1096X

76187 Karlsruhe
Vokietija
S7-400
KEMA 03
ATEX 1125X
S7-300 CP
KEMA 03
ATEX 1228X
SIMATIC NET
KEMA 03
ATEX 1226X

A5E00352937-02
31
Lietuvika
Nuoroda
Konstrukcines grupes/modulius, kuri leidimas eksploatuoti yra
II 3 G
EEx nA II T3 .. T6 galima naudoti tik 3 kategorijos sistemose "SIMATIC".
Prieira
Esant gedimams, konstrukcin grup/modul isiskite gamintojui. Tik jis gali
kvalifikuotai suremontuoti tais.
Specialiosios slygos
1. Konstrukcines grupes/modulius montuokite jungimo spintoje arba metaliniame
korpuse. Korpuso ar jungimo spintos saugos klas turi bti maiausiai "IP 54"
(pagal EN 60529). Btina atsivelgti kitas aplinkos slygas. Norint korpus
eksploatuoti zonoje 2, btinas gamintojo paymjimas (pagal EN 50021).
2. Jei korpuso kabelio arba kabelio prijungimo temperatra pakyla daugiau nei
70 C arba laid atakoje temperatra padidja daugiau nei 80 C, reikia
naudoti kabelius, kuri termins savybs atitinka imatuotas temperatros
vertes.
3. Kabeli sujungimai turi bti saugos klass IP ir atitikti 7.2 skyriaus (pagal
EN 50021) reikalavimus.
4. Visi prietaisai, skaitant ir jungiklius, jungiami sistem "SIMATIC" eigose ir
ieigose, turi bti tipo "EEx nA" arba "EEx nC" - apsaugoti nuo sprogimo.
5. Btina imtis priemoni, kad pereinamj grandi vardin tampa neviryt
40 %.
6. Leistina aplinkos temperatra: 0 C iki 60 C
7. Atidar korpus, jo viduje gerai matomoje vietoje, taisykite lentel su spjimu:
spjimas
Korpus` atidaryti tik trumpam laikui, pvz., patikrai. Neliesti jungikli,
konstrukcini grupi neitraukti ir nekiti, neatjungti elektrini sujungim
(kitukini sujungim).
io spjimo galima nepaisyti, kai yra inoma, jog darbin aplinka yra nesprogi.
Leistin konstrukcini grupi/moduli sraas

Leistin konstrukcini grupi/moduli sra rasite interneto puslapyje:
ved kod 13702947.
32

A5E00352937-02
Magya
A fegysgek/modulok alkalmazsa a 2. zna

robbansveszlyes krnyezetben
2. zna
A robbansveszlyes krnyezeteket znkba soroljk be. A robbansveszlyes
lgkr elfordulsnak valsznsge alapjn klnbztetik meg a znkat.
Zna
Robbansveszly
Plda
robbansveszlyes gzat
zrt helysgekben elhelyezett
tartalmaz lgkr csak ritkn s csvezetkeknl a lapos tmtssel
rvid ideig lp fel
rendelkez karims ktsek
krnyezetben
x a 2. znn kvl
biztonsgos nem
krnyezet
x a decentrlis perifria kszlkek

standard alkalmazsai
A kvetkezkben fontos utastsokat tall a fegysgek/modulok teleptshez a

robbansveszlyes krnyezetbe.
Tovbbi informcik
A tovbbi informcikat a fegysgekhez/modulokhoz megtallja a hozztartoz
kziknyvben.
Gyrtsi hely / Engedlyezs

II 3 G
EEx nA II T3 .. T6
az EN 50021 : 1999 szerint
Ellenrz szm: lsd a tblzatot
Gyrtsi hely
92224 Amberg
Germany

76187 Karlsruhe
Germany
Fegysgek/modulok
Ellenrz szm
ET 200S
ET 200S hibabiztos fegysgek
KEMA 01
ATEX 1238X
S7-300
ET 200M
DP/PA buszcsatol
Diagnzisrepeater
S7-300 hibabiztos fegysgek
KEMA 02
ATEX 1096X
S7-400
KEMA 03
ATEX 1125X
S7-300 CP
TS Adapter II
KEMA 03
ATEX 1228X
SIMATIC NET
KEMA 03
ATEX 1226X

A5E00352937-02
33
Magya
Utasts
Az II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 engedlyezssel rendelkez
fegysgeket/modulokat alkalmazhatja csak a 3. felszerels-kategriba tartoz
SIMATIC rendszerekbe.
Karbantarts
Javts esetn kldje az rintett fegysgeket/modulokat a gyrtsi helyre. Csak itt
hajthatjk vgre a javtst.
Klnleges felttelek
1. A fegysgeket/modulokat egy kapcsolszekrnybe vagy egy fm hzba kell
beszerelni. Ezeknek kell biztostaniuk legalbb az IP 54 vdettsgi fokozatot
(EN 60529 szerint). Itt figyelembe kell venni azokat a krnyezeti feltteleket,
amelyek fellpnek a kszlk teleptsekor. A hzhoz meg kell legyen a gyrti
nyilatkozat a 2. znhoz (az EN 50021 szerint).
2. Ha a jelen hz kbeln ill. kbelvezetsen zemi felttelek mellett a
hmrsklet > 70 C, vagy ha az zemi felttelek mellett a hmrsklet > 80 C
az relgazsokon, akkor meg kell egyezzenek a kbel hmrskleti
tulajdonsgai a tnylegesen mrt hmrskletekkel.
3. Az alkalmazott kbelvezetsek meg kell feleljenek a kvetelt IP vdettsgi
fokozatnak s a 7.2. bekezdsnek (EN 50021 szerint).
4. Minden kszlk, kapcsolt stb. belertve, amelyeket a SIMATIC rendszerek
be- s kimeneteire csatlakoztattak, engedlyezve kell legyen az EEx nA vagy
EEx nC tpus robbansvdelemhez.
5. Intzkedseket kell hozni, hogy a tranziensek ne lpjk tl a nvleges
feszltsget tbb mint 40 %-al.
6. Krnyezeti hmrsklet tartomny: 0 C ... 60 C
7. A hzon bell -a nyitskor jl lthat helyen- helyezzen el egy tblt a
kvetkez figyelmeztetssel:
Figyelmeztets
A hzat csak rvid ideig szabad nyitani, pl. optikai diagnzishoz. Ekzben ne
mkdtessen egy kapcsolt sem, ne hzzon ki vagy dugjon be egy fegysget
sem s ne vlasszon le villamos vezetkeket (dugs csatlakozk).
Ez a figyelmeztets mellzhet, ha tudott, hogy nem ll fenn robbansveszlyes
lgkr.
A megengedett fegysgek/modulok listja

A megengedett fegysgek/modulok listjt megtallja az interneten:
a 13702947 cikk azonost szm alatt.
34

A5E00352937-02
Malti
Tqegid tal-Komponenti / Modules fi-ona 2, fejn

hemm Riskju ta' Splujoni
ona 2
Sezzjonijiet fejn hemm riskju ta' splujoni jitqassmu f'oni. Tagmel distinzjoni bejn
ona u ora skond il-probabbilt li jkun hemm ambjent li jista' jwassal gal
splujoni.
ona
Periklu ta' Splujoni
Eempju
ambjent gassu li jista' jisplodi

jfe rarament u gal mien
qasir
oni madwar flan ojnts b'gaskits atti

f'kanni ewwa spazji magluqin
ona gura
le
x barra mi-ona 2
x uu normali ta' devices periferali
deentralizzati
Issib hawn tat indikazzjonijiet importanti gall-installazzjoni ta' komponenti /

modules fi-ona fejn hemm riskju ta' splujoni.
Aktar Tagrif
Aktar tagrif fuq il-komponenti / modules jinstab fil-manwal ikkonernat.
Post ta' Manifattura / Approvazzjoni

II 3 G
EEx nA II T3 .. T6
skond EN 50021 : 1999
Numru ta-ertifikat: ara t-tabella
Post ta' Manifattura

92224 Amberg
Germany

76187 Karlsruhe
Germany
Komponenti / Modules
Numru taertifikat
ET 200S
KEMA 01
ET 200S modules ma jistgux ifallu ATEX 1238X
S7-300
ET 200M
bus coupling DP/PA
Ripetitur ta' dijanjosi
S7-300 modules ma jistgux ifallu
KEMA 02
ATEX 1096X
S7-400
KEMA 03
ATEX 1125X
S7-300 CP
TS Adapter
KEMA 03
ATEX 1228X
SIMATIC NET
KEMA 03
ATEX 1226X
Nota
Komponenti / modules bl-approvazzjoni
II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 jistgu
jintuaw biss ewwa sistemi SIMATIC tal-kategorija 3.
A5E00352937-02
35
Malti
Manutenzjoni
Fil-ka li jkun hemm bonn ta' tiswija, il-komponenti / modules ikkonernati
gandhom jintbagtu fil-post ta' manifattura. It-tiswijiet jistgu jsiru biss f'dan il-post.
Kundizzjonijiet Spejali
1. Komponenti / modules gandhom jiu mmontati ewwa swi kabinett jew
kaxxa tal-metall. Dawn iridu jiggarantixxu protezzjoni mill-inqas tat-tip IP 54
(skond EN 60529). Inti u tagmel hekk, trid taseb gall-kundizzjonijiet
ambjentali ta' waqt l-installazzjoni tad-device. Irid ikun hemm dikjarazzjoni talmanifatturier gall-kaxxa ga-ona 2 (skond EN 50021).
2. Jekk fil-kejbil, jew fil-kaxxa mad-dala gall-kejbil, tintlaaq temperatura ta'
aktar minn 70 C tat kundizzjonijiet ta' idma, jew jekk fil-post fejn jinfirdu lwajers jista' jkun li hemm temperatura ta' aktar minn 80 C, il-kejbil irid ikollu
proprjetajiet ta' temperatura xierqa gat-temperaturi tabilaqq imkejlin.
3. Id-daliet gall-kejbil li jintuaw iridu jikkonformaw mat-tip ta' protezzjoni IP
mitlub u t-taqsima 7.2 (skond EN 50021).
4. Id-devices kollha, swiijiet etc. inklui, li jitqabbdu ma' l-inputs u l-outputs ta'
sistemi SIMATIC, iridu jkunu approvati gal protezzjoni kontra splujoni tat-tip
EEx nA jew EEx nC.
5. Iridu jittiedu miuri biex il-vulta nominali ma jitqabbix b'aktar minn 40%
minabba transitorji.
6. Varjazzjoni tat-temperatura ambjentali: 0 C sa 60 C
7. Gandha titqieged tabella bit-twissija li ejja ewwa l-kaxxa, f'post li jidher sew
wara li tinfeta il-kaxxa:
Twissija
Il-kaxxa tista' tinfeta biss gal mien qasir, per eempju gal dijanjosi viwali. Inti
u tagmel hekk, ma tista' tmiss l-ebda swi, ddaal jew tnei l-ebda module u
tnei l-ebda kejbil elettriku (konnessjonijiet li tipplaggjahom).
Tista' ma tagtix ka ta' din it-twissija meta taf li m'hemmx riskju ta' splujoni flambjent.
Lista ta' Komponenti / Modules Approvati

Issib il-lista ta' komponenti / modules approvati fl-internet:
bin-numru ta' identifikazzjoni 13702947.
36

A5E00352937-02
Polski
Zastosowanie grup konstrukcyjnych / moduw w 2

strefie zagroenia wybuchem
Strefa 2
Otoczenie zagroone wybuchem dzielone jest na strefy. Strefy dziel si ze
wzgldu na stopie prawdopodobiestwa powstania atmosfery stwarzajcej
moliwo powstania wybuchu.
Strefa
Niebezpieczestwo eksplozji
Przykad
atmosfera gazowa z
zagroeniem wybuchem
wystpuje rzadko i na krtki
okres czasu
miejsca wok cz w kanaach

technicznych z opaskami przy
przewodach instalacyjnych w
pomieszczeniach zamknitych
obszar
bezpieczny
nie
x poza 2 stref
x standardowe zastosowanie
decentralnych urzdze peryferyjnych
Dalej znajd Pastwo informacje dotyczce instalacji grup konstrukcyjnych /

moduw w otoczeniu zagroonym wybuchem.
Pozostae informacje
Dalsze informacje dotyczce grup konstrukcyjnych / moduw znajd pastwo w
odpowiedniej instrukcji.
Miejsce produkcji / Rejestracja

II 3 G
EEx nA II T3 .. T6
stosownie do EN 50021 : 1999
Nr testu: zobacz tabela
Miejsce produkcji
92224 Amberg
Niemcy

76187 Karlsruhe
Niemcy
Grupy konstrukcyjne / moduy
Nr testu
ET 200S
ET 200S grupy konstrukcyjne
odporne na uszkodzenia
KEMA 01
ATEX 1238X
S7-300
ET 200M
Zbierajce cze sprzajce
DP/PA
powtarzacz diagnozy
S7-300 grupy konstrukcyjne
odporne na uszkodzenia
KEMA 02
ATEX 1096X
S7-400
KEMA 03
ATEX 1125X
S7-300 CP
TS Adapter II
KEMA 03
ATEX 1228X
SIMATIC NET
KEMA 03
ATEX 1226X

A5E00352937-02
37
Polski
Uwaga
Grupy konstrukcyjne / moduy zarejestrowane jako
II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6
wolno stosowa jedynie w systemach SIMATIC o 3 kategorii urzdzenia.
Konserwacja
W celu naprawy naley odpowiednie grupy konstrukcyjne / moduy przesa do
miejsca produkcji. Jedynie serwis producenta jest upowaniony do dokonywania
napraw.
Warunki szczeglne
1. Grupy konstrukcyjne / moduy musz zosta zamontowane do skrzynki
ochronnej lub metalowej puszki ochronnej. Musz one spenia wymagania co
najmniej stopnia IP 54 (stosownie do EN 60529). Naley bra pod uwag
warunki otoczenia, w ktrym urzdzenie bdzie instalowane. Naley posiada
owiadczenie producenta dopuszczajce puszk do uytku w strefie 2
(stosownie do EN 50021).
2. W przypadku, gdyby na przewodzie tej puszki podczas pracy temperatura
moga przekroczy > 70 C, lub ya przewodu mogaby osign temperatur
> 80 C, waciwoci cieplne przewodu musz zosta dobrane do takich
wartoci.
3. Wszystkie stosowane przewody musz odpowiada waciwemu stopniowi
ochrony IP oraz warunkom okrelonym w punkcie 7.2 (stosownie do EN
50021).
4. Wszystkie urzdzenia wczajc w to przeczniki itp., ktre podczane s do
wej lub wyj systemw SIMATIC musz by dopuszczone do ochrony
przeciw wybuchom typu EEx nA lub EEx nC.
5. Musz zosta spenione takie warunki, aby napicie miana w przejciach nie
mogo przekroczy wicej ni 40 %.
6. Temperatura otoczenia: od 0 C do 60 C
7. W puszce w dobrze widocznym po otwarciu miejscu naley umieci
ostrzeenie nastpujcej treci:
Uwaga
Puszk wolno otworzy jedynie na krtki okres czasu na przykad w celu kontroli
optycznej. Nie wolno przy tym naciska na aden z przecznikw, nie wolno
wyciga ani montowa adnej grupy konstrukcyjnej ani te odcza adnych
przewodw elektrycznych (cza wsuwkowe).
Powyszego ostrzeenia nie trzeba przestrzega jeli wiadomo jest, i na miejscu
nie ma zagroenia wybuchem.
Lista dopuszczonych grup konstrukcyjnych / moduw

Wykaz dopuszczonych grup konstrukcyjnych / moduw znajduje si na stronie
internetowej:
w czci ID 13702947.
38

A5E00352937-02
Slovensky
Pouitie kontruknch skupn / modulov v prostred s

nebezpeenstvom vbuchu zny 2
Zna 2
Prostredia s nebezpeenstvom vbuchu sa rozdeuj do zn. Zny sa rozliuj
poda pravdepodobnosti prtomnosti atmosfry so schopnosou vbuchu.
Zna
Nebezpeenstvo explzie
Prklad
plynov atmosfra s
nebezpeenstvom vbuchu sa
vyskytuje len zriedka a
krtkodobo
priestory okolo prrubovch spojov s

plochmi tesneniami pri potrubnch
vedeniach v uzavretch priestoroch
bezpen
oblas
nie
x mino zny 2
x tandardn pouitia decentrlnej
perifrie
alej njdete dleit pokyny pre intalciu kontruknch skupn / modulov v

prostred s nebezpeenstvom vbuchu.
alie informcie
alie informcie ku kontruknm skupinm / modulom njdete v prslunej
prruke.
Miesto vyhotovenia / Osvedenie

II 3 G
EEx nA II T3 .. T6
poda EN 50021 : 1999
slo skky : pozri tabuka

Miesto vyhotovenia
Siemens AG, divzia A&D
92224 Amberg
Nemecko
Siemens AG, divzia A&D

76187 Karlsruhe
Nemecko
Kontrukn skupiny / moduly
slo skky
ET 200S
ET 200S kontrukn skupiny
odoln voi poruchm
KEMA 01
ATEX 1238X
S7-300
ET 200M
Zbernicov vzbov len DP/PA
opakova diagnzy
S7-300 kontrukn skupiny
odoln voi poruchm
KEMA 02
ATEX 1096X
S7-400
KEMA 03
ATEX 1125X
S7-300 CP
TS Adapter II
KEMA 03
ATEX 1228X
SIMATIC NET
KEMA 03
ATEX 1226X

A5E00352937-02
39
Slovensky
Upozornenie
Kontrukn skupiny / moduly s osvedenm
II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 sa sm
pouva len v systmoch SIMATIC kategrie zariadenia 3.
drba
Za elom opravy sa musia prslun kontrukn skupiny / moduly zasla na
miesto vyhotovenia. Oprava sa smie vykonva len na tomto mieste !
pecilne podmienky
1. Kontrukn skupiny / moduly sa musia vmontova do spnacej skrine alebo do
kovovho puzdra schrnky. Tie musia zabezpeova druh ochrany minimlne
IP 54 (poda EN 60529). Pritom je potrebn zohadni podmienky prostredia, do
ktorho sa bude zariadenie intalova. V prpade puzdra mus existova
vyhlsenie vrobcu pre znu 2 (poda EN 50021).
2. V prpade, e na kbli, prpadne na kblovom prvode tohto puzdra presiahne
teplota pri prevdzkovch podmienkach hodnotu > 70 C, alebo ak na vetve ily
me by pri prevdzkovch podmienkach teplota > 80 C, musia tepeln
vlastnosti kbla vyhovova skutone nameranm hodnotm.
3. Vetky pouit kblov prvody musia zodpoveda poadovanmu druhu
ochrany IP a odseku 7.2 (poda EN 50021).
4. Vetky zariadenia, vrtane prepnaa, at., ktor sa pripoja na vstupy a vstupy
systmov SIMATIC, musia by schvlen pre ochranu voi vbuchu
typu EEx nA alebo EEx nC.
5. Musia sa splni tak opatrenia, aby sa menovit naptie cez prechody nemohlo
prekroi o viac ako 40 %.
6. Rozsah okolitch teplt: 0 C a 60 C
7. V puzdre je na dobre viditen miesto po otvoren potrebn umiestni ttok s
nasledovnou vstrahou:
Vstraha
Puzdro sa me otvori len poas krtkej doby, naprklad pre vizulnu diagnzu.
Nestlate pritom iadny prepna, nevytiahnite alebo nezasute iadnu
kontrukn skupinu a neoddete iadne elektrick vedenia (zstrkov
spojenia).
Tto vstrahu si nemuste vma v takom prpade, ak je znme, e sa na mieste
nevyskytuje atmosfra s nebezpeenstvom vbuchu.
Zoznam dovolench kontruknch skupn / modulov

Zoznam dovolench kontruknch skupn / modulov sa nachdza na internete :
v lnku ID 13702947.
40

A5E00352937-02
Slovensko
Uporaba sklopov/modulov v eksplozivno ogroenem

obmoju cone 2
Cona 2
Eksplozivno ogroena obmoja se delijo na cone. Cone se loijo po verjetnosti
prisotnosti eksplozivne atmosfere.
Cona
Nevarnost eksplozije
Primer
eksplozivna zmes plinov v

atmosferi je redka in traja le
kratko.
Obmoja okoli prirobnih spojev z ploskimi

tesnili pri cevnih napeljavah v zaprtih
prostorih.
sigurno
obmoje
ne
x izven cone 2
x Standardna uporaba decentralne
periferije.
Sledijo pomembni napotki o intalaciji sklopov/modulov v eksplozivno ogroenem

obmoju.
Nadaljnje informacije
Nadaljnje informacije o sklopih/modulih najdete v priloenem prironiku.
Mesto izdelave / Dovoljenje - Atest

II 3 G
EEx nA II T3 .. T6
po EN 50021 : 1999
kontrolna tevilka: glej tabelo
Mesto izdelave
92224 Amberg
Germany

76187 Karlsruhe
Germany
Sklopi/moduli
kontrolna
tevilka:
ET 200S
ET 200S Sklopi varovani proti
okvari
KEMA 01
ATEX 1238X
S7-300
ET 200M
bus vezava DP/PA
Diagnozni repeater
S7-300 Sklopi varovani proti okvari
KEMA 02
ATEX 1096X
S7-400
KEMA 03
ATEX 1125X
S7-300 CP
TS Adapter II
KEMA 03
ATEX 1228X
SIMATIC NET
KEMA 03
ATEX 1226X
Opozorilo
Sklopi/moduli z dovoljenjem
II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 se lahko uporabijo samo
v SIMATIC-Sistemih kategorije 3 .
A5E00352937-02
41
Slovensko
Vzdrevanje
V primeru popravila poljete sklope/module na kraj izdelave. Popravila lahko
izvajajo samo na tem naslovu!
Posebni pogoji
1. Sklopi/moduli se morajo vgraditi v elektro omaro ali metalno ohije.
Omara/ohije mora zadostiti varovanju IP 54 (po EN 60529). Pri tem je
potrebno upotevati tudi pogoje okolice, v kateri se naprava nahaja. Ohije
mora imeti izjavo (atest) proizvajalca za uporabo v coni 2 (po EN 50021).
2. e na kablu oz. uvodnici tega ohija v reimu obratovanja temperatura dosee
vrednost > 70 C ali e dosee na razcepih vodnikov v obratovanju temperatura
vrednost > 80 C, se morajo temperaturne lastnosti kablov skladati z dejansko
namerjenimi.
3. Uporabljene uvodnice morajo ustrezati predpisani IP zaiti in poglavju 7.2 (po
EN 50021).
4. Vse naprave, vkljuno s stikali itd., ki so priklopljene na vhodih oz. izhodih
sistemov SIMATIC, morajo biti odobrene za zaito proti eksplozijam tipa
EEx nA ali EEx nC.
5. Zagotoviti se mora, da nazivna napetost ne prekorai ve kot 40% pri
tranzienci (preklopih, vklopih,...).
6. Temperaturno obmoje okolice: 0 C do 60 C
7. V notranjosti ohija, na odprtem dobro vidljivem mestu, se pritrdi napis z
naslednjim opozorilom:
Opozorilo
Ohije se lahko odpre samo za kratek as, npr. za vizualno diagnozo. Pri tem ne
vklapljajte/izklaplajte stikal, sklopov ali elektrinih vodnikov (vtinih spojev).
Opozorilo ne velja, kadar je znano, da ni eksplozivne atmosfere.
Seznam dovoljenih sklopov/modulov

Seznam dovoljenih sklopov/modulov najdete na internetu na spletni strani:
pod ID prispevka 13702947.
42

A5E00352937-02
Trke
Patlama tehlikesi olan Alan 2 blgesinde nite

gruplarnn/modllerin kullanlmas
Alan 2
Patlama tehlikesi olan blgeler alanlara ayrlr. Alanlar, patlayabilecek atmosfere
sahip ortam ihtimaline gre farkl derecelere ayrlr.
Alan
Patlama tehlikesi
rnek
Patlayc gaz atmosferi sadece

nadir ve ksa bir sre iin sz
konusu
Kapal alanlardaki boru balantlarnda

yass contal flan balantlar civarndaki
blgeler
Gvenli
blge
hayr
x Alan 2 haricinde
x Merkezi olmayan periferi standart
uygulamalar
Aada, nite gruplarnn/modllerin patlama tehlikesi olan blgelerde kurulmas

iin nemli bilgiler bulacaksnz.
Daha baka bilgiler

nite gruplar/modller hakknda daha fazla bilgi iin ilgili klavuza baknz.
malat yeri / Lisans

II 3 G
EEx nA II T3 .. T6
EN 50021 standartna gre: 1999
Test numaras: bkz. Tablo
malat yeri
92224 Amberg
Germany

76187 Karlsruhe
Germany
nite gruplar/Modller
Kontrol
numaras
ET 200S
ET 200S Hataya kar emniyetli
nite gruplar
KEMA 01
ATEX 1238X
S7-300
ET 200M
Bus kuplaj DP/PA
Diyagnoz repeater nitesi
S7-300 Hataya kar emniyetli
nite gruplar
KEMA 02
ATEX 1096X
S7-400
KEMA 03
ATEX 1125X
S7-300 CP
TS Adapter II
KEMA 03
ATEX 1228X
SIMATIC NET
KEMA 03
ATEX 1226X

A5E00352937-02
43
Trke
Bilgi
II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 lisansl nite gruplar/modller sadece 3 numaral
cihaz kategorisine ait SIMATIC sistemlerine kullanlabilir.
Bakm ve koruma
Bir onarm gerekli olmas halinde, ilgili nite gruplar/modller imalat yerine
gnderilmelidir. Onarm sadece orada yaplabilir ve yaplmaldr.
zel koullar
1. nite gruplar/modller bir alter dolab iine veya metal kasa iine monte
edilmelidir. Bu kasalar en az IP 54 (EN 60529 standartna gre) koruma trne
ait olmaldr. Burada, cihazn kurulduu evre koullar dikkate alnmaldr.
Kullanlacak kasa iin, alan 2 iin geerli bir retici beyan mevcut olmaldr
(EN 50021 standartna istinaden).
2. Kabloda ya da bu kasann kablo giriindeki iletme koullarnda scaklk > 70 C
oluyorsa veya iletme koullarnda kablo telleri (damarlar) ayrlma noktasnda
scaklk > 80 C olma ihtimali varsa, kablonun scaklk ile ilgili zellikleri,
gerekten llm scaklklara uygun olmaldr.
3. Kullanlm olan kablo girileri, talep edilen IP koruma trne ve blm 7.2
(EN 50021 standartna gre) dahilindeki taleplere uygun olmaldr.
4. SIMATIC sistemlerinin giri ve klarna balanan tm cihazlar (alterler vs.
dahil) iin, EEx nA veya EEx nC patlamaya kar koruma tipine istinaden izin
alnm olmaldr.
5. Nominal gerilimin transiyentlerden (hatlardaki dalgalanmalardan dolay ani
gerilim ve akm deiiklikleri) dolay azami %40 almas iin gerekli nlemler
alnmaldr.
6. evre scakl aral: 0 C ile 60 C arasnda
7. Kasa dahilinde, aldktan sonra iyi grlebilen bir yere aadaki uyar
taklmaldr:
kaz
Kasa sadece ksa bir sre almaldr, rn. grsel diyagnoz iin. Herhangi bir
altere basmaynz, herhangi bir nite grubunu ekip karmaynz veya
takmaynz, elektrik hatlarn (soket balantlar) ayrmaynz.
Eer patlama tehlikesi sz konusu olan bir atmosfer olmad biliniyorsa, ibu
ikaz gz ard edilebilir.
zin verilmi olan nite gruplarnn/modllerin listesi

zin verilmi olan nite gruplarnn/modllerin listesi iin internete baknz:
Dokman ID 13702947.
44

A5E00352937-02
SIMATIC Product information to the ET 200S manual
1
Introduction
______________
2
Product information
______________
SIMATIC
Product information to the
ET 200S manual
Product Information
Edition 07/2005
A5E00583609-01
Safety Guidelines
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.
Danger
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.
Warning
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.
Caution
with a safety alert symbol, indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.
Caution
without a safety alert symbol, indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
Notice
indicates that an unintended result or situation can occur if the corresponding information is not taken into
account.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The device/system may only be set up and used in conjunction with this documentation. Commissioning and
operation of a device/system may only be performed by qualified personnel. Within the context of the safety notes
in this documentation qualified persons are defined as persons who are authorized to commission, ground and
label devices, systems and circuits in accordance with established safety practices and standards.
Prescribed Usage
Note the following:
Warning
This device may only be used for the applications described in the catalog or the technical description and only in
connection with devices or components from other manufacturers which have been approved or recommended
by Siemens. Correct, reliable operation of the product requires proper transport, storage, positioning and
assembly as well as careful operation and maintenance.
Trademarks
All names identified by are registered trademarks of the Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this
publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the
owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.
Siemens AG
Postfach 48 48
90437 NRNBERG
GERMANY
Order No.: A5E00583609-01

07/2005
Copyright Siemens AG 2005.

Technical data subject to change
Table of contents
1
Introduction............................................................................................................................................. 1-1
1.1
Contents..................................................................................................................................... 1-1
Product information................................................................................................................................. 2-1

2.1
Startup and diagnostics on the PROFINET IO .......................................................................... 2-1
2.2
Interface module IM151-3 PN (6ES7151-3AA10-0AB0) ......................................................... 2-10
2.3
Digital Electronic Modules........................................................................................................ 2-11
2.4
Power modules ........................................................................................................................ 2-11
Index................................................................................................................................................ Index-1
Tables
Table 2-1
Status and error displays of the IM151-3 PN............................................................................. 2-2
Table 2-2
Terminal assignment of the PM-E 24 VDC power module ...................................................... 2-11
Table 2-3
Terminal assignment of the PM-E 24-48 VDC power module................................................. 2-13
Product information to the ET 200S manual

Product Information, Edition 07/2005, A5E00583609-01
iii
Table of contents
iv

Introduction
1.1
1.1
Contents
Introduction
This product information describes corrections and additions to the manual Distributed
Peripheral Device ET 200S (EWA-4NEB 780602401-13), release 07/2005.

1-1
Introduction
1.1 Contents
1-2

Product information
2.1
2.1
Startup and diagnostics on the PROFINET IO
6.3.1.3 Integrating modules for the configuration

Asymmetry for insert/remove interrupt from DO modules
%\WH[
0RGXOH0RGXOH0RGXOH
ZLWKRXW ZLWK ZLWK
:KHQSXOOHGRQO\WKHSXOOHG'2LVRPLWWHG
:KHQSXOOHGWKHQDOO'2PRGXOHVWKDWDUH
FRPSULVHGLQWKLVE\WHRXWSXWUHSODFHPHQWYDOXHV
Figure 2-1
Asymmetry for insert/remove interrupt from DO modules
Asymmetry for insert/remove interrupt from DI modules

%\WH[
0RGXOH0RGXOH0RGXOH
ZLWKRXW ZLWK ZLWK
:KHQSXOOHGRQO\WKHSXOOHG',LVRPLWWHG
:KHQSXOOHGWKHUHIHUHQFHGDWDPDUNHUIRUWKHLQSXWE\WHLVVHWWR%$'
7KH,2FRQWUROOHUWKHQVHWVWKHLQSXWE\WHWR
Figure 2-2
Asymmetry for insert/remove interrupt from DI modules

2-1
Product information
2.1 Startup and diagnostics on the PROFINET IO
6.3.3 LED display diagnostics

Status and error displays through LEDs on IM151-3 PN
Table 2-1
Status and error displays of the IM151-3 PN

Meaning
LEDs
SF
BF
ON
Flashing
2 Hz
on
Incorrect or no connect telegram no data

exchange between the IO controller and the
interface module (IO device) takes place but
the IO device is physically linked to the switch.
Causes:
Device name is incorrect
Configuration error
The IO controller is switched off, defective
or the bus cable to the IO controller is
missing.
Remedy

assignment.
Check the device name.
module.
Check the IO controller
on
on
on
A factory new SIMATIC Micro Memory

Card is being formatted.
Wait until the formatting procedure is

completed. This can take a number of minutes
to complete. When the SF LED goes out, the
formatting procedure is complete.
on
off
on
There is no S7 program located on the

No SIMATIC Micro Memory Card is
inserted.
The inserted SIMATIC Micro Memory Card
is full or does not have enough storage
space for the device name.
No suitable SIMATIC Micro Memory Card
is inserted (i.e. no SIMATIC Micro Memory
Card from Siemens).
Format the die SIMATIC Micro Memory Card.

Before switching on the power supply voltage,
insert an empty SIMATIC Micro Memory Card
in the IM151-3 PN.
The IO device cannot be reached in this state.
2-2

Product information
6.3.5 Evaluate interrupts from ET 200S

Diagnostic "Process interrupt lost"
For the components
2DI DC24V HF (6ES7131-4BB01-0AB0),
4DI DC24V HF (6ES7131-4BD01-0AB0) and
4DI UC24..48V HF (6ES7131-4CD00-0AB0)
the diagnostic "Process interrupt lost" is not available at present.
Note
Process interrupts should not be used for technological purposes (e.g. cyclical creation of
process interrupts).
If more than 90 process interrupts are generated per second, process interrupts can be lost.

2-3
Product information
6.3.7.2 Channel diagnostics

Definition
The channel diagnostics provide information on channel faults of modules.
Channel faults are mapped as channel diagnostics in IO diagnostic data records. A data
record contains 10 Bytes in each case.
Diagnostics can be read for a submodule slot, for a slot, for the IO controller assigned slot in
an IO device or for an IO device. The determination is reached via the data record number:
800AH
Channel diagnostics for a submodule slot
800BH
Manufacturer-specific channel diagnostics for a submodule slot (coming)
800CH
Manufacturer-specific diagnostics for a submodule slot (coming and going)
C00AH
Channel diagnostics for a slot
C00BH
Manufacturer-specific channel diagnostics for a slot (coming)
C00CH
Manufacturer-specific channel diagnostics for a slot (coming and going)
E002H
Deviation of the set configuration by the actual configuration of an IO

controller assigned IO device
E00AH
Channel diagnostics for the IO controller-assigned channel in an IO device
E00BH
Manufacturer-specific channel diagnostics for an IO controller assigned

channel in an IO device (coming)
E00CH
Manufacturer-specific channel diagnostics for the IO controller assigned

channels in an IO device (coming and going)
F00AH
Channel diagnostics for an IO device
F00BH
Manufacturer-specific channel diagnostics for an IO device (coming)
F00CH
Manufacturer-specific channel diagnostics for an IO device (coming and

going)
AFF0H to
AFFFH
Manufacturer, order number, creation state, version, etc.
The data record is read with the SFB 52 RDREC (read data record).
Structure of diagnostic data records

You can find the diagnostic data records structure and examples for programming in the
programming manual From PROFIBUS DP to PROFINET IO.
The data record that the ET 200S supports, based on the PROFINET IO - Application Layer
Service Definition V2.0 standard.
You can download the standard at http://www.profibus.com at no cost.
2-4

Product information
Channel diagnostics
The channel diagnostics for ET 200S is structured as follows with the IM151-3 PN interface
module:
%\WHDQG
%LWQR

%LWQR
%LWQR
%LWQR
%LWQR
'DWDUHFRUGFRQWHQWV+

%\WHDQG
'DWDUHFRUGOHQJWK

%\WHDQG
9HUVLRQ

%\WHDQG

%\WHDQG

%\WHDQG
%LWQR
%\WH
%LWQR
5HVHUYHG
(UURUW\SH
%,QFRPLQJIDXOW
%\WH

%LWQR
%LWQR
%\WHDQG
(UURUW\SH
+WR)))+0DQXIDFWXUHUVSHFLILFGLDJQRVWLFV
+'LDJQRVWLFPHVVDJHIRUVXEPRGXOHLVSHQGLQJ
+0XOWLSOH
+([W&KDQQHO'LDJQRVLV'DWD
+ELV)))+5HVHUYHG
+ELV))+5HVHUYHGIRUSURILOH
$+WR))))+5HVHUYHG
Figure 2-3
Structure of the channel diagnostics for ET 200S with IM151-3 PN

2-5
Product information

%LWQR
%LWQR
%\WHDQG

%\WH
%LWQR
5HVHUYHG
(UURUW\SH
%,QFRPLQJIDXOW
&KDQQHOW\SH
5HVHUYHG
,QSXWFKDQQHO
2XWSXWFKDQQHO
,QSXWRXWSXWFKDQQHO

%LWQR
%\WH
&KDQQHOW\SH
+IUHHGDWDW\SH +:RUG
+%LW

+'RXEOHZRUG
+%LW

+GRXEOHZRUGV
+%LW

+WR))+5HVHUYHG
+%\WH

%\WHDQG
(UURUW\SH
+5HVHUYHG

+6KRUWFLUFXLW

+8QGHUYROWDJH

+*URXQGIDXOW
+2YHUYROWDJH
+2YHUORDG

+6DPSOLQJIDXOW
+([FHVVWHPSHUDWXUH
+7KUHVKROGYDOXHH[FHHGHGIDOOHQ
EHORZ
+:LUHEUHDN

+2XWSXWVZLWFKHGRII
+8SSHUYDOXHOLPLWH[FHHGHG
+6HFXULW\UHOHYDQWHUURU
+(UURU

$+WR)+5HVHUYHG
+WR))+5HVHUYHG
Figure 2-4
Structure of the channel diagnostic record for ET 200S with IM151-3 PN
message.
Error types of the other modules

The error types of the power modules, digital electronic modules, analog electronic modules,
and the technology modules are the same as for ET 200S with PROFIBUS DP.
2-6

Product information
6.3.7.4 Interruption of the ET 200S backplane bus

Diagnostics for the bus interruption
If the ET 200S does not startup, it can have the following causes:
one or multiple missing modules
Faulty backplane bus (e.g. defective terminal module)
If the ET 200S does not startup, it can have the following causes:
At least two missing modules (that is in contrast to a missing module no more gap rather
a separated backplane bus)
An interrupt is not generated in the event of an interruption of the ET 200S backplane bus.
The information must be read out explicitly by the user. The data record with index F00BH is
available for this purpose. You can read out this data record with STEP 7 in SIMATIC
Manager via reachable nodes in the component status window. The PG must be located in
the PROFINET subnet.

2-7
Product information
Composition of the diagnostics for the bus interrupt

Contents of the diagnostics for the bus interrupt:
%\WHDQG
%LWQR

%LWQR

%LWQR
'DWDUHFRUGFRQWHQWV+
%\WHDQG
%LWQR
'DWDUHFRUGOHQJWK+

%\WHDQG
9HUVLRQ
%\WHDQG
6ORWQXPEHURIWKHFRPSRQHQWWULJJHULQJWKHLQWHUUXSW+
%\WHDQG

%LWQR
6XEPRGXOHVORWQXPEHURIWKHFRPSRQHQWWULJJHULQJWKHLQWHUUXSW+
%\WHDQG

%LWQR
&KDQQHOQXPEHU+
%\WHDQG
%LWQR
5HVHUYHG
(UURUW\SH
%,QFRPLQJIDXOW
%\WHDQG

%LWQR
(UURUW\SH+ 0DQXIDFWXUHUVSHFLILFGLDJQRVWLFV

%\WH
%\WH
%\WH
%LWQR
5HVHUYHG
%LWQR
5HVHUYHG
%LWQR
5HVHUYHG
%LWQR
%\WH
6ORWQXPEHUDIWHUZKLFKWKHEDFNSODQHEXVLVLQWHUUXSWHG
Figure 2-5
2-8
Structure of the diagnostics for the bus interrupt for ET 200S with IM151-3 PN on the
PROFINET IO

Product information
6.3.7.5 Failure of the load voltage

The electronic modules behave as follows for a failure of the load voltage (generally analog
and technology modules):
If such a module is removed during the failure of the load voltage, a remove interrupt is
generated.
If such a module is inserted during the failure of the load voltage, an insert interrupt is
generated.
Note
If an electronic module was unparametrized with an IO controller via the application
program, then these unparametrized data are not available after restoration of the load
voltage.

2-9
Product information
2.2
2.2
Interface module IM151-3 PN (6ES7151-3AA10-0AB0)
8.7.1 Features of the interface module IM151-3 PN

Compatibility of the interface module IM 151-3 PN (6ES7151-3AA10-0AB0)
Note
Firmware version of the controller used
In order for you to be able to operate the interface module IM151-3 PN (6ES7151-3AA100AB0) on a controller, this must be operated with one of the firmware versions listed in the
tables below. You can utilize the interface module IM151-3 PN (6ES7151-3AA00-0AB0)
independently of the controller firmware version.
The following firmware versions are compatible to the interface module IM 151-3 PN
(6ES7151-3AA10-0AB0):
CPU
Controller
Firmware version
CP
SOFTNET PNIO
315-2 PN/DP
317-2 PN/DP
317F-2 PN/DP
443-1
343-1
SIMATIC NET-CD
V2.3.2
V2.3.3
V2.2
2.0
V 6.3 Hotfix 1
8.7.2 SNMP
The IM151-3 PN supports the Ethernet service SNMP. MIB-2 (RFC1213) is supported R/W
objects are changeable using SNMP tools and are stored in the device.
Remanent stored SNMP parameters are reset to default settings (STEP 7 V5.3 SP 3 and
higher) in HW config dialog "Target system > Ethernet > Edit Ethernet nodes" "Reset" button
under "Reset to default settings". Provided that the component has a station name (saved on
a SIMATIC Micro Memory Card), this is not deleted. The SIMATIC Micro Memory Card is not
a part of a factory-new component. Likewise, the IP address, that is only present when the
component is in a switched on state, is not deleted.
After an exchange with a factory-new component the R/W objects in the IM151-3 PN are set
to default settings.
2-10

Product information
2.3 Digital Electronic Modules
2.3
2.3
11.13 Digital Electronic module 4DO DC24V/0,5A ST (6ES7132-4BD01-0AA0)

Features
Suitable for solenoids, direct current switches and warning lights
2.4
2.4
Power modules
10.2 Power module PM-E DC24V (6ES7138-4CA01-0AA0)

Terminal assignment
The following table illustrates the terminal assignment of the PM-E 24 VDC power module for
Table 2-2
Terminal assignment of the PM-E 24 VDC power module

View
Terminal assignment
Remarks
7036$DQG30(9'&
M: Chassis ground
$8;
$ $

9'&
9'&
$8;
$

$

$8;
9'&

2-11
Product information
2.4 Power modules
View
Terminal assignment
Remarks
7036$DQG30(9'&
M: Chassis ground
AUX1 is used as PE.
$8;
$

9'&
$

9'&
$

$

$8;
9'&
0
$8;
7036DQG30(9'&

M: Chassis ground
$8;
9'&
9'&
9'&
2-12

Product information
2.4 Power modules
10.3 Power module PM-E DC24..48V (6ES7138-4CA50-0AA0)

Terminal assignment
The following table shows you the terminal assignment of the PM-E 24-48 VDC power
module for the different terminal modules:
Table 2-3
Terminal assignment of the PM-E 24-48 VDC power module

View
Terminal assignment
7036$DQG30(9'&
Remarks
M: Chassis ground
$8;
$

9'&
$

9'&
$

$

$8;
9'&
0
$8;

7036$DQG30(9'&
M: Chassis ground
$8;
$ $

9'&
9'&
$8;
$

$

$8;
9'&
7036DQG30(9'&

AUX1 is used as PE.

M: Chassis ground
$8;
9'&
9'&
9'&

2-13
Product information
2.4 Power modules
2-14

Index
B
Backplane bus
Interruption, 2-7
IM151-3 PN HIGH FEATURE

SNMP, 2-10
Channel diagnostics, 2-4
Load voltage
Failure, 2-9
D
Diagnostics
Bus interruption, 2-7
P
Power module PM-E 24..48 VDC
F
Failure of the load voltage, 2-9

Index-1
Index
Index-2


Systems Manual Simatic ET200S PDF

Cargado por

Información del documento

Descripción original:

Título original

Derechos de autor

Formatos disponibles

Compartir este documento

Compartir o incrustar documentos

Opciones para compartir

¿Le pareció útil este documento?

¿Este contenido es inapropiado?

Copyright:

Formatos disponibles

Systems Manual Simatic ET200S PDF

Cargado por

Copyright:

Formatos disponibles

Preface

SIMATIC ET 200S Distributed I/O System ET200S

The following supplement is part of this documentation:

Special Measures for

Order No.: EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Copyright Siemens AG 2005.

Required level of knowledge

Scope of the manual

Changes since the previous version

Labeling for Australia (C-tick mark)

Distributed I/O System ET200S

Position in the information landscape

ET 200S Distributed I/O System

Installing and wiring of ET 200S

ET 200S Motor Starters

Installing and wiring of motor starters

PROFINET System Description

Basic principles of PROFINET

From PROFIBUS DP to PROFINET IO

Fail-Safe Motor Starters

ET 200S IM151-7 CPU Interface Module and Instruction List

Addressing of IM151-7 CPU

ET 200S FC Frequency Converter operating instructions

ET 200S FC Frequency Converter list manual

Technological functions ET 200S

Distributed I/O System ET200S

Serial Interface Module ET 200S

4/8 F-DI DC24V PROFIsafe

Measurement of weight and power values

Recycling and disposal

SIMATIC Technical Support, Contact Persons and Training

Distributed I/O System ET200S

Distributed I/O System ET200S

Product overview .................................................................................................................................... 1-1

What are distributed I/O systems?............................................................................................. 1-1

What is PROFINET IO? ............................................................................................................. 1-3

What is the ET 200S distributed I/O system? ............................................................................ 1-4

Guide to the ET 200S manuals................................................................................................ 1-10

Brief Instructions on Commissioning ET 200S ........................................................................................ 2-1

Commissioning on PROFIBUS DP............................................................................................ 2-1

Commissioning on PROFINET IO ........................................................................................... 2-10

Configuration options.............................................................................................................................. 3-1

Precisely Modular System ......................................................................................................... 3-1

ET 200S Power Supply.............................................................................................................. 3-3

Placing power modules and connecting them to common potential.......................................... 3-4

Configuration options for the interface modules ........................................................................ 3-6

Direct data exchange on PROFIBUS DP ................................................................................ 3-23

Isochronous operation on PROFIBUS DP............................................................................... 3-25

Distributed I/O System ET200S

Option handling on PROFIBUS DP ......................................................................................... 3-30

Identification data ..................................................................................................................... 3-38

Use of the ET 200S in a redundant system ............................................................................. 3-41

Limitations on the number of modules that can be connected/maximum configuration.......... 3-43

Installation .............................................................................................................................................. 4-1

Basic principles of installation .................................................................................................... 4-1

Mounting the interface module................................................................................................... 4-4

Mounting the TM-P and TM-E terminal modules ....................................................................... 4-6

Replacing the terminal box on the terminal module................................................................... 4-9

Mounting the terminating module............................................................................................. 4-11

Mounting the shield connection ............................................................................................... 4-13

Applying slot number plates and color-coding plates .............................................................. 4-15

Setting the PROFIBUS address............................................................................................... 4-17